Magna Carta : a 800 Years Journey

Home , Angevin kings of England, Enterodiol, Enterolactone, Hydroxymatairesinol, Lariciresinol, Pinoresinol

Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

From Unfettering Chains to Free Flight

Magna Carta A 800 Years Journey From Unfettering Chains to Free Flight

Conceived and Compiled by

Dr. Jyoti Marwah Principal

Editors Dr. Usha Karunakaran Dr. Fatima Shaikh HOD, Dept of Zoology and HOD, Dept of Languages and Coordinator (Science) Coordinator (Language Lab) Ms. Snehal Patil HOD, Dept of Commerce and Coordinator (Commerce)

KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without permission. Any person who does any unauthorised act in relation to this publication may be liable to criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages. However, data may be taken as reference for research work only limited to non-commercial/non- profit purpose.

First Published, 2016

ISBN : 978-93-85000-51-5

Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey From Unfettering Chains To Free Flight

Printed in India: Published by Onkar Bharti BHARTI PUBLICATIONS 4819/24, 3rd Floor, Ansari Road Darya Ganj, New Delhi-110002 Mobile : +91-989-989-7381 E-mail : [email protected] [email protected] Website : www.bhartipublications.com Board of Management

1. Dr. Prabhakar B. Kore, M.P. Chairman 2. Shri Ashok G. Bagewadi, B.A. B.Com. Vice-Chairman 3. Shri Mahantesh M. Kavatagimath Member 4. Shri Amit P. Kore, B.E.M.B.A. Member 5. Shri Shrishailappa Channappa Metgud, B.Com. Member 6. Shri Jayanand M. Munavalli Member 7. Shri Shankaranna Ishwarappa Munavalli Member 8. Shri Basavaraj R. Patil, B.A. Member 9. Dr. Vishwanath I. Patil, M.B.B.S. Member 10. Shri Y.S.Patil, M.A.KAS (Rtd) Member 11. Shri Anil Vijayabasappa Patted, B.Com. Member 12. Dr. Virupaxi S. Sadhunavar, M.B.B.S. Member 13. Shri Shivanand D. Shiragave, M.A.B.Ed. Member 14. Dr. Mahadev T. Kurani, M.Sc.Ph.D. Member 15. Dr. Sudha A. Raddi, M.Sc. (N), M.Phil., Ph. D. Member Review Panel

Dr. Anita Jadhav HOD, Dept of Zoology and Head, Zoology Research Centre, ICLES’ M.J. College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai Ms Kawaljeet Kaur Department of Chemistry, ICLES’ M.J. College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai Ms Tejashree Bandekar PG Faulty, History, ICLES’ M.J. College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai Dr. Jyoti Marwah Principal, KLE Society's College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai Prologue

Magna Carta: A 800 Years Journey From Unfettering Chains to Free Flight The book has been conceived as an inter-disciplinary publication to commemorate hundred years of Karnatak Lingayat Education Society’s role and contribution to the cause of Higher and Technical Education with a focus on Medical education and health care. This parallels with the 800 years of Man’s invigorating history and movements from physical and mental subversion to a world of free thought and action. From the early beginnings of New Learning to the challenging world of Information Communication Technology this publication compiles original thoughts on diverse facets which delve deep into an academic discussion on Man's intellectual, social, political and economic flight in the last eight hundred years. It traces this jouney ever since ‘Magna Carta’ — The Great Charter of Liberties - the first of its kind, marked the beginning of constitutional government in Britain in 1215. It had granted to the people their rights and freedom to question the king on several issues confronting them. It had then become a part of English political life. Thus marking Britain the ‘Mother of Parliamentary Democracy’ and was probably one of the reasons for the beginning of the Parliaments increased role in the political, social, educational and economic life of the nation. The earlier works by Virgil, Ovid, Cicero and Seneca remained to be the bench mark of classical learning during the High Middle Ages. Renaissance had reawakened the people to bring dramatic changes by questioning religion and religious dogmas and unfair impositions of taxes. Church dominated intellectual and cultural life, underwent a change as society was now controlled by central political institutions which prioritized urban and commercial economy patronized by society elites for popularizing ‘New Learning’. Liberal rulers and representative governments introduced new curriculums in schools and colleges which were not based on religion alone. Art, Literature, Science and Aesthetics changed the frontiers of human thinking. Study of the subjects of human interest led to the development of humanities thereby promoting secularism and individualism thus giving birth to the concept of ‘Modern Humanity’.

The Transformed World The American Revolution, the French Revolution, the Agricultural Revolution, the Intellectual Revolution were followed by the Industrial Revolution in the West. Colonial subjugation of the East introduced the world to the western concepts of democracy and communism which further viii transformed with the Universal Declaration of Human Rights by the General Assembly of the UNO in 1948. This in totality changed the world dramatically and since then there has been no stopping. Science and Technology have drawn new frontiers in human history being both constructive and destructive. Information and Communication Technology combined with the Transportation Revolution has made life unimaginably progressive and fast but equally stressful. Social media has engineered the process of mass inclusion and mainstreaming people by removing all taboos and social restrictions that had traditionally divided people. Globalisation reduced barriers to trans-world contacts and brought the world so close to each other so as to become ‘One World One Family’. Unfortunately, this close proximity to each other removed all formalities and barriers resulting in the dissolution of respect and tolerance for each other, to include the lost respect for Mother Nature and her bounties. Now Man is struggling to prevent the back lash as the fury of climate change with rising global temperature is a growing concern and can become the very cause of his own destruction. The Millennium Development Goals, The Sustainable Development Goals and Earth Summits are making desperate efforts to find ways to prevent or may be postpone the oncoming devastation. Will these worrisome concerns lead to a reversal? For, for how long can Man and Society take the challenges generated by these upheavals? We are now on the threshold of Bio-Technological advances with fears of Artificial Intelligence overtaking Natural Intelligence, Blue Brain and Cloning of Man and other animals. Let us pause, and think, if we need to question the ethical issues of this hybridization and the cultural impasse’ affecting our natural and indigenous heritage? This publication is a heady discussion on all such issues that are of an urgent enquiry and need to be viewed and reviewed.

Dr. S.N. Shetti Dr. Jyoti Marwah 25 June 2016 Epilogue

‘…from unfettering chains to free flight…’ It is our good fortune that on the occasion of the national workshop cum seminar on ‘Science Communication: A Dialogue Between Scientists and the Masses’ we also have succeeded to release the very first research publication of KLE Kalamboli, on 25th June 2016. As editors, it gives us immense joy and satisfaction to bring forward the publication titled ‘Magna Carta: A 800 Years Journey From Unfettering Chains To Free Flight’. The book is an inter-disciplinary publication commemorating hundred glorious years of KLE Society’s role and contribution to the cause of Higher, Medical and Technical Education and Man’s Journey for the last 800 years since the Magna Carta to become what he is today’. The ground for the germination of this idea of research publication was prepared way back during ‘Learner Alliance’ meeting in January 2016. Principal, Dr. Jyoti Marwah utilized these sessions for discussing the ways for enhancing the academic abilities of the members of the teaching faculty. This was seen as a way forward for developing the potent abilities of communication in the different subjects, which the faculty must excel, to improve teaching abilities and to reach out to the students. It took us several months of self-evaluation, self-correction and contemplation that resulted in the final product which was worthy of print. This was because the Learner Alliance meetings started focussing on the importance of communication and research to achieve excellence in Higher education and imperative if we wished to develop the graduate attributes of our students. Hence, took birth, the research culture at KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli; a culture that was to shape and promote the sense of scientific outlook to understand the world around us. This research culture and scientific writing was not only limited to our college but it spread around far and wide. Information was disseminated through e-mails and our faculty members carried this information personally to various colleges in and around Navi Mumbai and Mumbai. Invites were also sent to all sister KLE Institutions for maximum participation. The response was very encouraging, in fact much beyond to our expectation. The organising committee received a good response to the ‘Call for Papers’ as more than 50 abstracts were submitted for consideration. Expression of interest was received from various institutions not only from Mumbai, but from other cities like Bengaluru and Belagavi, besides the contributions from many of the Faculty x members of KLE College Kalamboli and nearby other colleges in Navi Mumbai. Students from nearby colleges in Navi Mumbai also showed keen interest in submitting their papers for the publication. We traversed International boundaries too and embraced participation from beyond our national boundaries. We were happy to have received a special study on the 21st century Urbanisation Phenomenon by Dr. Nidhi Subramanium, a specialist in Urban Studies from Cornell University, USA. Further, to disseminate our research conclusions to the masses at National and International levels, our publisher Bharti Publications will also host the book on Flip Cart and Amazon. Our journey was enriched with several introspection sessions and evaluation by specialists from other institutions. The research was reviewed in three sessions with intervals in between, for the faculty members and students to incorporate the changes as advised by the resource persons. The first review was conducted on 30th March 2016 by Principal, Dr. Jyoti Marwah, where the abstract and few completed first draft of the papers were submitted which were then analysed by Dr. Marwah and the Editors, with regards to the content, theme, style and structure. A feedback was given and individual discussions ensued. Hereafter, a deadline was given and the teachers and students were then ready for the second review along with a Power Point Presentation in the presence of the Principal and the resource person, Dr. Anita Jadhav, Head, Department of Zoology and Head Research Centre ICLES Motilal Jhunjhunwala College, Vashi, on 9th April 2016. The papers were critically evaluated with suitable suggestions. This session served to be fruitful as the papers now were polished with better communication and content evaluation. The third and final Review was conducted by Asst Prof. Kawaljeet Kaur, Department of Chemistry, ICLES Motilal Jhunjhunwala College on 12th April, 2016. All the faculty members and student researchers from the degree college presented PPT to highlight their themes and contents focussing on abstract, hypothesis, research methodology, suggestions/recommendations, conclusion and references. This session served as a booster for every researcher to understand the real essence of doing research in the areas of Humanities, Social Sciences, Medicine, Technology, Commerce, ICT and Society at large. These three reviews paved a way for the birth of the final form of Magna Carta in all its essence. Students showed equal enthusiasm in writing research papers and making presentations with the help of their guiding teachers. Principal, Dr. Marwah served as a guide to few students from ICLES’ M.J. College Vashi, Navi Mumbai on themes related to concerns for the differently abled, history of CSR and the long journey from obtaining basic rights to those of RTI and an aggressive Social Media activism. Dr. Fatima Shaikh, Head of English Department guided degree college students on the themes of the concept of Net Neutrality and Shift of Communication from the Real World to the Virtual Realm. The research guides collaborated with their students at all times as and when needed, supporting and motivating their urge to create something new and unique. The entire book has been categorized into seven sections. Each section deals with well written themes put together by the valued contributions of the researchers. Section 1 deals with papers related to Humanities highlighting the impact of Magna Carta on the liberty and freedom of Man and his freedom to think and grow. Thus, there was a growth of democracy and parliamentary form of government leading to social, political and economic quality among Men Section II deals with the growing world of Information Technology. ICT in diverse and novel ways has empowered the Man to move from issues of Cyber security, Virtual reality and advances in the Health Sector. xi Section III deals with the history of science; also with the advances in science and technology. Scientific knowledge allows the build up of new Technologies/Innovations which brings about new discoveries and inspires new possibilities and approaches to long standing unresolved scientific queries. Thus this section deals with understanding the interrelationships between science, technology, and environment. Section IV discusses the inextricable relationship between environment and science/technology addressing major needs of the industry and the society as a whole. The world is rapidly changing; the climate is getting warmer, population is increasing, demands for food and energy are growing, society is more and more connected and our need to handle large, complex data and finding solutions to a plethora of issues is rapidly increasing. Thus this section focuses on the Impact of Solar Energy on Environment Sustainability, Industrialization, Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection and scarcity of water. Section 5 contributes to several issues which lead to Economic development and to improve the economic well-being and quality of life by improvement in living conditions, adoption of new technologies, transition from agriculture-based to industry-based economy, creating and or retaining jobs, supporting or growing incomes, improving infrastructure, health and safety. As Magna Carta is often seen as one of the first legal documents protecting human rights, it celebrates all the aspects of life and its essence. Section 6 looks at Education and Mathematics as the game changer and a onetime solution to resolving various problems. Section 7 examines society as an inclusive denominator embracing all the nations under one roof of human freedom and liberty. Modern society respects freedom with regard to women’s rights, rural-urban equality in terms of development, role of media in spreading awareness on various social, political, economic, ethical and cultural aspects of life. Principal Dr. Jyoti Marwah, as a Historian possesses a clear insight into the vision of our College that is aspiring for ‘excellence in life skills through education’. We could succeed in accomplishing this feat with her constant support and the fervour of the faculty members to prove themselves as accomplished and enlightened intellectuals of a transformed and progressive world. This publication has provided teachers and students the much needed platform to bring forth the latent talent which hitherto was untapped and had no outlet. Also, such activities design a pathway for release of pent-up thought processes by giving a channel for communication as we are living in a world of unabated information which needs to be churned to obtain the truth and relevant information. To conclude the birth of this publication of Magna Carta will serve as one of the memorable moments for KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai. The launch of this book is a matter of pride that has enlightened this moment of when we are celebrating the importance of Science Communication in this workshop cum seminar. Magna Carta opens up new doors for various interdisciplinary areas that are intertwined with one another through a common medium of communication between the scientists and the masses. We as editors, thank Honouable Chairman, Dr. Prabhakar Kore, KLE Board of Directors, Director, Dr. S. N. Shetti, Principal, Dr. Jyoti Marwah, faculty members of KLE colleges, students from our college and other colleges and our publisher for having extended their valuable contribution towards making our feat turn into a reality.

25 June 2016 Dr. Usha Karunakaran Ms. Snehal Patil Dr. Fatima Shaikh Disclaimer The views expressed in the articles are those of the Authors/ contributors and not necessarily of the editor and publisher. Authors/contributors are themselves responsible for any kind of plagiarism found in their articles. Contents

Board of Management v Review Panel vi Prologue vii-viii Epilogue ix-xi

Prefatory xix-xxvii Urbanization Patterns in India and the World : Implications for the Future Nidhi Subramanyam (Department of City and Regional Planning, Cornell University, USA)

Section 1 Humanities Tracing a New Culture

1. Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India 3-11 Dr. Fatima Shaikh 2. From the ‘Lost Generation’ of the 20th Century to the ‘Occupy Wall Street’ of 12-15 21st Century: It’s all about Social, Economic and Political Inclusion Dr. Jyoti Marwah 3. 800 Years of Magna Carta: Moving Towards Equitable and Responsible Society. 16-21 Dr. Jyoti Marwah, Deepika Dhnawat & Shayesha Lobo 4. Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civilization 22-30 Patil Dhanashree Vasant Vasudha xiv Section 2 Encompassing Field of Information and Communication Technology

5. Future Generation Wireless Networks 33-37 Dr. Udaykumar L. Naik 6. From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws 38-46 Jyoti G. Hiremath 7. Information and Communication Technology 47-51 Nazeerunnisa & Parveez Ameena 8. Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using 52-59 Artificial Intelligence Kshitija Suhas Kapre 9. Net Neutrality – Shield The Web 60-65 Lifna Varghese 10. Understanding the Chemistry Between the Internet and Young Minds 66-70 Ulka Patil 11. The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 71-81 Harshala Pradeep Raj & Dr. Fatima Shaikh 12. Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society 82-90 Shilpa Udayshankar 13. The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 91-102 Sindhu Chandan Singh 14. Revolutionized Communication of the 21st Century, yet the need of ‘Cyber Security’ 103-108 Nilam Patil

Section 3 Health and Technological Advances

15. A Survey on Anaemia Amongst the Girl Students-A Case Study 111-116 Divya K Shetty 16. From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 117-133 Dr. Usha Karunakaran 17. Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview 134-142 Sunitha Menon. K xv

18. Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans 143-151 Mahashabde R.P. 19. Nanotechnology in Food Industry 152-156 Rajiv Khombare 20. HPLC Validation of Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Doses form 157-164 Apurva Sharma 21. Xenobiotics: Uses and Applications 165-168 Dr. Kamalinee Deodhar 22. Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 169-182 Anjali Sudam Mane 23. AYUSH : “Usage and Acceptability of Indian Systems of Medicines” 183-189 Deepak Gaikwad

Section 4 Environmental Concerns

24. Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 193-204 Ashwini P. Parab 25. The Impact of Solar Energy on Environment Sustainability in the Indian Context 205-209 Dr. Ela Atheaya & Deepali Atheaya 26. Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity 210-218 Swati Yeole

Section 5 From Bullion to Commodity Trade in the Globalised World

27. Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 221-232 Gopika B. Hosamani 28. The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 233-244 Snehal Anant Patil 29. Importance of Micro, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises in Economic 245-251 Development of India Eknath G. Pokharkar xvi

30. Common Practices of Corporate Social Responsibilities in Pharmaceutical Companies 252-258 Lekha J Varma 31. E-commerce and its Impact on Society 259-264 Shuhangi S. More 32. Review of the Impact of WTO in the Indian Context 265-271 Umashankar B. Pandey 33. History and Evolution of Corporate Social Responsibility 272-278 Dr. Jyoti Marwah, Gayatri Nair, Ajay Srivastava, Sankalp Navrekar, Muniza Shaikh & Ayifa Shaikh

Section 6 Magna Carta Spurring Education

34. Mathematical Analysis of the Impact of Industrialization on 281-288 Environmental Pollution Dr. Shikha Gaur 35. Creative Methods of Teaching Mathematics 289-295 Kanchan Ukirde 36. Mathematical Modeling 296-303 Shiuli Dhar 37. Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems 304-311 N .V. Pawar

Section 7 Society - An Inclusive Denominator

38. Right to be a Woman - Legal Lineage from Magna Carta 315-317 Tejashree Prakash Bandekar 39 Rapid Urbanization 318-324 Sumaiya Fathima 40. The Media Reach and Impact 325-329 Ayesha B. B. xvii

41. Rights of the Differently Abled Cresendoes to New Levels of Humanities 330-335 Ankush Landge, Minakshee Jadhav, Shayesha Lobo, Deepika Dhanawat & Sagar Malaviya 42. Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era 336-343 Vivek Prabhakar Jadhav 43. tu tkx:drk gsrq lapkj ds ekè;e dk ;ksxnku 344-351 jpuk ikaMs

PREFATORY

Nidhi Subramanyam Research Scholar, Department of City and Regional Planning, Cornell University, USA

Urbanization Patterns in India and the World: Implications for the Future

We are presently living in an era of urbanization. More than half of the world’s current population lives in urban areas or cities, and there are projections that this number will increase. This urban population is unequally distributed in cities of different sizes across the globe. What constitutes “urban” varies across regions, but definitions typically include areas with dense agglomerations of people, majority of whom are engaged in non-agricultural activities (United Nations Statistics Division, 2005). Urbanization occurs due to natural growth, or due to migration from rural areas or other cities.In addition, Montgomery (2008) notes that the re-classification of urban areas to include peripheral villages,or the formation of new agglomerations due to the re-classification of large villages into small towns are other main causes. With increasing urbanization, it has been projected that the world rural population will start decreasing in about a decade and there will likely be 200 million fewer rural inhabitants in 2050 than there are today. In this paper, I trace the broad patterns of urbanization in the world as measured through increase in urban population, cities of various size classes, and their growth rates. Using the case of India (a rapidly urbanizing country with a large urban population), I show how these urbanization patterns manifest in the context of the global South. In the final section, I conclude with some implications of these urban growth trends for future research and development policies. xx World-Wide Urbanization Trends In 2014, over 54% of the total world population was urban, but more than75% of this urban population – nearly 3.9 billion people – was concentrated in the less developed regions of the world, i.e. in cities of the global South.However, only around 48% of the population is urbanized within these global South countries, suggesting an uneven concentration of urban population in select cities and regions. In contrast, over 78% of the population in countries in the global North is urban. Even within the global South, Latin America and the Caribbean are highly urbanized (nearly 80% of the population is urban) as compared to Asia (~48%) and Africa (~40%) (Refer Figure 1).

Figure 1 - Urban Population as a Proportion of Population in Different Regions of the World in 1950-2050 (Source: United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2014. Retrieved from http://esa.un.org/unpd/wup/CD-ROM/ on 2 June, 2016). Within the various regions, too, urban population is unevenlydistributed among cities of different sizes. Megacities – dense urban agglomerations with a population of 10 million or more – are home to over 470 million people worldwide. Tokyo is currently the world’s largest megacity followed by Delhi, Shanghai, Sao Paulo and Mumbai. The world had 29 megacities in 2014 (17 in Asia alone) but they accounted for barely 11.9% of the world urban population. In contrast, a bulk of the world’s urban population has always resided and continues to do so in small cities with less than 1 million residents. See Figure 2 for a distribution of world urban population by city size class. xxi

Figure 2 - Distribution of Urban Population by City Size Class (Source: United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2014. Retrieved from http://esa.un.org/unpd/wup/CD-ROM/ on 2 June, 2016). In 2014, nearly 60% of the world’s 3.9 billion urban dwellers lived in as many as 1200 small cities, each with fewer than 1 million inhabitants. In the coming decades, the number of small cities (and hence, urban population in them) is projected to increase – at a faster rate as compared to megacities. This growth will be more pronounced in Asia and Africa. For instance, the number of small cities in Asia and Africa is estimated to increase by a third from 774 in 2014 to 1048 in 2030. In contrast, the number of small cities in other regions of the world will increase by only about 13% from 454 in 2014 to 515 in 2030. For these reasons, it will be necessary to concentrate sustainable development efforts in cities in developing regions, particularly small cities, which are growing at a faster pace. This is especially important in the area of poverty alleviation. Poverty can be broadly understood as multidimensional deprivation and a lack of access to freedoms and opportunities, and can be measured in terms of access to employment, shelter as well as basic services and amenities such as water, healthcare and schooling (Kudva, 2015). While urbanization helps reduce absolute poverty in the aggregate by fostering economic growth, some scholars have found that there has been an increasing urbanization of poverty in recent decades across the world (Ravallion et al., 2007).They estimate that currently one third of all urban residents are poor, which represents one quarter of the world’s total poor. Many of these are in small cities and towns where the incidence of poverty tends to be higher and more widespread as compared to big cities (Kudva, 2015).The incidence of xxii urban poverty, i.e.the share of poor as a proportion of the urban population, is highest for South Asia and Sub-Saharan Africa (Baker, 2008), which are also the most rapidly urbanizing regions. As mentioned earlier, this calls for a re-focus of development efforts in small cities in these regions. With this overview, the next section sketches some of the urbanization trends in India, and concludes with a few implications for urban development policies.

Urbanization Patterns in India India’s urban population exceeds the total population of the United States (over 420 million), and is second only to China. Nearly a fifth of its urban population lives in the 4 densely populated megacities of Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata and Bangalore, whereas the remainder lives in hundreds of small cities and towns with less than a million residents. During the colonial period, urban growthwas concentrated in port cities like Bombay/ Mumbai, Calcutta/ Kolkata, and Madras/ Chennai, which were hubs of trade, administration and commerce; while the hinterland remained largely rural and undeveloped (King, 2014). These ports have continued to remain some of the major urban centers even today. Following Independence, India’s urban population increased by 53.7% due to Partition and the inflow of refugees (Batra, 2009), causing the state to rapidly develop capacities in existing urban centers such as Calcutta/ Kolkata and Bombay/ Mumbai. Despite the high concentration of the small urban population in these two cities (~12%), they had less than 5 million residents and were the only two cities in India to cross the million mark. During this period, the Nehruvian ‘developmentalist’ state focused on industrial development in cities to create employment and strengthen the economy. In the period 1970-85, the state’s focus shifted towards balanced regional growth to prevent overcrowding in a few cities due to rural-urban migration. India experienced some of its highest annual urban population growth rates during this period as many small and medium sized townswere developed. According to Heitzman (2008), the growth of many of these small towns and cities rested on smaller market towns and administrative centers that had emerged during the colonial period. From 1986 onwards, India adopted neoliberal reforms, and the task of urban development was shifted to the private sector. It was decided to upgrade existing urban centers to world class standards so as to attract global capital (Batra, 2009). These historical urban development trends in India are parallel to those seen in many other regions in the global South as outlined in Goldman (2014). In subsequent decades, the urban population has more than doubled, and is projected to be 815 million in 2050, which is more than the current population of the entire continent of Europe. Although India’s present urban population is very high, its growth rate is not as high as some other parts of Asia. According to the Census of India (2011), the total population was nearly 1.2 billion, of which 31.8% was urban, only a slight increase from the 2001-10 period (~28%). Simultaneously, the share of rural population has been declining as shown in Figure 3. xxiii

Figure 3 - Share of Rural and Urban Population in India in 1950-2050 (Source: United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2014. Retrieved from http://esa.un.org/unpd/wup/Country-Profiles/ on 2 June, 2016) The Union Territories of Chandigarh, Delhi, and Pondicherry are highly urbanized, and have experienced a huge increase in urban population. States like Goa, Mizoram, Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Maharashtra, Gujarat, Karnataka, Punjab, Haryana and Andhra Pradesh are highly urbanized compared to the rest of the country (Refer Figure 4). Of these, Kerala has recorded more than 89% growth in urban population in the last decade, followed by Haryana (42.6%) and Gujarat (36%) (Census of India, 2011). xxiv

CENSUS OF INDIA 2011

Figure 4 - State-Wise Distribution of Urban Population (Source: Census of India, 2011) A majority of the urban population (54.2%) is concentrated in cities with population less than 1 million. The number of people living in these cities is approximately 215 million, which constitutes 17% of the total population. The number of these small towns and cities has increased rapidly; it has quintupled since independence from 79 in 1950 to nearly 500 at present. The bulk of the recent increase in urban population in many states such as Kerala is due to the addition of 2,532 “census towns” in the last decade. These census towns are ‘urban’ by definition, but may be ‘rural’ in governance (JNNURM and NIUA, 2011). This shows that the increase in urban population is not necessarily due to natural growth or migration from rural to urban areas. While increases in population are not substantially large in small towns and cities as compared to their mega counterparts (See Figure 5), nevertheless transformations in lifestyle, economies and the built environment have been the most pronounced here (Heitzman, 2008). xxv

Figure 5 - Urban Population by City Size Class in India (Source: United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2014. Retrieved from http://esa.un.org/unpd/wup/Country-Profiles/ on 2 June, 2016) According to the National Sample Survey carried out in 2007-08, migrants make up about 35.4% of the urban population, and people migrate for reasons like better employment, starting a business, or for education (Kundu and Saraswati, 2012). The fast-growing small towns are often the livelihood resort of marginalized rural populations, whereas larger towns and small cities benefit from better- off rural-to-urban migration streams that avoid the large cities, where the cost of living is climbing steeply (Kudva, 2015). High rates of urban to urban migration (13.1%) in the National Sample Survey suggest that many migrants could be from middle and high income categories, who tend to migrate with families. In 2010, India had nearly 5.4 million immigrants, making it one of the top ten immigration destinations, although the proportionof immigrant population is quite low (0.4% of the total population), and there is no evidence to suggest that they settle in urban areas. More than 50% of these immigrants are from Bangladesh, Pakistan, and the neighboring SAARC countries. xxvi As noted earlier, there has been an increasing urbanization of poverty worldwide. However, urban poverty has been on the decline in India, with sharp decline after the 1990s. In 2011-12, urban poor constituted 13.7% of India’s population (Planning Commission, GoI as cited in Rao, 2013) as opposed to 26.8% in 2004 and 42% in 1983 (Kudva, 2015). The proportion of urban poor is less than that of the rural poor. However, the number of urban poor in India is very large – above 50 million (Rao, 2013). A map of urban poverty by state shows that states with higher percentage of urban population have lower urban poverty rates, indicating that urbanization could have contributed to poverty reduction (also see Kudva, 2015 for an in-depth discussion on sub-national poverty). At the city scale, poverty rates are higher in small cities that have population below 1 million, and increase for much smaller places or those with poorer access to services, particularly if they are more than 200 miles away from a larger city (Kudva, 2015).

Conclusion The urbanization trends that I have briefly sketched out in this chapter clearly indicate that future urban growth will occur in the global South, and is likely to be concentrated in small cities and towns in Asia and Africa. As these small towns and cities will have a higher incidence of poverty, and will likely absorb more of the rural-urban migration streams in future, it is necessary that urban development policies be directed towards fostering the economies, and increasing access to services and amenities within these small towns and cities in an equitable manner. Additionally, the growing impacts of climate change and the rapid rate of urbanization demandnovel research methodologies and innovations in planning and policies. Specifically, within the Indian context, policy makers will have to focus on improving housing, access to services, mobility, employment, and participation in governance and decision-making, while simultaneously conserving the natural environment and reducing our carbon footprint. The Smart City policy is one opportunity but it remains to be seen whether it will deliver on its promises of equity and sustainability. Similarly, researchers will have to move beyond the comfort zones of megacities to uncover histories, local planning practices, needs and capacities – a formidable task given the scale and speed of growth.

References Baker , J. L. (2008). Urban Poverty: A Global View. (Urban Papers no. UP-5). Washington D.C. - The Worldbank. Retrieved from: http://documents.worldbank.org/curated/en/2008/01/9112288/urban-poverty-global-view Batra, L. (2009). A review of urbanization and urban policy in Post Independent India (Working Paper No. CSLG/ WP/12). New Delhi - Center for the Study of Law and Governance, Jawaharlal Nehru University. Retrieved from website: http://www.jnu.ac.in/cslg/workingPaper/12-A%20Review%20of%20Urban%20(Lalit%20Batra).pdf Census of India. (2011). Provisional population totals. New Delhi, India: Registrar General and Census Commissioner, India. Goldman, M. (2014). Development and the City. In F. Miraftab & N. Kudva (Eds.), Cities in a Global South Reader. London and New York: Routledge. Heitzman, J. (2008). Middle towns to middle cities in South Asia, 1800-2007. Journal of Urban History, 35(1), 15-38. JNNURM Directorate, Ministry of Urban Development and National Institute of Urban Affairs (NIUA), (2011).India’s urban demographic transition: The 2011 census results (provisional). Retrieved from website: http:/ /indiagovernance.gov.in/files/urbandemographictransition.pdf xxvii

King, A. D. (2014). Colonialism and urban development. In F. Miraftab & N. Kudva (Eds.), Cities in a Global South Reader. London and New York: Routledge. Kundu, A., & Saraswati, L. R. (2012). Migration and Exclusionary Urbanization in India. Economic & Political Weekly, 47(26), 219-27. Kudva, N. (2015). Small cities, big issues: Indian cities in the debates on urban poverty and inequality. In Miraftab, F., Wilson, D. and Salo, K. (Eds), Cities and Inequalities in a Transnational World. London and New York: Routledge. Montgomery, M. (2008). The demography of the urban transition: what we know and don’t know. In Martine, G., McGranahan, G., Montgomery, M. and Fernandez-Castilla, R. (Eds),The New Global Frontier: Urbanization, Poverty and Environment in the 21st Century. London: Earthscan, 17-36. Rao, K. (2013, July 23). India’s poverty level falls to record 22%: Planning commission. Livemint. Retrieved from http://www.livemint.com/Politics/1QvbdGnGySHo7WRq1NBFNL/Poverty-rate-down-to-22-Plan-panel.html Ravallion, M., Chen, S., & Sangraula, P. (2007). New evidence on the urbanization of global poverty. Population and Development Review, 33(4), 667-701. The World Bank, (2011a). Bilateral remittance matrix. Retrieved from website: http://go.worldbank.org/ JITC7NYTT0 The World Bank. (2011b). Migration and Remittances Fact book 2011. (2nd ed.). Retrieved from http://issuu.com/ world.bank.publications/docs/9780821382189?mode=embed&layout=http://skin.issuu.com/v/light/ layout.xml&showFlipBtn=true United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division. (2014). World Urbanization Prospects: The 2014 Revision. Retrieved from website: http://esa.un.org/unpd/wup/Publications/Files/WUP2014- Report.pdf United Nations National Statistics Division. (2005). Demographic Yearbook 2005. Retrieved from website: http:/ /unstats.un.org/unsd/demographic/sconcerns/densurb/Defintion_of%20Urban.pdf Section One Humanities Tracing a New Culture

Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India

Dr. Fatima Shaikh*

Abstract This paper is an attempt to analyze a very recent technique of communication used in New India that deploys an element of surprise to attract attention with a purpose of conveying a predetermined message within a predestined time. It started as an experiment but gradually became an effective tool of communication in the field of marketing and technology. This work will shed light on the place of this technique’s origin and its characteristic features. Due to an involvement of a huge crowd, the term ‘Flash Mob’ came into existence in the year 2003 for the first time in the United States of America. This term was coined by Bill Wasik, a writer and cultural critic who surprised the world with his newest experiment, carrying on the MOB project, which flooded the streets of New York City with unusual performances. Within no time this was quickly labelled “flash mobs” by participants and local media. Flash mob refers to either a small group or a big group of people coming together through electronic media or internet for a specific predetermined time and purpose and disperses quickly. These people are called as mobster who shares information about the time and place for the upcoming event utilizing blogs, chain email messages, SMS text messages, and social networking sites such as face book and twitter. Their intention is social, political, commercial, religious and creative. Nowadays it is used as a popular marketing stunt to market a product such as mobile phones. The success of flash mob depends on the element of astonishment that is generated in the audiences. It uses a flash moment technique- sudden appearance and disappearance in the crowd. In New India this newest technique functions as a tool for promotion and communication simultaneously. Companies have started utilizing this method in bringing out their brands in public and boosting up their sales. Keywords: Technique, Marketing, Technology, Boosting, Communication, Stunt, Information.

* Head of Department of Languages, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 4 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Introduction Business competitions have become part and parcel of this globalized world. India being a partner in this fast growing world economy has to face many challenges and opportunities since liberalization period. Technological advancement and varying needs of consumers are constantly bringing change in the competitive paradigms. This makes all the business firms to comprehend the complexities and requisites of markets so as to improve and sustain competitiveness. Research into sales and marketing has shown that marketing strategy plays a significant role in all enterprises- Big and Small. In order to survive in today’s highly competitive market; companies are desperately in search of new ways and channels to sell their products to the customers. There are many enterprises selling the same or similar products. Consumers are able to get full access to information about products and utilize their rational in choosing the correct one due to advancement in technology and internet. It has become an absolute necessity for enterprises to satisfy consumers for their survival. In such a scenario, the only way in which a firm can have a fair market share is by creating product preference. This can be done by increasing the demand for their products utility and backing it up with heavy advertising and promotional strategies. The existing promotional strategies have started to lose its effectiveness in capturing customers’ attention. Innovative techniques of marketing, Product launching and Activation has become a challenge for every enterprises to expand its popularity and credibility in the current competitive market. This paper attempts to look at the phenomenon of “Flash Mob” which is the form of Guerilla Marketing- a rising trend as promotional strategy witnessed in India, especially in Metros. It is currently used as a vehicle for spreading social messages as well as advertising stunt by grabbing attention through surprise and its attracting techniques of promotion. How far is it acceptable in a conventional country like India still remains a question mark? It has created a rave in India as an exploitable marketing channel in reaching out customers. By adopting this strategy, the companies can get benefitted in terms of its economic profit but how far is it going to be a very successful promotional strategy in the future cannot be predicted. It might turn out to be either a Fashion or a Fad. Advertisements only educate the consumers and fail to engage or entertain them. This is where Flash Mobs, can help as it has already started gaining popularity among crowds.

Origin of the Concept Flash Mobs began as a form of performing art in the 16th century. “Performing art” itself is defined as art created by the performance of one or more individuals. It seems simply to happen spontaneously. Performing art can incorporate all of the senses, using colour, movement, music, and so on — or their opposites: stillness and silence. Flash mobs are a 21st century innovation on the performing art theme. Performing art comes in all sorts of forms, and flash mobs demonstrate the mass creative power that can be demonstrated through electronic communication in the age of internet. A flash mob is an unrehearsed, spontaneous, communicable and diffused mass action that involves participation of a large number of people. The concept of improvising a mass gathering was first denoted as a “smart mob” in author Howard Rheingold’s book, Smart Mobs: The Social Revolution published in 2002. The term “flash mob” was coined a year later on June 17, 2003 as a form of participatory performance art, with groups of people using email, blogs, text messages, and Twitter to arrange to meet and perform some kind of playful activity in a public location. Manhattan witnessed the first flash mob in 2003, as the newest experiment in the form of MOB Project created by a senior editor of Harper’s Magazine, Bill Wasik. The first attempt proved unsuccessful after it was being tipped off about the plan for people to gather. Wasik tried attempting flash mob in the same year on June 17, which happened Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India 5 to be successful. The participants were sent to the preliminary staging area where they were provided with further instructions about the ultimate event and the location just before the event began. They assembled at one spot in a departmental store in a large group and on being questioned about their size by the sales assistant; they responded that they took decision as a group for any kind of purchase. In the same way around 200 people gathered in the lobby and mezzanine floor of Hyatt hotel for about 15 seconds and in a shoe boutique who pretended to be tourists on a bus trip. Wasik claimed that he created flash mobs as a social experiment to make fun of people who followed the latest trends and fashions, especially those regarded as being outside the cultural mainstream. In an interview with wired magazine Wasik said: “the mobs started as a kind of playful social experiment meant to encourage spontaneity and big gatherings to temporarily take over commercial and public areas simply to show that they could”. Elaborating on flash mob he also said, “The idea is mine, and I write the e-mails, but I don’t think of myself as the leader of the mob. In my mind (the mob) is led by whoever forwards the e-mail around. People make the mob through whoever they know”. Flash mob is a product of the digital age that requires a certain level of technological advancement to form, namely e-mail and text message technology created in the latter part of the 20th century. Flash mobs typically begin with an e-mail which is often sent by an anonymous person or by an organizer under a pseudonym, announcing the date and time of occurrence, along with either a set of instructions for action or the promise of instructions to be delivered on site. Receivers of the message then forward this e-mail to others through computers and cell phones, forming the mob with each successive email or text message. On arrival, participants are given instructions on what they should do during the flash mob. Flash mobs tend to last no longer than ten minutes. Participants arrive at a site, perform their action(s), and then leave, often just before the police arrive. All sorts of public performances, including fights, freezes, dances, even political protests seem to fit this new category of performance art. Today, flash mobs are seen as elaborate in-jokes, outright protests, and even television program plot lines. Flash mob is an interesting and ever-expanding amalgamation of performance, culture, and new technologies diffused world wide in the age of digitalization. India has embraced this performing art for various purposes- social, political and commercial. It has become a powerful tool of communication reaching out large number of people at the same time. Flash mob is not an entirely a new concept in India. It already prevailed in the form of performing art- dances, street plays etc. In the age of globalization, Indian economy needs to flourish and expand nationally and internationally creating a brand name out of every product manufactured and marketed. Public and Private sectors have started experimenting with various unique marketing strategies available. Business firms felt the need to attract general public at large to sell their products in order to improve sale and boost up their profit margin. Flash mob is serving not only as a medium for spreading social, political, cultural and general awareness but also used as a strategy to promote and sell products in India. Since its emergence in New York in 2003, the flash mob has been used as a successful visual marketing tool for many companies. This research paper will focus on the need and efficiency of flash mob to promote products in the age of internet. It will attempt to look at New India using this newest technique as a tool for promotion and communication in the world of fast growing business economy. 6 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Purpose of this Unique Technique Flash mob is nothing but entertainment through performance. It causes amusement, sometimes harmless confusion and also at times satirizes some important issues of society that is immediately grasped and responded by the audience. Though it serves as a good publicity stunt and a vehicle for political satire, it is also used as marketing tool for promoting publicity of a new product to a wide range of people. Flash mob carries different events with a motive towards expecting that people observers will take an initiative of buying a product, or vote for someone or support some social cause. As a tool for promotion of a product, it aims at diffusing the information of a new launch in such a way that it becomes a brand in the market. The element of surprise and entertainment plays the role of a booster in spreading the awareness regarding the various features of a product hence, attracting the masses towards using it thus creating it a brand name. It serves as a live social media on streets. It has become a buzz word these days. Though some critics have sent a word of caution for marketers, still it has all the ingredients of magic, surprise, buzz and recall value. If flash is done flawlessly and cautiously, it could potentially work like magic. It will serve as a correct tool if it applies the unique tone of the product and marketing objectives.

Consideration of Important Elements Socializing outdoors today has become a very popular culture among the urban population in India. It provides an ideal location for interacting with large crowd for a specific purpose. Flash mobs are ideally organized at well-populated locations. It works through attracting the observers, probably the potential buyers through a well planned technique that serves as an element of surprise and wonder. It uses meticulously crafted dance sequence which is kept very simple so that if there are watchers who want to join in, they can. It should check on the speed of the performance and generate an element of surprise and wonder. Popular song track that matches with the dance steps should be carefully selected. Frequency of the event should be set right. It should be examined in order to sustain excitement amongst viewers or participants. Brands should have a definite well-planned strategy in place before starting a flash mob campaign to ensure that consumers do not sense repetition in the context or style. It is important to organize such activities not only on the basis of time, but also according to the nature of the audience, location and content. A particular scenario should be acted out aptly. Mime should be used wherever necessary. The flash mob participants should aim at breaking their own set record in order to enter into Guinness Book of World Record. This can be achieved by having the largest gathering doing a performance at the same time.

Flash Mob - A Billiant Technique of Promotion and Communication Business firms and marketers have gained tremendous help for promoting their products, services and activities through the utilization of the flash mob technique- advertisement using fun and entertainment. Flash mob serves as a genius marketing tool for promoting and popularizing a particular brand in the market. It is a smart tool because it is unique and unconventional in approach. It becomes nearly impossible to miss a flash event as it tends to lure the bystanders and possible buyers into watching the performance. It is almost organized free of cost without incurring heavy finance. The group arranges their event through Twitter and Face book without any need of renting out a space for performance. They can have a hand on free auditorium such as malls, train stations, crowded city blocks, and popular tourist attractions. It acts as an active news channel that that captures the attention of the observers towards the performance and invokes them to Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India 7 seize the moment either in their mobile phones or some other device and circulate the same on various social media such as YouTube. This helps spreading the flash mob performance far and wide through technology. Social media such as Twitter and Face book is widely brought into use in making the video go viral thus enabling millions of viewers watch the flash mob performance at a time. The excitement and thrill of witnessing the live flash mob performance creates a closer relationship between consumers and the product. This makes consumers feel that they are part of the product.

What Makes a Flash Mob Effective Flash mobs tend to be effective when they follow certain norms and laws of performance. It becomes fruitful when it provides clear instructions to a group of performers. There should be proper arrangement of the required props and costumes taking into account the aptness and urgency. Venue, date and time should be decided upon in advance keeping in mind the limitation of the location of performance. Right kind of humour is necessary so that nobody feels offended during performance. It is mandatory that the performers are aware of the local laws thus avoiding any kind of indulgence in illegal, harmful and safety compromising activities. Prior permission from relevant authority should be asked for to avoid any future embarrassment. The performers should show respect for the large gathering in a particular place. Trespassing into any public or private premises should be strictly avoided. Goals that are set in the beginning should be clear cut. Organizers should assure that they stick to their original plans. They need to carefully select people they already know on social media sites hitting up like-minded people and giving them a firm grasp of their concept. Press and prominent social media peeps and bloggers should be invited through calls and emails. Performance should be winded up in such a way as if nothing had ever happened. Once the event gets over the participants should not be allowed to sit and talk or loiter around in the crowd. They need to mingle back with the crowd and walk off unknown and unseen. Policy of Perform, Disperse, and Celebrate should be followed without a pinch of doubt. Talking about the effectiveness of flash mob, Heemanshu Sharma, choreographer at Dance work, says flash mobs should be limited. He adds, “I think flash mobs can be far more productive if used less. Otherwise, they tend to become very predictable”.

A New and Unique Marketing Strategy in India According to Krishnadeep Baruah, Director of Marketing, Research in Motion, India (RIM), the parent company that owns the popular mobile brand Blackberry, considers: “The concept of flash mobs has been a popular phenomenon in the west. It has recently gained popularity in India”. Flash mob serves as the latest publicity stunt for placing their brands- big or small in front of the people especially in the cities. Otherwise restricted to big cities and metros, amidst cosmopolitan culture, it has now entered even rural areas. Event management companies, social activists, TV channels and movie production houses are keen at creating a buzz among masses. It is a tried- and-tested technique abroad, but in India it is a new concept. It was first initiated at Mumbai’s Chhatrapati Shivaji Terminus when approximately 200 people began dancing to Bollywood chartbuster “Rang De Basanti” in the month of November 2011. A 23 – year- old Shonan Kothari caused a sensation on the internet by converting her dream into reality. This woman brings the concept of flash mob in India for the first time with an aim of doing something different and unique. “I was aiming to do something really spectacular,” said Ms. Kothari in an interview. After a successful encounter with the bystanders this flash mob caught people’s attention and travelled to various cities like Pune, Chennai, Bangalore, and Hyderabad, Kochi as well as the 8 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey national capital of India. It also made a headline at Jagtial municipality town in Telangana state (formerly in Andhra Pradesh). Some of the best examples of flash mobs performed in India-cities as well as rural, as a marketing strategy for promotion of a product in the Indian market are: ¾ Nokia, as a part of their promotional campaign for the launch of its Lumia smart phone, carried out simultaneous flash mobs in malls across several metro cities in the country in 2011. ¾ In June 2012 a flash mob was conducted on the streets of Jagtial town with the purpose to educate the youth on the occasion of International Day against Drug Abuse and Illicit Trafficking. The passersby, mostly rural folk, were first quite shocked to see a sudden dance number being done by the students on the roads and the presence of police along with them. ¾ In 2013, the Performance Materials Division of Merck India initiated a consumer awakening campaign called ‘SAY NO To Sab Chalta Hai’.’ The campaign, which made use of a flash mob related competition, was aimed at empowering the end consumer to explore new possibilities and challenge convention. Through these flash mobs, college students were urged to create awareness about unsafe and low-quality products and inspire consumers to demand what is rightfully theirs in terms of good quality products that made life better, safer and more enriching. ¾ Big brands are increasingly targeting highly crowded areas to carry out flash mobs in order to maximize their audience. At the 12th Auto Expo 2014 in Delhi, Mahindra conducted a flash mob where dancers performed to ‘Live young, live free’, which is the theme song of the brand. Some of the dancers were even dressed as security guards and emerged from within the crowd to surprise the automobile enthusiasts. The brand continued the campaign by uploading the video of the flash mob on Face book which has gone on to get almost 6,000 likes. ¾ More than 50 million people are now using Opera Mini to go online with their phones in India, making it the third-largest mobile app in India, after Face book and WhatsApp. Opera Mini CEO, Lars Boilesen, in November 2014, joined 50 dancers in a fun Bollywood flash mob to celebrate and thank users in India. ¾ Phoenix Marketcity Mall took its customers by surprise by introducing India’s first ever “Phoenix Marketcity Fashion Flash Mob” in the city on October 3, 2015, featuring the most stylish fashion shows for all fashionistas. ¾ American clothing brand Aeropostale entered the fast growing India market on November 27, 2015 through the use of flash mob. ¾ Famous actress and dancer, Madhuri Dixit, recently surprised her fans at the Oberoi Mall in Mumbai by performing a song and dance sequence to the jingle of Oral-B. The idea behind the campaign, which was done in a ‘Flash Mob’ way, was to encourage people to join in on the Oral-B Smile India movement. This flash mob was conducted in the month of March 2016. ¾ Just recently in 2016, McGraw Hill Education India, a 125-year old leading learning company which delivers personalized learning experiences, surprised its employees by having some fun with a flash mob. The passionate and high-spirited India team got together for the flash mob during their virtual global kick-off. Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India 9

Comments from Experts Supporting the Effectiveness of Flash Mob As a Marketing Strategy tool for Communication Various experts from the field of marketing have supported the influence and impact of flash mob on the promotion and sales of different products. It is important to observe some of the compelling statements about the effectiveness of flash mob around the globe. 1) “A big thank you to the entire team for putting together an incredible 5oo person flash mob in five cities! Pretty sure no one else would’ve turned this around with the same level of professionalism, expertise and enthusiasm! Thank you again for acting as true partners throughout this process and for putting together an incredible event”. - Saskia Sorrosa, VP Marketing, NATIONAL BASKETBALL ASSOCIATION, simultaneous flash mobs in 5 cities for NBA Playoffs marketing campaign. 2) “BookAFlashMob.com were great partners who seamingly and professionally worked with our team to put all the elements together for one of our top clients. Their ability to work closely with our team to adapt to our client’s needs was exceptional. They met every request and delivered smart creative solutions along each step of the way”. - Bret Mactavish, Senior Accountant Director, LEADDOG MARKETING, flash mob marketing for top client’s press announcement. 3) “Everyone had so much fun and the flash mob performance was a hit. The flash mob team was amazing to work with. Thanks again for everything and we look forward to working with you on future events”. - Angie Guerra, SYMANTIC, for launch of a new facility 4) “There is much talk about creating experiences for the consumer. And this acts as the perfect medium to give them that.” -. Santosh Desai, CEO of FUTURE BRANDS, calls it a classic case of ‘interactive advertising’. 5) “BIG Music has consistently believed in building greater audience interaction. Do Knot Disturb’s soundtrack is fresh, peppy and energetic and a remarkable dance album. The ‘flash mob’ activation is an extension of the music’s clear mass appeal and we are sure audiences will be intrigued by these enthusiastic and unexpected performances.” - Kulmeet Makkar, CEO – BIG MUSIC AND HOME ENTERTAINMENT. 6) “It was a dream come true and we have been planning meticulously on this project for 30 days now….the show was perfect” - Faheem Raja, Choreographer, India’s first ever fashion flash mob in Bangalore. 7) “It was (a) great idea for visual merchandising. All these smartly dressed models just froze in the middle of whatever they were doing at the mall. Whether it was drinking coffee, applying make-up, talking on the phone or walking. So shoppers were a little startled at first, but figured things out when they saw the Allen Solly tags”. Vinod Vijaykumar, general manager (south and west) of TEQUILA, part of TBWA Group. 10 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Table 1: SWOT Analysis of Flash Mob as the Usual Communication Technique in New India Strengths Weaknesses • Effective Promotional Strategy • Possibility of pick pocketing and theft in the crowd • Powerful Social, Cultural and Political gimmick • Reduction in efficacy • Unique and Unusual tool of communication • Monotonous • Exposure of a brand to a large crowd at a time • Crowd-engaging phenomenon • Pulls attention of the bystanders within seconds • Repetition of the same technique at many places • Attracts through element of surprise • Reduction in the old charm • Less time consuming • No coverage in the rural area

Opportunities Threats • Can be modified as a brand promoter • Safety concerns in large gathering • Can serve as a powerful promotion tool • Hurting of Social and Religious covering various brands sentiments • Can be used as a gimmick to spread social and • Fear of losing cultural values cultural messages to the masses • Can do wonders in rural India • Fear of losing charm due to monotony • Can serve as a tool to educate masses about • Killing of original essence as a the issues of concern promotional tool • Can become a popular gimmick in the business • Threat to legalities world • Fear of trespassing and robbery

Conclusion Though flash mob has made its way in the Indian market with a big bang, it has brought its own limitations. With the popularity it has gained, arrive certain problems in the forefront. There are reports of thefts and pick pocketing in the area where flash mobs are organized. These types of incidents have lead people to reject the efficacy that it has displayed at various places in the area of marketing products. Socially, it lacks gaining acceptance from all corners of our traditional Indian society. It becomes a huge crowd-engaging phenomenon wherever it is performed. It has done wonders as a social, political and cultural vehicle in India, it still needs to be seen whether it would do the same as a promotional strategy. It has started losing its big size craze as they were in the early days of YouTube. Flash mobs in the city have become so predictable in nature that it has started losing its value. Experts argue against over doing the flash mob events for every other reason. “The whole basis of a flash mob is spontaneity. If it’s organized for publicity, it is nothing but a trash commercial venture. I won’t be surprised if they start paying people to dance in a flash mob”, says Alyque Padamsee, communication consultant. Repetition of a flash mob promoting same product kills the very essence of not only the medium but also the product. Flash Mobbing: The Unusual Communication Technique in New India 11 There is lack of controlling authority over the event hence, no specific rules regarding performance is followed. Flash mobs come frequently under immense police surveillance as constant threat predominates due to large gathering at public places. It is losing its original charm perhaps due to the fact that organizing flash mobs have become more common and it no more serves information using surprise and wonder. People are now quite aware of this gimmick used by marketers to promote their brands among the people on the streets, malls, railway stations, crowded public locations etc. It has lost that shine and glitz of being absolutely new and dazzling concept in the Indian business market. It can still try to build its charm in the rural India where it has already been initiated though at a low pace. It can not die completely in the metro cities but just diminish in its original appeal to the audience at the same time picking up a gear in the rural India as a new marketing strategy.

References Dance with a purpose, join in the flash mob. India Today Online. 29 Dec 2011. Web. Flash Mob History. Flash Mob; 101. Web. Guerrilla Marketing: The Power of the Flash Mob. Raindance. 21 Nov 2012. Web Christine, C. In 5 Reasons Why Flash mobs are Genius for Marketing. A Blog on Public Relations Society of America. 4 Oct 2014. Web. Cicchetti, C. Is Flash Mob Advetising Dead?. GC Marketing Services. 10 Jan 2012. Web. Dewan, N. Once a hit marketing tool, flash mob may loose its sheen due to frequent use. Economic Times. 2 Jan 2012. Web. Hsieh, Dr. M. Social Media in Strategic Communication (SMISC). Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA). Web. Jayachandran, A. Flash Mob – Prospects As An Exploitable Promotion Strategy. Marketing & Strategy Articles. 15 Sept 2012. Web. Kanojia, K. Flash Mob: a new marketing tool?. Deccan Herald. Web. Kurian, S. Saying it with flash mobs!. Times of India. 17 Jul 2013. Web. Murugesan, D. Keep em Flashing – Flash Mobs in India. Penny Shine Blog. 15 Dec 2011. Web. Nicholson, J. A. FCJ-030 Flash! Mobs in the Age of Mobile Connectivity. The Fibreculture Journal, Issue 6. 2005. Web. Roger, H. Flash Mobs as a Marketing Tool. H+A International Inc. 12 July 2011. Web. Shah, G. New crowd-puller: branded flash mobs. Live Mint. 30 Oct 2009. Web. Shambhavi, A. Aeropstale using flash mobs for Indian debut. The Economic Times. 25 Oct 2015. Web. Thacker, S. Fashion Flash Mob. Vogue India Magazine (Online). 11 Nov 2011. Web. Titus, R. Yuva India: Consumption and Lifestyle Choices of a Young India. www.bokus.com. 2015. Web. Wang, C. P; Akella, D. P; Bennett, C. F. Flash Mobs in the 21st Century: Mobile Technology Shapes Human Collective Behavior. International Journal of Business, Humanities and Technology. May 2014. Web. 2

From the ‘Lost Generation’ of the 20th Century to the ‘Occupy Wall Street’ of 21st Century: It’s all about Social, Economic and Political Inclusion

Dr. Jyoti Marwah*

“Times of Upheaval begin as surprises but end as clichés” has been very rightly observed by Todd Gitlen an acclaimed writer of the ‘Sixties’. 20th century history can no better be written and communicated than by the literature of these times. A period when Big Business had made America so confident so as to emerge from its splendid isolation of the 19th century and chart a new trend in leading the world as a major arbitrator and global player in the process of globalization.History of America began with the religious upheaval in Europe but 20th century witnessed the most progressive period in history, economics, literature as well as social and political awakening. This progressive impulse in literature - propelled by Herbert Croly’s ‘The promise of American Life’ - a critical supporter of the progressive movement. He saw the inevitable conflict between the principles of liberty and equality — absolute liberty in the economic sphere leads to inequality. He therefore had argued in favour of a strong government to administer social justice. Other writers like Theodore Drieser, Upton Sinclair and Frank Norris promoted realism in their writings.Muckrakers exposed evils and corruption – to promote social justice– this resulted in social and economic legislations.Charles Beard’s ‘Economic interpretation of the Constitution of the United States’ indicates the economic impulse of the century. 1901-1945 was an era of great change. The years between 1900-1920 have gone down in history as the Progressive Era or the Age of Reform. The movement was not based on any political philosophy or a doctrine it was a practical and pragmatic way to reform the framework of American institutions from within. Herbert Croley wrote “The promise of American Life ‘ in 1904 and Theodore Roosevelt called it the ‘ most powerful and illuminating study of our national conditions’. Croley’s contribution to the political thought is also referred to as ‘New Nationalism’.As the average

* Principal, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra and Former Member BOS History UoM and former HOD History, ICLES’MJ College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra From the ‘Lost Generation’ of the 20th Century to the ‘Occupy Wall Street’ of 21st Century: It’s... 13 American had awakened to the need for satisfying the larger interests of the public during this era. Realistic literature of this period reached the masses. The Muckrackers exposed the evils and corruption in business, politics and attacked bribery, special privileges, organized vice, business combines, prostitution, child labour, food adultery and slavery. The ‘Wisconsin Way’ was a memorable movement obtaining talent from colleges for the reform programme. During this period there were profound changes in the racial composition as well as mental and moral attitudes of the American society. These changes were the result of the growth of Big Business as it led to period of abundance. Woodrow Wilson believed that nothing can be more dangerous for a country ‘than the picture of arrogance of wealth’. There was rapid industrial growth and agriculture transformed with increased mechanization. There was phenomenal prosperity for there was not a single American family that did not have a house and a car to own. However affluence and abundance resulted in the breakdown of morals and family life was disrupted by loose moral behavior among children and women. Alcoholism became rampant among them. Thus this era of excess, rapid urbanization, loose morality, motion pictures, influence of radio and jazz culture led to the bitter experience of the Great Depression. This however was a turning point in American history. The experience of the Great Depression undermined the old philosophy of American business of being a self- regulatory economy, to one that was now to promote concern for human values, social and political consciousness under the ‘New Deal’ of Franklin D. Roosevelt. Though referred to as the lost generation or era of wonderful nonsense or the jazz age it was an era definitely not lost to literature.This period produced eminent writers, historians and intellectuals who raised the nation’s literary reputation. Edmund Wilson says that ‘writers in this generation attacked their own culture more consistently than in any other era of history’. Literature of 20’s and 30’s was the culmination of this social change. F.Scott Fitzgerald ‘s ‘This side of Paradise’ revolved around the theme of sex and alcohol. Hemingway’s Farewell to Arms deprived WW-I of it’s glamour and greatness that America had felt under the leadership of Woodrow Wilson. Sinclair Lewis had attacked the clergy for their dishonesty in his writings and became the first Noble Prize winner from USA. John Stein Beck known as the ‘giant of American Literature had also explored the themes of injustice and won the Noble Prize for Literature in 1962. There were many other writers with new influence on history and the sharpest critic of artificiality and dishonesty in American life was Henry L.Menchen. Described as the bad boy of American Letters. He was critical of FDR and the New Deal.However according to Walter Lippman he was a powerful influence on the ‘generation of educated people’. He ridiculed American ‘piety’, ‘stupidity’, ‘cheap chauvinism’, ‘religion’, ‘prohibition’ and even Christian marriage.The annals of History have been enriched by H.G.Wells in his Outline of History and Charles A. and Mary R. Beard’s – The Rise of American Civilization –which has given a Marxist interpretation of American history. Review of the Sixties has been given by Todd Gilten for this was the most notable decade after the second world war in changing equations and remarkable achievements. His book on the sixties has been dealt under four heads and is a remarkable piece of History and Autobiography that expresses the mood, style, spirit of youthful rebellion, adventure, innocence and the desire for the Moon. These were; 1) Social Equality (Race, Gender, Sexuality) 2) Wide-Open Lifestyle (Sex, Drugs, Rock N Roll) 14 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey 3) Limitation of National Violence and Care of Earth 4) Spread of Democratic Activity In fact every National election since 1968 was symbolically a cultural referendum and a war against traditional values. The movements of the sixties had a lasting impact in terms of standards, traditions, changed roles of housewives, hetro-sexual dominion, dislike for the use of canons and familial relations. Even in 1992 a spokesperson of President George Bush had blamed the burning of Los Angeles for some unspecified programme of the ‘sixties’. Gitlin’s believes that Fifties was the cemetery of the Sixties for a number of reasons as outlined below; • Because the Surprises of the Sixties were Planted in the Fifties. • After the Second World War United States had become the Economic Lord with Both The Axis and Allies Destroyed • Inflation was Negligible • Natural Resources were Plentiful • Science had Mobilized Industry • Industry had Spurred Science • Kennedy had Promised Man on the Moon by the Project Apollo in 1961 • Miseries of the Depression were Over • Flush of Prosperity had Brought Baby Boom which Translated to Economic Boom. • Americans Began Acquiring new Spaces to Live and Cities Transformed and Redeveloped. • The World was now at the Finger - tips of America Hence Todd Gitlin’s defines the The Sixties as ‘The Years of Hope’ and ‘Days of Rage’. Todd Gitlin was a part of SDS ( Students for a Democratic Society) makes an assessment of the Sixties decade and evaluates it in the several revolutions and uprisings that America had faced. In this book‘The Sixties The Years of Hope , Days of Rage’ he has covered the infighting , successes, mistakes, riots, demonstrations, drug abuse, music, politicians, conspiracies, wars and conflicts and CIA bugging phones in college dormitories of students. He has explained how the fears of the fifties had under the impact of the second world war affected the kids who had now become the youth and college students and they demanded disarmament. For by 1960 America had more college students than farmers and by 1969 they had doubled to become three times more than the farmers. Spending on Institutions of higher education rose from $742.1million in 1945 to $ 6.9 billion in 1965. Gitlin says that the revolutions were waiting to happen and these Movements of the sixties can be traced down to the • Civil Rights Movement • Anti-War Movement • Counter Cultural Movement • Womens Movements • Student Unrest From the ‘Lost Generation’ of the 20th Century to the ‘Occupy Wall Street’ of 21st Century: It’s... 15 • A War Against Traditional values • Fear of AIDS • Hetrosexual / Homosexual Movements • And the Disappointments and Disillusionments However, Gitlin says that writings by C. Wright Mills in ‘The Power Elite’and William. H. Whyte in ‘The Organisation Man’ were a warning by the two authors that had hinted that the manipulative adjustments and irresponsible corporate, political and military circles are the bane of growing consumerism. Thus a realization has begun to dawn upon the ‘Affluence’ of the ‘Affluent Class’ Gitlin’s works of the previous decades now looks at the social and economic unrest in the 21st Century in his book ‘Occupy Nation: The Roots, The Spirit and The Promise of Wall Street’. The movement’s central thrust he explains is clear that it wanted popular control over the plutocrats who had brought the economy to its knees and are that they are continuing to buy political power by plugging the tax loopholes, and that they go unpunished and above all are unaccountable. They lobby so successfully with such fever pitch for their privileges to monopolize the maximum at the cost of the people.GItlin high lights the need for political and cultural co-optation for a more equitable and just economic adjustments by the corporate world and an equitable distribution of wealth. He argues that though the movement has been out of the headlines, it’s been at work. They continue to denounce corporate loopholes by adopting techniques of civil disobedience. They have also been making national plans for coordinated activity and inspite of all the divides and fumblings among them the movement has left a traceable mark of its contribution and given voice to the 99%.

References Blake, Nelson M. AShort History of American Life,MacGraw New York 1952 Morrison, S.E. The Oxford History of American People Oxford Press 1965 Hofstadher, R. The Age of Reform Vintage 1955 Galbraith, J.K. The Affluent Society, Houghton 1958 Frank Freidel, America in the Twentieth Century Knof 4th ed 1976 Dalal, B. P. Glimpses of American History Vora and Comp. Bombay 1990 Gitlin Todd, Occupy Nation The Roots, the Spirit and the Promise of Occupy Wall Street, Harper Collins 2012 Gitlin Todd The Sixties, The Years of Hope, Days of Rage New York Bantam Books 1987 3

800 Years of Magna Carta: Moving Towards Equitable and Responsible Society

Dr. Jyoti Marwah*, Deepika Dhnawat** & Shayesha Lobo**

Abstract This paper at the outset attempts to analyze the revolutionary image of a society clamoring for Equitable and Responsible governancewhich has been ushered by advances in technology, growing awareness and social activism with the active role of ICT even before it can highlight the historical and early beginnings for the creation of a fair and just society by the Royal grant of the Magna Carta in 1215. KeyWords: OWS, Arab Spring, HDI, Social Media, RTI, Millennium Development Goals, Sustainable Development Goals

The 21st Century was a path breaking century that heralded several new and unique movements that laid the path for a transformed world. A world that emphasized the recognition of a single principle of an equitable and inclusive society, though the paradox was utter despondency caused by remorseless and cruel inflictions by Man against Man. The revolutionary achievements leading to the creation of an equitable and responsible governance was effectively done by people networking globally to mainstream the hitherto excluded masses irrespective of caste, creed, race, sex, color and birth. The creation of a one world and one family concept overcame barriers of hitherto dividing people. The effective use of social media contributed wholesomely to the building up a society free of social exclusion.Some of the most impressive and revolutionary movements which marked the creation of such a society were: 1. Occupy Wall Street Movement (OWS) 2. The Arab Spring 3. UNO peace initiatives for removal of

* Principal, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra ** TYBA, ICLES MJ College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 800 Years of Magna Carta: Moving Towards Equitable and Responsible Society 17 4. Millennium Development Goals and the successive Sustainable Development Goals 5. Human Development Index 6. India and Right to Information.

Occupy Wall Street (OWS) Occupy Wall Street March of September 17th 2011 in Zuccotti Park in New York lasted for a year. It brought a flood of humanity to voice their concern for the economic inequality worldwide, due to the corporate monopoly of 99% of the income and wealth. The focus of the movement has been projected by Arindajit Dube and Ethan Kaplan from theUniversity of Massachusetts to outline”inequality in the U.S. that has risen dramatically over the past 40 years. So it is not too surprising to witness the rise of a social movement focused on redistribution”.An article on the same subject published in Salon Magazine by Natasha Leonard had noted that “Occupy has been central to driving media stories about income inequality in America” which was most notably about “99 percent” against a “1 percent” OWS’s goals include a reduction in the influence of Multi-National Companies on the politics of the nation and for a more balanced distribution of income, Jobs for all bank reforms and laws to curtail speculative trading by Banks, waving off of student loans and giving them other reliefs.Some media label the protests “anti-capitalist”. Early on the protesters were mainly young people but as the protest grew, older protesters also pitched in. The average age of the protesters was 33, with people in their 20s balanced by people in their 40s. Various religious faiths have also been represented in the protests to include Muslims, Jews, and Christians.

The Arab Spring Arab spring was an effective civil resistance movement. It was organized and based on the use of technology particularly the social media, in the Arab world against the long period of Dictatorship in these countries ever since the 2nd World war had ended.Arab Spring refers to the democratic uprisings that arose independently and spread across the Arab world in 2011. The movement originated in Tunisia in December 2010 and quickly spread to Egypt, Libya, Syria, Yemen, Bahrain, Saudi Arabia, and Jordan. The rulers were thrown out of power while in some places the conflict still continues to inflict the worst cruelty and inhuman treatment of Man by Man, be it in Syria, Iraq, Crimea and Egypt. • Six governments were overthrown (Egypt twice and Yemen twice) • Three civil wars (Syria, Iraq, Libya) • One civil disorder leading to governmental changes • Five protests leading to governmental changes • Five major protests • Five minor protests In Egypt on February 11, 2011, Hosni Mubarak resigned his presidency and handed power to the army. Col. Gaddafi in Libya was in power since 1969, making him the longest-serving ruler in Africa and in the Middle East. However, on October 20, 2011 Gaddafi was killed by rebel fighters in his hometown of Surt.In Jordan King Abdullah II expedited the process of political reform and 18 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey immediately appointed former Prime Minister and Chief of the Royal Court, Fayez Tarawneh, as the Prime Minister. Similar to Jordan, protests in Saudi Arabia had been directed towards more freedom than ousting the monarchy. These protests, in comparison, are relatively small ranging from 100 to 4000 people. However, King Abdullah, according to sunrise 1 Reply, he has overcome the unrest in the kingdom with a series of economic reforms such as housing subsidies; unemployment benefits; and permanent contracts to temporary government workers. In Yemen 16,000 citizens lined the streets of the capital city of Sanaa, calling for an end to the 32 year-long rule of Ali Abdullah Saleh who was accused of pushing the country to a civil war by clinging to power despite massive protests against him however mounting international pressure compelled him to step down. Protests in Syria started on 26 January 2011against Bashar Hafez al-Assad who had succeeded his father Hafez al-Assad, who had led Syria for 30 years. Bashar was elected president on 10 July 2000. On 16 July 2014, Bashar Assad was sworn in for a new seven-year term, On 18 April 2011, approximately 100,000 protesters sat in the central Square of Homs asking for the resignation of President Bashar al-Assad. These protests continued through July 2011. However on 12 June 2012, the UN peacekeeping chief in Syria stated that, in his view , Syria has entered a period of civil war. A characteristic situation has arisen in the region as a proxy war between United States and Russia with several other countries embroiled in it is a cause for grave concern. Russia has subjected the region to air strikes and loads and loads of refugees have begun to cross over into Europe to escape the ravages of conflict. ISIS has also become a threat and a proto world war seems to be in operation. In spite of efforts by Russia, Iraq, Iran and Syria to

resolve the issues as they set up a joint operation information centre in Baghdad. In September 2015. Matters still remain to be grave. • Countries like Egypt, Yemen the government was over thrown multiple times, • Country like Tunisia the government was over thrown once, 800 Years of Magna Carta: Moving Towards Equitable and Responsible Society 19 • Countries like Syria Libya and Iraq Civil war took place, • Countries like Jordan, Omen, Kuwait, Morocco and Lebanon protests and governmental changes took place, • Algeria, Sudan are the countries Where Major protest took place, • Djibouti, Somalia, Saudi Arabia Mauritania, UAE and Palestine were the countries where minor protest took place. Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arab_Spring#Syria

The Role of UNESCO The role of UNESCO and the Non-Governmental Organization (NGO) like the Green Peace have been phenomenal and cannot be underrated.Green Peace is an Environmental NGO, present in more than 55 countries across Europe, The Pacific, The America, Asia and Africa. 18th century developments in politics, economies, and international law, science and individual rights had led to the development of the modern philosophy of ‘liberal democratic nationalism’. German philosopher Immanuel Kant had envisioned a peaceful world in which ‘democracy, economic interdependency, and international law would be the key features of globalization and contemporary international politics’. Hence it was the eighteenth century rational thinking and learning that motivated world leaders and showed the way for the making of the United Nation. To understand the evolution of an organization it therefore is imperative to recollect its origin and early history. It is this historical semblance and development of certain events that explain the founding of the United Nation. Events like the American and French revolution, concert of Europe, founding of the league of Nation for collective security and the elimination of war have laid the seeds of the UNO. The United Nations has now existed for more than half a century and has played an un-daunting role as an international organization for the benefit of its member states through a number of specialized agencies in several regions of the world that have been disturbed due to conflicts and in-fighting particularly in 21st century West Asia

Human Development Index Human Development Index is a unique feature in the world of 21st century which was created to emphasize that people and their capabilities should be the ultimate criteria for assessing the development of a country, not just economic growth alone.Hence, HDI is calculated as follows: LEI: Life Expectancy Index. EI: Education Index.

HDI=3 LEI ⋅⋅ EI II.

II: Income Index. Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Human_Development_Index 20 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Trends in Sri Lanka, Iran (Islamic Republic) and India’s HDI 1980-2015

Source: Sustaining Human Progress of Sri Lanka

This Image is Indicative of India’s Position in the HDI Index and in this Current Scenario of Some Asian Asian Countries, India’ position is Even Lower than that of Sri Lanka

Countries HDI HDI Life expectancy Expected years Mean years GNI per capita rank value at birth of schooling of schooling (PPP US$) Sri Lanka 073 0.750 74.3 13.6 10.8 9,250 Pakistan 146 0.537 66.6 7.7 4.7 4,652 India 135 0.586 66.4 11.7 4.4 5,150 Iran 075 0.749 74.0 15.2 7.8 13,451 Source: Sustaining Human Progress of SRI LANKA

The Millennium Development Goals and The Sustainable Development Goals At the United Nations Sustainable Development Summit of 25th September 2015 the world leaders adopted the agenda for Sustainable Development 2015-2030 with a set of seventeen goals (SDGs) to fight poverty, inequality, injustice and climate change issues. These global goals were built on the earlier Millennium Development Goals of 2000-2015 which had on its agenda eight development goals. MDGs had aimed at fighting poverty, hunger, disease, gender inequality, and access to water and sanitation. Despite some success of the MDGs still much needed to be done hence the SDGs were adopted in 2015 to further the MDGs and address the universal need for development and eradicate poverty. Poverty, hunger, disease, gender inequality and access to water and sanitation poverty, hunger, disease, gender inequality, and access to water and sanitation.

India and the Right to Information India too has moved ahead with progressive legislations such as the Right To Information (RTI), setting up the Lokpal– an anti-corruption ombudsman to control the parliamentarians this makes 800 Years of Magna Carta: Moving Towards Equitable and Responsible Society 21 the rule of Law more effective and above all more recently the civil society movements have compelled the government to be more responsive and responsible. The Right to Information Act (RTI) of 2005 is an Act of the Parliament of India that provides the citizens of India access to information, on request, from a public authority. This act had replaced the earlier Freedom of information Act, 2002. The Act also requires every public authority to computerise their records for wide dissemination and to proactively categories the information so that the citizens need minimum time and effort to retrieve information from the concerned authority.

Human Being-The Focus It sounds rhetoric but I insist that the world has understood the inevitable need to focus on the human being and to enhance the quality of life by ushering in a society which is transparent, just, righteous, progressive and free from the earlier feudal tendencies of exclusion, discrimination, and exploitation and partisan.

800 years of Magna Carta Tracing these stories of growth, development and struggles by people I am confident that this study and analysis has projected the importance of the humble beginnings of the Magna Carta when 800 years ago for the first time Royalty recognized the importance of granting people their rights and liberties. Thereafter it has been a long story of struggle, revolutions, perseverance, intellectual inputs and volatility that has engineered so much of change and progress. The ICT, Press and the Social Media have evolved remarkably for the creation of an equitable Society. However, the cause of sustainability still remains to be a mirage and a question unanswered.

References Moore. J.A, Pubantz.J.Jr The New Uniterd Nations International Oraganization in the Twenty-First Century Pearson education, 2009 Delhi, India. National Institute of Rural Development, Rural Sociiety and Sustainable Development, Hyderabad, 2010 Media grows bored of Occupy - Salon.com Archived January 8, 2014, at the Machine. Accessed on 24th April 2016 Human Development Report 2014: HDI values and rank changes in the 2014 in Sri Lanka. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Human_Development_Index https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arab_Spring#Syria 4

Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civilization

Patil Dhanashree Vasant Vasudha*

The Magna Carta is one of the most famous and most important documents ever written some 799 years ago, between the barons of Medieval England and King John1. It is a phrase written in Latin, and it means GREAT CHARTER. The Magna Carta granted liberties to Englishmen under the rule of King John, in 1215. John signed it under the threat of civil war and reissued it with alterations in 1216, 1217 and 1225. Throughout its eight centuries of existence it has been cited in many political disputes and many rights and liberties have been attributed to it. Although Magna Carta was a thirteenth-century feudal charter created to resolve the immediate crisis of civil war, it has been perceived to be significant and relevant in many subsequent periods of British history. Though people of the time may not have understood its power, early in its history it became a symbol and a battle cry against oppression. In England, the Petition of Right in 1628 and the Habeas Corpus Act in 1679 looked directly at clause 39 of the Magna Carta, which stated: “No free man shall be arrested or imprisoned or disseized or outlawed or exiled or in any way victimized, neither will we attack him or send anyone to attack him, except by the lawful judgment of his peers or by the law of the land.” 1

One of the four surviving copies of the 1215 Magna Carta containing the famous clause ‘to no one will we sell, to no one deny or delay right or justice’. * Tilak College of Science and Commerce, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civilization 23 Whig historians in the nineteenth century venerated the charter and portrayed it as the basis of English liberty and the beginning of constitutional government2. Today also the National and State Constitutions show ideas and even phrases directly traceable to the Magna Carta. This great charter still has huge significance for us today as it is directly relevant on so many areas of our lives, especially those concerning human rights and the establishment of the Human Rights Act in 1988.

Earlier “Magna Cartas”

There were three Angevin kings of England: Henry II (reigned 1154-1189), and his two sons Richard I (r. 1189-1199) and John (r. 1199-1216). These kings are known as the Angevins because Henry II was also the count of Anjou – a territory in north-western France from which the royal dynasty took their name. Under the Angevins, the power of the English king was greatly expanded at the expense of the barons – the wealthiest and most powerful of the king’s subjects who held land from the king in return for military service. Magna Carta was, in large part, a baronial reaction to this new balance of power.3 Though earlier kings of England, such as Henry I, Stephen, and Henry II, had issued charters that also made promises or concessions to their subjects, these charters were very generally phrased and the promises were granted by, not exacted from, the king. Most of the issues dealt with in Magna Carta sought to address problems that had arisen not in King John’s reign alone, but over the past half-century under the rule of the Angevin kings. In order to understand how civilization was affected by the Magna Carta, we first have to understand how the Magna Carta was affected by civilization. Certain aspects of life resulted in changes with respect to the content of Magna Carta. For example, obviously, no clause was necessary for, like modern times constrict campaign spending, since it was not an issue in thirteenth-century England. All great documents are affected by the contemporary times in which they are written.

John, King of England As the youngest son of Henry II and Eleanor of Aquitane, John, born on December 24, 1167, succeeded his brother Richard I to the throne on May 27, 1199. In August 1200, a year after his coronation, King John married Isabelle, heir to the strategically valuable county of Angoulême in France3. After the loss of Normandy in 1203, John was a resident ruler in England. Since Henry II 24 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey and Richard I had ruled largely from their territories in France, ‘evil counsellors’ had taken the blame for the abuses of Angevin kingship and oppressive rule in England. For John, it was far more difficult to shift the blame onto others. Given this context, it was by sticking with the policies of his father and brother, rather than because of a fundamental departure from them, that John caused baronial rebel in 1215. Yet, the unprecedented funds required by the end of Richard I’s reign to meet the costs for the defense of Normandy and other Angevin territories in France made John’s task all the more difficult. John was not the typical king of the time. Unlike most kings, he was suspicious, personally unstable, mercurial and unforgiving. However, his greatest shortcoming was that he was not a warrior, during a time when kings were expected to be warriors. John had many problems with the Church and his barons, but it was his trouble with the barons that led to the writing of Magna Carta. In 1214, John made an expedition to Poitou4. However, his defeat, along with his quarrels with the church, the defeat of his ally, Holy Roman Emperor Otto IV, in the Battle of Bouvines, and the bankruptcy caused by his brother, gave the baron’s an excuse to rebel. He died in October 1216 with the civil war still at an inconclusive stage.

Revolt of the Barons On June 15th, 1215, the rebellious barons met John at Runnymede on the Thames7.The king was presented with a document known as the Articles of the Barons. King John was forced to put his seal to “The Articles of the Barons” by a group of powerful barons who could no longer stand John’s failed leadership and despotic rule. The king’s Great Seal was attached to it on 15th June 1215. In return, the barons renewed their oaths of fealty to King John on 19thJuly 1215. A formal document to record the agreement was created by the royal chancery on 15thJuly: this was the original Magna Carta. “The law of the land” is one of the great watchwords of Magna Carta, standing in opposition to the king’s mere will. This document hallowed in history more than 750 years and frequently cited as a forerunner of the Declaration of Independence and the Declaration of the Rights of Man and of the Citizen, it is a singularly undramatic document. It is filled with problems of feudal law and custom that are largely untranslatable into modern idiom. Still, it was remarkable in the fact that it protected the rights of all freemen and not just the authorial barons. Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civiliza- 25 tion Immediate Effects of the Magna Carta John signed the Magna Carta hesitantly since he did not believe any of its principles. In immediate terms Magna Carta was a failure, for it was no more than a stage in ineffective negotiations to prevent civil war within months he returned to war against the barons. John was released by the Pope of his obligations under it. But the Magna Carta was re-issued ten years later by John’s successor, Henry III with papal approval, and so it became, in its 1225 version, a part of the permanent law of the land. But the document had been changed with parts that the monarchy did not like being left out. Many kings after Henry, however, also re-issued it. In later centuries the Magna Carta was almost forgotten. When it was rediscovered around the time of Queen Elizabeth I it was looked upon with pride by the English as evidence of a supposed history of legal principles and people’s rights in their country. Even though this was not really true - the Magna Carta was a solution to a specific situation rather than a grand declaration of rights for all people - it came to be used as a kind of bill of rights. People used it to back up a broad range of arguments about the powers of parliament, the Church and the monarchy and people’s rights. It influenced the content of other documents that protect people’s rights such as constitutions (including Australia’s constitution) and America’s Bill of Rights.

Dividing the Magna Carta 26 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Though it was written continuously, the Magna Carta has been subdivided into 63 clauses and 9 groups. The first group concerned the church, asserting that it was to be “free.” The second group provided statements of feudal law of particular concern to those holding lands directly from the king. The third assured similar rights to subtenants. The fourth group referred to towns, trade and merchants. The fifth group concerned reform of the law and justice. The sixth group controlled the behavior of royal officials. The seventh group concerned the royal forests, and another dealt with immediate issues, requiring, for example, the dismissal of John’s foreign mercenaries. The final groups dealt with providing a form of security for the king’s adherence to the charter, by which a council of 25 barons should have the ultimate right to levy war upon him should he seriously infringe it.

The Reissuing of the Charter Councilors for the young Henry III reissued the charter in 1216 and 1217, omitting all matters relating only to the political situation of 1215. In 1217, clauses relating to royal forests were transferred to a separate forest chapter. In 1225, having come of age, Henry III reissued the charter8, though it was not very different from the issue of 1217 There are four “originals” of the charter of 1215, one in Lincoln Cathedral, one in Salisbury Cathedral and two in the British Museum. Durham Cathedral Posses the charters of 1216, 1217 and 1225.

A Combination of Pictures Taken in London on February 2, 2015, Shows the Four Surviving Original Magna Carta Copies. AFP Photo Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civilization 27 Remnants of the Magna Carta in the United States Constitution The Constitution is in many ways like the Magna Carta. One of the key themes of the Constitution that the Magna Carta indirectly implied was Habeas Corpus. Habeas Corpus (Latin, “you are to bring the body”) is a writ issued by a court, requiring a person in custody to be brought before it. Although the writ is issued for various purposes, it is usually issued in criminal cases in order to determine whether a prisoner is lawfully being held by the police, and if so, what the Habeas Corpus charges are. “Guardian of Personal Liberty” Habeas Corpus is also used in civil cases, such as those which require the presence of a minor in court to determine rightful custody. In England, Parliament has the power to suspend the writ of Habeas corpus, an act that occurred in 1794 in reaction to the Reign of Terror in France. The US Constitution failed to specify who may suspend Habeas corpus, a cause of much controversy during the Civil War when President Abraham Lincoln suspended it. Chief Justice Roger B. Taney challenged Lincoln by ruling in Ex parte Merryman (1861) that Congress alone could suspend Habeas corpus and try disloyal persons in military courts. In Ex parte Milligan (1866), the Supreme Court held that neither Congress nor the president could suspend Habeas corpus in areas not in rebellion or where federal courts were not open. This clause stems from the Magna Carta’s author’s fear of military rule.

Effects on Society in England The Magna Carta had many effects on the society in England. It changed the ultimate rule of the king. People no longer looked at the king as the uncontested ruler of England who could do whatever he pleased. Now he could be challenged, and even defeated. Even the feudal system was affected by the Magna Carta. The Magna Carta gave rights to all under the feudal system, even the lowliest serfs. In my opinion, the Magna Carta led to the downfall of the feudal system all across Europe and not just in its native land of England. It gave rights to women also, as stated in Clauses 7 & 8:7 Clause 7: “A widow shall have her marriage portion and inheritance forthwith and without difficulty after the death of her husband; nor shall she pay anything to have her dower or her marriage portion or the inheritance which she and her husband held on the day of her husband’s death; and she may remain in her husband’s house for forty days after his death, within which time her dower shall be assigned to her.” 28 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Clause 8: “No widow shall be forced to marry so long as she wishes to live without a husband, provided that she gives security not to marry without our consent if she holds of us, or without the consent of her lord of whom she holds, if she holds of another.”

The Long-Term Effects The actual text of the Magna Carta does not much have much influence on the world today due to its medieval origin, however the concept of a document that restricted what a ruler could and could not do, actually, in my opinion, gave birth to the modern form of democracy. A stable government needs something set down, “written in stone,” that can control it. The Magna Carta is one of the greatest documents in history, paralleled only by such documents as the Constitution, the Ten Commandments and the Declaration of Independence. It created the first society of democracy since the fall of Athens. The democracy that I am referring to is not the form that we view it with elections and Presidents and governors. I am referring to the true meaning of the word democracy- “people power.” The Magna Carta led to the creation of the British Parliament. Due to Britain’s imperialism the idea of a representative body spread all over the world. The United States Congress, as well as the representative bodies of its states, is a direct descendant of the British Parliament with its House of Lords (the Senate) and the House of Commons (the House of Representatives). Americans embedded principles of Magna Carta into the laws of their states and later into the Constitution and the Bill of Rights. Magna Carta is the origin of many enduring constitutional principles: the rule of law, the right to a jury trial, the right to a speedy trial, freedom from unlawful imprisonment, protection from unlawful seizure of property, the theory of representative government, the principle of ‘no taxation without representation,’ and most importantly, the concept of fundamental law – a law that not even the sovereign can alter.8 Although scholars, such as Painter and Pollard, have argued that Magna Carta is merely a feudal document, the charter is perceived to be significant because of what it came to represent9.The misinterpretations of the clauses led the document to become a symbol of important liberties because people were led to believe that it guaranteed them. Therefore, in the twenty-first century, even if the significance of the document is questioned, the idea of Magna Carta is presented as significant and relevant. Modern historians argue that Magna Carta is historically significant because the inaccurate view of it acted as an inspiration and a weapon for campaigners in several periods of history10.Moreover, activists still believe that referencing Magna Carta is beneficial because they are not referring to the thirteenth-century document but to the tradition of rights and liberties that have stemmed from it and have been attributed to it. Magna Carta is not believed to be significant because of what it originally meant but because of what it has come to mean and the rights of which it is perceived to be a symbol. This is demonstrated by the claims made by the Influence of Magna Carta on Modern Civilization 29 Magna Carta 800th Anniversary 2015 Committee. Its deputy chairman, Alice Richmond, argued that the charter retains significance not by alleging that it originally guaranteed important rights but by claiming that it ‘came to represent’ valued liberties. Therefore, Magna Carta is still perceived to embody significant rights that are valued and fought for by twenty-first-century society. Many people have perceived Magna Carta to be significant because they have believed that it is of value to them. In the almost eight hundred years since the charter was first drawn up, there have been countless references to the document by people who have believed it would be advantageous to them and their cause. This is extremely relevant for all today as it was one of the first times, laws were promised to be fair to everybody and not just the rich and powerful. Magna Carta has greatly affected history, government and society throughout the world.

Endnotes 1. Jon Lewis, What relevance is the Magna Carta today?, p.1-2,(Oakwood Park Grammar School)May 2014 2. J. Green, A short history of the English people (London, 1878), p. 123-4; Sir James Mackintosh, History of England I (London, 1830) p. 217-8 3. The National Archives Education Service, Magna Carta (preparation material for virtual classroom) [KS3], p.13-14 4. M. T. Clanchy, England and its Rulers: 1066 – 1307, John Wiley & Sons, (Fourth edition, 04-Mar-2014, pp.368), Part III The Poietevins(1199-1272), ch. 11.King John and the minority of the Henry III (1199-1272)/S. D. Church, King John: New Interpretations, Boydell & Brewer Ltd, 2003 – p.183- 361 pages. 5. Relevance of Magna Carta, Remarks of the Right Honourable Beverley McLachlin, P.C. Chief Justice of Canada At the Honourable Society of Gray’s Inn London, UK June 18, 2015, p. 3 6. C. Breay, Magna Carta: manuscripts and myths (London, 2002), pp. 23-8, 40-4; R. Turner, Magna Carta: through the ages (Harlow, 2003), pp. 45-51 60-61, 67-71, 105/ Magna Carta, articles, Timeline of Magna Carta and its legacy, British Library 7. Magna Carta, articles, English Translation of Magna Carta, British Library/ British Library, Treasures in full: Magna Carta - English translation,p.2-pp.8(2007)/Jon Roland and Danny Stone, The Magna Carta (The Great Charter) 8. Magna Carta: The Most Enduring Symbol of the Rule of Law_MagnaCarta_2015Vol1 Utah Bar Journal, p.57 9. Pollard, The history of England, p. 19/ Painter, The reign of King John, p. 347. 10. Cam, Magna Carta, p. 26 ; Ashley, Magna Carta, p. 13 /E. Griswold, ‘Introduction’, in The Great Charter (New York, 1965), p. ix.

Bibliography William Sharp McKechnie, Magna Carta: A Commentary on the Great Charter of King John, with an Historical Introduction, Second Edition Revised and in Part Re-Written,Glasgow,James Maclehose and Sons 1914 Dan Jones, Magna Carta: The Making and Legacy of the Great Charter, pp.144[2014] Perceptions of Magna Carta: Why has it been seen as significant? Dissertation Code: DISS02860 Caroline Eele University of Durham Scutt and Jocelynne, Women and the Magna Carta the treaty of control or freedom? ISBN 978-1-137-5623-0, Palgrave Macmillan UK, pp.154 30 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Secondary articles Magna Carta an introduction - The British Library The Rule of History The Rule of History, Magna Carta, the Bill of Rights, and the hold of time,Jill Lepore- The New Yorker Magna Carta, Simon Newman, History - Middle Ages, The Finer Times 8 ways Magna Carta still affects life in 2015, Sealed on this day in 1215, Magna Carta still has an impact on modern life. Here’s how, Alex McClintock for RN, ABC News

Pictography P. Vanderbanck after E. Lutterell. Portrait of King John, from the Complete History of England, 1697 Engraving, 1680–1687, (Prints and Photographs Division) Library of Congress. en.wikipedia.org www.historyextra.com magnacarta800th.com

Reference https://www.oxfordreference.com/view/10.../oi/authority.20110803100125783 https://www.salisburycathedral.org.uk › Magna Cart https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Magna_Carta https://www.bl.uk/treasures/magnacarta/translation.html https://www.bl.uk/magna-carta/articles https://www.newyorker.com/magazine/2015/04/20/the-rule-of-history https://www.constitution.org/eng/magnacar.pdf http://www.thefinertimes.com/Middle-Ages/magna-carta.html http://mobile.abc.net.au/news/2015-06-15/magna-carta-800-years/6538364 Section Two Encompassing Field of Information and Communication Technology

Future Generation Wireless Networks

Dr.Udaykumar L. Naik*

Abstract

Wireless communication is experiencing a remarkable market growth. Advances in wireless technology and the end users acquiescence to use these technologies have revolutionized the concept of information processing for personal, professional and business applications. Present day wireless network subscribers are looking forward to more personalized services and precise location based applications. The other vital anticipation from the client is that the network must be ubiquitous and it must be accessible all the time. International research activities are being carried out to enhance the capabilities of the present day wireless networks. This paper illustrates visionary scenarios of new generation network applications. Paper also presents a brief overview of technological developments to obtain cost effective secure quality services from the future generation wireless networks. Keywords: Wireless networks, pPrsonalized services, Precise location based applications, Radio resource management

Introduction Wireless communication improves the quality of life, increases the productivity and support cost reductions in many processes [1]. The benefits of wireless communication are the major reasons for the strong growth of wireless systems market. Wireless systems have the potential to provide communication and access to information at remote locations in a financially viable manner. Present day networks are providing different ICT applications. Novel technologies are developing for new protocols (set of rules that end points in a telecommunication use when they communicate) to specify interactions between communication entities. A positive trend is seen for the development of new generation networks with seamless interconnections, enhanced multimedia services, improved resource allocation, better coverage. Such networks will have enlarged network capacity and better privacy and security.

* Professor, Electronics and Communication Engineering, KLE Society’s Dr. M. S. Seshgiri College of Engineering and Technology, Belagavi, Karnataka 34 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey This paper provides an appraisal of rapidly developing wireless networks. The paper is organized as follows: In Section 2, the growth of wireless networks, user’s applications and economic impact of such networks is presented. Section 3, describes future credible seamlessly interacting wireless networks and their envisioned realistic applications. Section 4, provides concluding remarks.

Trends in Wireless Networks and user Perspectives Wireless systems have the potential to provide communication and access to information in an economic manner. The global market share for wireless communications is changing between different regions of the world, where Asia is the dominating market [1]. Mobile and wireless communication systems have become an essential feature and determine the social, economic status of a nation. The China’s achievements are impressive in contrast with India. At the end of 2014, India had 227 million Internet users, compared to 665 million in China. Fewer than two out of every five Indian businesses had an online presence compared to almost two–thirds of firms in China. The cost of a 1Mbit/s residential broad band service in India is 6-10 times higher than in China [2]. It is expected that in a decade from now the wireless networks will exist everywhere and will make the whole paradigm to be centric upon applications and services [3].According to CISCO’s predictions new global IP (Internet packet) forecast, Wi-Fi devices will consume 37.2 Exabyte’s of worldwide per month in 2015, which is slightly higher than 37.0. Exa bytes* wire traffic. This is shown graphically in Fig. 1 (*1 Exa byte = 1 EB = 1018 bytes).

Figure1. Global IP Traffic Forecast (Source: [3] Cisco Report) With the merger of communication and computers, global networks have become a powerful tool for economic and social and political change by offering more choices to networks people and information to everyone throughout the world [5]. International research bodies [1] provide recommendation for standardization for communication resources and system components. Major international bodies are: Future Generation Wireless Networks 35

• ITU-R ( Radio Sector) • ITU-T (Telecommunication Sector) is mainly working in the area of networking aspect. ITU- T SSG (Special Study Group) is focused on system beyond 3G. • The IEEE, a internationally operating association with its headquarter in the US, has been active in developing standards for wireless local area network systems and is enhancing its development of future systems with extended capabilities. Wireless communication domain has new trends as a result of following developments: • Advancement of the Internet and Mobile communication • Advance of E-commerce • IoT (Internet of Things) • Self configuring MANET (Mobile Adhoc Network) and VANET (Vehicular Adhoc networks) • Convergence of networks • Price for bandwidth is decreasing • Deregulation and globalization Further, Electromagnetic spectrum is a modern natural resource supports the widening array of services [6]. Wireless networks are pivotal in indoor positioning applications [7-8].These applications include: • Location based billing • Emergency response • Resource allocation and tracking • Home automation • Patient monitoring • Context aware applications • Pervasive computing

Future Credible Wireless Networks To explain the requirements of next generation wireless networks, two fantasy applications based scenarios of next decade are presented. Situation 1: Mr. Ashok, a young CEO, is suffering from sleep disorders since one decade. His health problems are aggravated from last few days as a result of technical hitches in his 1 –terabit (1012 bit) office wireless networks. Ashok wears his bio wearable suit. A new generation protocol of the bio-suit communicates with family physicians personal digital assistant. Health Management Information Services and Protocols (HMIP) of doctors mobile, adjusts bio sensor inputs of the Mr. Ashok’s bio wearable. Ashok falls into profound sleep. Situation 2: Mr. Shrey works for Asian Investment Corporation, at Singapore has become the winner of worldwide 3-D holographic games event organized by the Consortium of American Banks. At Belgaum, hometown of Mr. Shrey, Drowns have taken the aerial photographs of 36 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey residential localities. Administration for Cartography and Structural Levy has uploaded the aerial photos and matching tax into the public domain resident expediency database. Personal Management Information and Services (PMIP) of Shrey’s mobile download aerial photo and the property tax of his home. Application program interface of his mobile allows push and pull payments from any bank account. The Immediate Payment Service (IMPS) of Shrey’s mobile pays the tax to the administration in terms of Global Dollar (G$). Mr. Shrey’s father is driving on Rajeev Gandhi Sea Link, Bandra, Mumbai. The PMIP of Shrey’s fathers mobile now provides information of all the events at Shrey’s end in sequence in an audio annotations form. The above scenarios represent subsequent important facets of dynamic future generation networks for real time applications: i) The next generation networks should support multi rate, multi power applications. ii) Networks have to provide personalized services at tera bit speeds. iii) The roaming subscribers anticipation from the networks is service must be ubiquitously available. iv) Networks have to offer concentrated high volume of data access and segmented but huge volume of data transactions from personal area network to metropolitan area network to wide area network. v) Future generation networks must be compatible to the holographic gaming devices, shopping carts, electronic wallets, traffic signals [9]. vi) Integrated security and privacy is an important issue of future generation networks. vii) Protocols required for the communication establishment between networks must be simple and have to be supported by the open source community for wide spread use. viii) All these proposed applications will have to be processed by much smaller, reliable, and more power efficient systems than what are being used today. ix) Networks must support expandable customer base at affordable flat rates. In next few decades the communication engineers, researchers may have to find comprehensive solutions to the above and similar situations.

Conclusion Future growth of mobile and wireless communication network is anticipated. Such networks will offer better personalized services and provide precise location based applications. There will be a convergence of different wireless and broadcasting networks across personal area to global area networks. The important requirements of the next generation wireless networks are: i) the protocols and new devices must immaculately integrate with various network infrastructures ii) network must offer cost effective services, high speed data rate with optimum spectrum usage. The success of such networks to reach the services to the end user is based on management of various telecommunication resources. Consequently this will necessitate proper cooperation among standardization organizations, research community, policy authorities and electronics industry. Future Generation Wireless Networks 37 References Basu, K., India’s Digital Transformation, PP 9, The Hindu February 12, 2016 Pahlvan, K., & Levesque, A. H., Wireless data communications, Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol.82, No.9, pp 1398-1430, 1994 Pitroda, S., Roots in Technology, Exploding Freedom, Allied Publishers, New Delhi, pp; 83, 1993 Prasad, R., Pruthi, P., & Ramareddy, K., The top 10 list for terabit speed wireless personal services, Springer Wireless Personal Communications Journal, Vol. 49, pp 299-309, 2009 Cisco Wi-Fi report, 2011 http://www.giga.com/2011/06/0/ cisco-wifi-vni-report Kong, Y., Kwon, Y. G., & Gwitae, P., Robust localization over obstructed interferences for in building wireless applications, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Vol. 55, No. 1, pp 105-11, 2009 Mohr, W., Strategic steps to be taken for future mobile and wireless communications, Springer Wireless Personal Communications Journal,Vol.38, pp 143 – 160, 2006 Murakami, T., Establishing the ubiquitous network environment in Japan-From e-Japan to u-Japan-Tokyo Nomura Research Institute, July 2003 Sayed, A. H., Tarighat, A., & Khajehnouri, N., Network based wireless location: Challenges faced in developing techniques for accurate wireless location information IEEE signal processing magazine, pp 24-40, 2005 6

From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws

Jyoti G. Hiremath

Abstract

In the electronic age, the invention of Computers, Internet and Cyberspace - together known as “Information Technology” has significantly impacted the communication in the society. The Internet based communication cross the territorial borders, creating a new realm of human activity and undermining the feasibility and legitimacy of applying laws based on geographical boundaries. The emergence of technology not only widens scientific horizon but also poses constant challenges for the legal system and legal world as a whole. The said challenges are not confined to any single traditional legal category but in almost all established categories of law. The existing legal system and framework has shown inadequacy of law while dealing with Information Technology itself as well as while dealing with the changes induced by the Information Technology in the way of our living. The courts throughout the world have been dealing with the problems of exercise of jurisdiction. While information technology through the cyberspace play havoc with geographic boundaries, a new boundary made up of the screens and passwords that separate the virtual world from ‘real world’ emerges. This new boundary defines a distinct cyberspace and created a new law of its own as the “Territory” based law-making and law enforcing authorities find this new environment deeply threatening. Separated from the doctrine tied to territorial jurisdictions, new rules emerged regulating cyberspace activities, in variety of online spaces to govern wide range of new phenomena that have no clear parallel in the non-virtual world. These new cyber laws are defining legal personhood, rights in virtual property and its protection, online disputes resolving mechanism, regulative measures over the cybercrimes and crystallizing a collective conversation about core values. This article is an attempt to throw light on the development of territorial laws to cyber laws, as knowledge of these cyber laws has become the need of the hour. Keywords: Cyberspace, Internet, Jurisdiction, Cyber laws, Cyber crimes

Introduction In the electronic age, the invention of Computers, Internet and Cyberspace together known as “Information Technology” has significantly impacted the communication in the society. With the

* Assistant Professor, B. V. Bellad Law College, Belagavi, Karnataka From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws 39 advent of the Internet, there is a paradigm shift in the way one views the world. Technological advancements have nevertheless caused problems to the existing conceptions of sovereignty and jurisdiction. In the pre-internet age and prior to the establishment of ‘Political States’ the king governed the people. He used to enjoy legislative, executive and judicial powers. Gradually when it became difficult for him to manage, all the three powers were delegated to different institutions- the Legislature, the Executive and the Judiciary, with defined powers and assigned places of domain to operate. These prescribed areas of operation were known as jurisdiction. As such, no institution could act ultra vires or encroach into the jurisdiction of another institution. This became a sustainable option even for democracies thereafter. International law limits a country’s authority to exercise jurisdiction in cases that involve interest or activities of non-residents. Firstly; there must exist “jurisdiction to prescribe” which means that the substantive laws of the forum country are applicable to the particular persons and circumstances. If the jurisdiction to prescribe exists, then there should also be “jurisdiction to adjudicate” and “jurisdiction to enforce”. The “jurisdiction to adjudicate” empowers the tribunals of a given country to resolve a dispute with respect to a person or thing. In addition to these laid down practices, States also exercise jurisdiction to adjudicate on the basis of various principles, including the defendant’s nationality, domicile or residence in the country. Identification of jurisdiction on the basis of such principles varies from country to country. The “jurisdiction to enforce” allows a country to employ judicial or non-judicial measures to compel compliance or punish non-compliance with its laws or regulations. In the physical world, society evolves systems of regulation and enforcement under the aegis of the State and recognizes physical jurisdictional boundaries. Every States makes rules of private international law i.e. jurisdiction, choice of law, recognition and enforcement to provide for any claims arising within the physical boundaries of its territory. Superficially the international legal order is based on separate physical jurisdiction, each with the sovereign attributes, the ability to make the law, the ability to declare or decide the application of the law and the power of enforcement. The lines of demarcation between the nations are based either on geographical convenience or administrative convenience. In physical world, the territorial borders assume primary importance in determining what set of legal rules shall be made applicable. From the medieval period to date, jurisdiction has been the means of imposing power. In the electronic age the significance of jurisdiction has increased. It has gained the importance as one of the powerful instruments to expand the reach of the sovereign power of a country. The pervasive nature of the internet disregards these physical boundaries, which will no longer function as signposts of State territory. Therefore; the borderless virtual world is confronted with anessential disjunction between economic and technological realities that are global and legal realities that are national. The Internet based communication across the territorial borders, creating a new realm of human activity and undermining the viability and legitimacy of applying laws based on geographical boundaries. The emergence of technology not only widens scientific horizon but also poses constant challenges for the legal system and legal world as a whole. The said challenges are not confined, to any single traditional legal category but in almost all established categories of law. The existing legal system and framework has shown inadequacy of law while dealing with Information Technology itself as well as while dealing with the changes induced by the Information Technology in the way of our living. The courts throughout the world have been dealing with these problems. While information technology through the cyberspace play havoc with geographic boundaries, a new boundary made up of the screens and passwords that separate the virtual world from ‘real world’ emerges. This new boundary defines a distinct cyberspace and created a new law of its 40 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey own as the “Territory” based law-making and law enforcing authorities find this new environment deeply threatening. Separated from the doctrine tied to territorial jurisdictions, new rules emerged regulating cyberspace activities, in variety of online spaces to govern wide range of new phenomena that have no clear parallel in the non-virtual world. These new cyber laws are defining legal personhood, rights in virtual property and its protection, online disputes resolving mechanism, regulative measures over the cyber crimes and crystallizing a collective conversation about core values. It became obligatory to get aware about the development of territorial laws to cyber laws, as knowledge of these cyber laws has become the need of the hour.

Invent of the “Information Technology” The internet which is a “Super Highway” of information is a vast global network of computers storing information on every conceivable subject of interest to mankind. It is originated initially through military and security concerns during the Cold War; a need was felt for military command and control structures that could withstand a nuclear attack. The idea of network of computers came from the analogy with the transport system, which had been designed so that there were multiple paths to every point. The organization of large numbers of inter-connected computers permitted messages to be routed in multiple ways. The National Physical Laboratory in Britain set up the first network along these principles in 1968. The first node was established at the University of California named as ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency NET) and its primary aim was to enable transmission of data files and long distance computing including accessing data and research files at distant sites. Thus there started use of computer with internet, popularly termed as “Information Technology”. The “computer” means any electronic magnetic, optical or otherhigh-speed data processing device or system which performslogical, arithmetic, and memory functions by manipulations ofelectronic, magnetic or optical impulses, and includes all input,output, processing, storage, computer software, orcommunication facilities which are connected or related to thecomputer in a computer system or computer network. Thus, computer is a material medium. “Internet” is not a physical or tangible entity, but rather a massive network, which interconnects innumerable smaller groups of linked computer networks. It is a network of networks, and wherein some networks are “closed” networks, not linked to other computers or networks. This global web linked networks and computers are referred to as Internet. The nature of the internet is such that it is very difficult, if not impossible, to determine its size at a given moment. No single entity- academic, corporate, governmental, or non-profit-administers the internet. It exists and functions as a result of the fact that hundreds of thousands of separate operators of computers and computer networks independently decide to use common data transfer protocol to exchange communications and information with other computers (which in turn exchange communication and information with still other computers). There is no centralized storage location. Control point, or communications channel for the internet, and it would not be technically feasible for a single entity to control all of the information conveyed on the internet. Thus, internet is a virtual medium. “Cyberspace” is a virtual location where all the activities of netizens (people who browse internet)take place. Anyone with access to the internet may take advantage of a wide variety of communication and information retrieval methods in the cyberspace. These methods are constantly evolving and difficult to categorize precisely. But, as presently constituted, and most relevant are electronic mail (“e-mail”), automatic mailing list services (“mail exploders”), “newsgroups”, “chat rooms”, and the “World Wide Web”. All of these methods can be used to transmit text; sound, pictures, and moving video images. Taken together, these tools constitute a unique medium- known From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws 41 to its users as ‘cyberspace’ – located in no particular geographical location but available to anyone, anywhere in the world, with access to the internet. Thus; we can say that a Computer is a material medium; Internet is a virtual medium; and the Cyberspace is virtual location for electronic activities. “Cyberlaws” therefore, are those laws, which have been adapted or re-interpreted to govern or apply to transactions or interactions in Cyber space. Cyber laws also cover those special enactments, which are specially designed to govern or apply to Cyber space for example, Information Technology Legislations enacted in different countries including Information Technology Act, 2000, enacted by the Government of India.

Scope of the Information Technology The Internet / World Wide Web is everywhere. Web pages serve youngsters following their music bands, students gathering material for their essays, families following their member’s activities through social media sites, journalists researching their articles, academics putting up course notes for students, the elderly looking up details of the drugs prescribed them . . . the list is endless. The internet opens up many different possible ways: 1. To communicate with others like mail, blogs, Social networking sites e.g. Facebook, Twitter, Chartrooms, Forums, VoIP - internet telephone etc. 2. Of shopping whatever one wants to buy and sale i.e. e-commerce. 3. About leisure and entertainment:One can choose to spend time online and amuse by playing online games, listening to music (mp3 download or live streaming), reading online books and e-books, watching online videos e.g. YouTube, looking for holidays or concert tickets, reading about your hobbies, keeping up-to-date with the news and sporting events, watching ‘catch up’ television from the main channels etc. 4. The internet has many services that help you explore the world such as Satellite and mapping applications e.g. Google Earth, Travel sites providing details of other places, Live web cams showing other parts of the world, Almanacs and encyclopedias etc. 5. Beyond social media, emails, and web pages, the Internet has a host of other uses, including: creation of Intellectual properties like patents, copyrights, trademarks-domain names, E- governance, Distance learning, Internet TV, Video conferencing, online cinematograph films etc. 6. As the cyberspace is used for good purpose, is also used for criminal purposes such as internet hacking, phishing, pornography, cyber stalking, terrorist activities etc. which together can be termed as Cyber crimes. Hence it is observed that information technology/ cyberspace’s scope is manifold and hence there arises an issue of regulating activities in cyberspace.

Need for Regulation on the use of Cyberspace Activities Cyberspace is an intangible dimension that is impossible togovern and regulate using conventional law. It is a general principle in the physical world that the laws of a particular jurisdiction normally only have an effect within the boundaries of that jurisdiction. The application of this principle to physical world activities is comparatively straight forward; the geographical locationof anetizens (internet user) or an objectat the relevant time is objectively determinable and on that basis,the 42 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey application of local law and the appropriate jurisdiction can be decided. The geography of the internet is purely virtual. In operation; it pays no heed to geographical or political boundaries. Furthermore, the physical world location of those parts of the internet infrastructure via which a communication is carried may be purely fortuitous. The result in many cases is that the parties to an internet transaction are faced with overlapping and often contradictory claims that national law applies to some part of their activities. The issue of overlap raises the following questions: 1. Where an internet activity has a cross border element, on what principles can we decide which country’s law applies and which court has jurisdiction? 2. On what basis can a national government claim to apply its laws and regulations to internet activities which originate in a different jurisdiction? 3. How far if at all, is it possible to resolve the conflict between differing national laws where the only effective means of compliance is to limit information flows across national boundaries? The problems with cyberspace is that its constituent elements, the human and corporate users and the computing and communications equipment through which the transaction is effected, all have a real world existence and are located in one or more physical world legal jurisdictions. These corporeal elements of cyberspace are sufficient to give national jurisdiction a justification for claiming jurisdiction over and the applicability of their laws to an internet transaction. Following are the reasons for the regulation on the use of cyberspace: 1. Cyberspace has complete disrespect for jurisdictionalboundaries. A person in India could break into a bank’selectronic vault hosted on a computer in USA and transfermillions of currencies to another bank in Switzerland, all withinminutes. All he would need is a laptop computer and a cell phone. 2. Cyberspace handles huge traffic volumes every second.Billions of emails are crisscrossing the globe even as we readthis, millions of websites are being accessed every minute andbillions of dollars are electronically transferred around the worldby banks every day. 3. Cyberspace is absolutely open to participation by all. A tenyear-old in Bhutan can have a live chat session with an eightyear-old in Bali without any regard for the distance or the anonymity between them. 4. Cyberspace offers enormous potential for anonymity to itsmembers. Readily available encryption software andsteganographic tools that seamlessly hide information withinimage and sound files ensure the confidentiality of informationexchanged between netizens. 5. Cyberspace offers never-seen-before economic efficiency.Billions of dollars worth of software can be traded over theInternet without the need for any government licenses, shippingand handling charges and without paying any customs duty. 6. Electronic information has become the main object of cybercrime. It is characterized by extreme mobility, which exceeds byfar the mobility of persons, goods or other services. Internationalcomputer networks can transfer huge amounts of data around theglobe in a matter of seconds. 7. A software source code worth crores of rupees or a movie can bepirated across the globe within hours of their release. From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws 43 8. The theft of corporeal information (e.g. books, papers, CD ROMs,floppy disks) is easily covered by traditional penal provisions.However, the problem begins when electronic records are copiedquickly, inconspicuously and often via telecommunicationfacilities. Here the “original” information, so to say, remains in the”possession” of the “owner” and yet information gets stolen. 9. Data protection and privacy is an emerging concern and cyberlaws aim to achieve a fair balancebetween the privacy rights of the individual and the interests ofdata controllers such as banks, hospitals, email service providersetc. These laws seek to address the challenges to privacy causedby collecting, storing and transmitting data using new information technologies.

Formulation of Cyber Laws ‘Cyber Law’ is a term that regulates the legal issues related to the use of communicative, transactional and distributive aspects of networked information devices and technologies. Cyber Law is a generic term which refers to all the legal and regulatory aspects of Internet and the World Wide Web. Anything concerned with or related to or emanating from any legal aspects or issues concerning any activity of citizens and others, in cyberspace comes within the ambit of Cyber Law. When the concept of the Internet was founded and later developed, the developers knowing very less about the Internet that it would have the power of being transformed into a monster that could be used for several illegal and immoral activities and it would eventually need to be regulated. There are several disturbing things that happen in cyberspace ranging from identity theft and terrorism to money laundering. Due to the anonymous nature of the Internet, anybody can indulge in a variety of criminal activities with impunity. These grey areas are being exploited by individuals, companies and their like to perpetrate criminal activities in cyberspace, thus creating the need for cyber laws. As the nature of Internet is changing and this new medium is being seen as the ultimate medium ever evolved in human history, every activity of ours in cyberspace can and will have a Cyber legal perspective. When we register our e-mail, or when we conduct an online train reservation, do some electronic commerce transactions, start a bank account, withdraw money from ATM counter or pay electricity bills, at every point of time, every day there are various Cyber Law issues involved. We may not be bothered by these issues and we may think that these laws are very distant from us and they do not have an impact on Cyber activities. But sooner or later, some process may fail to give response, which may end in loss, and we will be forced to take note of Cyber Law for our own benefit. The important steps in this respect can be traced back to 1996, by the publication of the United Nations Commission on International Trade Laws (UNCITRAL) Model Law and 1998, the starting of the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) global campaign to promote e-commerce especially in developing countries. The model laws wh³ñh hàve båån adopted by UNCITRAL relating to electronic commerce and electronic signatures are: a. Model law on Electronic Commerce 1996 b. Model law onElectronic Signature 1998- 2001 Thå¾å model laws have played a fundamental role in preliminary enactment of electronic laws in various countries. The Information Communication Technology revolution in India had its beginning in 1975, when the Government of India strategically decided to take effective steps for the development of information systems and the utilization of information resources. The National 44 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Informatics Centre under the Electronic Commission/Department of Electronics was the outcome of this view and was assisted by United Nations Development Program (UNDP). The formation of National Association of Software Services Companies in the early 1990s reflects on India’s strength in this sector. Use of Internet in India started in 1995 and after almost 5 years, India legislated its first cyber law i.e. the Information Technology Act, 2000initiated a new cyber law regime in the country. India became the 12thnation in the world to enact cyber laws.

Jurisdictional Issues in the Cyberspace TheJurisdiction is the authority of a Court to hear a case and resolve a dispute. As a general term, jurisdiction refers to a Government’s general power to exercise authority over all person or thing within its country, or a geographical area within which political or judicial authority may be exercised. The legal environment of cyberspace activities has no geographical boundaries. Usually an online e-merchant has no way of knowing exactly where the information on its site is being accessed. Therefore, jurisdictional issues are of primary importance in the cyber space. The developing law of jurisdiction must remedy a particular event in cyberspace which is controlled by the laws of the country where the website is located, by the laws of the country where the internet service provider is located, by the laws of the state or country where the user is located or perhaps by all of these laws. A number of jurists have opted for the notion that cyberspace should be treated as a separate jurisdiction. However, in practice this view is not supported by the Courts or addressed by the lawmakers. The main issue of jurisdiction arises in cases of regulating cyber crimes which are taking place in the virtual world. Cyber crimes may be defined as unlawful acts wherein the computer is either a tool or a target or both. Under the Information Technology offences committed within the encompass in which the investigation agency requires access to information being processed or transmitted in a computer system is a cyber crime. Cyber crimes can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature known as conventional crimes such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation and mischief etc. Abuse of computers has also given birth to some new age crimes such as e-mail spoofing and cyber defamation, sending threatening e-mails, cyber pornography, internet time thefts, tampering with source, online gambling, web jacking, hacking, spreading computer viruses, worms and trojans, spamming, cyber terrorism etc. the new forms of cyber crimes also include financial crimes such as cheating, credit card frauds, money laundering etc. So far as cyber jurisdiction in India is concerned, for civil matters; Chapter IV of Indian Information Technology Act, 2000, deals with attribution, acknowledgement, and dispatch of electronic records. It is assisting the Court in sorting out problems of jurisdiction in case of breach of contract lest a dispute goes to a court of law. So far as position in India is concerned Information Technology Act, 2000, enacted provisions to sort out many problems of cyber crimes by providing punishments to the new forms of the computer crimes which are not covered under any other penal law of India and by carrying suitable amendments in the penal laws like Indian Penal Code, 1860, the Indian Evidence Act, 1872, the Banker’s Book Evidence Act, 1892 and the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto alongwith enactment of Indian Information Technology Act, 2000. Different amendments in the above legislations resulted into proper adjudication for the Indian Courts in dealing with the jurisdictional issues in criminal cases. Globally speaking, legal scenario of Information Technology would face jurisdictional issues in future also and time is the only factor, which may bring some solution to these issues along with development of Cyberlaw as a branch of established law. From the Territorial Laws to the Cyber Laws 45 Conclusion and an Overview of Future of Cyber Laws As cyber law develops around the world, there is a growing realization among different nations that their laws must be harmonized and international best practices and principles must guide implementation. Cyber laws would further require development in the courts. Both the substantive and procedural laws will require new exposition in the light of the experience arising in technological complexities. The challenge before the courts would be to evolve cyber jurisprudence consistent with our constitutional guarantees. As the world passes through a distinctly unique time in history, technology and cyberspace are increasingly making huge advances in the forward direction. However, based on the development of jurisprudence and emerging trends as on date, one can try to see some broad Cyber law trends that are likely to emerge in coming years. The major Cyber law trend that is likely to bring forward is increased attacks on networks and the need for coming up with appropriate legislative frameworks for enhancing, preserving and promoting cyber security and maintenance of peace in the cyber space. As Cyber crimes and breaches of cyber security are likely to increase dramatically in these years, lawmakers across the world will be faced with the challenge of how to come up with appropriate enabling legal regimes that not only protect and preserve cyber security, but also further instill a culture of cyber security amongst thenetizens. Large number of existing cyber legislations across the world, do not yet address important issues pertaining to cyber security. In future; the need is to bring emphasis on effective and mandatory provisions which would help to protect, preserve and promote cyber security in the context of use of computers, computer systems, computer networks, computer resources as also communication devices. Cyber law makers across the world will have to face the unique challenge of how to effectively regulate the misuse of social media by vested interests and further how to provide effective remedy to the victims of various criminal activities on social media few gray areas in the arena of cyber crimes can still be pointed out, although they have been dealt with either under the IT Act 2000, or by amendments in IPC and Indian Evidence Act. For example: problem arises when an attempt is made to rationalize accusation of ‘cyber theft’ under the traditional notion of theft. Under the Indian Penal Code, 1908; there should be an actual movement of a movable property and consequently, a loss to the owner of the property. In the electronic world, difficulties arise in prosecution for the ‘theft’ of information because it is difficult to apply considerations for booking the cyber criminal for ‘theft’. The questions, therefore arise, are: whether internet time can be brought within the ambit of property, movable or immovable, toprove ‘theft’ of internet hours as cyber ‘theft’? Can Internet Service Providers be held responsible in case of theft ofpasswords? Such questions remain unanswerable in the existing legal framework ofInformation Technology Act andamendments to the penal laws. Here starts the role of the courts as interpreters ofstatutes with a result of evolving the law to make it to be a full-fledged grown up legislation. Fewmore illustrations may be cited as that of ‘theft’ with a pointer to the inadequacy of the existinglegal framework to answer newborn cyber crimes. Controlling such crimes is the result of theinterplay of the legislature, executive and judiciary. The law to nail down the cyber offender hasbeen passed and enforced in India. Now it needs proper execution and implementation. It willnot be proper to expect a tailor-made IT jurisprudence because it has to develop under givenconditions and circumstances and by understanding the technology itself. For that there is aneed of efficacious legal support for which the way is ahead. The concept of Cyber law is ever-growing. As new opportunities and challenges are surfacing, Cyber law is suitably modifying itself to fit the call of the time. Different countries have had their 46 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey own experiences while framing and implementing cyber laws. Some early adopters in the US and the West in general, had come up with their own legislations in this regard by either adapting their existing laws in the context of cyberspace or creating new laws in respect thereof. Following their footsteps, the developing countries such as India, Pakistan, Indonesia, Malaysia, and Philippines have also enacted cyber law legislations. The years to come are likely to further consolidate on the technological advancements made in the past few years. This is likely to add huge numbers of new Internet. Not only will the numbers of Internet users increase tremendously, but even the number of people migrating to mobiles and smart phone platforms will rise significantly. With increased usage of the digital format and the digital environment, Cyber law is likely to see various emerging trends that will have to be appropriately addressed by law makers.

References Chauhan A.,Evolution and development of Cyber Law- a study with special reference to India. Kamat N., Law relating to Computers, Internet & E-commerce, Universal Law Publishing Co., New Delhi. Dr. Rasal P.,Cyber Laws – A Way Ahead.http://indiaforensic.com/cyber_law_a_way_ahead.pdf accessed on 24/02/2016 Reed C., Internet Law: Text and Materials, Universal Law Publishing Co., New Delhi. Rohas, N.,Introduction to Indian Cyber law.https://dict.mizoram.gov.in/uploads/.../cyber.../intro-indian-cyber-law.pdf accessed on 24/02/2016 Ryder R. D., Intellectual Property and the Internet; 2002, LexisNexis Butterworths, New Delhi. Vidya, C. (ed), Cyber Jurisdiction – A legal vision, The ICFAI University Press, Hyderabad. http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2195557.pdf accessed on 24/02/2016 7

Information and Communication Technology

Nazeerunnisa* & Parveez Ameena**

Abstract

Technological progress is a considerable driving force behind economic growth, citizen engagement and job creation. Information and communication technologies (ICTs), in particular, are reshaping many aspects of the world’s economies, governments and societies. Information and Communication Technology can contribute to universal access to education, equity in education, the delivery of quality learning and teaching, teachers’ professional development and more efficient education management, governance and administration. UNESCO takes a holistic and comprehensive approach to promoting ICT in education. Access, inclusion and quality are among the main challenges they can address. The Organization’s Inter sectral Platform for ICT in education focuses on these issues through the joint work of three of its sectors: Communication and Information, Education and Science. When done right, ICT infrastructure investment and policy reform can empower poverty reduction and shared prosperity. A 10 percent increase in high-speed internet connections leverages a 1.4 percent increase in economic growth (on average) in developing countries. Information and Communication Technology (ICT) in education is basically our society’s efforts to teach its current and emerging citizens valuable knowledge and skills around computing and communication devices, software that operates them, applications that run on them and systems that are built with them. ICT is complex and quickly changing, and it is confusing many people. It is so pervasive in the modern world that everyone has some understanding of it, but those understandings are often wildly divergent. Virtually, all modern businesses and industries and in modern society in general, ICT has key strategic roles. It is strategically important to develop citizens and workers who can competently and efficiently operate and add value in these systems and environments. Keywords: Economic growth, Universal access to education, Teachers’ professional development, ICT infrastructure investment, Strategic roles

* HOD, Department of Commerce, B.E.T Sadathunnisa College, Bengaluru, Karnataka ** Assistant Professor, Department of English, BET Sadathunnisa College, Bengaluru, Karnataka 48 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Introduction Young people today, live in a world characterized by dramatic cultural, economic, social and educational differences; individual circumstances depend largely on where a person is born and raised. More than 800 million adults (two-thirds of them women) still lack basic literacy skills; at the other end of the spectrum, the use of information and communication technology (ICT) is skyrocketing. Notwithstanding the immense diversity in living environments, an unprecedented and unifying global media culture has developed challenges and often surpassed such traditional forms of socialization as family and school. Two major assumptions underlie the role of ICT: firstly, proliferation of these technologies is causing rapid transformation in all areas of life; secondly, ICT functions to unify and standardize culture. It is on the basis of these assumptions that the term “media culture”, incorporating the phenomena of informationalism and globalization.

Objectives of the Study 1. To study the importance of information and communication technology. 2. To know the ICT dimensions on education. 3. To know how ICT is important in today’s world

Dimensions to ICT in Education There are many important dimensions to ICT education. These include: • ICT/Digital Literacy: Today, everyone needs a basic understanding of ICT; the knowledge of how to make productive use of it; to be good students, workers and citizens. While teaching people how to be competent, ICT technologies play an important role. People can achieve success in their academic and work careers, and also they can efficiently participate in modern technical society. As part of its study, validating U.S. Department of Labor, IT Competency model content in California, MPICT determined with 99% confidence California employer agreement with the following statements regarding Digital Literacy: o “Information and communication technology (ICT) competencies are increasingly important for most of our employers, regardless of role. If there was an agreed-upon standard for “digital literacy”, or ICT competencies expected of all workers, regardless of workplace role, my organization would value a credential based on that standard as a way of validating ICT skills for non-ICT workers.” o “In the 21st century, an ability to work with information and communication technologies is becoming as essential to education, life and workplace success as “reading, writing and arithmetic”.” ICT Digital Literacy should be considered a basic skill by educational systems, something taught to and assessed for all students. o This study details 49 competencies for ICT User level knowledge and skills, as an actionable, teachable and assessable definition of what people need to know and be able to do to be “digitally literate.” • ICT Infrastructure and Support Applied Technologists: Beyond a basic user competency, our society also needs more knowledgeable and capable technical people to deploy, manage and maintain ICT equipment, software and systems, so that they work well for users. In all industries, these people manage computer and communications hardware, software and applications; networked systems; online information sharing, communication and commerce systems; business processes making use of these systems; and user support. Information and Communication Technology 49

• Specialized Business and Industry Uses of ICT: As enabling technologies, ICT is used strategically in almost all businesses and industries. Many have developed specialized systems and uses of ICT, and many have specialized legal and regulatory requirements; quality control systems; integrations with production and research equipment and systems; security requirements; and software applications. For example: o Bioscience industries rely on specialized ICT systems and applications to conduct research, analyze organic materials, produce biotech products and do required reporting. o Financial services industries rely on ICT to maintain customer records, do business, conduct trades, do financial reporting, secure proprietary information and comply with regulations. o Manufacturing industries use specialized computer controlled systems and robotics to design, produce and test products. o Property management operations use ICT to network and control heating and cooling, lighting and building access systems. o Electric utilities use ICT to monitor and manage electricity distribution, customer billing and smart metering systems. o Telecommunications, cable TV and other entertainment industries use ICT to store content, manage customers and deliver their services. We need to develop a competent workforce that understands not only relevant technologies, but also specialized business and industry environments and operations to meet these specialized needs. •· ICT Research and Development Scientists: ICT fields are under constant pressure to evolve and improve. We need people who deeply understand the science and technologies underlying ICT. We need someone who can work to advance the fields.

The Importance of ICT in Education in the Future Several studies argue that the use of new technologies in the classroom is essential for providing opportunities for students to learn to operate in an information age. ICT skills in primary schools help the pupils to be prepared to face future developments based on proper understanding. ICT can play various roles in learning and teaching Processes; supporting face-to-face teaching and learning in the classroom. Many researchers and theorists assert that the use of computers can help students to become knowledgeable, reduce the amount of direct instruction given to them, and give teachers an opportunity to help those students with particular needs. New technologies can help teachers enhance their pedagogical practice; while assisting students in their learning activities. Science curriculum has changed to match the new aims of science education and it will continue to change. Osborne and Hennessy (2003) state that the latest move towards, “teaching about science rather than teaching its content will require a significant change in its mode of teaching and an improved knowledge and understanding in teachers”. They emphasize that along with the changes in views on the nature of science and the role of science education, the increase in the number of ICTs offers a challenge to science teaching and learning. Potential benefits from the use of ICT for science learning have been reported in several research studies. 50 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Findings • The ICT sector remains a buoyant and growing sector for employment and a key sector underpinning both national and international development. Employment in the ICT sector has continued to grow significantly in recent years. This growth, however, has not led to a parallel increase in women’s presence in the ICT labour market, with the male-female gap being particularly pronounced at senior levels. In comparison to the general growth of the sector, women’s employment figures in advanced economies are actually in decline, which suggests that the issue is not just an entry level problem but also one of de motivation, of retention and/or promotion of women within the sector at many levels. • The perception in most countries that the ICT sector is a male-dominated industry still persists. Males dominate most high-value and income jobs in the ICT sector. Research conducted for this study in both developed and developing countries found classic cases of vertical gender segregation, with women more strongly represented in lower level ICT occupations than in higher status and higher paid arenas. Although women are making inroads into technical and senior professions, there remains a ‘feminization’ of lower level jobs. On average, this research found that women accounted for 30 per cent of IT operations technicians, a mere 15 per cent of ICT managers and only 11 per cent of IT strategy and planning professionals. • There is also room for significant improvement in the number of women holding leadership positions at board and senior management levels.

Conclusion The future is about access, anywhere learning and collaboration, both locally and globally. Teaching and learning is going to be social. Schools of the future could have a traditional cohort of students, as well as online for students who live across the country or even the world. Things are already starting to move this way with the emergence of massive open online courses (MOOCs). Teachers can use the cloud to set, collect and grade work online. Students will have instant access to grades, comments and work via a computer, smart phone or tablet. Many schools are already doing this. Plus, services such as the educational social network Edmodo offer this for free. Teachers could adopt a flipped classroom approach more often. Students will take ownership of their own learning. Teachers can put resources for students online for students to use. These could be videos, documents, audio podcasts or interactive images. All of these resources can be accessed via a student’s computer, smart phone or tablet. As long as they have an internet connection either via Wifi, 3G or 4G they are good to go. To maximize its competitiveness and development potential, skills need to be seen as a key part of an economy’s infrastructure, and the more sound that infrastructure is the more robust and resilient the economy will be in response to opportunities and challenges. The choices made by policymakers, enterprises and individuals on investment in education and training must strive for gender equality—that is, to give women the same rights, responsibilities and opportunities as men. Business leaders and policy-makers need to work together towards removing barriers to women’s entry to the ICT workforce and putting in place practices and policies that will provide equal opportunities for rising to positions of leadership within the ICT sector. Such practices will ensure that all existing resources are used in the most efficient manner and that the right signals are sent regarding the future flow of talent. Information and Communication Technology 51 References Hideyuki K., Dana M. B., Impact of ICT on Elt and Innovation methodology, publishers, Yking Books. ICT; A Review literature, Education Technology Research and development. Kumar S., ICT and English language teaching challenges and innovate. Publisher ykings books. Saini K. A., Application of ICT and effective reference service, publishers VDM Gerlach Dr.Muller. Stem and ICT Education in intelligence and environment (intelligent reference), publishers springers. 8

Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using Artificial Intelligence

Kshitija Suhas Kapre*

Abstract

Artificially, intelligent system has number of applications in various areas, from entertainment to medicine. In this research paper various ways of using such Artificial Intelligence (AI) in the field of medicine are discussed. In developing and poor countries there are many patients particularly in rural areas awaiting care from specialists. Using AI, now it is possible to diagnose many diseases. AI can help doctors to take care of such patients. Using artificial intelligence, the data of the patients are collected, treated, processed and presented as well to test and simulate new treatments, scenarios and devices. Using AI, we can put entire medical history of each and every person on a universally accessible, privacy protected, electronic health record, or EHR. How to make use of AI cost effectively for poor people staying in remote areas has been discussed in this paper. This paper tries to develop a system using AI to solve healthcare problem for such people by providing them a help at right time and establish a communication with them with the help of Primary Healthcare centres present over there. A link will be established between such Primary healthcare centre and Government hospital at Thane. Depending upon the data fed by doctors at PHCs, action will be taken by the Doctors at Government hospital. Thus a quick and correct action will be taken and infant deaths due to malnutrition can be reduced. Keywords: Artificial intelligence, Electronic health record (EHR), Health Informatics, Primary healthcare centres (PHC).

Introduction Current Medical System : In the current healthcare system, if you feel sick enough to need urgent care, you will go to a conveniently located clinic near you. There, you will be checked by the registered medical practitioner. The doctor checks your health by using various medical equipments and instruments. He carries out various tests to diagnose you. He also takes into consideration

* Department of Physics, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using Artificial Intelligence 53 your previous history before prescribing medicine. But today, the field of medicine is facing many problems. There are many new diseases coming up. Many new therapies are also coming up to fight with the diseases and to cure the people. Due to use of new technologies, new equipments and instruments, it is possible to make quick decisions but then at the same time cost of the medical treatment also goes up. It is becoming very difficult for a common man to afford the cost of this treatment. In a complicated situation, the patient has to consult a specialists or super specialists also. Big hospitals are emerging with many such specialists working for them and the person gets all the medical treatment under one roof. But the cost of such treatment is very high. In India, many poor people can’t afford such treatment. The other problem involved with today’s system is that such treatment, aid by specialists and super specialists is available only in big cities. People staying in remote areas or far away from cities must come to cities for treatment. So, there is an additional problem of staying in the cities during treatment. In highly populated country like India, the problem is still worst as there are always large number of patients waiting for the treatment and comparatively less number of specialists available. Patient may have to wait from many days to few months just for consultancy. His condition may worsen during this period. • Rural Healthcare System In India

Figure 1: The structure and current scenario:

Source: Website, National rural Health mission The healthcare infrastructure in India has been developed as a three tier system. 1. The population norms are set as shown below. 54 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Table 1: The Population Norms for Healthcare Infrastructure in India. Centre Population Norms Plain Area Hilly/Tribal/ Status (31st Difficult Area March 2015) Sub Centre 5000 3000 5396 Primary Health Centre 30,000 20.000 25308 Community Health Centre 1,20,000 80,000 153655

Figure 2: Percentage of Shortfall as Compared to Requirement Based on Existing Infrastructure: Source: website, National rural health mission 1Shortfall is against requirement for existing centres.

Figure 3:Percentage of Sanction Post Vacant: Source: website, National rural health mission Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using Artificial Intelligence 55 2 Vacancy is against sanctioned posts

Figure 4: Percentage of PHCs without doctor/Lab Tech/Pharmacist Source: website, National rural health mission

Figure 5:Percentage of Sub Centres Functioning without ANMsor/and HW(M):

Source: website, National rural health mission

Objective • To offer quick medical help to poor and needy people with the help of advanced technology and Artificial Intelligence. • Consultancy of specialists and super specialists to be made available in remote areas. • Provide affordable medical treatment in the rural areas of Maharashtra. 56 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Research Methodology Proposed System Using Artificial Intelligence : Artificial intelligence is what enables a digital device to see and recognize objects. It can understand and reply to normal speech. It also can make decisions and even learn to change its thinking and behaviour as it analyzes the data which it receives. In the proposed system, if you feel sick enough to need urgent care, you will go to a conveniently located clinic. There you’ll be seen by a nurse practitioner working “at the top of her license”. This person is able to able to take into account your entire medical history by pulling up your universally accessible, privacy protected, electronic health record, or EHR. You won’t have to leave home to get advice about how to treat many worrisome conditions. Simply dial your health care provider on a smart phone and send a picture or a video of, say, your child’s inflamed ear. A computer will read the image and recommend how to proceed. The same goes for decoding X-rays, skin rashes and biopsy slides. Similarly, most people with chronic conditions will be cared for at home by nurse educators and doctors. They will not be present physically, but they’ll chat with you via the television set, laptop, tablet computer or smart phone, acting on data from implantable, wearable or external sensors. If you do need to be in a hospital, you will be very, very sick — or there for major surgery or for diagnosis of some puzzling, rare or extremely complex condition. Most people who are infirmed will be cared for in less expensive, more comfortable settings. Each patient will control his or her own EHR. Redundant information requirements will be eliminated. EHR (Electronic Health Record): An electronic health record (EHR), or electronic medical record (EMR), refers to the systematized collection of patient and population electronically-stored health information in a digital format.[1] These records can be shared across different health care settings. Records are shared through network-connected, enterprise-wide information systems or other information networks and exchanges. EHRs may include a range of data, including demographics, medical history, medication and allergies, immunization status, laboratory test results, radiology images, vital signs, personal statistics like age and weight, and billing information. EHS systems are designed to store data accurately and to capture the state of a patient across time. It eliminates the need to track down a patient’s previous paper medical records and assists in ensuring data is accurate and legible. It can reduce risk of data replication as there is only one modifiable file, which means the file is more likely up to date, and decreases risk of lost paperwork. Due to the digital information being searchable and in a single file, EMR’s are more effective when extracting medical data for the examination of possible trends and long term changes in a patient. Population-based studies of medical records may also be facilitated by the widespread adoption of EHR’s and EMR’s. Government of India intends to introduce a uniform system for maintenance of Electronic Medical Records / Electronic Health Records (EMR / EHR ) by the Hospitals and healthcare providers in the country. An Expert committee was set up to develop EMR / EHR Standards for adoption / implementation in the country. Draft EMR / EHR Standards were hosted on the website of the Ministry soliciting comments from the stakeholders and general public. After due consideration of the recommendation of the Committee and the comments received thereon, the ‘Electronic Health Record Standards for India’ have been finalised and approved by the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Government of India. Primary Helathcare Centure: (PHCs): They are sometimes referred to as public health centres, are state-owned rural health care facilities in India. They are essentially single-physician clinics usually with facilities for minor surgeries, too. They are part of the government-funded public health system in India and are the most basic units of this system. Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using Artificial Intelligence 57 Table 2: The Statistics about Sub Centres, PHCs and CHCs in Maharashtra Required In position Vacant % Shortfall Sub centres 13512 10580 2932 22 PHCs 2201 1811 390 18 CHCs 550 360 190 35

Table 3: The Statistics about Doctors and Specialists at Sub Centres, PHCs and CHCs

Required Sanctioned In position Vacant Shortfall Doctors at PHCs 1811 3009 2937 72 * Specialists at CHCs 1440 823 578 245 862 Surgeons 360 202 90 112 270

Hypothesis and Findings At national level as on 31st March, 2015, 8.1% of the PHCs were without a doctor, 38.1% were without a Lab Technician and 21.9% were without a pharmacist. CHCs reveal that as on 31st March, 2015, out of the sanctioned posts, 74.6% of Surgeons, 65.4% of obstetricians & gynaecologists, 68.1% of physicians and 62.8% of paediatricians were vacant. Overall 67.6% of the sanctioned posts of specialists at CHCs were vacant. Moreover, as compared to requirement for existing infrastructure, there was a shortfall of 83.4% of surgeons, 76.3% of obstetricians & gynaecologists, 83.0% of physicians and 82.1% of paediatricians. Overall, there was a shortfall of 81.2% specialists at the CHCs as compared to the requirement for existing CHCs. In Maharashtra, 14.9% sub centres without electricity and 3.6% do not have motorable approach road. 94.3% centres are with computers. There are 86 sub divisional hospitals, 23 district hospitals and 40 mobile medical mobile units. As per 2011 census, 54.8% population of Maharashtra lives in rural areas where healthcare facilities should be provided

Implementation of Healthcare System In the proposed system, all the PHCs, Dispensaries and Hospitals in Maharashtra are to be networked together. Each PHC should collect and maintain the information about each person in the area. This is e-information, which is stored with each PHC. Each person will be assigned with one UID number (which can be an Adhaar card number. The data associated with each PHC is shared with all dispensaries in the district and the data from all dispensaries is the shared with all the hospitals. Thus a permanent record about each and every person is created and saved. If that person is suffering with any disease, this data can be accessed very easily by the hospital with the aid of corresponding PHC. Hence, it is possible to prescribe the medicine and to monitor health of that person by specialists in the hospitals. Immediate help by specialists can be provided to this person through doctors in PHCs as and when required. In spite of constraints of geographical locations, the patient can get best treatment without actually coming to the city. In Maharashtra 99.3% centres are with computers. 58 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Block Diagram of Proposed System

Future Plans In future, the system can be developed for India. The concept of cloud computing will help to store and access large amount of data in that case.

Conclusion Thus, with the help of artificial intelligence, we can overcome the problem of shortfall of doctors and specialists at PHCs and CHCs. Using the proposed system, we can solve many problems associated with medical field faced while treating people in remote areas. Following objectives get fulfilled with proposed system : • Immediate medical help. • Maintenance of health record electronically which can be referred by any doctor any time • Continuous monitoring of health of the patient by specialists • No geographic constraints while treating the patient .

References Teahan William John and bookboon.com, Artificial Intelligence-Agent Behaviour I, 1st edition, 2010, ISBN 978-87-7681- 559-2 Teahan William John and bookboon.com, Artificial Intelligence-Agents and Environment, 1st edition, 2010, ISBN 978-87- 7681-528-8 http://www.thane.nic.in/htmldocs/ThaneAtaGlance.html- An official website of Thane district, Govt. Of Maharashtra http://www.healthcentral.com/depression/cf/slideshows/8-ways-artificial-intelligence-is-affecting-the-medical-field Health Informatics: A Solution to Healthcare Problems in Maharashtra using Artificial Intelligence 59 http://www.openclinical.org/aiinmedicine.html https://healthinformatics.wikispaces.com/Artificial+Intelligence+in+Medicine http://www.wired.com/2014/06/ai-healthcare/ http://epia2015.dei.uc.pt/artificial-intelligence-in-medicine/ http://epia2015.dei.uc.pt/artificial-intelligence-in-medicine/ http://www.nhp.gov.in/table-of-content_mtl http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/india/How-artificial-intelligence-can-change-Indian-healthcare-sector/articleshow/ 49304409.cms http://www.hhnmag.com/articles/6561-ways-artificial-intelligence-will-transform-health-care https://arogya.maharashtra.gov.in/1113/Primary-services https://nrhm-mis.nic.in/RURAL%20HEALTH%20STATISTICS/(A)RHS%20-%202015/Rural%20Health%20Care% 20System%20in%20India.pdf 9

Net Neutrality – Shield The Web

Lifna Varghese*

Abstract

One of the hottest debates of the nation is the on-going feud between the Indian netizens and the Internet Service Providers (ISP) which has been christened as the “Net Neutrality Debate”. This paper aims at discussing that common people must understand the benefits of net neutrality and be aware of the fact that there are also certain problems associated with net neutrality.Net Neutrality means all content is equal and all sites must be equally accessible. Neutrality refers to the ideology that once an internet plan is bought, the customer should be allowed to access any site in the internet without discrimination. It also means that irrespective of the telecom operator one should be able to access all the data on the net at the exact same speed. But India’s telecom companies are lobbying the Telecom Regulatory authority of India (TRAI) to enact a regulation in their favour. Telecom operators are trying to disseminate the internet body into various sections so as to force the user to pay to access to every single one of them separately. The leading ISPs or telecommunication service providers like AT&T, IBM, Verizon, CISCO, Intel and Qualcomm – companies that spurred their revenue growth because of the internet that was paid for by ordinary people, companies and governments – all feel threatened and vehemently oppose the concept of net neutrality. They are against the so-called “over the top services” which include are “Skype, Viber, Whatsapp, Chat on, Instagram, Snapchat, Google talk, Hike, WeChat, Facebook messenger, etc”. The telecom companies fight net neutrality for money. One of the arguments put forth by them is that a lot of money is invested to build infrastructure; to create and maintain these data services. But these over the top services eat into their revenues making it impossible for them to earn their investment back. TRAI is, thus, backing their demand. But this is taking a toll on people’s right. Thus, it is the need of the hour to demand. To demand freedom to be able to access information or entertainment on the internet on terms we choose. To protect Equality - internet is probably the last frontier where everyone is equal. We need to reminisce that modern era looks upon Internet as a utility and not a luxury. Thus adoption of net neutrality will help India in the long run. Save the net. Adopt Net Neutrality. Keywords: Net neutrality, Internet Service Providers, Telecom Regulatory Authority of India, Data services, Infrastructure, Freedom, Equality, Modern Era

* FYBSC, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Guided by Dr. Fatima Shaikh, HOD, Department of Languages, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Net Neutrality – Shield The Web 61 Introduction NET NEUTRALITY refers to free access to all content and applications regardless of the source and no blocking of the website or pages as long as they are not illegal. Another aspect of net neutrality is level playing field on the internet; this means all websites can co-exist without hampering others. This also means that all websites are accessible at the same speed and no particular website or application is favoured. Net neutrality also means that all website and content created are treated equal and you don’t have to pay extra for faster internet speed to a particular site/service. It is the principle that internet service providers and government should treat all data on the internet the same. Net neutrality is our guiding principle. It preserves our right to communicate freely online. This is the definition of the open internet.Net Neutrality means an Internet that enables and protects free speech. It means that Internet service providers should provide us with open networks — and should not block or discriminate against any applications or content that ride over those networks. Just as your phone company shouldn’t decide who you can call and what you say on that call, your ISP shouldn’t be concerned with the content you view or post online. Without Net Neutrality, cable and phone companies could carve the Internet into fast and slow lanes. An ISP could slow down its competitors’ content or block political opinions it disagreed with. ISPs could charge extra fees to the few content companies that could afford to pay for preferential treatment — relegating everyone else to a slower tier of service. This would destroy the open Internet

Origin of Net Neutrality The FCC would allow network owners (your Verizon’s, Comcast’s, etc.) to create Internet “fast lanes” for companies (Disney, The Atlantic) that pay them more. For Internet activists, this directly violated the principle of net neutrality which has been a hot-button issue in Silicon Valley for a long time. In the United States, net neutrality has been an issue of contention among network users and access providers since the 1990s. Until 2015, there were no clear legal restrictions against practices impeding net neutrality. In 2005 and 2006, corporations supporting both sides of the issue spent large amounts of money lobbying Congress. Between 2005 and 2012, five attempts to pass bills in Congress containing net neutrality provisions failed. Each sought to prohibit Internet service providers from using various variaHYPERLINK “https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ Variable_pricing”ble pricing models based upon the user’s Quality of Service level, described as tiered in the industry and as price discriHYPERLINK “https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ Price_discrimination”mination by some economists. FCC decided to consider two options: permitting fast and slow broadband lanes, thereby compromising net neutrality; and second, reclassifying broadband as a telecommunication service, thereby preserving net neutrality. In November 2014, President Barack Obama recommended that the FCC reclassify broadband Internet service as a telecommunications service. In April 2014, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) reported a new draft rule that would have permitted ISPs to offer content providers a faster track to send content, thus Reversing its earlier net neutrality position, in May 2014, the In January 2015, Republicans presented an HR discussion draft bill that made concessions to net neutrality but prohibited the FCC from enacting any further regulation affecting ISPs. On February 26, 2015, the FCC ruled in favour of net neutrality by reclassifying broadband as a common carrier under Title II of the Communications 62 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Act of 1934 and SHYPERLINK “https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Telecommunications_policy_of_ the_United_States”ection 706 of the Telecommunications act of 1996. On April 13, 2015, the FCC published the final rule on its new “Net Neutrality” regulations .These rules went into effect on June 12, 2015.

Net Neutrality Net Neutrality Law refers to laws and regulations which enforce the principle of net neutrality.

Chile Chile became the first country in the world to pass net neutrality legislation in 2010. The laws adopted there prohibit organizations such as Facebook and Wikipedia from subsidizing mobile data usage of consumers. The adoption of net neutrality law usually includes allowance for discrimination in limited conditions, such as preventing spam, malware, or illegal content. The law in Chile allows exceptions for ensuring privacy and security. The law in the Netherland follows exceptions for congestion, security, spam, or legal reasons.

Belgium In Belgium, net neutrality was discussed in the parliament in June 2011. Three parties (CDHYPERLINK “https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Christen-Democratisch_en_Vlaams”& HYPERLINK “https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Christen-Democratisch_en_Vlaams”V, N-VA & PS) jointly proposed a text to introduce the concept of net neutrality in the telecom law

France In France, on 12 April 2011, the Commission for economic affairs of the French parliament approved the report of MP Laure de La Raudière (UMP). The report contained 9 proposals. Propositions n°1 & 2 act on net neutrality.

Italy Since March 2009 in Italy, there is a bill called: Proposta di leggedeisenatori Vincenzo VITA (PD) e Luigi Vimercati (PD) ”NeutralitàDelleReti, Free Software E Societa’ Dell’informazione Senator Vimercati in an interview said that he wants “to do something for the network neutrality” and that he was inspired by Lawrence Lessig, Professor at the Stanford Law School. Vimercati said that the topic is very hard, but in the article 3 there is a reference to the concept of neutrality regard the contents. It is also a problem of transparency and for the mobile connections: we need the minimum bandwidth to guarantee the service. We need some principle to defend the consumers. It’s important that the consumer has been informed if he could not access the entire Internet. The bill refuses all the discrimination: related by the content, the service and the device. The bill is generally about Internet (“a statute for the Internet”) and treats different topics like network neutrality, free software, giving an Internet access to everyone.

Netherlands In June 2011, the majority of the Dutch lower house voted for new net neutrality laws which prohibits the blocking of Internet services, usage of deep packet inspection to track customer behaviour and otherwise filtering or manipulating network traffic. The legislation applies to any telecommunications provider and was formally ratified by the Dutch senate on 8 May 2011. Net Neutrality – Shield The Web 63 Slovenia In Slovenia, with 1 January 2013 there is a new telecommunication law in effect which explicitly defines and requires net neutrality from telecommunication operators. Net neutrality is defined as a principle that every internet traffic on a public communication network is dealt with equally, independent of content, applications, services, devices, source and destination of the communication.

Israel In 2011, Israel’s parliament passed a law requiring net neutrality in mobile broadband. These requirements were extended to wire line providers in an amendment to the law passed on February 10, 2014. The law contains an exception for reasonable network management, and is vague on a number of issues such as data caps, tiered pricing, paid prioritization and paid peering.

Net Neutrality in India Since the past couple of years, the instances of Internet censorship in India have increased manifold. In 2011, India adopted the new ‘IT Rules 2011’ that supplemented the IT Act 2000. These rules made it mandatory for Internet intermediaries to remove objectionable content within 36 hours of receiving complaint. But the terms included were vague and open to interpretations. These rules received sharp criticism, but they have prevailed. In 2011, government also drew flak as it asked major sites like Google, Facebook and Yahoo to ‘pre-screen’ content and remove any objectionable, defamatory content from going live. Government requests for banning content have also been on rise over the past couple of years. On the other hand, with the increasing popularity of instant messaging apps like Whatsapp, Viber and others, Telco’s had started making noise against the accelerated adoption of these services. Throughout last year, they’ve have been quite vocal about their dislike for over-the-top (OTT) services, who have been cannibalizing their main revenue streams – calls and SMSes. For example: There was buzz around a fee being imposed on popular OTT services, but the matter fizzled out soon after TRAI rejected telcos’ proposal to do so. In a bid to make up for the losing revenue, Airtel decided to play evil Santa on Christmas 2014 and announced an extra charge on making VoIP calls. The Twitterati had gone all out condemning Airtel for the act, and the service provider had to soon retract its decision. Net neutrality got yet another blow in India with the recent announcements from Reliance and Airtel. In India, Facebook has teamed up with Reliance Communications in an effort to bring Internet.org to smartphone as well as feature phone users. But at the Mobile World Congress, telecom service providers such as Vodafone, Airtel and Telenor have made their discomfort clear when it comes to offering free Internet services over expensive telecom networks. In order to compete with Reliance, Airtel announced Zero marketing platform allowing customers to access apps of participating app developers at zero data charges. Now, you may be wondering what is wrong if someone wants to offer free Internet. Free internet sounds tempting, but you need to be aware that you are only getting free access to services/apps which have struck a deal with the telecom companies. App developers and services flush with funds will not find it an issue to pay telecom companies for data charges. But this can leave app developers, especially start -ups, who cannot afford Airtel or Reliance’s data rates at a definite disadvantage. 64 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey In India, the concept of net neutrality doesn’t exist legally. However, ISPs try to moderately not violate any laws. They’ve approached TRAI for the losing revenues and are awaiting TRAI’s decision on regulation IM app by OTT players. Most decisions here are made by DoT and TRAI. However, it would be a good move to get things legally on paper, while Internet access in India is still at its infancy. TRAI Rules in Favour of Net Neutrality The TRAI on 8 February 2016 barred telecom service providers from charging differential rates for data services, thus prohibiting Facebook’s Free Basics and Airtel Zero platform by Airtel in their present form. In their latest ruling, they have stipulated that: • No service provider can offer or charge discriminatory tariffs for data services on the basis of content. • No service provider shall enter into any arrangement, agreement or contract, by whatever name called, with any person, natural or legal, that the effect of discriminatory tariffs for data services being offered or charged by the service provider for the purpose of evading the prohibition in this regulation. • Reduced tariff for accessing or providing emergency services, or at times of public emergency has been permitted. • Financial disincentives for contravention of the regulation have also been specified. • TRAI may review these regulations after a period of two years. Impacts of Net Neutrality Positive Impacts • Democratic rights of citizens such as freedom of speech, equality are upheld- But it is the people’s right at stake. So we should demand freedom to be able to access information or entertainment on the internet on terms we choose. A need arises to preserve equality because the internet is probably the last frontier where everyone is equal. • It provides a fair market environment for start-ups to grow- Net neutrality protects innovation and if big companies like Google and Netflix could pay to get exceptional treatment, more bandwidth, faster speeds, the new start-up firms would be at a disadvantage. Net neutrality supports competitive marketplace and provides chance to every firm, from big companies to small start-ups. If net was not neutral, Google, Facebook or Zomato would not have been able to reach where they are today. Curbing netizens right to a neutral net will be a big blow for the budding entrepreneurs. • Access to rich and poor alike and breaching the economic gap- The big telecom companies can provide the ways but don’t have any right to direct how the people should walk on them. They cannot differentiate between the different groups. • Speedy work and fast resolution of grievances- Since internet is available at any point of time speedy access can lead to timely and fast resolution of our problems. Net Neutrality – Shield The Web 65 Negative Impacts • Injustice to telecom companies who spent billions on providing services- The telecom companies fight net neutrality for money. The telecom providers do not get money for anything except providing bandwidth. One of the arguments telecom companies are making is that they pay a lot of money to build infrastructure to create and maintain these data services. But these over the top services eat into their revenues making it impossible to them to earn their investment back.

Conclusion Net neutrality is a phenomenon that has taken birth due to telecom companies’ greediness. This is purely business tactics. The telecom companies are against the concept of net neutrality because they are only profit oriented. Going against the net neutrality will be a set back for the consumers because they have to pay money multiple times for the same service. If net neutrality comes into existence, then the telecom companies will be an internet gatekeeper who will decide who stays and goes on the internet. We the consumers pay telecom companies twice already. There is no need to pay them a third time. If net neutrality does not come into play, the greatest loser will be the consumer only. Before 8 Feb 2016, there was no law in India that was governing net neutrality which gave the telecom companies the power to charge extra money for their service.Net neutrality gathered public attention when Airtel, a mobile telephone service provider in India announced in Dec 2014 additional charges for making voice calls (VOiP) like whatsapp, Skype, etc. Due to this, TRAI released a formal consultation paper and finally, on 8 Feb 2016, TRAI ruled in the favour of net neutrality which was a revolutionary decision that brought happiness to the consumer and sadness to the telecom companies.

Suggestions The example of TRAI shows how people can come together and win over a common cause. Indian government should keep a track of what is happening where. It should be able to differentiate between right and wrong and take action immediately

References Marsden C., Net Neutrality: Towards a Co-Regulatory Solution, Bloomsbury Publishing, 2010 Nunziato D., Virtual Freedom: Net Neutrality and Free Speech in the Internet Age, Stanford University Press, 2009 TRAI, Consultation Paper on Introduction of Competition in Domestic Long Distance Communications, Telecom Regulatory Authority of India, 1999 Verlag G., The Telecom Regulatory Authority of India Act, 1997, Universal’s, New Delhi. Zelnick E., Zelnick B., The Illusion of Net Neutrality, Hoover Institution Press, U.S. 10

Understanding the Chemistry Between the Internet and Young Minds

Ulka Patil*

Abstract

The use of internet has been widely accepted as a way of improving student’s performance in several subject areas. The internet, which is a double-edged sword, has double effects. It has been found that for the last few years, the use and access of Internet among students has been increasing and now has become an important daily activity worldwide.The review of this paper revealed that students use internet for various objectives. Most of the undergraduate students use the internet for entertainment, social and education objectives. They use it minimum for their academics and knowledge, whereas students, if guided properly by their supervisors, will utilise it to gain access to large amount of information on any subject or topic. Keywords:Internet, Academics, Entertainment

Introduction Background of the Study: The Internet is a global linking of computers that allows information transfer. The Internet was established in the early 1960s by the U.S. Department of Defence (Schneider, Evans, &Pinard, 2006), primarily for military purposes. Since then, the continual improvement of the Internet technology has provided an extraordinary level of public accessibility to a wide range of forms of communication, e.g. intra-organisational and inter-organisational email; data storage, management and transfer; social websites like Facebook; text messaging such as Twitter, and so forth. Due to the development and spread of cheaper and more user-friendly computer technology and software (e.g., portable computers, Microsoft Word etc), the use of the Internet has increased dramatically. In 2010, the world’s Internet use was 28.7% of the population. While this may not seem like a very large portion of the world’s population, the growth in the use of the Internet has

* Department of Chemistry, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Understanding the Chemistry Between the Internet and Young Minds 67 been dramatic. For example, between 2000 and 2010, the rate of growth of Internet use was 444.8% (Internet World Stats, 2010b). Likewise in Thailand, while 26.3% of the Thai population were Internet users in 2010, the growth rate in Internet use was even larger than for the world as a whole, growing 660.3% from 2000 to 2010 (Internet World Stats, 2010a, 2010b). There are many benefits associated with internet use, such as access to needed information, worldwide access to news and events, and interpersonal communication through email. Internet, no doubt is one of the best inventions. There are lot of positive effects of internet on our lives but at the same time there are some negative effects too. With the arrival of modern technology, it has placed the whole humanity into the computer age. By this everything was being influenced by this highly advanced equipment regardless of age and gender. It swiftly climbs into the social lifestyle system of everyone. The evolution of computer systems and its application does provide a road to the development of internet.

Objectives of the Study The study was conducted to find out the following objectives. 1. To review and analyse the published literature on the effect of internet on students. 2. To understand the extentof influence of interneton the everyday life of students?

Research Methodology The methodology is based on the review of various research papers on the impact of internet on student’slife.

Literature Review Nagasireesha Challa and Venkatachalam in their joint study concluded that majority of the medical students were not using the internet for their education and learning new things. Most of the students preferred to internet for music, movies, games and social sites rather than attaining knowledge on their subject. The researchers also made some important recommendation that internet may play an important roles in many aspects of medicine in future. So, there was need to pay attention to guide the students use it for their academic and future career. They further emphasised that students must be educated to get valuable information and knowledge from the sites and teaching should be done through computers in all medical institutes. Vani Madhavi, Kommula A, and Kusneniwar B (2013) found that mostof the students were using theinternet service in the institute. Butthese students wereusing it for entertainment and time pass and not for academicpurposes and a majority of the students had not knowledge about any medical websites. Only a few students used internet for online exams. Unnikrishnan, et al. (2008) noted a significant relationship between the study and the purpose of Internet use. Majority of the students preferred internet over text books because it accessed the latest knowledge. Majority of the students wanted that computer and internet use among students should be encouraged in institutions. The researchers also observed that most of the final year students spent less than three hours with their computer and went online in one week. AdithyaKumari, H. and Mahadevamurthy, M. andHydarali, (2013) argued that internet was a most common and useful instrument for all students. The results of the study showed that students 68 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey used the internet for several objectives, and most of the students also faced many problems while surfing the Internet. A large population used the internet every day. The researchers recommendedthe teaching institutes to educate and advise students to use Internet. Fayaz Ahmad Loan (2011) found that students from different disciplines used internet for communication, information, entertainment and academic purposes. But majority of the students accessed internet for knowing new things, chatting and emailing. Frequency of using internet was varied among the students one third of the students used it for 2/3 times in week while many users accessed internet daily basis. All students faced some problems while accessing the internet. Some of the students did not get reliable and valid information due to overload of information while others faced slow speed, downloading facility, language barriers etc. Sampath Kumar and G. Manjunath, (2013) researched to find out the academic impact of internet on teachers and researchers. This study found a high use of the internet byteachers and research students in university. Most of respondents used internet service to support their study, research and teaching. They accepted that they learnt to use the internet with the help of friends. The results of study also showed that internet use has improved their academic performance. The internet helped them write to good research papers and more papers. The researchers recommended that university should provide internet facility to its research scholars and motivated the students to use the internet for their research and academics. The study also advocated that there should be training on how to use the internet for academic and research. Singh Dhyan and Nutan Sharma (2013) viewed that most of the students used internet on the direction of their teachers for educational purposes and the use of internet among college students was increasing swiftly day by day. The students who had no internet service at their homes, they used it at colleges and cyber cafes. It was also discovered that internet had changed the activities of playing, reading, outgoing, and watching television since they started accessing the internet. The authors also found some positive impacts of internet use in students. If the internet was used for one-two hours in a day, it made students energetic andfresh. But, who spent much times on internet feel some anxiety, irritation in their behaviour, pain in eyes, and other disorders. They also concluded that internet was making students dull, passive and uncreative because they found readymade information on internet. Barthakur (2012) conducted a study to find out the connection between internet use and mental health problems. In the total 268 respondents, 24.6% testified frequent problems due to use of internet. The researchers found several negative effects of internet addiction. A large population from the sample accepted that excessive use of internet effected their work, social life and anticipation. Heavy users of internet felt loneliness, depressive, anxious and other disorders. The researchers recommended that internet users at the college and workplace should be screened and interventions should be planned to prevent mental health problems. Anita (2013) summed up that there was a significant connection between residential background and emotional maturity of Internet users. The study also confirmed that there was an interactive influence between academic discipline and regularity of Internet use on emotional maturity of Internet users. SugataMitra and VivekRana (2001) provided internet facility to the slum children in New Delhi. The researchers observed that children seemed to understand the things and could use the technology easily. Children did not find language and education any significant problem to learning. They also argued that internet technology had been spreading promptly in India like other countries of the world but internet users in India were mostly restricted to the urban areas. Understanding the Chemistry Between the Internet and Young Minds 69 A survey conducted by TCS on 17,500 students across 14 Indian cities summed up that 75% of students used internet to research for colleges while 62% of students accessed the Internet for social reasons like chatting and connecting with their friends. The report also found that one in five students spent nearly 2-3-hour on the Internet

Table 1: Impacts of Internet

Impacts of Internet Positive impact Negative impact 1) Health: Daily diet Chart, Nutritional value of food Headache, sleep pattern disrupt, eye defect 2) Social Behaviour: Interpersonal Relationship, Loss of human touch& Motivational video builds Worldwide linking with people Self confidence. 3) Culture: Information related to Indian Adoption to western culture culture 4) Psychology: Access to information worldwide Pornography, Addiction

The negative impacts of Internet addiction includes, the impact on interpersonal relationship where the relationship of an individual is getting further from surrounding (Morahan-Martin, 2005). Individual might face behavioural problem due to over usage of Internet where they are reacting differently than the normal behaviour (Kubey, Lavin & Barrows, 2001). Some other physical problem might occur due to long use of the Internet. Some physical problems are migraine or headache, sleep pattern disrupt etc (Jeon, 2005; You, 2007; an d Yang & Tung, 2004). Some other problems include psychological problems where an individual are unable to control their emotions and the way of thinking due to long hour use of the Internet. They tend to increase the net serving time and eliminate the set schedule. Moreover, the impact of Internet addiction does not limit to affect an individual only but might also affect the work performance of an individual (K.S. Young, 2008). The condition is getting worried when the work problem has brought some impacts to the people working together and to the company that the individual is working with.

Discussion& Result The students spend 2-3 hours on the Internet daily to satisfy their various needs mostly for chatting, connecting with friends, making new friends, telling about their plans and performances, social relations, and other education objectives. The study review also confirms that more than 60% users of internet are students and they access the Internet primarily through their cell phones. Today, Educational sector has been deeply influencing by the arrival of Internet and computer and it is changing how education is taught, learned and delivered to the students. They use internet for research purposes while college students do not use it for their academic objective most of the time. Secondly, guidance plays most important role in what should be researched on internet. The studentswho useit for academics are advised by their supervisors. 70 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Suggestions 1. There is an urgent need and emergency to sensitize both students and parents about the negative effect of internet use and abuse. Parents and guardians should pay proper attention about what their children are doing on internet. 2. Parents and guardians should encourage children to participate in outdoor activities and motivate them to go out for playing and outings than using internet. 3. Unwanted sites should be blocked or use password. 4. During exam internet connection should be blocked. 5. Parents should always help them to distinguish the appropriate & inappropriate contents on internet. 6. Time spent on internet should be fixed.

Conclusion After reviewing several research papers it can be concluded that the internet affects student’s life both positively and negatively. The use of internet among students has been bringing a fundamental change in their life styles and their study habits since its inception.

References A Systematic Review of Literature on effect of Internet Use on Students in India - https://www.researchgate.net/publication/ 273538253_A_Systematic_Review_of_Literature_on_effect_of_Internet_Use_on_Students_in_India Negative and positive impact of internet addiction on young adults: Empericial study in Malaysia - Syed Shah Alam1, NikMohd. HazrulNik Hashim2, Maisarah Ahmad1 CheAnizaCheWel1 ,SallehuddinMohd Nor1 , Nor Asiah Omar1 - http:/ /upcommons.upc.edu/bitstream/handle Singh Dhyan andNutan Sharma (2013), Academic, Psychological, and Social Impact of Internet on College Students,Anweshan Journal of Education ISSN 2249-3794, Pages. 151-157. TCS (2013) GenY Survey 2012-13 Muhammad MusaudAsdaque, Muhammad Nasir Khan,Dr.SyedAsad Abbas Rizvi, Effect of Internet on the Academic Performance and social of university students in Pakistan. http://reviewmything.com/negative-positive-effects-of-internet#ixzz4526RYFEk Clark DJ, Frith KH and Demi AS, 2004,Internet use has both positive and negative aspects. The positive consequences of Internet use include enhanced self-confidence, increased frequency of communication with family and friends, and feelings of empowerment. 11

The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm

Harshala Pradeep Raj* & Dr. Fatima Shaikh**

Abstract

Spanning the years from the time of the Babylonian period to the present day democratic scenario, the transformation of the varied means of communication has been clearly described in the paper. Briefing through the history of communication, one comes to terms with the fact that there are two media of communication which have evolved to be one of the robust instruments of communication. One is the ancient heritage which is a physical existence of compilation of words inscribed on paper i.e. books. The other one is the boon of technology to ease modern day communication in a virtual realm viz. the Internet. Through the course of the paper it is witnessed that books have played a significant role in not only enhancing communication but also shaping the social as well as religious life circles. The significance of books during the Industrial Revolution has been mentioned in the paper highlighting the broad prospects of books as being an efficient media of communication. With the evolution of internet, the style and method of communication has revolutionized. Modern life is expeditious and this medium clearly hooks up with the contemporary social structure. The paper, thus, clearly explains about the relevant causes pertaining to the paradigm shift of communication from the physical globe to the virtual domain. Keywords: Books, Internet, Physical world, Virtual realm paradigm shift, Contemporary social structure

Introduction The study in shift of means of communication is a subject which is to be introspected and is a topic of keen interest during the period of gradual change and in the modern times. This shift though seems abrupt to most ideologies it has been a slow change unknowingly and is now looked upon or emphasized upon more than it used to be since the past two decades.

* Student , KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra ** Guide, HOD, Department of Languages, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 72 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Being social is the most vital trait of an individual. Communication is the key to being amiable. Social life of an individual encircles around certain aspects. Some of the aspects of social life include semiotic aspects i.e. the role of signs in social life, linguistic aspects, etc. The linguistic aspects of a human’s social life are bridged by communication. A communication media is not simply a tool for communication but it supports us in our everyday life and it is also a tool in our professional dealings at work, to give us information and knowledge to help us make more informed decisions better and faster. The medium is the message. Medium or in singular form media is the collective communication outlets or tools that are used to store and deliver information or data. It is akin to the various means of transport that one witnesses in everyday life. The first form of transport in the early centuries was on foot and as time progressed and humans started interacting more with their environment they started domesticating animals such as camels and donkeys for transportation. Then eventually with the invention of the wheel the transportation smoothened and eased a bit with the advent of horse carts and bullock carts depending upon the country whose history is explored into. Gradually with the Industrial Revolution, new inventions started to emerge. The major outbreak was the introduction of the locomotive. Railway was a huge revolution in the field of transportation. The locomotives were but steam locomotives .When the electricity was invented, it brought a sudden pace to the media of transport. Electric trams were a common sight during those times. Then with the invention of cars and safety bicycles the face of transportation changed abruptly. Even in the waterways steam ships were being used. And the airways, the modern mode, are the fastest means of transportation. Thus, it is witnessed that there was a slow and gradual change of transportation which was boosted and revolutionized by science and technology. In a similar manner, the various means of communication were developed by humans from centuries through interaction with the environment and fellow human beings; then boosted and revolutionized by the modern technology. The first form was the spoken language. Finding it unreliable in terms of secrecy, messages carved on stone pillars were used. But it was an inefficient method of communicating across space. Thus, a portable writing such as papyrus was used. Then, with the invention of papyrus (the olden form of paper), the postal service was introduced with men on foot involved in the service. The messenger was speeded up by horsemen. The pigeon post, too, came into existence during the 11th century. At that time, the Chinese paper flooded the world market. The invention of the printing press was a major up thrust to the communication world. Books reached to the masses. Ideas could be easily propagated in this manner. Also, eventually, newspapers, magazines, pamphlets emerged as important tools for communication. With the Industrial revolution and means of transport revolutionizing, the communication gained impetus with mail service through trains. The advent of technology was the greatest boost of all times. The television and internet was a doorstep communication media. Though, it took a while to capture the globe, the network in the 21st century of these media is very robust. With every step, the communication media has progressed in such a manner as to diminish the gap between people not only in a geographic but also a in a more social and economic sense. The focus mainly remains on the gradual shift of communication from the physical existence of communication to the modern day virtual domain. With this idea, it becomes easy to figure out the paradigm shift of communication from ages up till the 21st century. The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 73 Origin and Development of Books The Early form of writing The early forms of written characters were pictograms essentially pictures of the words or their sounds. Ancient Egyptian hieroglyphs and modern Chinese characters are other examples of pictographic script. Later, the Sumerians’ picture-writing evolved into cuneiform, which means “wedge writing” in Latin. Cuneiform was written with a wedge-shaped stylus, much like the ones used on today’s hand-held computers, onto damp clay tablets, which were then baked until hard. Ancient Egyptians wrote on many of the same surfaces that the Sumerians did: clay, stone, bone, metal, and leather. They wrote most often, however, with reed pens on papyrus scrolls. In the 2nd or 3rd century CE, Romans began to sew groups of folded papyrus sheets together and bind them between two wooden covers into a form familiar to book called codex.

The Writing of Scribes The subject of a book, how it was to be used, and for whom it was intended, influenced the size, lettering, and decoration. For example, a Bible to be used for the conducting of church services would be rather large and beautifully decorated. The scribe would begin his work by outlining the margins on the parchment leaf with a compass, pricking marks down the side of the page and drawing a straight line between the points. He would rule the lines in the same way, calculating where the large initial letters and illustrations would fall, and then copy the text, writing with a goose quill.

Introduction of Books People wanted to be able to record stories so they didn’t have to remember them. In other words, they wanted to document their discoveries. Hence books were introduced. Books printed on presses before the year 1501 are called incunabula, which comes from a word meaning “cradle” or “birthplace” in Latin. Although printing was certainly in its infancy prior to 1501, the actual printing process of using movable type on a wooden press did not change a great deal over the next 350 years. There were, however, changes made to the format of books, such as the addition of title pages where medieval scribes simply added their own name, the date of completion, and perhaps a small prayer to the end of their manuscripts. Also, by the beginning of the 16th century, page numbers had made their appearance. Because medieval readers expected books to contain a combination of text and images, printers quickly began to incorporate woodcut images between blocks of text. This innovation eliminated the need for hand painting and saved both time and money while sustaining the text and illustration format that continued to be important during the Renaissance. It is estimated that a third of all incunabula were illustrated, and images continued to be hand-coloured into the 18th century.

The Spread of Printing Gutenberg’s printing technology quickly spread from Mainz to Subiaco in Italy (1465), Paris (1470), and London (1476). By the beginning of the 16th century, there were approximately 240 printing shops in Europe. The first press in the Americas was set up in Mexico City less than 50 years after Columbus’s first voyage. The first press in what is now the United States was set up in Cambridge, Massachusetts in 1638 and began printing in 1639, only 19 years after the arrival of the Mayflower. 74 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey The first items printed were a Freeman’s Oath, an almanac for 1639, and in 1640 the Bay Psalm Book.

The Vernacular More and more books began to be published in local languages, rather than Latin. Before the year 1500, three quarters of all books were written in Latin. This figure would quickly be reversed. English editions of Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales and Italian editions of Dante’s Divine Comedy were some of the early successes. Printing in the local language made reading available to people who did not know Latin, including many women. Moreover, spelling started to become standardized. Local languages were strengthened, and translations became common, leading to a decline in the use of Latin, apart from in the Church and universities.

Censorship The Catholic Church quickly realized the potential of the printing press as a challenge to its influence. Censorship was introduced into the print shop in 1487, when Pope Innocent VIII required that Church authorities approve all books before publication. The Church had censored books for centuries, though it became much more difficult to do so after the invention of printing. Controlling a dozen painfully copied manuscripts of a forbidden text may have been a manageable task, but controlling the thousands of copies churning off the presses every year was quite another matter. One of these forbidden texts was the Bible printed in any other language than Latin.

The Reformation The Protestant Reformation movement began in 1517 with Martin Luther and his insistence that all Christians be able to read the Bible in their own language. The printing press helped to spread his message and eventually end the hold of the Catholic Church over much of northern Europe. The press as a tool of political and cultural change ensured the world would never be the same again. News of scientific and geographic discoveries now quickly circulated. Medical texts were published with detailed anatomical illustrations. Gutenberg the man may still be a mystery, but his invention helped to enlighten the world in a way that was impossible with manuscripts.

Spread of Books as per World Scenario The social and environmental conditions of communities influenced the different forms of books all over the world. In eastern Asia, books were made from a variety of local materials, including bamboo, tree bark, and palm leaves. Unfortunately, humidity and hungry insects have taken their toll on ancient manuscripts, and very few survive. Paper is especially attractive to insects. In the 19th century, Christian missionaries in India tried adding arsenic to their paper pulp in an effort to preserve their religious texts from these destructive pests. Books were produced in different languages and different styles according to the needs of the people who used them. Before Gutenberg’s printing methods became widespread, all books were handwritten. Some hand-produced books, however, continued to be made even after printed books were available. The 18th century Bible on this page comes from Ethiopia. The Bible is handwritten in Ge’ez, the language of the Ethiopian church; it has a wooden cover, and is stored in a leather case with a strap. These small, portable Bibles were meant for personal use, not to be displayed in a church or The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 75 used in services. Christianity came to the Ethiopian region around the 4th century, and Bibles were soon produced in the local language.

Change in Printing Since Gutenberg’s Invention Today, printing is very different from the process used in Gutenberg’s workshop. By modern standards, Gutenberg’s printing process may seem slow and tedious; compositors put type together by hand, and a skilled compositor could assemble 2,000 characters or letters in an hour. A computer can arrange the same number of characters in about two seconds. Today, more words are being printed every second than were printed every year during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries. But with technological improvements, the Gutenberg press was less utilized. Until the nineteenth century, printers completed each step of printing by hand, just as they did in Gutenberg’s print shop. As technology evolved, inventors adapted these new technologies to revolutionize printing. Steam engines and, later, electrical engines were incorporated into the design of printing presses. In the 1970s, computers were integrated into the printing process.

Printing Today: The Personal Computer Revolution Although some of the printing techniques we have discussed are still used, many have been revolutionized by the invention of computers. Today, a student using a personal computer is simultaneously doing the jobs of author, editor, and compositor.

Books as a Physical Tool for Communication Books are not just a set of written, printed, illustrated, or blank sheets, made of ink, paper, parchment, or other materials, fastened together to hinge at one side .It is a collection of ideas, fantasies, dreams, explorations, findings, research, ancient history, scientific know-how and a compilation of all the worldly knowledge. It is one of the best methods of communicating to the masses. It can be better termed as the “silent communication” which has inspired and weaved ideologies in the minds of generations. Books were the trigger for the prominent Protestant Revolution. The spread of Gutenberg’s printing press provided the means for the rapid dissemination of religious materials in the vernacular. The Reformation was a triumph of literacy and the new printing press. Luther’s translation of the Bible into German was a decisive moment in the spread of literacy, and stimulated as well the printing and distribution of religious books and pamphlets. From 1517 onward, religious pamphlets flooded Germany and much of Europe. By 1530, over 10,000 publications are known, with a total of ten million copies. The Reformation was thus a media revolution. Mass communication became possible on a scale that was unparalleled. Also with the printing of books in local languages, the social communication between varied classes of society especially within the vernacular medium expanded to a great extent. Thus, books helped to strength the social structure and proved to be a trigger to foster social development. It also facilitated as a means to raise a voice against the powerful unkind authority. Such instances are witnessed even in the modern times but the wave is diminished soon because of the shortcomings within books. Books can wear out. They can become outdated and need to be updated. They can be lost. Information is not readily available .It needs to be scanned a lot. Books often take up excess physical 76 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey space, and can possibly be a heavy load. This led to the search of a new medium of communication which is more reliable and works as an efficient tool of communication.

Origin and Development of Internet Need to Create the Internet The Internet is broadly described as having a world-wide broadcasting capability, being a mechanism for information dissemination, and a medium for collaboration and interaction between individuals and their computers without regard for geographic location. The Internet was created essentially to enable and facilitate communications among connected systems at the local, state, national and international levels.

Origin The origin of the Internet can be traced to the launch of the first artificial earth satellite. In 1957, the USSR, successfully launched Sputnik, and the United States of America responded with ARPA. The Advanced Research Projects Agency was started by the Department of Defence to establish US supremacy in science and technology applicable to the military. And it was within ARPA that the seed for today’s Internet was sowed. During the early sixties, J.C.R. Licklider and W. Clark talked about a “Galactic Network” concept. Licklider envisioned a globally interconnected set of computers through which everyone could quickly access data and programs from any site. Much like what the Internet is today. Around 1962, in a US Governmental agency RAND, Paul Baran was given the task of creating a super resilient network, which would allow the US army to communicate, and retain control over its missiles and bombers, in the event of a nuclear attack. His final proposal was a “packet-switched network”. This technology involved breaking down the data into packets that would be transferred from one computer to the other until the final destination computer was reached. Also if any data were lost, it would be resent. Around the mid sixties, two computers located in different geographical areas within the US were connected using a 1200 bps phone line. But this was done without using packet-switching. Within two years of this, the first design paper for the ARPANET, the precursor of the Internet was presented by Larry Roberts. ARPA awarded the contract for ARPANET to BBN, which constructed a physical network of four nodes, University of California at Los Angeles, SRI (in Stanford), University of California at Santa Barbara, and University of Utah, in 1969.

Network Control Protocol Vint Cerf, C.S. Carr and S. Crocker working on the all important protocol for the ARPANET, came out with the original host to host communication protocol, called the Network Control Protocol. And subsequently ARPANET hosts started using this Network Control Protocol. Working for the ARPANET, Ray Tomlinson in 1971 came up with the first email program, to send messages across the network. This became an instant hit, with the @ sign from Tomlinson’s Model 33 Teletype being chosen to represent “at”. In that same year, Larry Roberts wrote the first email management program that could list, read, file, forward and respond to messages. By 1972, the ARPA was renamed DARPA, Defence Advance Research Projects Agency. The ARPANET using the Network Control Protocol was allowing communication between its hosts. By the next year, the ARPANET had its first international connections, with the University of The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 77 London (England) and NORSAR (Norway). In the same year, the concept of the Ethernet was born after Bob Metcalf’s Harvard PhD thesis. Meanwhile Vint Cerf, in March that same year, sketched the gateway architecture for ARPANET, on the back of an envelope, in a San Francisco hotel lobby. Cerf and Bob Kahn, then presented the basic Internet concept at the International network Working Group. The direct result was that development started on the protocol that was later to be called TCP/IP or Transmission Control protocol/ Internet Protocol. The development work was headed by Vinton Cerf of Stanford and Bob Kahn of DARPA. By 1974, they publish “A Protocol for Packet Network Interconnection” which along with detailing out TCP, also for the first time used the term ‘Internet’. In the same year the first commercial version of the ARPANET, Telenet was opened by BBN. In 1975, satellite links connected Hawaii and UK as the first TCP tests were run through them by Stanford, BBN and UCL.

Development Development in internet communication was essential because of the ease and accessibility the internet offers. The internet is the World Wide network. The Internet has turned out to be a positive legacy of Cold War paranoia, providing efficient and inexpensive communications between people around the world. The year 1976 was marked by the first email being sent by Elizabeth II, Queen of the United Kingdom, in February. As also by the final development of the Ethernet by Robert Metcalfe, it would allow data to move extremely fast. In the Internet etiquette front, on April 12th 1978, Kevin MacKenzie suggested the use of -) to indicate that the sentence in an email is tongue-in-cheek. And with this, emoticons were born. 1979 saw the creation of the decentralized news group USENET and the ‘store and forward’ network BITNET. The ARPANET completely shifted over to TCP/IP, in 1983, making it the core Internet protocol, and replacing the NCP (Network Control Protocol) entirely. In the same year the University of Wisconsin developed the Domain Name System (DNS), which made it easier for people to access servers, as they no longer needed to remember numbers. And in 1985, “symbolics.com” was assigned, to become the first registered domain. With domain names registration catching on, in 1988 the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority was established with John Postel as the head. Around that time, Jarkko Oikarinen developed the Internet Relay Chat (IRC).

World Wide Web The beginning of the 1990s saw the first commercial provider of Internet dial-up access, world.std.com. Within a year Tim Berners-Lee developed World Wide Web (WWW). By now the ARPANET had been disbanded and replaced by the NFSNET. And in 1991, the NFSNET traffic was passing 10 trillion bytes/month and 10 billion packets per month. In this phase of heightened attention to the Internet, Jean Armour Polly coined the term “surfing the Internet”. That same year saw the release of World Wide Web by CREN (Corporation for Research and Education Networking). Within two years, InterNIC was created to provide directory/database, registration and information services for the Internet. That year also saw the Whitehouse and United Nations coming online. 78 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Uprising of E-Commerce sites on the Internet The year 1994 saw the arrival of shopping malls on the Internet, along with the first cyberstation (RT-FM) and online pizza delivery by Pizza Hut. During this year, hundreds of thousands of new hosts were added to the Internet. 1995 was the year when JAVA was launched, streaming audio technology hit the Internet thanks to RealAudio and the WWW became the service with the greatest traffic. The registration of domain names, previously free, now required a fee of $50 per year. In the recent times the e-commerce sites which have topped the list not only because of good social networking but also efficient customer service include Flipkart, Amazon, Jabong, Snapdeal, Myntra, etc.

Search Engines and Video Chatting The mid 90s saw the emergence of search engines, and the browser wars between Netscape and Microsoft began in earnest. On 17th January 1996, PLO leader Yasser Arafat, Malaysian Prime Minister Mahathir Mohamad and Phillipine President Fidel Ramos met for a ten minute online interactive chat. This clearly marked the power and the influence of the Internet on the entire world. The late 90s saw the independent Internet Service Providers like AT&T, Sprint, BBN planet etc. carrying most of the Internet traffic on their backbones. Technologies like Push, Multicasting and Streaming Media came into force. In 1999 the first full service bank available only on the Internet came into being. That same year business.com was sold for a whopping US $7.5 million. Around this time e-Trade, online banking and MP3 was becoming popular. Not only did the Internet survive Y2K, its influence and usage increased, and is still increasing, at a mind-boggling rate. Nowadays, one can easily find a home internet provider with a great connection. With an estimated 2,405,518,376 internet users in June 2012, the future is wide open.

Social Networking Sites Social networking sites are web-based services that allow individuals to create a public profile, create a list of users with whom to share connections, and view and cross the connections within the system. Most social network services are web-based and provide means for users to interact over the Internet, such as e-mail and instant messaging. Social network sites are varied and they incorporate new information and communication tools such as mobile connectivity, photo/video/ sharing and blogging. Online community services are sometimes considered a social network service, though in a broader sense, social network service usually means an individual-centered service whereas online community services are group-centered. Social networking sites allow users to share ideas, pictures, posts, activities, events, and interests with people in their network. Popular methods now combine many of these, with American-based services such as Facebook, Google+, LinkedIn, Instagram, Pinterest, Vine, Tumblr,and Twitter,Whatsapp are widely used worldwide. Web-based social networking services make it possible to connect people who share interests and activities across political, economic, and geographic borders. Through e-mail and instant messaging, online communities are created where a gift economy and reciprocal altruism are encouraged through cooperation. The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 79 Information is suited to a gift economy, as information can be gifted at practically no cost. Scholars have noted that the term “social” cannot account for technological features of the social network platforms alone. Hence, the level of network sociability should determine by the actual performances of its users.

Internet as a Virtual Tool for Cmmunication The Internet is the global system of interconnected mainframe, personal and wireless computer networks that use the Internet protocol suite (TCP/IP) to link billions of devices worldwide. Internet is an open platform which can be easily utilized for sharing opinions, view points, ideologies without the fear of censorship to an extent as is in publishing books. The advantage of the internet is that it is a network of networks that consists of millions of private, public, academic, business, and government networks of local to global scope, linked by a broad array of electronic, wireless, and optical networking technologies. Thus, it reaches out to the maximum of population in the minimum amount of time. It can better be referred to as “active communication”. Though the communication is virtual, thought behind communication is reached to every individual and is easily intercepted by everyone which makes the essence of communication feel alive. According to the communication theory of uses and gratifications, an increasing amount of individuals are looking to the internet and social media to fulfil cognitive, affective, personal integrative, social integrative, and tension free needs. With internet technology as a supplement to fulfil needs, it is in turn affecting everyday life, including relationships, school, church, entertainment, and family. Unfortunately, the ability to send and receive emails also created a means for cybercriminals to distribute spam and malware. Malware hiding in email attachments could wreak havoc to one’s Personal Computer (PC) or possibly even create a backdoor for an attacker to infiltrate your system. Through emails, cybercriminals saw this as another opportunity to play on human emotions and lure victims into revealing sensitive information through phishing scams.

Modern Social Life and Communication Just a couple of centuries ago, most people lived in small towns and villages, where they had a basic social life and well-defined social roles. In time, human settlements grew, and a large percentage of the population migrated to the city and complex social structures developed. The complexity of the modern social life is basically based on two theories-the consensus theory and the conflict theory. According to the consensus theory, norms and values are the basic elements of social life. Social life involves commitment. Societies are necessarily cohesive. Social life depends on solidarity. Social life is based on reciprocity and co-operation. Social systems rest on consensus. Society recognizes legitimate authority. Social systems are integrated. Social systems tend to persist. According to conflict theory, interests are the basic elements of social life. Social life involves inducement and coercion. Social life is necessarily divisive. Social life generates opposition, exclusion and hostility. Social life generates structural conflict. Social life generates sectional interests .Social differentiation involves power. Social systems are mal-integrated and best by contradictions. Social systems tend to change. 80 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Society is now dominated by beliefs, attitudes and ways of thinking that elevate the values of impulse, instant gratification and loss of control to first line actions and reactions. People are out of control in their behaviours, feelings and thinking. Over-scheduling and double-booking have been signs of progress and belonging for two decades. Practices that used to cause embarrassment became proudly rationalized as multi-tasking, a new skill to master. Thus, it has become difficult to build meaningful relationships in the intricate modern world. Many people are very confused by today’s social structures .The rise of the internet, mobile communication and social media has created a whole new level of possibilities for social interaction. Thus, the bend of the masses towards Internet rather than books is clearly evident from this fact.

Comparison and Relvance of Physical and Virtual Tools in 21st Century The comparison between the physical and virtual tool of communication is quite essential to understand the exemplar modification in the tools of communication in the 21st century. The material tool of communication is a proficient resource of communication for cultural and historical knowledge. It in the past has helped to bridge social differences to a great extent and helped in voicing the people’s opinions to an elevated level. The printing of books, especially in the vernacular language has helped the lower classes to understand their rights leading to a positive change in the social as well as religious life of people. In the 21st century, as witnessed, the modern and westernized culture is becoming dominant all over the globe. In this context, it is essential that the ancient books be presented to the modern posterity to make them aware of the historical and cultural background of their region. The modern form of books i.e. e-books has made it reliable to reach out to the masses thus bridging the generation gap. As far as the Internet is concerned, it has a worldwide network which connects almost most parts of the globe. Internet not only bridges the actual gap between the continents but also the rift between individuals and communities. It makes people socially interactive. It provides a wide platform to put forth thoughts, ideologies, spread knowledge and bring about mass awareness. This has moulded the world into what most articulate as the global village. It has turned out to be a robust tool which has assisted in the simplification of the complexity of today’s social life. The Internet has an advantage over books. Its ready availability and upkeep with the expeditious life makes it more proficient than books. But both of these tools have their own relevance in the modern world and need to be developed and utilized in a lucrative manner.

Conclusion Social life is greatly influenced by communication. The means of communication have kept changing with times. At the early stages, books have played a significant role in evolving communication. But with the abrupt lifestyle, it is being witnessed that books have stepped down from the superior position and have paved way for the modern technology-the Internet to subdue the communication media. From the various facts the paper provides, it can be vividly inferred that there is indeed a shift in the tools of communication. The main reason for this shift is the change in the patterns in the social lifestyle of an individual which is responsible for this modification. The Paradigm Shift of Communication from the Physical World to the Virtual Realm 81 The modern day social life is very complex. Complexity is in terms of everything becoming interrelated. Social life is not only a built of social but also political and economic factors. To deal with such complex structures, we need a system of communication which is speedy, efficient and can connect to more people within a short duration. Thus, people rely more on Internet than books. Hence, the effect of paradigm shift in communication is the result of these varied causes. Though people rely on the virtual means of communication, it must be looked upon that the material mode does not become extinct. Because, even in the modern era, a section of the population still prefer books as a medium of exchanging ideologies and worldly know-how. They get connected to books easily. Also a particular section of world population is illiterate as far as computer knowledge is concerned. Thus, through the paper it is suggested that protection of the existence of the physical structure of communication should be taken as a key concern and continue to prevail as a tool of communication.

References Books Before and After the Gutenberg Bible (hrc.utexas.edu/educator/modules/gutenberg/books/) Brown S., Society’s self-destructive addiction to faster living, January 4, 2014 (nypost.com/2014/01/04/societys-addiction-to-faster-living-is-destroying-us-doctor/) Craib I., Modern Social Theory, Routledge, 2015 (books.google.co.in/books?id=P8JcCgAAQBAJ&pg=PA58&dq=modern+social+life&hl=en&sa=X&ved= 0ahUKEwil-tea PvLAhXHQpQKHTM_ChMQ6AEIPDAG#v=onepage&q=modern%20social%20life&f=false) Darnton R., What is History of Books?, 1982 (dash.harvard.edu/bitstream/handle/1/3403038/darnton_historybooks.pdf?sequence=2) History and Development of the Internet (techiwarehouse.com/engine/2208f293/History-and-Development-of-the-Internet) MacLuhan M., Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man, Mit Press, 1964 Marson C., The Evolution of the Internet, Network World, Feb 9, 2009 (networkworld.com/article/2870267/lan-wan/the-evolution-of-the-internet.html) Valik D., Innovation of Communication and Information Technologies, June 2013 (packtpub.com/books/content/innovation-communication-and-information-technologies) 12

Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society

Shilpa Udayshankar*

Abstract

After Independence owing to various factors, the feeling of Nationalism had got disintegrated in India. Especially, the Indian middle class had got too busy caring for personal benefits and advantages. It has been least participative and disinterested to stand up for any social or national cause. But with the beginning of the 21st Century, the trends have started to change. Something has changed this time round. The docile, half asleep animal is stirring itself. Time and again in the last decade, this dormant middle class had shown that it is capable of braving water cannons, shouting slogans, holding protest marches and courting arrest across the country in a manner as to say 'Enough-is-Enough'. There are tangible reasons for this turnaround. This awakening of the Aam Aadmi is boosted by two very important developments. The first is instant connectivity. Almost every member of the middle class possesses a mobile. And a large part of it is an avid user of social media. Today, this is a class which is in instant and constant conversation with itself. Secondly, it now cohabits an era of 24X7 news. Its pan-Indian dispersal is unified by the relentless national dissemination of news, of which again it is the single biggest consumer. This paper presents an alternate perspective to the idea of Globalization. We propose that there cannot be a more credible testimony to the idea of Globalization than these trends in the society that have contributed to the rise of the Nationalist identity among the citizens of India. Moving ahead we discuss at length a very critical consequence of the great Indian middle class riding along the Highway of Technology, on the vehicle called Social Networking, to the destination called Globalization. This consequence is called the Digital Footprint. We discuss the concept of Digital Footprint. How it is being already used in the modern world. The dangers awaiting humanity if it ends up being misused and exploited. We encourage that the governments gear up to regulate the generation and use of Digital Footprint to avert these dangers. We propose that humanitarians and technocrats will have to work together to tackle this risk before it becomes a reality. Keywords: Indian middle class, Internet, Social media, Mobile, Mobile internet, Digital footprint, Anna Hazare, India against corruption, Nirbhaya.

* Assistant Professor, English Department, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society 83 Introduction The demographics of India is fast changing. Closely connected due to the penetration of the Internet, and empowered by the platform called Social Media, the Indian Middle class, after being dormant close to half a century - has finally started to assert its rights and demand justice. In a fashion as if to say "Enough is Enough", there are several examples in the last decade where-in the Middle class has stood up for its rights and against injustice / crime. In the process this society has left behind a lot of traces of private and/or personal information in the big bad world of Internet. These traces are poetically (also technically accepted) called as the Digital Footprint. Put in a nutshell, this is how Webopedia describes Digital Footprint: On the Internet a digital footprint is the word used to describe the trail, traces or "footprints" that people leave online. This is information transmitted online, such as forum registration, e-mails and attachments, uploading videos or digital images and any other form of transmission of information - all of which leaves traces of personal information about yourself available to others online. The crony capitalists have already started to use this digital footprint as a valuable resource in the benefit of their business interests. There is a potential risk that this resource could be used for malevolent activities by anti social elements. Today is the right time to try and understand the potential of digital footprint and take steps to ensure that it is not misused or exploited.

Objectives o To discuss the new trend emerging in Indian urban middle class in the last decade. A surge towards overcoming a cultural, religious, linguistic, geographical, racial divisions in society and get united based on our ancestors idea of vasudhaiva kutumbakam (olqèkSo dqVqEcde~). o The role of Technology and especially Internet (especially Social Networking) in bringing Indians closer to each other. We perceive this phenomenon as a manifestation of the idea called Globalization, riding on the vehicle of technology. o To show how Social Networking has proved to be an Express Highway leading towards Globalization. o To introduce the concept of Digital Footprint - the side effect of Social Networking. How it can be used, misused and exploited. o A proposal to work towards synergizing Humanities with Technology which will help it to emerge as a precise science equipped to tackle the interdisciplinary complexities of the generation.

Hypothesis We interpret the idea of Globalization as a social tendency towards overcoming the geographical, cultural, linguistic, religious barriers and uniting based on introspection of commonalities of interests and curiosities. As a consequence, building a society without barriers which understands that good of each individual lies in the good of all.

The Awakening of the Indian Middle Class Not so long ago, even the presence of the Indian middle class was perceived as insignificant. Hard-nosed political strategists dismissed it as of little consequence, and they could not be faulted. 84 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Most members of this class were self-righteously disinterested in politics; they voted but sporadically; their vision rarely transcended their immediate familial and municipal concerns; and their numbers constituted neither a tactically consolidated bloc, nor a significant numerical size. But something has changed this time round. The docile, half asleep animal is stirring itself. And nobody is really sure of the consequences of ignoring its importance. There are tangible reasons for this turnaround. If we take a strictly economic criterion of defining a middle class person as anybody who belongs to a household which has a monthly income of between Rs. 20,000 and Rs. 100,000 a month, the middle class starts to look very substantial. Estimates reveal that as per this criterion the size of the middle class in 1996 was a paltry 25 million. Today, it is in excess of 160 million. And, by 2015, its numbers are expected to go up to 267 million. This is a very significant critical mass. It is pan-Indian in scale. It has a certain homogeneity, which while not entirely insulated from narrower regional or local considerations, gives it an identifiable commonality of interest. It is educated. It has similar aspirations, and similar expectation levels. These attributes have been boosted by two very important developments. The first is instant connectivity. Almost every member of the middle class possesses a mobile. And a large part of it is an avid user of social media. Today, this is a class which is in instant and constant conversation with itself. Secondly, it now cohabits an era of 24x7 news. Its pan-Indian dispersal is unified by the relentless national dissemination of news. Political pundits have also carefully watched the slow, selective yet definitive foray of this class in matters outside its traditionally narrow ken of interests.

The first signs of this were visible in the Jessica Lal case when Manu Sharma, the accused, who had killed her in 1999 in front of dozens of witnesses, was acquitted in February 2006. For the first time, through candle light vigils and other public displays of anger, the middle class publicly expressed its anger, leading to the verdict being reversed. More recently, the same nationwide mobilisation was visible during the peak of the Anna Hazare campaign in 2011 against corruption. The large crowds that thronged his public meetings consisted of large segments of the middle class. There were over 4 lakh people supporting his campaign on Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society 85 Facebook. One and a half crore calls were made to the designated phone number in Mumbai in his support. Then the Nirbhaya rape case in New Delhi in December 2012 again saw this class braving water cannons, shouting slogans, holding protest marches and courting arrest across the country. The real challenge before the middle class is to contribute to national development with an equitable and comprehensive alternative vision that compels the political class to rethink its strategies on governance, populism, demagoguery, false promises, social divisiveness and electoral and financial malfeasance. Only time will tell if the anger of the middle class on issues of lack of governance, corruption, women's safety and price rise will be able to contribute to something constructive, or else it will be exploited, subsumed, subverted or derailed. For the first time since 1947 the middle class is a player in determining the nation's destiny. The time has come for it to make its choices carefully.

The Role of Social Media Anna Hazare's 'August Kranti' on Facebook - a Case Study: Mr. Anna Hazare's anti-corruption fast was planned for 16th August, 2011. He was arrested on the morning of 16th August and sent to Tihar Jail on the same day. This was the day on which traction started which continued for the next 15 days on the Facebook. The page related to this movement was - facebook.com / IndiACor Sandeep Amar from India Digital Review has presented a detailed study of the event. Here is the statistic presented in the report. o 304 million page impressions for news feed o 1.9 million likes of news feed o 0.33 million comments o 4.3 million active users(non-unique) These numbers were unprecedented for a 16 day period for Facebook in the world. And this is just the data for the IndiACor page, the protest was widespread on Facebook and that engagement was 10 times bigger than the data we have.

Trend of post views from 14th August, 2011 to 27th August, 2011 (when the fast closure was announced) 86 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Trend of Likes & Comments of posts from 14th August, 2011 to 27th August, 2011(when the fast closure was announced) The movement categorized by many as the "second struggle for independence" was truly an awakening for the entire nation. As most of the citizens contributed in their own ways - some people reached Ram Lila Maidan, some people joined protests on streets and some people came out and offered to get arrested. Similarly Indian users on Facebook followed IndiACor - they shared, liked and commented on posts from IndiACor, from news sites, from other users and participated in this momentous campaign. A big section of news media agreed that social media played a big role in promoting the movement. Especially when Mr. Hazare was being moved from one police station to another - the updates from social media guided protesters to reach at the right locations. The government claimed that the protest is driven by the Facebook and Twitter generation and no one will come on the street. Well, they were wrong - from Facebook to Twitter to India Gate to Ram Lila maidan - people reached out everywhere to stand up against corruption. This trend has been characteristics of every event that has portrayed the awakening of the Indian middle class over the last decade. The great Indian middle class has been riding along the Highway of Technology, on the vehicle called Social Networking, to the destination called Globalization.

Penetration of Internet and Social Media India's digital landscape is evolving fast, Internet use appears to be accelerating, with the latest figures indicating 30 million new users since January alone - an increase of 14% in just 6 months. Social media use is also growing, with Facebook alone adding 16 million new users since January 2014 - that's roughly one new user every second. The top story in this report is the dominance of mobile connectivity in India. 70% of internet page views in India originate from mobile devices, while 87% of all Facebook users access the platform through mobile. Crucially, it's this mobile connectivity that's driving India's Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society 87 digital growth, and the majority of new internet users access exclusively through mobile. The testimony to this fact in best expressed in this must read article written in the context of the just concluded Loksabha elections. If you think the performance of BJP in UP was magical, the magic wand was nothing but the mobile phone (and of course Amit Shah was e magician wielding the magic wand )

Modi is the hero, mobile phone is the heroine in UP.

Google+ appears to be India's second most popular social platform, with 35% of internet users claiming to have signed in at least once in the past 30 days. Twitter and LinkedIn follow, while Orkut still appears in India's top 5 platforms. 88 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Digital Footprints as the Consequence "A digital footprint is the trail of data that is left behind by users on digital services. There are two main classifications for digital footprints: passive and active. A passive digital footprint is created when data is collected about an action without any client activation, whereas active digital footprints are created when personal data is released deliberately by a user for the purpose of sharing information about oneself." - Wikipedia. The social graph is a collection of data points noting what you and your friends (Facebook and Twitter friends that is) like on the Internet. The social graph is best represented by the ubiquitous "Facepile" - the Facebook widget that lets you know that Uday Shankar, Dibyajyoti and 300 of your friends also like something on whatever website you happen to be on. "The entire Facebook business model is based on the effective use of your data. Here is the deal: they give you a free social media platform to use and in turn sell advertising and insights based on what they learn about you." - Bernard Marr Influencer, Best-Selling Author, Keynote Speaker and Consultant in Strategy, Performance Management, Analytics, KPIs and Big Data This allows Facebook to sell very targeted advertising - e.g. A professor living in Mahantesh Nagar, Belgaum is a fan of Salman Khan and Sachin Tendulkar - is presently interested in Android based mobile phones with 5 inch display. This kind of knowledge is a marketeer's dream! 333333333333333333 Digital Footprint and its Effects on the Society 89 Regulating the use of Digital Footprint These emerging technologies offer immense opportunities and have a potential to influence a paradigm shift to various entities like businesses, governments, health care, art, entertainment, technology, human relationships, religion / spiritualities etc. Just like in the past when any technological breakthrough has been made there have been potential benevolent and malevolent applications, or in other words - opportunities and risks associated. Discarding the technology with the considerations of the risks involved is never a option. We believe that day has arrived when the Social media needs the service of humanitarians. We here in list a few potential applications of information extracted from consumers of Internet and Social media and leave it to the reader to classify them as good and bad. o Healthcare: Social media internet has a potential of providing a huge data concerned with the health and ailments of people across the globe. This combined with the personal data of people like age, background, lifestyle, food interests, location etc has the potential of revealing hidden patterns of related to diseases. A great service to humanity. o Government Policy making: It will be great platform for governments to understand its people, trends in the society, public grievances and complaints. o Protection of peace and harmony: Rise of tendencies like intolerance and hatred can be traced to their roots and tackled more effectively. o Media: Providing news to individuals as per their interest. Fans of a Politician can be sourced with news articles praising him and critics can be given articles cursing the leader. This will ensure loyalty of the audience to the channel / website / Newspaper. People do not like news that disagrees with what they believe in. o Targeted and Customised advertisement as per the individuals interests to ensure maximum impact. o Psychological conditioning of employees and society as a whole to increase performance and throughput that will ensure more prosperity and wealth creation for the nation. One thing is for sure. These are just tip of the iceberg and the potential is much large. We need active participation of humanitarians to understand it and propose ideas to encourage the beneficial applications and regulate the malevolent applications. Of course it cannot be done without the expertise of the technocrats.

Conclusion Technology, over the bygone decades, in its various manifestations like Telephone, Television, Telecommunication, Internet etc. has facilitated in bringing the people closer to each other by its virtue of enabling exchange of Information and emotions. This bringing closer of the people and societies across boundaries - cultural or geographical - is defined by the term Globalization. In this generation, no Civilization can flourish without Globalization. Hence globalization is no more a choice for a society. It's imperative. Thus technology has gone beyond expectation in influencing the social and cultural blueprint of the human race. What lies ahead is beyond comprehension of either the Social scientists or the Technocrats. Hence it's the call of the time that the Humanitarians and Technocrats come together in a synergy like never before to guide the civilizations. 90 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey References Sachdev, Ruchi., Impact Of Social Networking Sites(Sns) On The Youth Of India : A Bird's Eye View. College of Management Studies, Kanpur (UP) India. Shih, Clara., The Facebook Era: Tapping Online Social Networks to Build Better Products, Reach New Audiences and Sell More Stuff. Jain, Madhur Raj; Gupta, Palak; Anand, Nitika., Changing Mindset Of Youth On Social Issues: A Study Of Delhi-Ncr Youth. Jagannath International Management School, New Delhi, India.

Web References Cooper Smith, JUL 18, 2014, Business Insider. SOCIAL BIG DATA: Each Social Network Is Using A Very Different Data Lens To Understand Users And Target Advertising -http://www.businessinsider.com.au/social-network-big-data-lens- 2014-7 Justo Hidalgo, Slideshare, Aug 05, 2010, Digital Footprint and Social Media Analysis http://www.slideshare.net/justohidalgo/ digital-footprint-and-social-media-analysisLisa Ostrikoff, Hufingston Post, May 23, 2013, How Your Digital Footprint Can Hurt You? http://www.huffingtonpost.ca/lisa- ostrikoff/digital-reputation_b_3325957.html Pavan K. Varma, TOI Nov 23, 2013, India's middle class awakes http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/home/opinion/edit- page/Indias-middle-class-awakes/articleshow/26221440.cms Simon Kemp. July 09 2014, We Are Social, Digital and Mobile in India 2014 Sandeep, Amar, India Digital Review, Anna Hazare's 'August Kranti' on Facebook - a Case Study http:// www.indiadigitalreview.com/article/anna-hazares-august-kranti-facebook-%E2%80%93-case-study Bernard Marr, May 02, 2013, LinkedIn. How Facebook Exploits Your Private Information -https://www.linkedin.com/today/ post/article/20130502052254-64875646-how-facebook-exploits-your-private-information /http://wearesocial.net/blog/2014/07/social-digital-mobile-india-2014/ 13

The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System

Sindhu Chandan Singh

Abstract

Information and Communication Technology (ICT) plays a major role in the education sector. Education comprises online, distance and part time education. There are boundless applications of ICT in modern world. This paper emphasizes the role of Information and Communication Technology in the education field. Traditional education system process includes activities like admission, teaching, Personal Contact Programmers, conducting exams, preparing results, storing various records etc. Everything was done in manual process which consumed lot of time. The emergence of ICT in education made this task easy and accurate. ICT can play a major role in all the activities by providing lot a of benefit to students, teachers, parents and universities itself. ICT can be used for providing education to the people who are not able to attend school due to various reasons. ICT plays a vital role in formal and non-formal forms of education. Over the last decade, use of ICT has changed many things in the field of education. The use of ICT in education will not transform the function of education instead it will bring efficiency in the work. It works as a major tool in improving the knowledge of teachers and students. Nowadays ICT, especially internet, plays an inevitable role in process of assimilating technology into the educational activities. This work focuses on implementation of ICTs in all levels of education and provides information about how it will improve the Quality of education. Key words: Education, Technology, Quality, Transform

Introduction IT has become a buzzword while talking about technology and its applications. IT is used in various business and management functions but not in improving the quality of education. Quality of education has been issue of concern in the absence of standard parameters to measure the quality. The hardware, software, the methods and know how required or used in acquiring, storing, processing and displaying data and information is collectively known as Information Technology (IT). On other hand, many developments and achievements took place in communication

* Assistant Professor, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 92 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey technology sector after the Second World War. Hardware, know how, programs and the methods used in ensuring that message is transmitted correctly, efficiently and cost effectively are collectively known as Communication Technology (CT). Both these technologies became complementary to each other, which means progress in one alone is not much beneficial. Hence, IT and CT started moving together and a new term was coined named as Information and communication Technology (ICT). Convergence of these two technologies gave birth to ICT. Education system includes formal and non-formal forms of education at various levels. Teaching is imparting knowledge or skill whereas learning is skill acquisition and increased fluency. Usage of ICT is one of the way by which India‘s large population base can be effectively reached. Moreover, enhancing the quality and delivery of services through ICT, especially in case of developing relations with citizen, Government will be better positioned. Passive learning occurs when students use their senses to take in information from a lecture, reading assignment, or audio visual. Traditional lecture is not an effective learning environment for many of our students because so many students do not participate actively during a traditional lecture. This is the mode of learning most commonly present in classrooms whereas active learning involves the student through participation and investment of energy in all three phases of the learning process (input, operations, and feedback). This type of learning is more apt to stimulate higher cognitive processes and critical thinking. In the past few years, there has been a paradigm shift in curriculum where teacher acts as a facilitator in a student-centred learning. In Student-centred learning focus is on the student’s needs, abilities, interests, and learning styles with the teacher as a facilitator of learning. Here students have to be actively responsible participants in the learning process. Teacher plays a key role in the whole process; whereas in case of ICT-based education, various ICT tools are supplemented to make the teaching learning interesting and engrossing. A survey says that there was a sense of pride created and interest generated among the teachers and students for gaining ICT and its privileges. ICT has the potential to remove the barriers that are causing the problems of low rate of education in any country. ICT as a tool can overcome the issues of cost, less number of teachers, and poor quality of education as well as to overcome time and distance barriers. This research work will focus on how learning through ICT can be made effective and easier for improving the quality of both formal and non-formal forms of education. ICT increases the flexibility of delivery of education so that learners can access knowledge anytime and from anywhere. It can influence the way students are taught and how they learn, as now, the processes are learner driven and not by teachers. This in turn would better prepare the learners for lifelong learning as well as to contribute to the industry. It can improve the quality of learning and thus contribute to the economy. It provides several tangible and intangible benefits for all stakeholders involved in the economic growth of the country.

What Is ICT? Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) are referred to as the varied collection of technological gear and resources which are brought into use to communicate. They also used to generate, distribute, collect and administer information. ICT is a force that has changed many aspects of the way we live. Information and Communication Technologies consist of the hardware, software, networks, and media for collection, storage, processing, transmission and presentation of information (voice, data, text, images), as well as related services. ICTs can be divided into two components: Information and Communication Infrastructure (ICI) which refers to physical telecommunication systems and networks (cellular, broadcast, cable, satellite, postal); and the services that utilize those (Internet, voice, mail, radio, and television); and Information Technology The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 93 (IT) that refers to the hardware and software of information collection, storage, processing, and presentation. The concept of a “Digital Divide” has been around almost as long as ICT has been publicly available. While traditionally, it has come to mean a division in society, based on socio-economic factors, this does not ‘paint the entire picture’. Introducing ICT as a tool to support the education sector has initiated substantial discussions since the late 1990s. A decade ago, the emphasis was on Technical and Vocational Education and Training and training teachers. During the last few years, an increasing number of international development agencies have embraced the potential of ICT to support the education sector. UNESCO has played a major role in spearheading the Education for all initiative to harness the potential of ICT. The widely subscribed Dakar Framework for Action recognizes that, ‘these technologies (ICTs) have great potential for knowledge dissemination, effective learning and the development of more efficient education services’. When looking at the integration of ICT to support the achievement of educational objectives, it can be found that after almost a decade of using ICT to stimulate development, it is not yet fully integrated in development activities and awareness raising is still required. The main objectives of the paper are to evaluate the importance of ICT in higher education and to analyze the government initiatives for development of ICT in higher education.

The Top 10 Global Trends in ICT and Education 1. Mobile Learning: New advances in hardware and software are making mobile “smart phones”, indispensible tools. Just as cell phones have leap frogged fixed line technology in the telecommunications industry; it is likely that mobile devices with internet access and computing capabilities will soon overtake personal computers as the information appliance of choice in the classroom. 2. Cloud computing: Applications are increasingly moving off the stand alone desk top computer and increasingly onto server farms accessible through the Internet. The implications of this trend for education systems are huge; they will make cheaper information appliances available which do not require the processing power or size of the PC. The challenge will be providing the ubiquitous connectivity to access information sitting in the “cloud”. 3. One-to-One computing: The trend in classrooms around the world is to provide an information appliance to every learner and create learning environments that assume universal access to the technology. Whether the hardware involved is one laptop per child (OLPC), or - increasingly - a net computer, smart phone, or the re-emergence of the tablet, classrooms should prepare for the universal availability of personal learning devices. 4. Ubiquitous learning: With the emergence of increasingly robust connectivity infrastructure and cheaper computers, school systems around the world are developing the ability to provide learning opportunities to students “anytime, anywhere”. This trend requires a rethinking of the traditional 40 minute lesson. In addition to hardware and Internet access, it requires the availability of virtual mentors or teachers, and/or opportunities for peer- to- peer and self- paced, deeper learning. 5. Gaming: A recent survey by the Pew Internet and American Life Project per the Horizon Report found that massively multi player and other online game experience is extremely common among young people and that games offer an opportunity for increased social interaction and civic engagement among youth. The phenomenal success of games with a focus on active participation, built in incentives and interaction suggests that current 94 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey educational methods are not falling short and that educational games could more effectively attract the interest and attention of learners. 6. Personalized learning: Education systems are increasingly investigating the use of technology to better understand a student’s knowledge base from prior learning and to tailor teaching to both address learning gaps as well as learning styles. This focus transforms a classroom from one that teaches to the middle, to one that adjusts content and pedagogy based on individual student needs – both strong and weak. 7. Redefinition of learning spaces: The ordered classroom of 30 desks in rows of 5 may quickly become a relic of the industrial age as schools around the world are re-thinking the most appropriate learning environments to foster collaborative, cross-disciplinary, student’s centred learning. Concepts such as greater use of light, colours, and circular tables, individual spaces for students and teachers, and smaller open learning spaces for project-based learning are increasingly emphasized. 8. Teacher-generated open content: OECD school systems are increasingly empowering teachers and networks of teachers to both identify and create the learning resources that they find most effective in the classroom. Many online texts allow teachers to edit, add to, or otherwise customize material for their own purposes, so that their students receive a tailored copy that exactly suits the style and pace of the course. These resources in many cases complement the official textbook and may, in the years to come, supplant the textbook as the primary learning source for students. Such activities often challenge traditional notions of intellectual property and copyright. 9. Smart portfolio assessment: The collection, management, sorting, and retrieving of data related to learning will help teachers to better understand learning gaps and customize content and pedagogical approaches. Also, assessment is increasingly moving toward frequent formative assessments which lend itself to real-time data and less on high-pressure exams as the mark of excellence. Tools are increasingly available to students to gather their work together in a kind of online portfolio; whenever they add a tweet, blog post, or photo to any online service, it will appear in their personal portfolio which can be both peer and teacher assessed. 10. Teacher managers/mentors: The role of the teacher in the classroom is being transformed from that of the font of knowledge to an instructional manager helping to guide students through individualized learning pathways, identifying relevant learning resources, creating collaborative learning opportunities, and providing insight and support both during formal class time and outside of the designated 40 minute instruction period. This shift is easier said than done and ultimately the success or failure of technology projects in the classroom hinge on the human factor and the willingness of a teacher to step into unchartered territory. These trends are expected to continue and to challenge many of the delivery models fundamental to formal education as it is practised in most countries. ICTs can provide new and innovative means to bring educational opportunities to greater number of children of all ages, especially those who have historically been excluded, such as populations in rural and remote-rural areas, girl children facing social barriers, and children with disabilities and other compulsions. It is probably in this domain that traditional ICTs like radio, television, and audio cassettes were first deployed in the education space. In India, distance learning offered by institutions like National Institute of Open Learning (NIOS) and Indira Gandhi National Open University have used a combination of print and audio-visual material as well as traditional face- to-face interactions to deliver their content. The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 95 Higher Education Scenario in India Survey covers entire Higher Education Institutions in the country. Institutions are categorized in 3 broad Categories; University, College and Stand-Alone Institutions. There are 757 Universities, 38056 Colleges and 11922 Stand Alone Institutions and out of them 716 Universities, 29506 Colleges and 6837 Stand Alone Institutions have responded during the survey. • Type - Wise Number of Universities Type of Universities Number of Universities Central University 43 Central Open University 1 Institute of National Importance 69 Others 6 State Public University 316 Institute under State Legislature Act 5 State Open University 13 State Private University 176 State Private Open University 1 Deemed University-Government 37 Deemed University-Government Aided 11 Deemed University-Private 79 Grand Total 757 MHRD GOVT OF INDIA, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional) • Level-wise Enrolment in various types of Universities Ph.D. M.Phil. Post Under PG Diploma Certificate Integrated Graduate Graduate Diploma Central University 17966 3499 97978 535705 3659 8071 3096 7946 Central Open University 59 17 269961 360625 17510 15397 146 0 Institute of National 22022 161 39095 100837 79 80 18 14599 Importance State Public University 31580 12017 979268 1227361 77554 99127 20099 33089 State Open University 45 0 211898 763099 6773 65575 26221 0 State Private University 5969 661 97112 303794 10671 54147 205 21304 State Private Open 0 0 10 27 0 0 0 0 University Institute under State 296 0 600 1430 257 211 49 0 Legislature Act 96 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Deemed University- 6082 340 12051 18755 753 1729 811 3003 Government Deemed University- 2003 647 32528 45918 942 2509 3486 103 Government Aided Deemed University- 12178 1321 135638 481357 8097 12312 1537 11604 Private Others 43 0 632 4595 0 0 0 0

MHRD GOVT OF INDIAN, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional)

MHRD GOVT OF INDIA, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional) • Gender Distribution in Enrolment in Different Type of University

Type of University Male Female Central University 364650 313270 Central Open University 358925 304790 Institute of National Importance 142836 34055 State Public University 1301612 1178483 State Open University 616970 456641 State Private University 354302 139561 State Private Open University 15 22 Institute under State Legislature Act 1499 1344 Deemed University-Government 32168 11356 Deemed University-Government Aided 50911 37225 Deemed University-Private 422058 241986 Others 1856 3414 The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 97 MHRD GOVT OF INDIA, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional)

MHRD GOVT OF INDIA, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional) • Student Enrolment by Levels

Level Male Female Enrolment Male % Female % % of Total Ph.D. 67330 45482 112812 59.68 40.32 0.3390525 M.Phil. 13676 18695 32371 42.25 57.75 0.0972899 Post Graduate 1847651 1961671 3809322 48.50 51.50 11.448784 Under Graduate 14088649 12487491 26576140 53.01 46.99 79.873657 PG Diploma 109371 77177 186548 58.63 41.37 0.5606635 Diploma 1618329 629101 2247430 72.01 27.99 6.7545721 Certificate 78597 97310 175907 44.68 55.32 0.5286823 Integrated 83101 49091 132192 62.86 37.14 0.3972984

MHRD GOVT OF INDIA , AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional)

MHRD GOVT OF INDIA, AISHE Report 2014-15 (provisional) 98 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Major ICT Initiatives in Higher Education The higher education system in India continues to suffer due to inadequate access to technology and inequity. However, the application of ICT in higher education has not only brought about diversification in higher education but has also fostered new avenues for international mobility of traditional and non-traditional students (Kirsebom, 1998). While it is believed that ICT can transform the educational scenario in the country, it should address the needs and perform multiple roles in higher education to benefit all stakeholders. This sense of urgency and the continuous implementation of ICT in higher education has led many universities and colleges into a more action-oriented adaptation approach (Schmidtlein & Taylor 2000). Pedro (2001) observes that the focus is often more on the end product than on the premises and processes behind a well- functioning incorporation of ICT in teaching and learning. India has taken up major initiatives in terms of content delivery and furthering education through Information and Communication Technology. For instance Gyan Darshan was launched in 2000 to broadcast educational programs for school kids, university students, and adults. Similarly Gyan Vani was another such important step which broadcast programs contributed by institutions such as IGNOU and IITs. Under the UGC country wide classroom initiative, education programs are broadcast on Gyan Darshan and Doordarshan’s National Channel (DD1) everyday. E-Gyankosh which aims at preserving digital learning resources is a knowledge repository launched by IGNOU in 2005. Almost 95% of IGNOU’s printed material has been digitized and uploaded on the repository. The National Programme for Technology Enhanced Learning (NPTEL) launched in 2001 is another joint initiative of IITs and IISc which promotes education through technology. Moreover, the ambitious National Mission on Education through ICT was launched by the government to harness ICT’s potential throughout the length and breadth of the country. In 2009, the government approved the landmark “National Mission on Education through ICT” scheme. The National Mission on Education through ICT is centrally sponsored scheme submitted by the Ministry of HRD and approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA). The Mission has planned a variety of initiatives aimed at developing and standardizing digital content for Indian higher education segment. The Mission envisions catering to the learning needs of 500 million people in the country.

Technology Trends in Indian Universities Technology will play a bigger role in transforming higher education imparted by universities to the next level. The tools help to create a social, highly collaborative and personalized environment with innovative solutions that will enhance the way students learn, communicate, and collaborate and study- both, on and off campus. Some of the exciting Technology trends in Indian Universities are: • Digitization of Books (E-Text Books) There is an increased trend towards creation of a digital repository of books to create a digital learning environment for students. The digital version of the books embedded with text, pictures along with video, simulations and visualizations help students learn the concepts in an interactive way. The National mission on Education through ICT plans to generate new online course content for UG, PG and Doctoral education. Efforts are already underway to prepare course content for 130 courses (UG and PG). The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 99 • Content Delivery using IT/ICT Higher Education is purely a content-driven play where educational content is delivered through innovative use of ICT. There is an increased trend in higher education institutes to render content through Radio, TV and Satellite • Open Education Resources Many Indian universities are contemplating Technology enabled free access of education resources. AICTE - Indian National Digital Library in Engineering and Technology (AICTE - INDEST) is a consortium set up by the Ministry of Human Resource to enhance greater access and generate annual savings in access of bibliographic databases. UGC has also launched its Digital Library Consortium to provide access to peer reviewed journals and bibliographic databases covering subjects such as arts, humanities, technology and sciences • Virtual Technical University The National mission on Education through ICT is working on a war foot to establish a virtual technical university to impart training to UG/PG students along with new teachers. National mission on Education through ICT • Mobility With the proliferation of mobile phones on campus, colleges everywhere are compelled to capitalize on feature-rich phones that are capable of much more than just voice calls. Adoption of the BlackBerry, iPhone and other smart devices that have Internet access allows students and faculty to perform a wide range of assignments. Tasks like administration, sharing class notes, downloading lectures, instant messaging, etc., are possible anywhere cell phone service is available. Mobile phones are also being used to access computer files from remote locations. With services like “Soonr”, students who have forgotten to bring a assignment to class can use their cell phone to access the completed work on their home computer and show it to the professor. • Social Learning The emergence of Web 2.0 and social networking such as blogs and wikis, as well as new online video repository and delivery websites such as YouTube, iTunes U and Big Think is influencing a new trend in higher education. The emergence of smart phones such as the iPhone and other intelligent devices has enhanced mobile learning (referred to as m-learning). These technologies create new channels for content delivery, online video expansion and podcasting. Also, the adoption of virtual reality websites such as “Second Life” has provided higher-education institutions with new venues for class gatherings and learning. A combination of Web 2.0 tools viz., Blogs, Wikis, Podcasts, Mashups, and Social Networking Communities are transforming the traditional learning environment into something more social and personalized. While traditional Learning Management Systems (LMS) like Blackboard, Sakai, Moodle or Web CT are course-centered and driven by faculty, the new trend in education is to create a “learner-centric” system. ICT role in higher education is solicited for improving quality, widening access and enhancing operational efficiency across all functions in higher education sector and to create new dynamics in higher education both at micro and macro levels (J.Meenakumari, krishnaveni)Introduction of ICTs in the higher education has profound implications for the whole education process ranging from investment to use of technologies in dealing with key issues of access, equity, management, efficiency, pedagogy, quality, research and innovation. ICT applications provide institutions with a competitive edge by offering enhanced services to students and faculty, driving greater efficiencies and creating enriched learning experiences. 100 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Objectives • To emphasise the reaching of information and communication technology to the higher education society. • To find out that ICT is a better substitute to traditional education system. • To find function of ICT in higher education system. • To find out current enrolment status of students in higher education system.

Factors Affecting Adoption of ICT in Education There is a worldwide need felt for integrating ICT into education in order to improve the pedagogy to reflect the societal change (Plomp et al, 2007). The main goals of ICT adoption in the education field are reducing costs per student, making education more affordable and accessible, increasing enrollments, improving course quality, and meeting the needs of local employers (Ozdemir and Abrevaya, 2007). Low overheads and cost efficiency are attracting many private players in the field of Internet enabled education. This is also being driven by technological advances, competitive pressures and the positive experiences of many early adopters (McGorry, 2002). The main factors that affect the adoption of ICT in education are the mission or goal of a particular system, programs and curricula, teaching/learning strategies and techniques, learning material and resources, communication and interaction, support and delivery systems, students, tutors, staff and other experts, management, housing and equipment, and evaluation (UNESCO, 2002). National vision, supported by coherent strategies and actions is the most important factor in integrating ICT in education. Successful implementation of ICT requires strong national support from government and local support from relevant institutions and education authorities (Cross and Adam, 2007). Sharma (2003) explains that the political powers of any nations affect the introduction of any new technology. Sharma (2003) and Amutabi and Oketch (2003) explain that cost is an important issue that decides and guides the adoption and growth of Information and Communication Technology especially in developing 10 countries. Ozdemir and Abrevaya (2007) mention that the institutions, which are granted public status and are supported by government funds, as well as those, that are larger in size, are the ones to adopt the new technologies to support education. However, it is also observed that since technology adoption involves high fixed costs, institutes, which implemented such technology, did not upgrade it as time progressed. The presence of an ICT champion is necessary at all levels of the system. The strong presence of such leadership is evident wherever ICT integration has been initiated successfully (Mason, 2000). Along with ICT training, one needs an ICT related support mechanism to gradually induce the integration (Lai & Pratt, 2004). This is needed as many teachers in face of technical difficulties may tend to revert to the older teaching (non-ICT based) methods. Teachers need support in using and integrating ICT into the curriculum and teaching methods (Lai & Pratt, 2004; Amutabi and Oketch, 2003; McGorry, 2002). Teachers, who perceive greater ICT-related support being available to them, use technologies in their teaching much better (Tondeur et al, 2007).

Potential Drawbacks of using ICT in Education Although ICT offers a whole lot of benefits, there are some risks of using ICT in education which have to be mitigated through proper mechanisms. They are: 1. It may create a digital divide within class as students who are more familiar with ICT will reap more benefits and learn faster than those who are not as technology savvy. The Reach of Information and Communication Technology in Higher Education System 101 2. It may shift the attention from the primary goal of the learning process to developing ICT skills, which is the secondary goal. 3. It can affect the bonding process between the teacher and the student as ICT becomes a communication tool rather than face to face conversation and thus the transactional distance is increased. 4. Also, since not all teachers are experts with ICT, they may be lax in updating the course content online which can slow down the learning among students. 5. The potential of plagiarism is high as student can copy information rather than learning and developing their own skills. 6. There is a need for training all stakeholders in ICT. 7. The cost of hardware and software can be very high.

Conclusion Information and Communication Technology has no doubt brought about tremendous change in education, but we are yet to achieve the desired level of IT adoption in higher education in the country. The optimal utilization of opportunities arising due to diffusion of ICTs in higher education system presents enormous challenge. Nonetheless, it has become an indispensable support system for higher education as it could address some of the challenges facing higher education system in the country. Moreover, it can provide access to education regardless of time and geographical barriers. ICT can affect the delivery of education and enable wider access to the same. In addition, it will increase flexibility so that learners can access the education regardless of time and geographical barriers. It can influence the way students are taught and how they learn. The use of ICT in education can increase access to learning opportunities. It can help to enhance the quality of education with advanced teaching methods, improve learning outcomes and enable reform or better management of education systems. Extrapolating current activities and practices, the continued use and development of ICTs within education will have a strong impact on: What is learned, how it is learned, when and where learning takes place, & who is learning and who is teaching. The continued and increased use of ICTs in education in years to come, will serve to increase the temporal and geographical opportunities that are currently experienced. The integration of ICTs in higher education is inevitable. The very high demand for higher education has stimulated significant growth in both private and public provision.

References Hattangdi A., Ghosh A., (2008), Enhancing the quality and accessibility of higher education through the use of Information and Communication Technologies. Devi S., Mohammad R., Chander S., June (2012), ICT For Quality Of Education In India,Volume 2, Issue 6 ISSN: 2249- 5894. Meenakumari J., Krishnaveni R., (2010), ICT based and learning in higher education-A study, International Journal of Computer Science and emerging technologies. Pyla A.,ICT as a Change Agent for Higher Education and Society, International Conferenece on EGovernance & Cloud Computing Sevices (EGov ’12) Proceedings published by International Journal of Computer Applications® (IJCA) , page no. 25-30. 102 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Pegu U., Information and Communication Technology in HigherEducation in India: Challenges and Opportunities, International Journal of Information and Computation Technology. ISSN 0974-2239 Volume 4, Number 5 (2014), pp. 513- 518© International Research Publications House. Sarkar S., (May 2012) , The Role of Information and Communication Technology (ICT) in Higher Education for the 21st Century , The Science Probe Vol. 1 No. 1 Page No- 30-41. Agarwal P., (2006), Higher education in India: the need for a change, Indian Council For Research On International Economic Relations. Amutabi M. N. & Oketch, M. O., (2003), Experimenting in distance education: the African Virtual University (AVU) and the paradox of the World Bank in Kenya, International Journal of Educational Development 23(1), 57-73. Bhattacharya I., Sharma K., (2007), India in the knowledge economy – an electronic paradigm, International Journal of Educational Management Vol. 21 No. 6, pp. 543-568. http://mhrd.gov.in/sites 14

Revolutionized Communication of the 21st Century, yet the need of ‘Cyber Security’

Nilam Patil*

Abstract

This research paper examines the common interests and tensions between privacy and cyber security. Cyber security standards are security standards which enables organization to practise safe security techniques, to minimize the number of successful cyber security attacks. It sets out key policy directions with a view to generating dialogue on cyber security as an important element of online privacy. The internet as an open forum has created some security issues. Hence, Confidentiality, Integrity and Authentication are needed. People need to assure that their Internet communication is kept confidential. When they shop online, they need to be sure that the vendors are authentic. When they send their transaction request to their banks, they want to be certain that the integrity of the message is preserved. Keywords: Security, Confidentiality, Integrity, Authentication

Objectives • Explain the different types of computer crime and the difficulties of discovery and prosecution. • Causes of Cyber Crime • How to tackle Cyber Crime • 5 cyber security trends to watch for 2016 • Conclusion and Suggestion

Introduction Any crime committed over the internet is referred to as Cyber crime. Cyber crime is stealing and using or selling of data. Cyber crime consists of specific crimes dealing with computers and

* Assistant Professor, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 104 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey networks and the facilitation of traditional crime through the use of computers. Security Management for networks is different for all kinds of situations. A home or an office would only require basic security while large businesses will require high maintenance and advanced software and hardware to prevent malicious attacks from hacking and spamming. Cyber security standards are standards which enable organizations to practice safe security techniques to minimize the number of successful attacks. This research provides specific techniques and directions for implementing cyber security. Cyber security standards have been created recently because sensitive information is now frequently stored on computer that are attached to the Internet. The government also needs to secure its information. One of the most widely used security standards today is ISO/IEC 27002 which started in 1995.This standard consists of two basic parts. BS7799 part 1 and BS 7799 part 2 both of which were created by (British standards Institute) BSI. Recently, this standard has become ISO27001.The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) has released several special publications addressing cyber security. In the 1990s, the Information Security Forum (ISF) published a comprehensive list of best practices for information security, published as the Standard of Good Practice (SoGP)

Types of Cyber Crimes • Hacking: This is a type of crime where in a person’s computer is broken into so that personal or sensitive information can be accessed. While hacking , the criminal uses a variety of software to enter a person’s computer and the person may not be aware that his computer is being accessed from a remote location • Cyber Stalking: This is a kind of online harassment wherein, the victim is subjected to a barrage of online messages and emails. Typically, these stalker know their victims and instead of resorting to offline stalking, they use the internet to stalk. However, if they notice that cyber stalking is not having the desired effect, they begin offline stalking along with cyber stalking to make the victims live more miserable • Identity Theft: This has become a major problem with people using the Internet for cash transactions and banking services .In this cyber crime, a criminal accesses data about person’s bank account ,credit cards, Social Security, debit card and other sensitive information to siphon money or to buy things online in the victim’s name. It can result in major financial losses for the victim and even spoil the victim’s credit history • Child Soliciting and Abuse: This is also a type of cyber crime wherein, criminals solicit minors via chat rooms for the purpose of child pronology. The FBI has been spending a lot of time monitoring chat rooms frequented by children with the abuse and soliciting

Causes of Cyber Crime • Snowden on Cyber War : America is its Own Worst Enemy Edward Joseph Snowden (born June 21,1983) is an American computer professional and former contractor for the federal government who copied and leaked classified information from the National Security Agency(NSA)in 2013 without prior authorization from the National Security Agency (NSA) in 2013 without prior authorization. His disclosures revealed numerous global surveillance programs, many run by the NSA and Five Eyes with the cooperation of telecommunication companies and European government. Revolutionized Communication of the 21st Century, yet the need of ‘Cyber Security’ 105 • Cost of Cyber Crime Affecting Economies Costing Jobs: The report tries to assess the impact on the global economy by looking at the range of costs and losses associated with Cyber Crime.

Findings ¾ The cost of cyber crime will continue to increase as more business move online and as more companies and consumers around the world connect to the internet. ¾ Losses from the theft of intellectual property will increase as acquiring countries improve their ability to make use of it to manufacture competing goods. ¾ Cyber crime is a tax on innovation and slows the pace of global innovation by reducing the rate to innovators and investors. ¾ The financial costs to economies from cyber attack include the loss of intellectual property, financial fraud, damage to reputation, lower productivity and third part liability. ¾ Emphasizing the transactional nature of cyber issues, the last few years have seen the emergence of highly sophisticated criminal gangs capable of exploiting vulnerabilities in business networks. ¾ Today’s cloud system is also insecure. it is a job of software as a service application providers to ensure that their products are as secure as possible. Many SaaS vendors hire the best and the brightest in IT security .But they are solely focused on preventing breaches into their infrastructure-things like denial of service attacks, malware outbreaks.

Current Cybercrime Scenario in India • Given the growth of cybercrime incidents in India, boards and CXOs are forced to take cognisance of this menace. Our survey report provides corporate India’s perspective on cybercrime which is summarised as under:

Figure 1: A snapshot of Cybercrime 106 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey How to Tackle Cyber Crime It has been seen that most cyber criminals have a loose network wherein they collaborate and cooperate with one another. Unlike the real world, these criminals do not fight one another for supremacy or control. Instead, they work together to improve their skills and even help out each other with new opportunities. Hence, the usual methods of fighting crime cannot be used against cyber criminals. The best way to go about is using the solutions provided by Cross-Domain Solutions. When organizations use cross domain cyber security solutions, they can ensure that exchange of information adheres to security protocols. This allows seamless sharing and access of information within a specific security classification, but cannot be intercepted by or advertently revealed to user who is not part of the security classification. This helps to keep the network and the systems using the network safe. Cross Domain Solution offers a way to keep all information confidential by using safe and secure domains that cannot be tracked or accessed. This security solution can be used by commercial and governmental organization to ensure an impenetrable network while still making sure that users can get access to the required information easily.

Cyber Security Trends to Watch for 2016 1. Cloud services: As more and more of the services we use reside in the cloud, IT departments can lose oversight and control. Employees are bypassing IT to snag the services they feel they need, and there is a real danger that they are bypassing security protocols and systems in the process. You should take steps to ensure that your IT department has full visibility. 2. Ransomware : This kind of attack encrypts important files, rendering data inaccessible until you pay the ransom. It often relies upon social engineering techniques to gain a footholds. 3. Spear phishing : Cyber criminals follow the path of least resistance and the easiest way for them to gain access to your precious data is usually by tricking a person into handing over the keys, not by writing a clever piece of code. Phishing attacks are growing more sophisticated all the time, as official-looking messages and websites, or communications that apparently come from trusted sources, are employed to gain access to your systems. 4. Known vulnerabilities: The open source movement has leveled the playing field for many companies, and there are also lots of off-the-shelf software packages that are very popular. Integrating this software will often make more business sense than developing something in-house, but you have to keep vulnerabilities in mind. Publicly known vulnerabilities are one of the biggest threats for IT departments. 5. The Internet of Things : We have seen a wave of mobile devices and wearable’s stream into the workplace, each offering a new potential inroad for a cybercriminal, but the Internet of Things represents another looming threat. As connectivity spreads into every corner of our lives and businesses, it becomes more and more challenging to maintain a clear view of entry points and data flow.

MIT Shows how AI Cyber Security Excels by Keeping Humans in the Loop 1. Cyber security threats are among the most pressing concerns for businesses and institutions that need to protect information, but today’s security systems are limited. Most security Revolutionized Communication of the 21st Century, yet the need of ‘Cyber Security’ 107

systems fall into two categories: human analyst or machine learning. Now, a new research paper from MIT shows that a combination of human experts with a machine learning system— in other words, supervised machine learning—provides better results than either human or machine alone. 2. “AI squared,” which uses a system developed by Pattern Ex, is 10 times better at catching threats than machine learning alone, and reduces false positives by a factor of five. This, said MIT’s researchers, is three times better than current benchmarks. The name, AI squared, comes from the combination of two ideas, said Ignacio Arnaldo, former CSAIL post doc who is now chief data scientist at Pattern Ex: artificial intelligence and analyst’s intuition.

Suggestions No one can deny the positive role of the cyber space in today’s world be it political, economic or social sphere of life. It has its own advantages and disadvantages. Cyber terrorists have used technology in the wrong way. To curb their activities, the information Technology Act 2000 came into existence which is based on Unicrital model of law on E-commerce. Cryptography is new phenomenon to secure sensitive information .There are very few companies in present date which have this technology. It is like ‘eye for an eye’ kind of situation where technology can be curbed only by understanding of technology taken over by cyber theorists. Even if the technology is made better enough to curb the computer related crime, there is no guarantee if that would stay out of reach of cyber terrorists. Today, in the present era there is a dire need for evolving of code of Ethics on Cyber-space.

Conclusion Nowadays, intensive use of computer technologies in various spheres of human activity has significantly, changed an idea of a place and a role of information in present day society. National information resources have appeared as a new economic category. They have become the most important factors of post industrial world development. Experts employ diverse definitions of cyber warfare, depending on on the weight or emphasis accorded to various actions, actors and intent .We attempted to minimize the all-encompassing and academically, confusing expression “information warfare” to describe electronic attacks. As stated at the outset, cyber warfare, involves units organized along nation-state boundaries, in offensive and defensive operations, using computer to attack other computers or network through electronic means. In the future, if not already common practice, individual cyber warfare units will likely execute through the wires attacks against targets in a cooperative and simultaneous manner. The overall intent is to seek advantage over an adversary by compromising the integrity, confidentiality or availability of a computer device. 108 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey References Dondossola G., Lamquet O. Feb. 2006 Cyber risk assessment in the electric power industry, Electra No 224 pp. 36–43 P. Farwell. J, 2012 Industry’s Vital Role in National Cyber Security, Strategic Studies Quarterly (Winter): pp. 10–41 Roche P. Feb 2005 Cyber security considerations in power system operations, CIGRÉ Electra No. 218 David S., Confront and Conceal. Obama’s Secret Wars and Surprising Use of American Power Singh M.K., 2012, Cyber Arms Race, surendra publication 978-33-82192-30-5A Wesley. A, 2007, Jaquith, Security Metrics—Replacing Fear, Uncertainty, Doubt. Reading

Links www.au.af.mil/au/ssq/2012/winter/farwell. pdf. http://www.cyberdegrees.org/resources/hot-technologies-cyber-security/ http://www.networkworld.com/article/3019235/security/5-cybersecurity-trends-to-watch-for-2016. html Section 3 Health and Technological Advances

A Survey on Anaemia Amongst the Girl Students-A Case Study

Divya K Shetty*

Abstract

Anaemia is a condition still prevalent worldwide. In the 21st century along with the medical advancement, globalization and industrial revolution it has become an anomaly to resolve the issue of Anaemia. According the current statistics of WHO the prevalence of anaemia among adolescents in Europe is 12%, in Asia it is 56%, in North America 6%. In rural India, due to lack of money and less awareness among women about their health leads to Anaemia. In Urban India, life style and excessive consumption of junk foods and improper dietary awareness cause Anaemia. 100 girl students studying in KLE College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli were given a questionnaire and their blood count profile was analysed. In India, 56% of the women are anaemic. The diet plan and health awareness is the need of the hour for reducing the anaemic condition among the girls. Keywords: Anaemia, Haemoglobin, Iron deficiency, Flow cytometry.

Introduction The term Anaemia refers to “a reduction below normal in the concentration of Haemoglobin or red blood cells in the blood”. Anaemia may be regarded in physiological term as “reduction in oxygen transporting capacity of blood”. Girls’ iron requirements increase dramatically during adolescent as a result of the expansion of the lean body mass, total blood volume and the onset of menstruation; these changes make adolescent girls more susceptible to anaemia, which has lasting negative consequences for them and for the survival, growth, development of their children later in life. In India the prevalence of anaemia in adolescent girls is estimated at 56 per cent. There are three main types of anaemia: that due to blood loss, due to decreased red blood cell production and due to increased red blood cell breakdown. Causes of blood loss include trauma and gastrointestinal bleeding. Causes of decreased production of red blood cell include iron

* Department of Chemistry, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 112 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey deficiency, a lack of Vitamin B12 and Thalassemia. Causes of increased breakdown include a number of genetic conditions such as sickle cell anaemia, infections like malaria and some other autoimmune diseases. It can be classified based on the size of blood cells and amount of Haemoglobin in each cell. If the cells are small it is Microcytic anaemia, If they are large it is Microcytic Anaemia and if they are normal sized it is Normocytic Anaemia. Haemoglobin is the oxygen carrying protein present in red blood cells. Its biological function is to carry oxygen from lungs to muscles in arterial blood. Haemoglobin is a coordination compound which has a molecular weight nearly 65,000. It is made up of four subunits. Each subunit comprises a porphyrin complex haem as shown in the figure below

Structure of Haemoglobin

It contains Fe2+ bonded to four nitrogen atoms and a globular protein called Globin. The globular protein is coordinated to the Fe+2 in haem through fifth ‘N’ atom from a Histidine molecule in the protein. The sixth position round the Fe2+ is occupied either by an oxygen molecule or a water molecule. A Survey on Anaemia Amongst the Girl Students-A Case Study 113 Normal Haemoglobin Values 1. In adult males- 15.0-17.0gm% 2. In adult females-12.5-15.0gm%

Primary Symptons of Anaemia Includes 1. Fatigue 2. Headache 3. Difficulty concentrating

Diagnosis

Figure 1: Peripheral Blood Smear Microscopy of a Patient with Iron-Deficiency Anaemia Anaemia is typically diagnosed on a complete blood count (CBC). Apart from reporting the number of red blood cells and the haemoglobin level, the automatic counters also measures the size of the red blood cells by flow cytometry which is an important tool in distinguishing between the causes of anaemia. The following methods can be included to diagnosis • Blood smear examination: Blood is smeared on a glass slide for microscopic examination of RBCs, which can sometimes indicate the cause of the anaemia. • Iron tests: These include total serum iron and ferretin tests, which can help to determine whether anaemia is due to iron deficiency. • Haemoglobin electrophoresis: Used to identify various abnormal haemoglobins in the blood and to diagnose sickle cell anaemia, the thalassemia, and other inherited forms of anaemia. • Bone marrow aspiration and biopsy: This test can help determine whether cell production is happening normally in the bone marrow. It’s the only way to diagnose aplastic anaemia definitively and is also used if a disease affecting the bone marrow (such as leukemia) could be causing of the anaemia. • Reticulocyte count: A measure of young RBCs, this helps to determine if RBC production is at normal levels. 114 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Objectives • To bring awareness among the students regarding the importance of Haemoglobin level in the blood. • To guide them for the proper diet for a good health.

Review of Literature Hall G.S. (1844-1924) was first psychologist who systematically conducted research on adolescents in the beginning of the present century and collected enormous data on adolescents. According to his study, adolescent in terms of psychological changes occurring in adolescents. He begins this period from 10-13 years of age and ends when full adult status is attained by 22-25 years of age. It is found that adolescence is a period of storm and stress. Erikson (1964) a famous psychoanalyst, who developed very comprehensive theory of human development, stated that adolescence as a period of rapid changes physical, physiological, psychological and social According to Adams (1973)”Adolescence can be defined as a holding period in which education maturating and waiting are the major tasks to be faced.” For this reason it seems scarcely profitable to define adolescence as being tied with age. It is the time when child begins to feel a lesser need for the security of familial supervision and protection at the time when physiological and hormonal development begins to approximate adult maturity and lastly when psychological maturing moves in the child in the direction of becoming responsible in society adolescence has begun. Pastides (1981) initiated a study in order to estimate and compare the occurrence of nutritional anaemia in three groups of adolescents and young adults. The first group comprised 159 individuals aged 14-21 years, who had been previously screened for thalassemia in three cities of England. The second group was comprised of 163 Derby High School students, aged 14-18 years, who had also been previously screened for thalassemia. The third group consisted of 118 Yale undergraduate students, aged 16-21 years, who were monitored for nutritional anaemia while undergoing routine physical examinations at the Yale University Health Service. The prevalence of nutritional anaemia varied from 0.0% to 5.5% among the three female groups, and from 4.4% to 17.9% among the three male groups. Only the Yale undergraduate male group was found to be anaemic and the Yale undergraduate females were discovered to have the highest prevalence. Chauhan (1983) stated that the adolescence is the most important period in human development about which poets, writers and historians have made occasional references and have held esteem the sacrifices made by the adolescences. It is the transaction period and turning point in the life of the individual. Switoniak et al. (1992) in their study found the prevalence of iron deficiency anaemia in 224 women aged 31-47 years, working in textile industry. Anaemia was found in 11.2% participating women, evident iron deficiency was found in 13.4% of population.

Methodology A Questionnaire was given to 100 girl students of KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli. The age group was selected between 15-21 years. The Complete blood count reports of the few students were analysed. Questionnaire had the following parameters. A Survey on Anaemia Amongst the Girl Students-A Case Study 115 Parameters of the Questionnaire # Parameters 1 Age 2 Eating homemade food daily 3 Regularity of Menstrual cycle 4 Medical problems 5 Marital Status 6 Haemoglobin Percentage

Result and Discussion Out of the 100 sample questionnaires received only 28 students gave their Haemoglobin percentage. Out of 28 students, 18 students were anaemic. From the graph below it is evident that 18 students are anaemic. The Socio- economic background also plays a vital role on their health.

Suggestions The consumption of foods rich in Calcium and Iron in larger quantities becomes essential for the normal growth and development of Adolescent girls. Vegetables and fruits are important sources of Calcium and Iron. Adolescent girls in India need Iron supplementation which in turn will improve the pre pregnancy Haemoglobin status and Iron status. The Supplementation will meet the growth, menstruation and future reproductive process.

Food Rich in Iron and Calcium

Iron • Apricots , Beets, red meat • Brewer’s yeast, Broccoli • Cherries, Cream of wheat • Dried Fruit, Egg yolks • Legumes peas , Molasses • Nuts, Red Cabbage • Seeds (sesame, poppy, etc.)

Calcium • Almonds ,Seaweed • Molasses , Figs • Oats ,Sesame seeds • Tofu ,Goat’s cheese/milk • Parsley ,Cabbage 116 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • Broccoli • Dairy products

Conclusion There is an urgent need to develop interventional programmes in the colleges in the form of nutritional supplementation along with prophylaxis of iron-folic acid tablets for prevention of anaemia. Regular nutritional education sessions should be carried out to increase awareness in adolescent girls regarding the anaemia.

References Abalkhail B, Shawky S (2002). Prevalence of daily breakfast intake, iron deficiency anaemia and awareness of being anaemic among Saudi school students. Int. J. Food Sci. Nutr., 53(6): 519-528. Rao Leena (2015). Bonding in metal carbonyls. Sheth publishers (ISBN-978-93-5149-317-4)181-183 Godkar P.B, Godkar D.P, (2007). Text book of Medical Laboratory Technology. 2nd edition, Bhalani Publishing house, Mumbai, India. Ross J, Horton S (1998). Economic Consequences of Iron Deficiency report in United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) Focus on nutrition. The Micronutrient Initiative Publisher, (ISBN 1-894217-05-5): 1-48. Kotecha,P.V, Nirupam,S, Karkar,P.D, (2009). Adolescent Girls Anaemia control Program, Gujarat, India. Indian Journal Medical Research, 539-589. Tortora,G.J, Derrickson,B,(2006). Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. JohnWiley and Sons, Inc, USA. Sembulingam.K, Sembulingam.P, (2008). Essentials of Medical Physiology. Jaypee brothers Medical Publishers, New Delhi. Agarwal.K,N, Gombler,S, Bisht, H, Som.M,(2003). Anaemia prophylaxis in Adolescent school girls by weekly or daily folate supplementation. Studies on Adolescent Girls- An Analytical Review. National Institute of Public Cooperation and child Development, 29. Swarnalata.A, Yagammai,C, (2006). Impact of Iron, Vitamin-A and Vitamin-C Supplementation on Anaemic Adolescent Girls. The Indian Journal of Nutrition and Dietetics, 60. 16

From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon?

Dr. Usha Karunakaran*

Abstract

Since the early 1930’s, the knowledge that material drawn from bovine pituitary resulted in increased milk production led to a spurt of activity to synthesize the hormones responsible for increased growth (lean mass). Application of recombinant DNA technology in the early 1980’s resulted in synthesis of bovine growth hormone in large scale quantities. The use of hormonal active growth promoters including hormonal substances and antibiotics in farm animals can increase the growth promotion of livestock animals. The hormonal compounds are naturally occurring in animals or are synthetically produced xenobiotics and have estrogenic (estradiol 17 â and its esters; zeranol), androgenic (testosterone and esters; trenbolone acetate) or progestogenic (progesterone; melengestrol acetate) activity. The aim of this review is to summarize the role of Growth promoters and its risk to human health as well as livestock. Multiple databases were searched to identify major lines of argument supporting the role of growth promoters, controversies and to summarize the existing regulatory and policy documents. Issues addressed in the present paper include concentrations of hormones and metabolites present in food, role of endogenous hormone supply in normal physiological functions and suggested associations of these steroids on cancer induction., risk profile of hormonal promoters based on the recent toxicity and human exposure information and recommendations for risk management to prevent human health impacts by the use of growth promoters are also presented. There are different regulations in various parts of the world with respect to the use of such hormones. There exists a total ban on use of hormones as production aids in the European Union (EU) in contrast to United States of America where the use if some hormones is authorised under strict conditions. EU also prohibits the import of beef and its products derived from hormones treated cattle. This divergence, in view of implications for World trade, has assumed a major sociological dimension involving National and International regulatory agencies that advise on acceptability of practices affecting the chemical safety of human food.

* Head, Department of Zoology, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 118 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

The major concern for EU authorities is the possibility of adverse effects on human consumers of residues of hormones and its metabolites. Particular considerations include the low quantities of hormonal compounds consumed in eat products and their relationships to endogenous production particularly in prepubertal children, enterohepatic inactivation , cellular receptor and non receptor mediated effects and potential for interference with growth development and physiological function in consumers. Key words: Growth hormones, Meat, Poultry, Human consumers, Adverse Health impact

Introduction Hormones are chemicals that are produced naturally in the bodies all animals, including human. They are chemical messages released into the blood by hormone producing organs that travel and affect different parts f the body. Hormones may be produced in small amounts but they control important body functions such as growth, development and reproduction Certain hormones can make young animals gain weight faster. They help reduce the waiting time and the amount of feed eaten by an animal before slaughter in meat industries. In dairy cows, hormones can be used to increase milk production. Thus hormones can increase the profitability of the meat and dairy industries. Hormones can have different chemistry. They can be steroids or proteins. Steroid hormones are active in the body when consumed orally. For example, birth control pills are steroid hormones and can be taken orally. In contrast, protein hormones are broken down in the stomach and lose their ability to act in the body when consumed. Thus, ordinarily, protein hormones need to be injected into the body to have an effect. A good example is insulin protein hormone. Steroid hormones are usually released in body by way of pellet (ear implant) inserted under the skin of the ear. The ears of the animals are thrown away at slaughter. Improper use of pellet implants in other parts of the animal can result in higher levels of the hormone residues to remain in edible meat. Federal regulations prohibit their use in this manner. Melengestrol acetate is also available in a form that can be added to animal feed.

History of Hormones used in Food Production As early as the 1930’s, cows were injected with material drawn from bovine (cow) pituitary glands which resulted in increase in milk production. Later, bovine growth hormone (bGH) from pituitary glands was found to be responsible for this effect. However at that time, technology did not exist to harvest enough material for large scale in animals/ Growth hormone (GH) first was isolated from the human pituitary gland in 1956, by both Li and Papkoff, in California, and Raben in Massachusetts, but its biochemical structure was not elucidated until 1972. In 1958, Raben reported the results of the first trial to show the effects of human GH on growth. By 1960 it was clear that GH-deficient children would benefit from pituitary GH Between 1963 and 1985 the National Pituitary Agency (NPA) supervised almost all of the GH treatment in the United States. And during this period about 7700 children in the United States and 27,000 children worldwide were given GH extracted from human pituitary glands to treat severe Growth hormone deficiency (GHD). (Cronin MJ, 1997, Flodh 1986) From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 119

By 1985, distribution of pituitary GH was suspended and use of human pituitary GH rapidly ceased due to occurrence of a fatal, slow viral (prion-mediated) Creuzfeldt Jacob Disease (CJD), to few children who had been treated with GH. And an exciting and important era in paediatric endocrinology came to an abrupt finish. (Lawson Wilkins Paediatric Endocrine Society, Report, 1985) Degenerative neurologic disease in patients formerly treated with human growth hormone. Identification of the biochemical structure of GH in 1972 became the catalyst for the development of recombinant DNA-derived human GH, the gene for which was cloned for the first time in 1979. Genentech (San Francisco, California), developed in 1981 the first recombinant human GH (rhGH) by a biosynthetic process. Later, an improved process to develop rhGH was developed called protein secretion technology wherein, the vector plasmid is isolated from a strain of E. coli and the DNA strand to be cloned is derived from the appropriate source which has been currently the most common method used to synthesize rhGH, known generically as Somatotropin. In the 1980s, large quantities of pure bGH could be produced using DNA Technology. In 1993, The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved the recombinant bovine growth hormone (rbGH) which simulates the naturally occurring hormone (IGF-1,Insulin like Growth Factor) used only for dairy cattle. This is not used on beef cattle. Earlier to the discovery of rhGH, the GH treatment was reserved for only the most severe cases of GHD and, because of scarce supplies. With the development of rhGH, an unlimited commercial source became available, allowing for an ever-growing list of FDA-approved indications for GH use in non–GH-deficient children and for additional indications in adults (Takeda et al, 2010; Hindmarsh, 2010.) During the 1930, it was also found that the female sex hormone, estrogen affects growth rates in cattle and poultry. Later, the hormone was also synthesized in large amounts. This brought in the development and use of synthetic hormones which was used to increase the size of cattle and poultry in the early 1950s. DES was one of the first synthetic estrogens commercially made in US to fatten chicken. It was also used as a drug in human medicine. Research highlighted an increased incidence of adenocarcinoma in the female offspring of women who were prescribed exceptionally high doses of DES during pregnancy by their medical doctors to prevent miscarriages (Herbat et al, 1971). DES was also found to increase the risk of vaginal cancer in daughters of treated woman. Thus after years of deliberation, DES use in food production was phased out in the late 1970s and banned for use in beef cattle as a precautionary measure in 1979. This action was mandated through the Delaney Clause 1a, 1958 amendment to the Federal Food Drug and Cosmetic Act which prevents FDA from approving products that could result in cancer causing residues of chemicals on food. Thus growth promoters containing compounds with any potential for carcinogenicity, even if only in extreme circumstances are subject to additional stringent safety testing requirements before they can be approved for use in food animal production.

Classification of Compounds 1. Steroid Hormones There are six different kinds of steroid hormones that are currently approved by FDA for use in food production in the US: Estradiol, Progesterone, Testosterone, Zeranol, Trenbolone acetate and Melengestrol acetate. (Table 1) Estradiol and progesterone are natural female sex hormones. Testosterone is natural male sex hormone, zeranol, trenbolone acetate and melengestrol acetate are synthetic growth promoters. 120 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Table 1: Growth Promoting Steroid Hormone Classification # Types of Growth hormones 1 Estrogens (female hormone) a. Natural Estradiol 17 β b. Estrogen like activity Zeranol 2 Androgens ( male hormone) a. Natural Testosterone b. Synthetic Trenbolone acetate 3 Progestin’s (hormone of pregnancy) a. Natural acetate (orally active) Progesterone b. Synthetic Melengestrol acetate (orally active) Zeranol is classified as a non steroidal Macrolide and is in a class of naturally occurring products referred to as â -resorcyclic acid lactones. It was originally isolated from corn mold. Trenbolone acetate (TBA) was synthesised in 1967, it is a testosterone analogue that has 10 -50 times the anabolic activity compared to testosterone. This androgen growth promotant is often used in combination with an estrogen (most commonly E2, to maximize growth rate and efficiency in cattle, especially steers. Melengestrol acetate (MGA) is approved for use in feeder heifers to suppress oestrus and enhance efficiency of growth. Uniqueness of this synthetic compound is that it is orally active, unlike the rest, so it is not necessary to administer it an s an implant. Currently MGA is approved only for feedlot heifers and cannot be fed to steers. No regulatory monitoring of the natural hormones is possible, since it s not possible to separate or tell the difference between hormone used for treatment from those made by the animals own body. However it is possible to detect residues of zeranol and trenbolone acetate in the animal’s meat. Scientists are also currently trying to develop better methods to measure steroid hormones left in edible meat from a treated animal Currently, Federal regulations allow these hormones to be used on growing cattle and sheep but not on poultry (chicken, turkey, ducks) or hogs (pigs) FDA has set a tolerance level for the synthetic hormones (BCERF Fact sheet # 25 on pesticide residue monitoring and food safety). Hormones used In Beef Cows: Currently, beef cows are the only meat producing animals approved for hormone injection in the US. There are 5 different hormones used, 3 of which are natural and 2 synthetic. Testosterone being the well known. The hormones which are implanted in beef cows convert feed into muscle faster and more efficiently leading to quicker maturity and leaner beef. In Dairy Cows: the only growth hormone approved for dairy use is called Bovine Somatotropin (bST) or recombinant bovine growth hormone rBGH) which simulates the naturally occurring hormone (IGF-1) used only for dairy cattle This is not used on beef cattle It is marketed as Posilac®, Lactotropina® and Lactotropin® by Elanco Animal Health. 2. β Adrenergic Agonists β Adrenergic Agonists (B-AA) are classified as phenethanolamine compounds and are approved for use in food animal production in several countries, including the USA. These compounds are From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 121 neither steroids nor peptide growth factors, but similar to endogenous catecholamines such a norepinephrine and epinephrine found in all animals including human. One of the most pronounced effect of feeding β adrenergic agonists to ruminants is the dramatic increase in skeletal muscle mass in animals. In the United States, Ractopamine hydrochloride and Zilpaterol hydrochloride are both approved as growth promotants for beef cattle. In both cases they are orally active in parts per million (ppm) concentration ranges. Ractopamine, marketed by Elanco Animal Health as Optaflexx® for cattle and Paylean® for swine was approved (June, 2003). Zilpaterol, marketed by Intervet/Schering Plough Animal health as Zilmax was approved (August, 2006) Table 2. β Adrenergic Agonists (Phenethanolamine, Orally Active) # Natural Catecholamines Synthetic 1 Epinephrine, Ractopamine HCl 2 Norepinephrine Zilpaterol HCl For the protection of consumers and for the benefit of International Trade, a total ban on anabolic agents for growth promoting purposes in slaughter animals has been effective in the Netherlands since 1961, in Belgium since 1962-1969, in all Benelux countries since 1973 and in the European Union since 1988. (European Commission adopted Directive, 2000, 0132 COD) A restricted controlled use of some specific anabolics is legalized, e.g. In the USA, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and in some countries in South America, Asia and Africa. Up to the present, â agonists, (Hanrahan, 1987, Stephany and Ginkel, 1996) are all banned for growth promoting purpose except Ractopamine, e.g. in USA and Zilpaterol, e.g. in South Africa There exists a total ban on use of hormones as production aids in the European Union (EU), Netherlands (1961) in contrast to United States of America where the use of some hormones is authorised under strict conditions. EU also prohibits the import of beef and its products derived from hormones treated cattle. Sources of Controversy Both sides of the growth hormone debate say there are residual levels of hormone in the food and milk. Those in favour of hormone promotant contend that these hormones are naturally occurring in human and animals, thus shall cause no ill effects. And those opposed to them are of the belief that they do cause harm to both human as well as animals. Arguments for Growth Hormones Since rBST is designed to increase cow’s milk production, fewer cows are needed to produce more milk. This reduces the diary industries impact on environment as well as providing milk to a larger population using lesser cows. The hormones enhance growth so that conversion of feed into meat is more efficient. They reduce the cost of feeding by at least $20 to $30 a head, which equals or exceeds the total profitability of the animal,” Beef cows can grow 15-20% faster than non treated animals. The meat produced is also leaner than conventional grown animals. If any residual hormone is found in meat or milk, they are either at too low levels to cause any response in human. Various published studies on bST alone have been undertaken by different scientists around the world documenting the quality and healthfulness of milk produced by injected cows. 122 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Arguments against Growth Hormones The label used to package the hormone injected into dairy cattle lists several side effects which can pose risks to the animals including mastitis, a painful bacterial infection in the cow’s udder. The amount of residual hormones found in cow’s milk is a much as 10 times higher than non treated cows. Several studies have linked these high levels of residual hormones to an increased risk of breast, colon, prostate and lung cancer in human. Growth hormones can cause early maturity in human. The classic example being DES, which was banned. Milk from treated dairy cows may have residual antibiotics since cows treated with bST have a higher rate of udder infections for which they are treated with antibiotics. Insufficient withdrawal period results in antibiotics showing up in milk samples. Both sides of the growth hormone debate say there are residual levels of hormones in the food and milk. Those in favour of the hormones contend that these hormones are naturally occurring in humans and animals and therefore, cause no ill effects. And those opposed to growth hormones say they do cause harm to both human and animals.

The Impact of Growth Hormones used in Food Animals on Potential Human Health Growth hormone promoters are evaluated for their potency of human health impacts in case they remain in food that is consumed. The approval of veterinary drugs used in food producing animals can be made after systemic evaluation of efficacy, target animal safety, human health risk and environmental impacts. From the view point of risk management, maximum residue limits (MRLs) are regarded as monitoring tools for compliance to the approved conditions of use and the ADI level is a decision point for human health impacts. Table 3: Comparison of the Amounts of Steroid Hormones Produced Daily in the Human Body and Ingested Via the Diet from Hormone-Treated Animals Hormones Total daily production Residue in muscle Residue in muscle Ingested amount (µg/day)* from non-treated animals treated via intake of animals animals muscle from (µg/kg)** (µg/day)** treated anmials*** a(µg/kg) Estradiol < 14 (prepubertal boys) 0.003~0.035 0.011~0.28 0.0033~0.084 10~24 (prepubertal girls) 27~68 (adult men) 30~470 (adult women) Progesterone 150~250 (prepubertal children) 0.0~0.9 0.23~0.77 0.069~0.231 416~750 (adult men, premenopausal women) Testosterone 30~100 (prepubertal children) 0.006~0.029 0.031~0.360 0.0093~0.108 210~480 (adult female) 2100~6900 (adult male) Source: * : JECFA, 2000b; EFSA, 2007) ** : Paris et al., 2006 *** : Calculated Considering a Person Intakes 300g of Muscle per day From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 123 Table 4: Toxicological Endpoints and Regulatory Limits of Hormonal Growth Promoters # Compound Toxicological endpoint NOAEL ADI MRLs (µg/kg) Reference (µg/kg (µg/kg for cattle bw/day) bw/day) tissues 1 17ß-estradiol No relief of symptoms of 5 0~0.05 unnecessary JECFA, menopause & changes in 2000b serum concentrations of corticosteroid-binding globulin 2 Testosterone Androgenic effects 1,700 0~2 unnecessary JECFA, 2000b 3 Progesterone Changes in the human 3,300 0~30 unnecessary JECFA, uterus (LOAEL) 2000b 4 Zeranol Estrogenic effects 50 0~0.5 2 (muscle), JECFA, 1988 10 (liver) 5 Melengestrol Changed menstrual 5 0~0.03 1 (muscle), JECFA 2006c acetate cycle 10 (liver) 2 (kidney), 18 (fat) 6 Trenbolone Androgenic effects 2 0~0.02 2 (muscle, JECFA, acetate ß-trenbolone) Androgenic 10 (liver, effects a-trenbolone) NOAEL: No-observed adverse-effect level ADI: Acceptable Daily Intake MRLs: Maximum Residual Levels Estradiol JECFA (2000b) determined the NOAEL (No-observed adverse-effect level) of estradiol-17β as 5 µg/kg bw/day based on human epidemiological data rather than animal toxicity data. The ADI of 0~50 ng/kg bw/day was determined by dividing the NOAEL of 5 µg/kg bw/day with an uncertainty factor 100. Estradiol-17β occurs naturally in all mammals. Background levels vary with age and sex of each animal species. The highest natural levels are found in pregnant animals. The normal daily production of estradiol-17β is 6.5 µg in prepubertal boys, 48 µg in men, and 37.8 mg in pregnant women. It is used as a growth promoter in cattle and may produce twofold to several ten-fold increase in levels, reaching peaks in the liver and fat of steers and calves (Paris, et al., 2006). The amounts of estradiol in the muscle tissue of treated veal calves, heifers, and steers were 11~280 ng/kg, whereas 3~ 35 ng/kg were detected in non-treatment groups. The intake amount of estradiol via the meat of treated animals (0.0045~ 0.180 µg per 500 g portion of meat) is approximately forty times to thousands of times lower than the amount of human daily production of the hormone (Table 3). In addition, estradiol becomes inactivated when orally administered thus incapable of exerting any hormonal effects in human beings (JECFA, 2000b) 124 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey However other studies states clear evidence that hormones originating outside the body can interfere with our own hormone function. For example, estrogen is classified by the International Agency for Research on Cancer as a Group 1 Human carcinogen. (IARC Monographs, 2007) In 1971, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) banned use in pregnant women of diethylstilbestrol or DES (the first synthetic hormone) after scientific studies showed higher cancer risks in their daughters. (Swan SH, 2000, EXTOXNET Web site. These “DES daughters,” are at least 40 times more likely than the general population to develop clear cell adenocarcinoma, a rare kind of vaginal and cervical cancer, in their teens or twenties. (Centres for Disease Control and Prevention Web site) Experience with DES constitutes some of the earliest and most compelling human evidence that disruption of the human endocrine system occurs from exogenous hormone exposure. Today, many hormone-related chronic diseases are common or on the rise, including breast and prostate cancer, thyroid disease, obesity and diabetes, endometriosis, uterine fibroids, and infertility. Early-stage breast development in young girls appears to be occurring at younger ages today compared with olden times. The relationship between these adverse trends in hormone- related development or chronic disease incidence and what likely are multiple social or environmental co-contributors is not completely understood. (Population genetics do not shift over such a small time period.) Progesterone: Progesterone is administered to cattle in combination with estradiol benzoate at a ten to one ratio (progesterone 100~200 mg with estradiol 10~20 mg) as an ear implant (poor oral absorption) to increase rates of weight gain and feed efficiency. It is also used to synchronize oestrus in lactating and non-lactating dairy cows and goats via an intravaginal sponge. The amount of progesterone produced in human body varies according to physiological status, such as 418 µg/day in premenopausal women in the follicular phase of reproductive cycle, 94,000 µg/day during late pregnancy, and 416 µg/day in post-pubertal men (3) (Galbraith, 2002). In humans, progestogens are mainly used for contraception and for hormone replacement therapy. 1993). In comparison studies for concentrations of progesterone in edible tissues from non-treated and treated veal calves, heifers, and steers, ranges of progesterone were not different between the groups; however, in the treated animals, amounts of progesterone in adipose tissue (3.20~8.66 µg/ kg) were several times higher than amounts found in the control animals (0.87~1.60 µg/kg) (Table 3) (Paris et al., 2006). This increased amount is about a thousand times lower than daily production amount in adult men and women of normal status. For changes in the human uterus, JECFA established the ADI of progesterone as 0~30 µg/kg bw based on a LOAEL of 200 mg/day (equivalent to 3.3 mg/kg bw/day) (Sang- Hee Juong et al,2010). MRL was recommended to be unnecessary because it is identical to endogenous progesterone and the amount of estimated daily intake via food consumption is negligible comparing the level of daily production in human beings (JECFA, 2000b) (Table 4). Testosterone: Testosterone propionate (200 mg) in combination with estradiol benzoate (20 mg) is administered to cattle as an ear implant (poor oral absorption) for growth promotion. Orally administered testosterone is mainly inactivated during digestion and hepatic metabolism. The bioavailability of orally treated testosterone is approximately 3.6% of the administered dose. In an earlier study, the plasma half-life was 10 min after intravenous administration and about 90% of the administered dose was excreted into the urine. The major functions of testosterone are pubertal development for spermatogenesis, regulation of the differentiation of the prostate, stimulation of erythropoietin production in the kidney and stem cells of the haematopoietic system, and the acceleration of growth during puberty in conjunction with growth hormone. In a human study, 400 mg of fine-particle testosterone administered orally for 21 days was well tolerated From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 125 without any significant side effects in healthy male volunteers. Increases of prostate gland weight and volume as well as amounts of serum testosterone, DHT, androstenedione, and estradiol were found by intramuscular injections of 200 mg of testosterone enanthate (equivalent to 8 mg/kg bw) for 28 weeks in adult male baboons. (Sang- Hee Juong et al, 2010) Many studies on genotoxicity have shown that testosterone alone has no genotoxic potential Testosterone (10 mg) induced resorption of embryos in female SD rats when it was treated subcutaneously on day 10 of gestation (Sarkar et al., 1986). For the carcinogenic potential of testosterone, the IARC (1979) determined that it is reasonable, for practical purposes, to regard testosterone as if it presented a carcinogenic risk to humans due to an absence of adequate data in humans, but there is sufficient evidence for its carcinogenicity in experimental animals. In human medicine, testosterone is used to treat deficient testicular function in men, and to replace hormones in postmenopausal women in combination with estrogen. Orally administered testosterone undecanotate induced the progression of virility and testicular growth, and the acceleration of growth associated with puberty in delayed boys at 40 mg per day for 15-21 months without any side-effects (Butler et al., 1992). In a human study with eunuchs, 25 and 100 mg of testosterone administered orally did not exert any effects; however, 400 mg exerted effects such as sexual desire, erection, ejaculation, and general wellbeing (Johnsen et al., 1974, Sang- Hee Juong et al, 2010). In another study, oral administration of testosterone at 100 mg/day restored sexual function slightly ((Sang- Hee Juong et al, 2010). JECFA (2000b) established the ADI of testosterone as 0~ 2 µg/kg bw based on a NOAEL of 100 mg/day (equivalent to 1.7 mg/kg bw/day) and an uncertainty factor of 1000 based on the study of eunuchs. Paris et al (2006) reported that the residue level of testosterone in muscle of implanted veal calves or heifers is 0.031~0.360 µg/kg, while that of non-treated animals is 0.006~0.029 µg/kg. When comparing the ADI value, the amount of testosterone via beef intake from hormone-treated animals is thousands of times lower than the ADI. The MRL of testosterone in beef is not necessary because of the same reasons for the cases of estradiol and progesterone (Table 4) Zeranol, Melengestrol and Trenbolone: Zeranol, melengestrol, and trenbolone are all synthetic xenobiotic growth promoters. Zeranol is a non-steroidal anabolic agent administered subcutaneously as an ear implant in cattle and shows estrogenic activity. Zeranol is metabolized to zearalenone and taleranol and tissue residue levels of zeranol are in the range of 0.01~1.21 µg/ kg with peak levels in liver tissue (Paris et al., 2006). Orally administered zeranol showed weak estrogenic effects in long-term toxicity studies using rats, dogs, and monkeys through changes in mammary glands and reproductive organs (WHO, 2000b). Zeranol and its metabolites, zearalenone and taleranol, were negative in several in vitro and in vivo genotoxicity assays. In carcinogenicity studies of rats and mice, mice showed a higher incidence of tumors in the anterior lobe of pituitary gland compared to a control group, but this effect was regarded as being due to the estrogenic properties of zeranol (JECFA, 1988). In an uterotropic assay using sexually immature rats, orally administered zeranol, zearalenone, and taleranol presented estrogenic potencies 1/150, 1/400, and 1/350 that of estradiol-17ß, respectively (Everett et al., 1987). In ovariectomized female cynomolgus monkeys, zeranol given orally for 13 weeks induced the maturation of vaginal epithelial cells at 0.5 and 5 mg/kg bw/day, and the NOAEL was evaluated as 0.05 mg/kg bw/day based on the estrogenic effects of zeranol (JECFA, 1988). JECFA recommended its ADI to be 0~0.5 µg/kg bw/day by applying an uncertainty factor of 100 for interspecies and individual differences (JECFA, 1988). The MRLs are settled as 2 µ/kg for muscle and 10 µ/kg for liver in beef (Table 4) Melengestrol is a synthetic progestogen administered orally as a feed additive to improve feed efficiency. The approved feeding doses are in a range of 0.25~0.50 mg/heifer per day during the fattening and finishing periods. Its activity is revealed via a high affinity for progesterone receptors as well as increases in prolactin secretion and activation of estrogen receptors (Perry et al., 2005). 126 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Melengestrol acetate (MGA) was metabolized to 2β,15âdihydroxy methyl MGA, 6-hydroxy methyl- MGA, 15âhydroxy-MGA, and 2β-hydroxy MGA in a vitro system prepared from cattle, and the most active metabolite among them was 2β-hydroxy MGA showing 9-times less potency than MGA (WHO, 2004). The residue level found in Canadian beef heifers treated with MGA at a rate of 0.40 mg/animal per day during 1982~1984 was 2.8 pg/kg as a mean value (ranging < 2 to 28.7 pg/kg), and 4.6% of all samples had MGA residues of more than 10.0 pg/kg of fat (Neidert et al., 1990). Melengestrol acetate was found to be a low acute toxic chemical in rodents after oral administration. Melengestrol acetate was not a genotoxic chemical in a full range of in vitro and in vivo assays, including bacterial and mammalian cellular gene mutation assays, unscheduled DNA synthesis assay, and micronuclei test in mice. Orally administered MGA induced reproductive toxicity as impaired pregnancy and parturition and greater pup loss in beagle dogs, and the NOAEL for reproductive toxicity was set at 2 µg/kg bw/day (JECFA, 2000c). MGA exerted embryotoxic, fetotoxic, and teratogenic effects including resorption, dead foetuses, visceral malformation, and incomplete skeletal ossification in rabbits, in which the NOAEL was 0.4 mg/kg bw/day (JECFA, 2000c). The most appropriate end-point for MGA is a progestational effect such as changed menstrual cycles of female cynomolgus monkeys with a NOAEL of 5 µg/kg bw/day (JECFA, 2000c). An ADI of 0~0.03 µg/kg bw/day was established by applying an uncertainty factor 200 to the NOAEL. The MRLs recommended by JECFA are 1, 10, 2, and 18 µg/kg for cattle muscle, liver, kidneys and fat, respectively (JECFA, 2006c) (Table 4) Trenbolone acetate (TBA) is a synthetic anabolic steroid administered to cattle as a subcutaneous implant in the ear to increase feed efficiency either alone or in combination with estradiol-17β or zeranol (Metzler and Pfeiffer, 2001). It exerts its anabolic effects via binding to androgen and glucocorticoid receptors. The approved dose is 200 mg/implant per heifer or steer 60~90 days before slaughter (Heitzman and Hardwood, 1977). Major metabolites of TBA are the stereoisomer’s 17β- and 17β-trenbolone. 17β-trenbolone is mainly found in muscle tissue, whereas 17β-trenbolone occurs mainly in the liver and bile excreta (JECFA, 1988). Its binding affinity to the androgen receptor is similar to that of dihydrotestosterone, but it has a stronger affinity to the progesterone receptor than progesterone (Hoffman et al., 1984). 17β trenbolone and the other metabolites of TBA have lower binding affinities to androgen and progesterone receptors (Bauer et al., 2000). When TBA is co-administered with estradiol-17β, TBA delays estradiol excretion. TBA is a weak toxic chemical with an oral LD50 of 1,000~1,500 mg/kg bw. The genotoxicity of TBA, 17β trenbolone, and 17β-trenbolone were negative in various in vitro and in vivo assays. In carcinogenicity studies, TBA given by feeding induced liver hyperplasia in mice at 0.9~9 mg/kg bw/day and islet-cell tumours of the pancreas in rats at 1.85 mg/kg bw/day, as a consequence of the hormonal activity of TBA (Schiffman et al., 1985, 1988). At a higher level of 2 µg/kg bw/day in pigs, TBA induced hormonal effects involving decreased testosterone levels in the serum of male pigs; reductions in weights of the testes, ovaries, and uteri; atrophy of testicular interstitial cells; suppression of cyclic ovarian activity; absence of glandular development of the uterine endometrium; and lack of alveolar development and secretion in the mammary glands (JECFA, 1988). Orally given ß- trenbolone induced antigonadotropic activity in castrated male rhesus macaque monkeys aged 8~17 years by the maintenance of seminal vesicle morphology and serum levels of testosterone and estradiol. The no-hormonal-effect level was evaluated as 2 µg/kg bw/day in this study (Wilson et al., 2002). JECFA (1988) recommended the ADI of TBA to be 0~0.02 µg/kg bw/day according to a no-hormonal-effect level of 2 µg/kg bw/day, based on hormonal effects observed in pigs and castrated monkeys, and an uncertainty factor 100. The MRLs of TBA are 2 µg/kg of â-trenbolone in cattle muscle and 10 µg/kg of á-trenbolone in cattle liver (Table 4) From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 127 Trenbolone is thought to have 8 to 10 times greater anabolic activity than testosterone. It is widely acknowledged that the use of these hormone growth promoters results in residues in meat. (Stephany RW, 2001). Residues of these hormone growth promoters also persist for weeks to months in manure and feedlot runoff, raising concerns about the added exogenous hormone load to the environment (Schiffer et al, 2001, Soto et al, 2004) Since 1988, use of steroid hormones in cattle production has been illegal in Europe. (Stephany, 2001) According to the European Commission’s Scientific Committee on Veterinary Measures Related to Public Health, the decision to ban the use of such hormones was based on the accumulating evidence on the fragility of the endocrine equilibrium in all stages of life as well as the potential genotoxicity of these compounds and their metabolites. Exogenous hormone exposure may disrupt this delicate equilibrium as is evidenced by the pronounced effects of oestrogens and testosterone on functional imprinting. Thus even exposure to residual amounts of hormonally active compounds as present in meat and meat products needs to be evaluated in terms of potentially adverse effects to public health. (European Commissions, Scientific Committee on Veterinary Measures, 1999 By contrast, the US government position is that hormone residues in beef from adult cattle pose no threat to human health. This assumption of safety, however, has remained untested by long- term epidemiologic studies and instead relies on dated research concerning the ability of estrogen (estradiol) to mutate genes. This policy fails to reflect more recent research that hormones and hormonally active chemicals may exert their toxicity instead via epigenetic changes. rbGH Use in Dairy Production Since 1994, recombinant bovine growth hormone, also known as rbGH or rbST, has been injected into dairy cows to increase milk production; the hormone typically increased production by an average of 11 to 15%. rbGH was developed and marketed by Monsanto and sold to Elanco, a division of Eli Lilly, in October 2008. Although approved by the FDA in a November 1993 decision, both Canada and the European Union in 1999 refused to approve the drug’s use, officially citing harm to cows’ health. (Canadian Veterinary Medical Association Expert Panel, European Union report, 2009) No significant scientific studies since then have led these bodies to reconsider their stance. Australia, New Zealand, and Japan have also prohibited the drug’s use. (Japan Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare, Ministerial Ordinance; 2004, Food Standards Australia and New Zealand, 2006) Although some studies (including several funded by Monsanto) have failed to demonstrate that rbGH harms dairy cows, Bauman et al, 1999; virtually all independent analyses of the data reached a different conclusion. (Kronfeld DS, 2000) In addition to the Canadian and European studies, the FDA’s analysis of the data by Monsanto demonstrated that use of rbGH increases the incidence of 16 different harmful conditions in cows, including birth disorders, hoof problems, heat stress, diarrheal, increased somatic cell count, and mastitis, a painful udder infection. (Kronfeld, 2003) On the basis of this evidence, the FDA requires these risks be listed on rbGH package inserts, but not on finished dairy products. Virtually all animal-welfare organizations, including the Humane Society of the United States and the Humane Farming Association, oppose the use of rbGH. rbGH use presents an additional risk to human health in the form of antibiotic resistance. As more cows develop mastitis caused by rbGH use, farmers necessarily increase their use of antibiotics to treat the udder infections. 128 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Scientific committees for Health Canada and the European Commission have also raised concerns about the potential effects of rbGH on cancer. (Health Canada, rBST Gaps Analysis Report, Toronto, Ontario, Canada: Health, 1998; European Commission. Report, 1999) Insulin-like Growth Factor- 1 (IGF-1) is a necessary growth hormone present and identical in both cows and humans. However, elevated IGF-1 levels in human blood are associated with higher rates of colon, breast, and prostate cancers. (Yu H, Rohan T.,2000; Moschos S, Mantzoros C. 2002; Roddam AW, et al. 2008) On the basis of data submitted by Monsanto, FDA determined that rbGH use raises levels of IGF-1 in cow’s sera and cow’s milk. These data also show that IGF-1 survives pasteurization. Animal models show that most IGF-1 in cow’s milk survives digestion, reaching the bloodstream where it may promote cancer.(Juskevich JC, Guyer C, Xian et al, 1996) The United Nations’ main food safety body, the Codex Alimentarius Commission, determined in 1999 that rbGH could not be declared safe for human health (Anderle et al,2002) More and more US public health organizations have taken formal stances opposing the drug, including Oregon Physicians for Social Responsibility, (Codex Alimentarius Commission, Twenty- Third Session, FAO Headquarters, Rome, June 28–July 3, 1999) in the last 3 years, more than 260 US hospitals have signed a pledge committing to serve rbGH-free dairy products (American Nurses Association. Resolution, 2009) A 2008 national poll showed that more than 90% of consumers favour labelling of rbGH-free products. (Consumer Reports National Research Centre. Food Labelling Poll 2008) Responding to this concern, many large retail establishments including Wal-Mart have phased out their milk brands produced using rbGH. (United States Department of Agriculture, Dairy 2007) Milk and many other dairy products from cows not treated with rbGH are now widely available; rbGH use fell from 22% of US farms in 2003 to 15% in 2007. Use of the synthetic hormone is still common practice on many large dairy operations, however. In 2007, nearly 43% of large herds were treated with rbGH. In February 2007, Monsanto appealed unsuccessfully to the FDA and the Federal Trade Commission to restrict the labelling of rbGH-free milk. Since then, policymakers in 8 states have attempted to ban or restrict the labelling of rbGH-free dairy products through bills or administrative rules. All failed except in Ohio, where the proposed rules are being challenged in court. Medical authorities and foreign governments have documented scientific public health concerns associated with rbGH use. As long as the FDA allows rbGH to remain on the market, consumers should have the right to know if it is present or absent in dairy products they consume. This right to know about hazardous or controversial substances has been defended in APHA Policy 2002-5. (American Public Health Association, Policy statement 2002-5: American Public Health Association; 2002) Precautionary Approach to Hormone Growth Promoters in Beef and Dairy Cattle Production Consistent with its explicit endorsement of the Precautionary Principle, APHA is therefore opposed to the use of hormone growth promoters in beef and dairy cattle production, and strongly recommends the following actions: The FDA should act with public health precaution to ban the use of hormone growth promoters on the basis of certain exposure and possibility of human health risks, pending long-term epidemiological data demonstrating such exposures to be without harm to workers or the population as a whole. Hospitals, schools, and other institutions, especially those serving children, should preferentially purchase food products from beef and dairy cattle produced without such hormones. From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 129 Companies producing and retailers offering products produced without rbGH or other hormones should retain the right to label such products in an easily readable and understandable fashion so that consumers in the free marketplace can be equipped to make an informed choice about which brands they buy. Public health organizations should support increased federal research to better delineate mechanisms of harm from hormone-disrupting chemicals in food and the environment and to assess the cumulative public health impact from low-level exposure to multiple such chemicals, including to foetuses, infants and children. In 2005, 32.5 million cattle were slaughtered to provide beef for US consumers. Scientists believe about two-thirds of American cattle raised in for slaughters today are injected with hormones to make them grow faster. According to Science News, 80 percent of all US feedlot cattle are injected with hormones. (Raloff, J, 2002). A study of cows treated with melengestrol acetate (one of the artificial growth hormones approved for use in the US) revealed that residues of this hormone were traceable in soil up to 195 days after being administered to the animals. (Daxenberger, A., et al, 2012) While the average dairy cow produced almost 5,300 pounds of milk a year in 1950, (Hallberg, M. C. 2003) today, the average is more than 20,000 pounds milk production. (US Department of Agriculture, National Agriculture Statistics Service, 2012) Despite opposition from scientists, farmers and consumers, the United States currently allows dairy cows to be injected with recombinant bovine growth hormone (rBGH/rBST. Controversy surrounds whether or not rBGH is safe for cows and humans. A well coordinated plan is needed to identify the adverse effects of long term use of growth promoters to human as well as animals in addition to it percolating into the food chain thereby causing an impact to the environment too. Although studies have been conducted in some disciplines, there has been a lack of serious and harmonized interdisciplinary effort to expand on the corpus of knowledge, which should be used to inform public policy. To result in a useful and complete list of research priorities, the agenda must include contributions by experts in basic sciences (e.g., genetics and microbiology), clinical sciences (e.g., veterinary medicine and human medicine), public health (e.g., epidemiology and nursing), social sciences (e.g., anthropology and sociology), economics (e.g., health and agriculture), and public policy (e.g., legislative and regulatory). Research goals put forth in the agenda should be reflective of methodological weaknesses identified in the existing literature. For example, definitions of Complex political, economic, and social barriers limit the quality of data on the use of growth promoters in food animals. The long-term impact of hormones on induction of cancer of nonbinding auditing programs is unproven. Effective surveillance of veterinary produce and administration to food animals is a key first step toward ascertaining realistic estimates of the full scope of growth promotant use. Before Industrial agriculture, before processed foods, McDonald’s and various Pizza outlets - Mankind ate real food which comprised of wholesome fruits and vegetables eaten in season or preserved in the summer months for a long cold winter. Real food was derived from animals that grazed on fresh pasture and were allowed to live in natural surroundings with natural instincts. But now industrial agriculture has taken over our food supply. In an attempt to feed more people (population explosion) in an easier and more productive way, food has become food “products” (full of chemicals not real food). This denatured food contributes to diseases that have led to shortening the human lifespan. Obesity, cancer, heart disease, high blood pressure and diabetes are at an all time high, and most of these diseases are controllable by the food we consume. 130 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey What You Can Do Many independent ranchers and farmers don’t use artificial hormones on their animals. By purchasing your milk and meat from local, sustainable farms, you will support a system that ensures the health and welfare of the farm animals, which protects you and your family from hormone-related health risks. We have the option to choose hormone-free beef and rBGH-free dairy products at the supermarket. When purchasing sustainably raised foods without the “organic” label, be sure to check with the farmer to ensure no hormones were administered.

Conclusion The use of hormonal growth promoters in food-producing animals has provoked many concerns on their human health impacts. Many of the risk assessment results of natural steroid hormones have presented negligible impacts when they are used under good veterinary practices The battle rages on with the debate from both sides that there are residual levels of hormone in the food and milk. Those in favour of hormone promotant contend that these hormones are naturally occurring in human and animals, thus shall cause no ill effects. And those opposed to them are of the belief that they do cause harm to both human as well as animals A better understanding of human health risks posed by the use of such drugs is essential for making regulatory decisions and programs that support the prudent nonhuman use of hormonal drugs. Risk assessments play a key role in the security of food safety. By following through with hazard identifications, hazard characterizations, exposure assessments, and risk characterizations, we attain more scientific background for decisions on risk management options in the protection of public health. Recent results of risk assessments on hormonal substances including estradiol- 17â, progesterone, testosterone, zeranol, trenbolone, and melengestrol acetate (MGA) indicate that natural steroid hormones have negligible human health impact when they are used under good veterinary practices, and for synthetic hormone-like substances, ADIs and MRLs are provided for the protection of human health. However before deciding on any risk management options, large scale evidence of risk assessment of growth hormones and promotants to mankind and animals is warranted.

References Daxenberger, A., Meyer, H., Meyer, K., & Schiffer, B. (2011) The fate of trenbolone acetate and melengestrol acetate after application as growth promoters in cattle: Environmental studies. Environmental Health Perspectives, 109(11) American Public Health Association. APHA policy statement 2002-5: Preserving right-to-know information and encouraging hazard reduction to reduce the risk of exposure to toxic substances. Washington, DC: American Public Health Association; 2002. Available at www.apha.org/advocacy/policy/policysearch/default.htm?id=279. United States Department of Agriculture. Dairy (2007) USDA-APHIS-VS, CEAH. Fort Collins, CO: United States Department of Agriculture. #N480.1007. Consumer Reports National Research Centre. Food Labelling Poll 2008. Available at: www.greenerchoices.org/ pdf/foodpoll2008.pdf. Yu H, Rohan T. (2000) Role of the insulin-like growth factor family in cancer development and progression. J Natl Cancer Inst.; 92:1472–1489. Moschos S, Mantzoros C. (2002).The role of the IGF system in cancer: from basic to clinical studies and clinical applications. Oncology. 2002; 63:317–332. Roddam AW, Allen NE, Appelby P, et al. (2008) Insulin-like growth factors, their binding proteins, and prostate cancer From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 131 risk: analysis of individual patient data from 12 prospective studies. Ann Intern Med.; 149:461–471, W83–W88. Health Canada. rBST Gaps Analysis Report. Toronto, Ontario, Canada: Health Canada; 1998. The European Commission. Report on Public Health Aspects of the Uses of Bovine Somatotropin. Food Safety: From the Farm to the Fork; 1999. Available at: http://ec.europa.eu/food/fs/sc/scv/out19_en.html. Accessed November 24, 2009. Kronfeld DS. (2000) Recombinant bovine Somatotropin and animal welfare. J Am Vet Med Assoc., 11:1719–1722. Bauman DE, Everett RW, Weiland WH, Collier RJ. (1999)Production response to bovine Somatotropin in northeast dairy herds. J Dairy Sci., 82:2564–2573. Raloff, J. (2002). Hormones: Here’s the beef - Environmental concerns re-emerge over steroids given to livestock. Science News, 161(1). IARC. (1979) IARC monographs on the evaluation of the carcinogenic risk of chemicals to humans. Vol. 21, Sex Hormones (II), Lyon, IARC Press. pp. 35-82, 139-547. Hallberg, M. C. (2003). Historical perspective on adjustment in the food and agriculture sector. Penn State University. Neidert, E.E., Gedir, R.G., Milward, L.J., Salisbury, C.D., Gurprasad, N.P. and Saschenbreckert, P.W. (1990). Determination and qualitative confirmation of melengestrol acetate residues in beef fat by electron capture gas romatography and gas chromatographic/chemical ionization mass spectrometry. J. Agric. Food Chem., 38, 979-981. US Department of Agriculture, National Agriculture Statistics Service. (2012, July 19). 2012 milk production. Metzler, M. and Pfeiffer, E. (2001). Genotoxic potential of xenobiotic growth promoters and their metabolites. APMIS, 109, 89-95. Sarkar, K., Kinson, G.A. and Rowsell, H.C. (1986). Embryo resorption following administration of steroidal compounds to rats in mid-pregnancy. Can. J. Vet. Res., 50, 433-437. Hugh Galbraith (2002) Hormones in International Meat Production: Biological, sociological and consumer issues. Nutrition research Reviews ,15,293-315 Schiffmann, D., Hieber, L., Schmuck, G., Pechan, R., Metzel, M. and Henschler, D. (1988). Trenbolone induces micronucleus formation and neoplastic transformation in Syrian hamster embryo fibroblasts but not in mouse C3H10T1/2 cells. Arch. Toxicol., 62, 49-53. Schiffman, D., Metzler, M., Neudecker, T. and Henschler, D. (1985). Morphological transformation of Syrian hamster embryo fibroblasts by the anabolic agent trenbolone. Arch. Toxicol., 58, 59-63. Sang- Hee Juong, Daejin Kang, Myung Woon Lim, Chang Su Kang and Ha Jung Sung (2010) Risk assessment of Growth hormones and antimicrobial residues in meat. Toxicol Res, 26(4):301-313. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (1988). Evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food. WHO Technical Report Series, 763, 16-33. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (1998a). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Tetracyclines. WHO Food Additives Series, 41. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (1998b). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Benzylpenicillin. http://www.inchem.org/documents/jecfa/jecmono/v27je05.html. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (1998c). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Dihydrostreptomycin and streptomycin. WHO Food Additives Series, 39. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2000a.) Procedures for recommending maximum residue limits-residues of veterinary drugs in food. pp. 43-51. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2000b). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Estradiol-17â, progesterone, and testosterone. WHO Food Additives Series, 43. 132 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2000c). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Melengestrol acetate. WHO Food Additives Series, 45. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2000d). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Lincomycin. WHO Food Additives Series, 45. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2006a). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Colistin sulfate. WHO Food Additives Series, 57. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2006b). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Erythromycin. WHO Food Additives Series, 57. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2006c). Evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food. Melengestrol acetate. WHO Technical Report Series, 939. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2009a). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Tilmicosin. WHO Food Additives Series, 61. Galbraith, H. (2002). Hormones in international meat production: biological, sociological and consumer issues. Nutr. Res. Rev., 15, 293-314. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2009b). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Avilamycin. WHO Food Additives Series, 61. Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA). (2009c). Toxicological evaluation of certain veterinary drug residues in food: Tylosin. WHO Food Additives Series, 61. Paris, A. Andre, F., Antignac, J.P., Le Bizec, B., Bonneau, M., Briant, C., Caraty, A., Chilliard, Y., Cognie, Y., Combarnous, Y., Cravedi, J.P., Fabre-Nys, C., FernandezSuarez, A., Fostier, A., Humblot, P., Laudet, V., Leboeuf, B., Louveau, I., Malpaux, B., Martinat-Bottle, F., Maurel, M.C., Pelicer-Rubio, M.T., Picard-Hagen, N., Pinault, L., Pinel, G., Ponsard, C., Popot, M.A., Schmidely, P., Toutain, P.L. and Zalko, D. (2006). Hormones et promoters de croissance en productions animales : de la physiologie à l’évaluation du risque. INRA Prod. Anim., 19, 149-240. International Agency for Research on Cancer. Combined estrogen-progestogen contraceptives and combined estrogen- progestogen menopausal therapy. IARC Monographs on the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risks to Humans. Vol. 91. Lyon, France: WHO, International Agency for Research on Cancer; 2007. Available at: http://monographs.iarc.fr/ ENG/Monographs/vol91/mono91.pdf. Swan SH. (2000) Intrauterine exposure to diethylstilbestrol: long-term effects in humans. APMIS. 108:793–804. EXTOXNET Web site. Questions about endocrine disruptors. A pesticide information project of Cornell University, Michigan State University, Oregon State University, and University of California at Davis. Available at: http:// extoxnet.orst.edu/faqs/pesticide/endocrine.html. Centres for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. Health Risks and Related Concerns for DES Daughters. Available at: www.cdc.gov/DES/hcp/information/daughters/risks_daughters.html. Grandjean P, Bellinger D, Berman A, et al. (2008) The Faroes statement: human health effects of developmental exposure to chemicals in our environment. Basic Clin Pharmacol Toxicol. 102:73–75. Aksglaede L, Sorensen K, Petersen JH, Skakkebaek NE, Juul A. (2009) Recent decline in age at breast development: the Copenhagen puberty study. Pediatrics. 123: e932–e939. Stephany RW. Hormones in meat: different approaches in the EU and in the USA. APMIS. 2001; 109:S357–S363. Schiffer B, Daxenberger A, Meyer K, Meyer HHD. (2001) The fate of trenbolone acetate and melengestrol acetate after application as growth promoters in cattle: environmental studies. Environ Health Perspect. 109:1145–1151. Soto AM, Calabro JM, Prechtl NV, et al. (2004) Androgenic and estrogenic activity in water bodies receiving cattle feedlot effluent in eastern Nebraska, USA. Environ Health Perspect. 112:346–352. European Commissions. Scientific Committee on Veterinary Measures Relating to Public Health. Assessment of Potential Risks to Human Health from Hormone Residues in Bovine Meat and Meat Products; 1999. Available at: http://ec.europa.eu/ food/fs/sc/scv/out21_en.pdf. Accessed 22 May 2009. From Growth Hormones to Synthetic GH’s - a Danger or a Boon? 133

Japan Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare. Ministerial Ordinance on Milk and Milk Products Concerning Compositional Standards. Tokyo, Japan: Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare; 2004. Food Standards Australia and New Zealand. A Risk Profile of Dairy Products in Australia: Food Standards Australia New Zealand. Canberra, Australia: Food Standards Australia and New Zealand; 2006. Kronfeld DS. Recombinant bovine Somatotropin and animal welfare. J Am Vet Med Assoc. 2000; 11:1719–1722. Juskevich JC, Guyer CG. (1990) Bovine growth hormone: human food safety evaluation. Science. 249:875–884. Xian CJ, Shoubridge CA, Read LC. (1995) Degradation of IGF-1 in the adult rat gastrointestinal tract is limited by a specific antiserum or the dietary protein casein. J. Endocrinol. 146:215–225. Anderle P, Langguth P, Rubas W, Merkle HP. (2002) In vitro assessment of intestinal IGF-1 stability. J Pharm Sci. 91:1. Codex Alimentarius Commission. Twenty-Third Session, FAO Headquarters, Rome, June 28–July 3, 1999. Available at: ftp://ftp.fao.org/codex/alinorm99/cac23rep_complet.pdf. Health Care without Harm. Position Statement on rBGH. Available at: www.noharm.org/lib/downloads/food/ HCWH_Position_on_rBGH.pdf. American Nurses Association. Resolution: Healthy Food in Health Care. 2008. Available at:http://nursingworld.org/ MainMenuCategories/OccupationalandEnvironmental/environmentalhealth/PolicyIssues/ HealthyFoodinHealthCare.aspx. Cronin MJ. (1997) Pioneering recombinant growth hormone manufacturing: Pounds produced per mile of height. J Podiatry. 131:S5–7. Flodh H. (1986) Human growth hormone produced with recombinant DNA technology: Development and production. Acta Paediatr Scand Suppl. 325:1–9. Report of the Committee on Growth Hormone Use of the Lawson Wilkins Paediatric Endocrine Society, (May 1985). Degenerative neurologic disease in patients formerly treated with human growth hormone. J Podiatry. 1985; 107:10– 2. Takeda A, Cooper K, Bird A, Baxter L, Frampton GK, Gospodarevskaya E, et al. (2010) Recombinant human growth hormone for the treatment of growth disorders in children: A systematic review and economic evaluation. Health Techno Assess. 14:1. Hindmarsh PC, Editor. Endocrine Development. 2nd ed. Vol. 18. Basel: Karger Publishers; 2010. Current Indications for Growth Hormone Therapy; pp. 92–108. 17

Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview

Sunitha Menon. K*

Abstract

Radiation is energy travelling in the form of particles or waves in bundles of energy called photons. Humans are continuously irradiated by sources outside and inside their bodies. Outside sources include space radiation and terrestrial radiation. Inside sources include the radio nuclides that enter our bodies in the food and water people ingest and the air they breathe. This radiation can disrupt atoms, creating positive ions and negative electrons, and cause biological harm. Ionizing radiation includes x-rays, gamma rays, alpha particles, beta particles, neutrons, and the varieties of cosmic rays. Most of them have the potential for both beneficial and harmful effects. Human awareness of radioactivity and Ionizing radiation has only a 100-year history starting with the discovery of x- rays and radioactivity. In addition, violent processes in the sun and elsewhere lead to the bombardment of the Earth by cosmic rays. Thus, radiation is an old and familiar, if unrecognized, pollutant. This article delineates the properties and behaviour of ionising radiation and the matter with which interacts. This research paper attempts to discuss about the adverse effect of ionising radiation in human being and to suggest different methods to control its exposure in human being. Keyword: Ionisation, Terrestrial radiation, Space radiation, Alpha rays, Beta rays, Gamma rays.

Introduction Radiation is energy in the form of waves or streams of particles. There are many kinds of radiation all around us. When people hear the word radiation, they often think of atomic energy, nuclear power and radioactivity, but radiation has many other forms. Sound and visible light are familiar forms of radiation; other types include ultraviolet radiation (that produces a suntan), infrared radiation (a form of heat energy), and radio and television signals. Many forms of “radiation” are encountered in the natural environment and are produced by modern technology. Most of them have the potential for both beneficial and harmful effects. Even sunlight, the most essential radiation of all, can be harmful in excessive amounts. Most public attention is given to the category of radiation known as “Ionizing radiation.” This radiation can

* Department of Physics, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview 135 disrupt atoms, creating positive ions and negative electrons, and cause biological harm. Ionizing radiation includes x-rays, gamma rays, alpha particles, beta particles, neutrons, and the varieties of cosmic rays.

Objectives The main objective of this paper is to study different types of ionising radiation, to analyse its effect in human body and to suggest different method to control the damage of tissues in human being due to ionising radiation.

Types and Sources of Radiation Radiation is energy in the form of waves of particles. There are two forms of radiation – non- ionizing and ionizing.

Non-Ionizing Radiation Non-ionizing radiation has less energy than ionizing radiation; it does not possess enough energy to produce ions. Examples of non-ionizing radiation are visible light, infrared, radio waves, microwaves, and sunlight. Global positioning systems, cellular telephones, television stations, FM and AM radio, baby monitors, cordless phones, garage-door openers, and ham radios use non-ionizing radiation. Other forms include the earth’s magnetic field, as well as magnetic field exposure from proximity to transmission lines, household wiring and electric appliances. These are defined as extremely low-frequency (ELF) waves and are not considered to pose a health risk.

Ionizing Radiation Ionizing radiation is produced by unstable atoms. Unstable atoms differ from stable atoms because they have an excess of energy or mass or both. Unstable atoms are said to be radioactive. In order to reach stability, these atoms give off, or emit, the excess energy or mass. These emissions are called radiation. The kinds of radiation are electromagnetic (like light) and particulate (i.e., mass given off with the energy of motion). Gamma radiation and X-rays are examples of electromagnetic radiation. Beta and alpha radiation are examples of particulate radiation. Ionizing radiation can also be produced by devices such as X-ray machines.(Table 1)

Methodology The methodology is based on the secondary analysis of ionising radiation and its health risks from various research papers. Table 1: Types of Ionizing Radiation # Types of Ionising Radiation Characteristics 1. Alpha radiation(β) • consists of alpha particles that are made up of two protons and two neutrons each and that carry a double positive charge • not able to penetrate skin. • be harmful to humans if the materials are inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through open wounds. • travels a very short distance through air. 136 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

• alpha radiation is only an internal hazard. An example of a nuclear substance that undergoes alpha decay is radon- 222, which decays to polonium-218. 2. Beta radiation (β) • consists of charged particles that are ejected from an atom’s nucleus and that are physically identical to electrons • travel meters in air and is moderately penetrating. • can penetrate human skin to the “germinal layer,” where new skin cells are produced. • Beta-emitting contaminants may be harmful if deposited internally 3. Photon radiation (gamma • Gamma radiation consists of photons that originate from [γ] and X-ray) within the nucleus, and X-ray radiation consists of photons that originate from outside the nucleus, and are typically lower in energy than gamma radiation. • able to travel many meters in air and many cms in human tissue and readily penetrates most materials and is sometimes called “penetrating radiation.” • gamma radiation and X-rays constitute both an external and internal hazard to humans. • Gamma radiation or X-rays frequently accompany the emission of alpha and beta radiation 4. Neutron radiation (n) • Neutrons are able to penetrate tissues and organs of the human body when the radiation source is outside the body • Neutron radiation is best shielded or absorbed by materials that contain hydrogen atoms, such as paraffin wax and plastics.

Figure 1: Summary of the Types of Radiation, from Higher-Energy Lonizing Radiation to Lower-Energy Non-Ionizing Radiation. Each Radiation Source Differs in its Ability to Penetrate Various Materials, Such as Paper, Skin, Lead and Water.

Penetration Abilities of Different Types of Ionizing Radiation Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview 137 Natural Sources of Ionizing Radiation Radiation has always been present and is all around us in many forms. Life has evolved in a world with significant levels of ionizing radiation, and our bodies have adapted to it. Many radioisotopes are naturally occurring, and originated during the formation of the solar system and through the interaction of cosmic rays with molecules in the atmosphere.

Table 2: Sources of Natural Radiation (UNSCEAR)

Cosmic Radiation • earth’s outer atmosphere is continually bombarded by cosmic radiation. • consists of fast moving particles that exist in space and originate from a variety of sources, including the sun and other celestial events in the universe Terrestrial Radiation • The composition of the earth’s crust is a major source of natural radiation. • Contributors are natural deposits of uranium, potassium and thorium which, in the process of natural decay, will release small amounts of ionizing radiation. Inhalation • Most of the variation in exposure to natural radiation results from inhalation of radioactive gases that are produced by radioactive minerals found in soil and bedrock. • It is the largest source of natural radiation exposure. Ingestion • Trace amounts of radioactive minerals are naturally found in the contents of food and drinking water • Natural radioisotopes continually expose us to radiation and are commonly found in many foods, such as Brazil nuts.

Artificial (Man-Made) Sources of Ionizing Radiation People are also exposed to man-made radiation from medical treatments and activities involving radioactive material. Radioisotopes are produced as a by-product of the operation of nuclear reactors, and by radioisotope generators like cyclotrons. Many man-made radioisotopes are used in the fields of nuclear medicine, biochemistry, the manufacturing industry and agriculture. The following are the most common sources:

Table 3 : Medical Sources: Radiation has Many uses in Medicine

SOURCE USES X-ray machines use radiation to find broken bones or to diagnose diseases Nuclear medicine Uses radioactive isotopes to diagnose and treat diseases such as cancer. A gamma camera one piece of medical equipment commonly used in diagnosis. 138 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Health Effects of Ionizing Radiation: Radiation damage to tissue and/or organs depends on the dose of radiation received, or the absorbed dose which is expressed in a unit called the gray (Gy). The potential damage from an absorbed dose depends on the type of radiation and the sensitivity of different tissues and organs. (The sievert (Sv) is a unit of radiation weighted dose also called the effective dose. It is a way to measure ionizing radiation in terms of the potential for causing harm. The Sv takes into account the type of radiation and sensitivity of tissues and organs. The Sv is a very large unit so it is more practical to use smaller units such as millisieverts (mSv) or microsieverts (µSv). There are one thousand ìSv in one mSv, and one thousand mSv in one Sv. In addition to the amount of radiation (dose), it is often useful to express the rate at which this dose is delivered (dose rate) e.g. µSv/hour or mSv/year.)

Table 4: Radiation Dose and its Effect in Human Body Radiation Dose Effect in Human Body 0 - 5 rem received • Don't expect observable health effects. 5 - 10 rem received • An effect is either nonexistent or too small to observe. 10 - 50 rem • Short-term blood cell decreases for doses of about 50 rem received in a matter of minutes. 50 - 100 rem received • increase your chances of getting cancer. Above 50 rem we may see some changes in blood cells, but the blood system quickly recovers. 100 - 200 rem received • will cause nausea and fatigue. 100 - 200 rem received over a long in a short period period will increase your chances of getting cancer 200 - 300 rem received • in a short period will cause nausea and vomiting within 24-48 hours. Medical attention should be sought. 300 - 500 rem received • received in a short period will cause nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea within hours. Loss of hair and appetite occurs within a week. Medical attention must be sought for survival; half of the people exposed to radiation at this level will die if they receive no medical attention. 500 - 1,200 rem received in a short period will likely lead to death within a few days in a short period >10,000 rem in a lead to death within a few hours short period

The health effects listed above are for a radiation dose to the entire body. If the radiation is given to a smaller area of the body, there are other effects that may occur, but illness or death is not expected unless noted: • 40 rem or more locally to the eyes can cause cataracts. • 100 rem - 500 rem or more can cause hair loss for a section of the body that has hair. • 200 rem or more locally to the skin can cause skin reddening (similar to a sunburn). Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview 139

• 1,000 rem or more can cause a breakdown of the intestinal lining, leading to internal bleeding, which can lead to illness and death when the dose is to the abdomen. • >1,500 rem or more locally to the skin can cause skin reddening and blistering.

Figure 2: Comparison of Typical Effective doses of Medical Examinations with the Average Natural Background Radiation. [* File contains invalid data | In-line.JPG *] Source: Understanding Medical Radiation - http://www.medicalradiation.com

Radiation Exposure in Nuclear Emergencies Radioactive material may be released into the environment during an emergency in a nuclear power plant (NPP). The radio nuclides of greatest concern to human health are iodine and caesium. It may result in radiation doses high enough to cause acute effects such as skin burns or acute radiation syndrome. Those living in closer vicinity to a NPP can be externally exposed to radio nuclides present in a radioactive cloud or deposited on the ground. They can also be externally contaminated by radioactive particles deposited on skin or clothes. Internal exposure may take place if radionuclides are inhaled, ingested, or enter an open wound. The deleterious effect ionizing radiation has on human tissue can be divided into two types: non- stochastic (deterministic) or stochastic effects.

Deterministic Effects It only occurs once a threshold of exposure has been exceeded. The severity of deterministic effects increases as the dose of exposure increases. Because of an identifiable threshold level, appropriate radiation protection mechanisms and occupational exposure dose limits and can be put in place to reduce the likelihood of these effects occurring. 140 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Mechanism Deterministic effects are caused by significant cell damage or death. The physical effects will occur when the cell death burden is large enough to cause obvious functional impairment of a tissue or organ. Table 4: Different Types of Deterministic Effects and its Physical Effects Sr. Deterministic effects Physical effects no 1. Skin Erythema /Necrosis / • occurs 1 to 24 hours after 2 Sv have been received Epilation • Breakdown of the skin surface occurs approximately four weeks after 15 Sv have been received • Epilation is reversible after 3 Sv but irreversible after 7 Sv and occurs three weeks following exposure. 2. Cataract • occurs due to accumulation of damaged or dead cells within the lens, the removal of which cannot take place naturally. • occurs after 2 to 10 Gy have been received, but may take years to develop. 3. Sterility • Radiation can impair oocyte function, leading to impaired or non-fertility • Radiation exposure to the testes can result in temporary or permanent azoospermia. Permanent sterility occurs after 2.5 to 3.5 Gy have been received by the gonads. 4. Radiation Sickness • involves nausea, vomiting, and diarrhoea developing within hours or minutes of a radiation exposure. • This is due to deterministic effects on the bone marrow, GI tract, and CNS. 5. IUGR /Teratogenesis / • depend not only on the radiation doseandon the gestational Fetal Death age at which it occurred • High levels of radiation exposure in pregnancy lead to growth retardation. • The threshold dose for this effect is high (>20Gy) with other deterministic effects (hypospadia, microphthalmia, retinal degeneration, and optic atrophy)

Stochastic Effects Current thinking is that stochastic effect occurrence follows a linear no-threshold hypothesis. This means that although there is no threshold level for these effects, the risk of an effect occurring increases linearly as the dose increases.

Mechanism Stochastic effects occur due to the ionizing radiation effect of symmetrical translocation taking place during cell division. Effect of Ionising Radiation on Human Body: An Overview 141

Table 4: Radiation Dose and Stochastic Effects # Stochastic Effects Radiation dose 1. Cancer • Anecdotal evidence suggested that ionizing radiation could cause cancer • Single CT scan with a dose of 10 mSv carries a risk of 1:1000 of producing cancer. 2. Hereditary Defects (e.g., • The United Nations Scientific Committee on the Effects of Down Syndrome) Atomic Radiation (UNSCEAR) and ICRP propose a hereditary defect risk of between 0.3 to 0.8% per Sv.

Discussion From the secondary data analysis, it is clear that health risk due to radiation depends on its doses. Data from the Radiation Effects Research Foundation on individuals exposed to radiation from the atomic bombs in Hiroshima and Nagasaki have shown an increased relative risk of developing malignancy (leukaemia, oral cavity, oesophagus, stomach, colon, lung, breast, ovary, urinary bladder, thyroid, liver, non-melanoma skin, and nervous system) as a result of radiation exposure. As such, multiple bodies, including the U.S. Departmental of Health and Human Services, have classified ionizing radiation as a human carcinogen. Epidemiological studies on populations exposed to radiation (for example atomic bomb survivors or radiotherapy patients) showed a significant increase of cancer risk at doses above 100 mSv. Radiation can damage the functioning of tissues and/or organs and can produce acute effects such as skin redness, hair loss, radiation burns, or acute radiation syndrome. These effects are more severe at higher doses and higher dose rates.

Conclusion It is very difficult to completely remove ionising radiation from our environment, but we can control its health risk if we use it wisely and safely. When X-ray equipment is installed, a critical examination should be done to check that the shielding and all the safety features, such as interlocks and warning lights, are in full working order. Whenever exposure to ionising radiation arises (either from manmade or natural), it should not exceed the dose limits which is specified for individuals. During nuclear emergencies public health protective actions must be executed to limit radiation exposure and associated health risks. There is limited information on interaction of ionizing radiation with lifestyle factors. Better methods are needed by which to estimate the levels of exposure to ionizing radiation that may result in an increased risk of hereditary disease.

References Abel Russ, Casey Burns, Seth Tuler, and Octavia Taylor(2006) :Health Risks of Ionizing Radiation: an Overview of Epidemiological Studies, A Report by the Community-Based Hazard Management Program, George Perkins Marsh Institute, Clark University. Goodman T.R (2010): Ionizing Radiation Effects and Their Risk to Humans, MD Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT Hendee W. R. and Edwards F. M. (1996): Health Effects of Exposure to Low-level Ionizing Radiation, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol, UK. Jr Boice JD, Blettner M, RA et al Kleinerman(1987): Radiation dose and leukemia risk in patients treated for cancer of the cervix,J Natl Cancer Inst 1987; 79: 1295–311. 142 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Merril Eisenbud and Thomas Gesell(1997): Environmental Radioactivity: From Natural, Industrial, and Military Sources, 4th Edition Academic Press, San Diego. Nuclear Science—A Guide to the Nuclear Science Wall Chart ©2003 Contemporary Physics Education Project (CPEP) 15- 1 Chapter 15 Radiation in the Environment Radiation and Health Physics http://www.umich.edu/~radinfo/ — Provides links too many web sites with radiation information Tubiana M (2005): Dose–effect relationship and estimation of the carcinogenic effects of low doses of ionizing radiation, The Joint Report of the Académie des Sciences (Paris) and of the Académie Nationale de Médecine. Int J Radiat Oncol Biol Phys 63:317–319 Wahl Linnea E. (2010): Environmental Radiation, Health Physics Society Specialists in Radiation Safety. http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs371/en/ https://www.epa.gov/radiation http://www.worldnuclear.org/uploadedFiles/org/Features/Radiation/3_Health_Risks_from_Ionising_Radiation.pdf https://hps.org/publicinformation/ate/faqs/radiationdoses.html 18

Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans

Mahashabde R.P.*

Abstract Biologically active natural products have been of increasing interest to chemists due to the growing demand for new medicines. There is a constant need for new and effective therapeutic agents.Lignans are a family of secondary plant metabolites known to exhibit both, interesting biological activities and immense structural diversity. Lignans have been challenging targets for synthetic organicchemists due to their varied structures. Lignans have been used for medicinal purposes dating back to 1000A.D. Many lignans and neolignans have been synthesized and used for the development of new drugs.Lignans are recognized as a class of natural products with a wide spectrum of important biological activities since recent years due to their medically important biological activitieslike anti-inflammatory, analgesic, antiviral, antileishmanial, antifungal, antioxidant, antimalarial, anti-mitotic, anti bacterial, cytoprotective, antiangiogenic, antitumoural, antihyper-uricemic agents, etc. to name a few. The paper deals with study about lignans and some of the synthetic and naturally occurring lignans, their sources and activities. Key Words: - Biological activities, Natural and Synthetic Lignans

Introduction The plant kingdom has formed the basis of folk medicine for thousands of years andnowadays continues to provide an important source to discover new biologically activecompounds. The research,development and use of natural products as therapeutic agents, especially those derived fromhigher plants, have been increasing in recent years.There is a constant need for new and effective therapeutic agents. The first step in the search of new plant-based drugs is the isolation ofthe secondary metabolites. In the past, the natural products researchers were moreconcerned with establishing the structures and stereochemistry of such compounds but, inrecent years, a great number of studies have concentrated efforts on their biologicalactivities.

Department of Chemistry, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 144 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Biologically active natural products have been of increasing interest to chemists due to the growing demand for new medicines. Lignans exhibit both interesting biological activities and immense structural variety.The lignans are a group of chemical compounds found in plants.Lignans are naturally occurring plant materials which can be derived from cinnamic acid derivatives. Lignans are phenylpropane dimers, where the phenylpropane units are linked by the central carbon (C8) of their side chains. Robinson (1927) had found a common feature of many naturally occurring products i.e. phenyl propane C6 - C3 unit. Haworth introduced the term ‘lignan’ in 1936 to describe a group of optically active extracts isolated from plant material. In a review Haworthproposed such a group having

C6 - C3 unit to be called as “lignans” (originally lignane but the ‘e’ got deleted with publications). Lignans are a class of secondary metabolites produced by oxidative dimerization of two phenyl propanoid units. Lignans are phytoestrogens. Some reviews include Hearson & Macgregor(1955) Hartwell & Sckercker (1953), Weings and Spanig (1961), V. R. Pasarkar (1975) etc.

Strucural Diversity of Lignans The lignans are divided into 9 structural groups, namely 1. Diarylbutane 2. Diaryltetrahydrofuran 3. Aryl benzyltetrahydrofuran 4. Diaryldioxabicyclooctane 5. Dibenzylcyclooctadiene 6. Dibenzybutyrolactone 7. Arylnaphthalene 8. Aryl dihydronaphthalene 9. Aryl tetrahydronaphthalene Lignans are classified into the following eight subgroups based upon the way in which oxygen is incorporated into the skeleton and the cyclization pattern: furofuran, furan, dibenzylbutane, dibenzylbutyrolactone, aryltetralin, arylnaphthalene, dibenzocyclooctadiene and dibenzyl- butyrolactol. (Whiting, 1985)

Plant Lignans Lignans are found in almost every part of plants right from the seed, roots, leaves, flowers, bark etc. Biosynthetically, lignans are synthesized in plants, in part, via the shikimate pathway, which is a major metabolic pathway for the construction of many aromatic compounds. Lignans are responsible for key pharmacological activities of plants. Lignans have variety in structures. So these can be called challenging molecules for the chemists. The lignans are a group of chemical compounds found in plants, particularly in flax seed. Lignans are one of the major classes of phytoestrogens.The other classes of phytoestrogens are the isoflavones and coumestans. Plant lignans are polyphenolic substances derived from phenylalanine via dimerization of substituted Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans 145 cinnamic alcohols known as monolignols, to a dibenzylbutane. This reaction is catalyzed by oxidative enzymes and is often controlled by dirigent proteins. Lignans and neolignans are well known plants secondary metabolites which are widely distributed in terrestrial plants, and have attracted much attention due to the varied biological activities. Flax seed and sesame seed are among the highest known sources of lignans. The principal lignan precursor found in flaxseed is secoisolariciresinol diglucoside. Secoisolariciresinol and matairesinol were the first plant lignans identified in foods. Lariciresinol and pinoresinol contribute about 75% to the total lignan intake whereas secoisolariciresinol and matairesinol contribute only about 25%. Plant lignans are co-passengers of dietary fiber, and therefore fiber-rich food items are often good sources of lignans. Other sources of lignans include cereals (rye, wheat, oat and barley - rye being the richest source), soybeans, cruciferous vegetables such as broccoli and cabbage, and some fruitslike apricots, peach pear and strawberries. This distribution may change as the contributions of syringaresinol and hydroxymatairesinol have not properly been quantified in foods. Sources of lignans: Source Amount per 100 g Flaxseed 300,000 µg (0.3 g) Sesame seed 29,000 µg (29 mg) Brassica vegetables 185 - 2321 µg Grains 7 - 764 µg Red wine 91 µg

Mammalian Lignans Though lignans are mainly plant compounds, Enterodiol and Entero-lactone are two lignans that have been isolated from humans and other animals but there is no evidence to support a mammalian synthesis of these compounds. The first mammalian lignans, Enterodiol (MW = 302) and Enterolactone (MW = 298) were identified in humans and animals in 1980. It is believed that these lignans are the byproducts of the intestinal microflora since the mammalian body is unable to synthesize such complex compounds. They are formed in the gastrointestinal tract of human body. Enterolactone and enterodiol are the end-products of dietary lignan fermentation by mammalian intestinal microflora. The dietary precusors to enterodiol and enterolactone are believed to be seco-isolariciresinol and matairesinol, respectively. It was shown that the consumption of a single dose of sesame seeds increased the plasma concentration of enterolactone and enterodiol. Coulman also showed that the urinary excretion of mammalian lignans is increased after four week intervention with sesame seeds. Until recently, only secoisolariciresinol and matairesinol were considered enterolignan precursors, but now several new precursors have been identified, of which lariciresinol and pinoresinol have a high degree of conversion. Not much is known about the contribution of different sesame seed lignans in the production of mammalian lignans. However, it was shown that sesamin, the major sesame oil lignan, is converted to enterolactone, enterodiol and three other intermediate metabolites after 24 hour fermentation with human microflora in vitro. 146 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Food stuffs and some major Lignans Present in it in (µg / 100 g) Food-stuff Pinores- Syringaresi Sesamin Lariciresi Secoisolariciresi Matairesi Hydroxymatairesi inol inol inol inol inol nol Flaxseed 871 48 — 1780 165759 529 35 Sesame seed 47136 205 62724 13060 240 1137 7209 Rye bran 1547 3540 — 1503 462 729 1017 Wheat bran 138 882 — 672 868 410 2787 Oat bran 567 297 — 766 90 440 712 Barley bran 71 140 — 133 42 42 541

Structures of some Major Lignans Found in Food Stuffs Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans 147

Biological Activities Many lignans and neolignans have been used for the development of new drugs. Lignans have been used for medicinal purposes dating back to many thousand years. Lignans have been of great importance with regard to their synthesis & studies since recent years due to their medically important biological activities like anti- HIV, cancer inhibitors, anti-inflammatory, analgesic, antiviral, antileishmanial, antifungal, antioxidant, antimalarial, anti-mitotic, anti bacterial, anti- hepatitis B virus activity, cytotoxic activity, cytoprotective, antiangiogenic, antitumoural, antihyperuricemic agents, hypolipidemic, antirheumatic, antineoplastics for the treatment of lung cancer, lymphoma, leukemia, inhibition of cyclic AMP phosphodiesterase etc.

Some Synthetically Prepared Lignans The following table focuses onsome synthetically prepared lignans, their source and biological activity known.

# Lignan Source Activity

1 Dibenzylbutyrolactone Partial synthesis Anti-inflammatory and lignans, (-)-hinokinin, from (-)-cubebin analgesic effects (-)-6,6'-dinitrohinokinin, and (-)-6,6'-diaminohinokinin 2 Synthesis of 1-arylnaphthalene Stobbe Antiviral activity and 1-aryl-1,2- condensation dihydronaphthalene lignans followed by regioselective reactions that provide access to both the common and retrolactone lignans 148 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

3 Trans – dibenzylbutryro- Conjugate addition Anti tumour lactones, Enterolactone, of Carbanions arylnaphthalene lactones derived from Aryl including retrojusticidin B bis (phenylthio)- methanes 4 Derivatives of enterolactone Three 13C atoms Compounds were prepared for and enterodiol, and their were incorporated use as internal standards in the precursors, secoisolariciresinol into each lignan LC-MS and GC-MS analysis of and matairesinol using potassium lignans [13C]cyanide as the source for all of the 13C atoms 5 A novel series of 4â-N- Linking 4β- Potential antitumor agents substituted podophyllotoxin amino-4- derivatives deoxypodo- phyllotoxin with alcohols through maleic acid 6 Dibenzylbutyrolactone lignans Stobbe Activity against MDA-MB-435 and their analogues condensation of human breast cancer cell. piperonal or veratraldehyde with diethylsuccinate and alkylation with 3,4- methylenedioxy benzyl bromide 7 Aryl dihydro-naphthalene - Use as Akt inhibitor for the lignan derivatives prevention & treatment of cancer 8 Lignan lactone Dehydrogenation Anti – bacterial, anti - tumour in presence of

RuH2 (PPH3) in Ph Me 9 Lignan derivative Arctigenin treated Diuretonic & cardiotonic

with LiAlH4 in THF gave butanediol which was treated with

K2CO3& (MeO)2 SO2 Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans 149

10 Nine analogues of natural Williamson Antitumor activity, cytotoxic lignan justicidin A etherification activities 11 1-Phenylnaphthalene and Perkin Anti inflammatory,Anti oxidant , Pericarbonyl lactone lignan condensation of Anti microbial compounds aromatic aldehydes with β-benzoyl propionic acid

Some Naturally Occurring Plant Lignans The following table focuses onsome lignans naturally occuring in plants. # Plant Species Lignan and its activity Activity 1 Justicia ciliate New Lignan Glycosides Potent Anti-inflammatory Effect Epipinoresinol, Phillygenin 2 Piper cubeba Dihydrocubebin,Yatein, Cubebin Antileishmanial activity and Hinokinin 3 Piper retrofractum Sesamin, bis-epoxy lignan, Antileishmanial activity (–)-sesamin. 4 Justicia hyssopifolia A β-D-glucoside (elenoside), cytotoxic activity Cubebin, Helioxanthin 5 Eucalyptus globoidea Globoidnan Inhibits HIV integrase 6 Euterpe oleracea Dihydroconiferyl alcohol, (+) Antioxidant and Cytoprotective lariciresinol, (+) pinoresinol, (+) Activities syringaresinol, and protocatechuic acid methyl ester 7 Phenax angustifolius Two new Anti – HIV activity Wedd dibenzylbutyrolactone-type lignans, named phenaxolactones 1 and 2. 8 Phenax rugosus Three new dibenzylbutyrolactone Anti – HIV activity Wedd lignans (phenaxolactones 3–5). 9 Phyllanthus Justicidin B, Two new lignans, acutissima acutissi-malignans A and B, along Cytotoxic & anti-HIV activities with two known lignans. 10 Phyllanthus niruri Hinokinin, Phyllanthin, Potential Antihyperuricemic hypophyllanthin, phylltretralin & Agents niranthin, Lignans As 150 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Structures of some Naturally Occurring and Synthetic Lignans

Conclusion Clearly lignans possess a diverse spectrum of biological properties. The variety of biological properties suggests that these compounds possess a variety of mechanism of action. Extensive investigations correlating structure to activity can be carried out to understand which chemical sites on the lignans are responsible for their specific biological properties. In this way it may be possible to develop new and effective pharmacological agents from the lignan family.

References Gurib , Fakim,Medicinal plants: traditions of yesterday and drugs of tomorrow,Feb;27(1):1-93 (2006) Fabricant D.S and Farnsworth N.R, The Value of Plants Used in Traditional Medicine for Drug Discovery, Environmental Health Perspectives,Vol 109 (1) March (2001) Robinson R. Proc. Univ. Durham Phil. Soc. 8, 14–59 (1927–8). Haworth R.D. Ann. Rep. Prog. Chem. 33, 266 (1936). Slanina J and Glatz Z, Separation procedures applicable to lignan analysis, 31 July (2004). Hearon W and W. S. MacGregorW . Chem. Rev. 55, 957–1068 (1955). J. L. Hartwell J.L & A.W. Sckrecker, Fotschur, Chem. org. Naturstoffa, 15, 83 (1953) Study of some Natural and Synthetic Lignans 151

Weings K& Spanig, Oxidative Coupling of phenols, Marcel Dekker Inc. New York, p 323 – 356 (1961) PasarkarV.R , Phd Thesis, 1 – 45 (1975) Aryes, D. C.; Loike, J. D. In Lignans: Chemical, Biological and Clinical Properties; CambridgeUniversity Press: Cambridge, pp 1-137, (1990) Whiting D.A. Nat. Prod. Rep. 2, 191–211 (1985); 4, 499–525 (1987); 7, 349–364 (1990). Kaufinan, P.B.; Cseke, L. J.; Warber, S.; Duke, J. A.; Brielmann, H. L. in Natural Products from Plants; CRC Press: New York, pp 51-55; (1999). Markkanen, T.; Makinen, M. L.; Maunuksela, E.; Himanen, P. Drugs Exptl. Clin.Res. 7, 711-718; (1981). Miyazawa M., Biotransformation of Lignans and Neolignans,Current Organic Chemistry, Volume 5, Number 9, pp. 975-986(12); (2001). Moazzami, A. A. Sesame Seed Lignans - Diversity, Human Metabolism and Bioactivity; (2006). Milder I.E, Arts I.C, van de Putte B, Venema DP, Hollman PC (2005). “Lignan contents of Dutch plant foods: a database including lariciresinol, pinoresinol, secoisolariciresinol and matairesinol”. Br. J. Nutr. 93 (3): 393–402. doi:10.1079/ BJN20051371.PMID 15877880 Axelson, M.; Sjovall, J.; Gustafsson, B. E.; Setchell, K. D. R. Nature 290, 659-665; (1982). 18. Setchell, K. D., A. M. Lawson, F. L. Mitchell, H. Adlercreutz, D. N. Kirk, and M. Axelson. Lignans in man and in animal species. Nature. 287: 740-742 (1980). Borriello S.P ,. Setchell, M. Axelson & A. M. Lawson; Production and metabolism of lignans by the human faecal flora; Journal of Applied Microbiology; Vol 58, Iss 1; pp 37 – 43; March (2008). Heinonen S et. al; In Vitro Metabolism of Plant Lignans : New Precursors of Mammalian Lignans Enterolactone and Enterodiol; J. Agric. Food Chem.;49, 3178-3186; (2001). Saarinen, N. M. et.al; Hydroxymatairesinol, a novel enterolactone precursor with antitumor properties from coniferous tree (Picea abies). Nutr. Cancer; 36, 207-216; (2000). Chi Yau Atropisomerism and the Synthesis of Lignans by Thesis August, (2001). Wang L; Mammalian phytoestrogens: enterodiol and enterolactone; Journal of chromatography B; Vol 777 Issue 1-2; 25 Pages 289-309; Sep (2002). Penalvo J, Heinonen S, Anna-M, Aura and Herman Adlercreutz; Dietary Sesamin Is Converted to Enterolactone in Humans; The American Society for Nutritional Sciences; J. Nutr. 135:1056-1062, May (2005). Coulman K. D. et. al; Whole sesame seed is as rich a source of mammalian lignan precursors as whole flaxseed. Nutr Cancer; 52(2):156-65; (2005). Ivon E. J. Milder, Ilja C. W. Arts, Betty van de Putte, Dini P. Venema and Pelter C. H. Hollman RIKILT; Lignan contents of Dutch plant foods : a database including lariciresinol, pinoresinol, secoisolarici-resinol and Matairesinol; November 09 (2004). B. Raffaelli, A. Hoikkala, E. Lapel; Enterolignans, Available online 4 March (2002). R.P. Mahashabde R.P, PhD thesis, NagpurUniversity, 2010;Pg 1-62 Deo S.S, Inam F , Mahashabde R.P and JadhavA.N; Anti-inflammatory activity in substituted naphthalenes;Asian Journal of Chemistry ; Vol. 22, No. 9 , 7423-7425;(2010) MahashabdeR.P , Kadam N.S,.Deo S.S, Inam F; Assaying Antioxidant & Antimicrobial activities of 1-phenyl-3-naphthoic acid derivatives; American Chemical Science journal ;4(6), 865-873,2014 19

Nanotechnology in Food Industry

Rajiv Khombare*

Abstract

This review focuses on tremendous benefits of nanotechnology in food industry in terms of food processing, packaging, safety and quality control. Nanotechnology can modify permeability of packaging material, increasing barrier properties, improving mechanical and heat-resistance, developing active antimicrobial surfaces, and creates Nano-biodegradable packaging materials. Nanotechnology has prospective revolution in food industry by design of nutrient delivery system to produce Nano-formulated agrochemicals, enrich nutritional values and generation of novel products through bioactive encapsulation. It has been used in innovative development of biosensors for detection of pathogens and chemical contaminants. This new technology also raises a serious concern about toxicological aspects of nanoparticles in food, with emphasis on the risk assessment and safety issues. Keywords: Nanoparticles, Nanocapsules, Nanosensors, Food packaging, Food safety, Food processing.

Introduction Nanotechnology is emerging as a rapidly growing field with its wide application in science and technology for manufacturing of new materials at Nanoscale level (Albrecht et al., 2006). This technology gained a tremendous impetus due to its capability of reformulating metals into new Nanosized particles, with dimension less than 100 nm in size. Due to nanoparticle size, their Physio-Chemical properties drastically changes leading to broad spectrum of new applications. Recently, innovative nanotechnology has revolutionized the food industry (Sanguansri and Augustin, 2006; Weiss et al., 2006; Chaudhry et al., 2008; Silvestre et al., 2011; Cushen et al., 2012; Rossi et al., 2014; Thangave and Thiruvengadam, 2014).There is progressive improvement in use of nanoparticles in food industry especially on food processing, packaging, storage and development of innovative products. Nanoparticles aimed at enhancing bioavailability of nano-sized nutraceuticals and health supplements, improving taste and flavour, consistency, stability and texture of food products (Chaudhry et al., 2008; Chaudhry et al., 2010; Momin et al., 2013). Due to antimicrobial characteristics

* Department of Chemistry, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Nanotechnology in Food Industry 153 of nanoparticles it can be incorporated into the food packaging materials to increase shelf life and keep it safe for human consumption. It is predicted that the invasion of the food production market with nanoparticles will be significantly increased in the near future (Heinlaan et al., 2008). Moreover, the use of encapsulated nanoparticles enable the development of nano-formulated agrochemicals such as pesticides, fertilizers, biosides, veterinary medicine, additives, antimicrobials and detoxifying compounds. In human food processing, nanocapsules have been used as nano-sized ingredients, additives, nutritional supplements, and in functional foods (Momin et al., 2013). Cushen et al., (2012) reported that nanoencapsulation of food ingredients and additives have been carried out to provide protective barriers, flavor and taste masking, controlled release, and better dispensability for water-insoluble food ingredients and additives. There is developing public concern regarding the toxicity and adverse effect of nanoparticles on human health and environment. Therefore, establishment of regulatory system capable of managing risks associated with the use of nanoparticles is recommended.

Objectives This review provides a comprehensive analysis of current developments in nanoparticles technology applied to food industry starting from food processing and packaging to food safety.

Nanotechnology in Food Processing During food processing, nanoparticles have been applied to improve nutritional quality, flow properties, flavor, color and stability or to increase shelf life. Indeed, nanotechnology might help in development of healthier food with lower fat, sugar and salts to overcome many food-related diseases. Recently, bulk amounts of SiO2 and TiO2 oxides have been permitted as food additives (E551 and E171, respectively) (EFSA, 2000). Effective olive oil hydrolysis by the use of covalent immobilization of porcine triacylglycerol lipase onto functionalized nanoscale SiO2 with reactive aldehyde group for better reuse, adaptation and stability have been reported (Bai et al., 2006). Several nano- and micro-structured assemblies of nanoparticles have been designed for encapsulation of food ingredients, additives, nutritional supplements as well as functional foods (Augustin and Hemar, 2009).

Nano-sized Additives and Nutraceuticals The potential of nanotechnology in functional food, design of nutritional supplements and nutraceuticals containing nanosized ingredients and additives such as; vitamins, antimicrobials, 154 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey antioxidants, and preservatives are currently available for enhanced taste, absorption and bioavailability (Momin et al., 2013). Some nutraceuticals incorporated in the carriers include lycopene, beta-carotenes and phytosterols are used in healthy foods to prevent the accumulation of cholesterol (Mozafari et al., 2006).

Nanotechnology in Food Packaging The crucial role of nanotechnology in food packaging process is considered as the largest commercial application in food sector (Chaudhry et al., 2010). In recent years, there is more concern about research and innovation in food packaging materials ranging from films, carbon nanotubes, to waxy nano-coatings for some foods. The use of nanoparticles might help in production of new food packaging materials with improved mechanical, barrier and antimicrobial properties to increase shelf life (Chaudhry et al., 2008; Mihindukulasuriya and Lim, 2014). Beside antimicrobial characteristics, nanoparticles can be used as vehicle to deliver antioxidants, enzymes, flavors, anti-browning agents and other materials to extend shelf life, even after opening (Cha and Chinnan, 2004; LaCosteet al., 2005; Weiss et al., 2006). Inorganic nanomaterials of some metals and metal oxides such as; silver, iron, titanium dioxide, zinc oxides, magnesium oxide as well as silicon dioxide and carbon nanoparticles have been used as antimicrobial agents in food packaging and in some cases as food supplement (Sekhon, 2010). Interestingly, TiO2 is widely used as a disinfecting agent as it generates highly reactive oxygen species (ROS) that are toxic to pathogenic microorganisms. Antimicrobial activity of silver nanoparticles against E. coli and Bacillus cereus spores is greatly enhanced if combined with titanium dioxide and carbon nanotubes, respectively (Krishna et al., 2005). Silver-doped TiO2 nanoparticles also inactivated B. cereus spores on aluminum and polyester surfaces (Vohra et al., 2005) and destroyed airborne bacteria and molds when incorporated into air filters (Vohra et al., 2006). Stabilization of silver nanoparticles with SDS or PVP increases antimicrobial activity against E. coli and Staphylococcus aureus 35. Therefore, surfaces of refrigerators and storage containers are coated with silver nanoparticles to prevent growth of foodborne pathogens and food spoilage bacteria (Cho et al., 2005).

Nanotechnology and Food Safety (Nanosensors and Nanosieves) The use of nanoparticles to develop nanosensors for detection of food contaminant and pathogens in food system is another potential use of nanotechnology. Indeed, tailor-made nanosensors for food analysis, flavours or colours, drinking water and clinical diagnostics have been developed (Li and Sheng, 2014). In fact, nanoparticles can be incorporated as nanostructured transducer of the biosensor devices (Vo-Dinh et al., 2001). Nakamura and Karube (2003) have recently reviewed research in biosensors. Nanosensors incorporated into the food packaging materials might help in track of any physical, chemical or even biological modification during food processing phase. Smart packaging with specialized nanosensors and nano-devices have been designed to detect toxins, food pathogens and chemicals (Cheng et al., 2008; Dingman, 2008; Lerner et al., 2011; Yang et al., 2011). Recently, Mihindukulasuriya and Lim (2014) reported the innovative application of nanotechnology in design of smart or intelligent packaging to enhance communication aspect of package. This smart packaging might increase efficiency of information transfer during distribution. The response generated due to changes related with internal or external environmental factor, will be recorded through specific sensor. Nanotechnology in Food Industry 155

Company Product Name Functionality Tip Top Tip Top UP® Fortified with nanocapsules containing Omega Omega-3 DHA 3 DHA rich tuna fish oil Shemen industries Canola Activa oil fortified with nonesterified phytosterols encapsulated via a new nanoencapsulation technology (NSSL: Nano-sized self assembled liquid structures, developed by Nutralease (Israel) for optimising the absorption and bioavailability of target nutrients RBC Life Sciences®, Nanoceuticals™ Slim Shake Chocolate nanoscale Inc. ingredients that scavenge more free radicals, increase hydration, balance the body’s pH, reduce lactic acid during exercise, reduce the surface tension of foods and supplements to increase wetness and absorption of nutrients Shenzhen Become Nanotea Nano-fine powder produced using Industry & Trade nanotechnologies. Co., Ltd.

Conclusion On the basis of review we can conclude that Nanotechnology can be effectively used in Food industry for Health, Safety and for better cost effectiveness. On the basis of this I would like to suggest that all Food Industries should incorporate these technology and avail their benefits.

References Albrecht, M.A., Evans, C.W., Raston, C.L. 2006. Green chemistry and the health implications of nanoparticles. Green Chemistry, 8(5): 417 32. Chaudhry, Q., Scotter, M., Blackburn, J., Ross, B., Boxall, A., Castle, L., Aitken, R., Watkins, R. 2008. Applications and implications of nanotechnologies for the food sector. Food Additional Contaminants. Part A, 25: 241 258. Silvestre, C., Duraccio, D., Cimmino, S. 2011. Food packaging based on polymer nanomaterials. Programme Polymer Sci., 36: 1766 1782. Sanguansri, P., Augustin, M.A. 2006. Nanoscale materials development A food industry perspective. Trends Food Sci. Technol., 17: 547 556. Weiss, J., Takhistov, P., McClements, D.J. 2006. Functional materials in food nanotechnology. J. Food Sci., 71(9): R107 R116. Thangave, G., Thiruvengadam, S. 2014. Nanotechnology in food industry A review. Int. J. Chem. Tech. Res., 16(9): 4096 4101. Chaudhry, Q., Castle, L., Watkins, R. (Eds.) 2010. Nanotechnologies in Food. Royal Society of Chemistry Publishers, Cambridge, UK. Momin, J.K., Jayakumar, C., Prajapati, J.B. 2013. Potential of nanotechnology in functional foods. Emirates J. Food Agricult., 25(1): 10 19. 156 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Heinlaan, M., Ivask, A., Blinova, I., Dubourguier, H.-C.andKahru, A. 2008. Toxicity of nanosized and bulk ZnO, CuO and TiO2 to bacteria Vibrio fischeri and crustaceans Daphnia magna and Thamnocephalus platyurus. Chemosphere, 71: 1308 1316. Bai, Y.X., Li, Y.F., Yang, Y., Yi, L.X. 2006. Covalent immobilization of triacylglycerol lipase onto functionalized nanoscale SiO2 spheres. Process Biochem., 41: 770 777. Mozafari, M.R., Flanagan, J., Matia-Merino, L. 2006. Recent trends in the lipid- based nanoencapsulation of antioxidants and their role in foods. J. Sci. Food Agriculture, 86: 2038 2045. 20

HPLC Validation of Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Doses form

Apurva Sharma*

Abstract

The selected drug in present paper is Cetirizine hydrochloride. Cetirizine tablets contain not less than 90.0

percent and not more than 110.0 percent of the stated amount of Cetirizine hydrochloride C21H25ClN2 O3.2HCl. The present paper presents an analytical method for HPLC estimation of Cetirizine hydrochloride in the form of tablet dosage. It is performed using stainless steel column 25x4.6mm, packed with octadecylsilane chemically bonded to porous silica(5µm). Mobile phase of mixture of 0.19gm of heptanes sulphonic acid sodium salt in 300ml water and 700 ml acetonitrile having ph adjusted to 3.2 with 0.05M sulphuric acid, uv-visible spectroscopic detector Wavelength adjusted at230nm Flowrate:1.2ml/minute, Retention time:7.3 approx, Injection value:20µl.The results obtained showed a good agreement with the declared content. Recovery values for cetirizine hydrochloride were 98.720% of the labelled amount. Due to its simplicity and accuracy, the method is suitable for routine quality-control analysis for cetirizine in tablets and compounded capsules. Keyword: HPLC; Cetirizine; Chromatogram; Peak table

Introduction Cetirizine is a second-generation antihistamine, major metabolite of hydroxyzine, and

a racemic selective H1 receptor inverse agonist used in the treatment of allergies, hay fever, Angioedema, and Urticaria. The structural similarities of cetirizine to hydroxyzine, and its derivation from piperazine, attribute similar adverse reactions and properties to other piperazine derivatives. Cetirizine Chemical IUPAC name: 2-[2-[4-[(4-chlorophenyl)-phenylmethyl]piperazin-1- yl]ethoxy]acetic acid

Chemical Formula of Cetirizine Hydrochloride: C21H25ClN2O3

* Department Of Chemistry, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 158 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Structure of Cetirizine Hydrochloride

Cetirizine tablets contain not less than 90.0 percent and not more than 110.0 percent of the stated amount of Cetirizine hydrochloride C21H25ClN2 O3.2HCl. For the estimation of drug formulation, the instrumental techniques, which are commonly employed, are spectrophotometry, GLC, high performance thin layer chromatography (HPTLC), HPLC etc. These methods are based upon the measurement of specific and nonspecific physical properties of the substances .In the present paper, the technique which is used for estimation of citrizine hydrochloride in dosage form is HPLC. HPLC is a separation technique that involves the injection of a small volume of liquid sample into a tube packed with tiny particles (3 to 5 micron (ìm) in diameter called the stationary phase), where individual components of the sample are moved down the packed tube (column) with a liquid (mobile phase) forced through the column by high pressure delivered by a pump. These components are separated from one another by the column packing that involves various chemical and/or physical interactions between their molecules and the packing particles. These separated components are detected at the exit of this tube (column) by a flow-through device (detector) that measures their amount. An output from this detector is called a “liquid chromatogram”. In principle, LC and HPLC work the same way except the speed, efficiency, sensitivity and ease of operation of HPLC is vastly superior. These components are separated from one another by the column packing that involves various chemical and/or physical interactions between their molecules and the packing particles.

Methodology Experimental Apparatus • Reversed phase high pressure liquid chromatographic system with uv-visible spectroscopic detector was used. HPLC Validation of Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Doses form 159

• Vacuum filter was used for filtration of sample • An electrical balance was used for accurate measurement of amount of sample Reagents • Heptanes sulphonic acid sodium salt • HPLC water (double distilled water) • Acetonitrile Sulphuric acid Solutions • Standard solution • Test solution Chromatographic System • A stainless steel column 25x4.6mm,packed with octadecylsilane chemically bonded to porous silica(5µm) • Mobile phase • Detector: uv-visible spectroscopic detector • Wavelength:230nm • Flow rate:1.2ml/minute • Retention time:7.3 approx • Injection value:20µl Assay Procedure • Determined by liquid chromatography • Preparation of mobile phase: Dissolve 0.19gm of heptanes sulphonic acid sodium salt in 300ml water, add 700 ml acetonitrile and mix. Adjust the ph to 3.2 with 0.05M sulphuric acid, filter • Preparation of standard solution: Weigh 25 mg of standard cetirizine hydrochloride, dissolve it in 50ml of hplc water, now dilute 5 ml of solution to 50 ml with the mobile phase • Preparation of test solution: Test sample used for analysis is Defal tabs #RAT -462. Weigh and powder 20 tablets. Now weigh quantity of powder containing cetirizine hydrochloride equivalent to about 10mg. That will be 156.9mg.dissolve it in 100ml of mobile phase, filter. Again dilute by taking 5ml of this and diluting by mobile phase making up to 10ml. • After preparing test and standard solution, inject the standard solution and test solution alternately in liquid chromatographic system, run the chromatogram 160 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Flow Chart of Whole Process

Chromatogram and Peak Table Chromatogram of Standard Solution: HPLC Validation of Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Doses form 161 Peak Table.1 Detectora A Ch1 230nm PEAK Ret. TIME AREA HEIGHT AREA% HEIGHT% K’ 1 6.706 22790 2171 3.135 4.245 0.00 2 7.267 704213 48979 96.865 95.755 0.084 TOTAL 727003 51150 100.000 100.000

Chromatogram of Standard Solution:

Peak Table.2 Detector A Ch 1 230 nm PEAK Ret. TIME AREA HEIGHT AREA% HEIGHT% K’ 1 6.702 22749 2168 3.128 4.229 0.000 2 7.262 704442 49097 96.872 95.771 0.084 TOTAL 727191 51265 100.000 100.000

Chromatogram of Test Sample 162 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Peak Table.3 Detector A Ch1 230 nm PEAK RET.TIME AREA HEIGHT AREA% HEIGHT% K’ 1 1.183 31038 8315 4.023 13.135 0.000 2 1.885 18923 4225 2.453 6.675 0.593 3 6.666 31259 3063 4.051 4.839 4.635 4 7.219 690348 47697 89.473 75.351 5.101 TOTAL 771569 63300 100.000 100.000

Calculations Area of Sample : 690348 Area of Standard : Avg.area = =704328 Average Weight of 20 Tablets: =157.5 Test Weight of 1 Tablet Equivalent to 10mg of Cetirizine Hydrochloride: 156.9mg Potency of Standard: 99.54 =9.872mg/tab 9.872=98.720% of the labelled amount

Results and Disscusion The studies involved HPLC method for determination of labelled amount of cetirizine hydrochloride in the tablets dosage form. The results obtained showed a good agreement with the declared content. Recovery values for cetirizine hydrochloride were 98.720% of the labelled amount. The proposed method is reliable rapid, precise, selective and may be used for the quantitative analysis of cetirizine HCl. The method was valid was for the determination in raw materials, bulk drug and formulations. Because of its simplicity and accuracy, the method is suitable for routine quality-control analysis for cetirizine in tablets and compounded capsules. Thus, the method was approved to be simple, precise and reproducible and can be used for the quality control of cetirizine hydrochloride tablets.

Method Validiation Validation by definition is an act of providing that any process, method, equipment, material, activity, system or analyst performs as expected under given set of conditions. When extended to an analytical procedure, depending upon the application it means that a method works reproducibility when carried out by a same or different person, in same or different laboratories, using different regent, different equipment etc. It will ensure commitment to quality of products and services. It builds a degree of confidence not only for the developer but also to the user. The applied HPLC method is successfully applied to the determination of cetirizine in bulk and tablet form, with high percentage of recovery, good accuracy and precision. HPLC Validation of Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Doses form 163 Applicability of Proposed Method and Other Method can be used for Present Analysis The HPLC technique is most widely used for all the analytical separation technique due to its sensitivity, its ready adaptability to accumulate quantitative determinations, its suitability for separating non-volatile species or thermally fragile ones. The other most widely used method for estimation drug content in tablets dosage form is spectrophotometric method using UV/visible spectroscopy. It is based on beer’s Lambert law It is simpler and précised method but not as informative as HPLC.

Conclusion The selected drug in present thesis is cetirizine hydrochloride Cetirizine HCl or 2-[2-[4-[(4- chlorophenyl)phenylmethyl]- piperazin-1-yl]ethoxy]acetic acid dihydrochloride, is white or almost white powder, freely soluble in water, practically insoluble in acetone and in methylene chloride, molecular weight 461.8, molecular formula, C21H27Cl3N2O3 Cetirizine is a piperazine derivative and metabolite of hydroxyzine, is an antihistamine, reported to be a long acting and with some mast-cell stabilizing activity. It is used for the symptomatic relief of hypersensitivity reactions including rhinitis and chronic urticaria. Cetirizine tablets contain not less than 90.0 percent and not more than 110.0 percent of the stated amount of Cetirizine hydrochloride C21H25ClN2 O3.2HCl For the estimation of drug formulation, the instrumental techniques, which are commonly employed, are spectrophotometry, GLC, high performance thin layer chromatography (HPTLC), HPLC etc. These methods are based upon the measurement of specific and nonspecific physical properties of the substances. In the present thesis an analytical method for HPLC estimation of cetrizine hydrochloride in tablets dosage form is described. The following studies involved an HPLC method for determination of cetirizine hydrochloride in tablet dosage form, performed with stainless steel column 25x4.6mm, packed with octadecylsilane chemically bonded to porous silica(5µm). Mobile phase of mixture of 0.19gm of heptanes sulphonic acid sodium salt in 300ml water and 700 ml acetonitrile with ph adjusted to 3.2 with 0.05M sulphuric acid, uv-visible spectroscopic detector Wavelength adjusted at:230nmFlow rate:1.2ml/minute, Retention time:7.3 approx, Injection value:20µl. The results obtained showed a good agreement with the declared content. Recovery values for cetirizine hydrochloride were 98.720% of the labelled amount. The method being simple and accurate is suitable for routine quality-control analysis for cetirizine in tablets and compounded capsules. It is also a precise and reproducible method and can be used for the quality control of cetirizine hydrochloride tablets. Earlier methods proposed for the determination of cetirizine hydrochloride in tablet dosage form were of low order specificity and sensitivity, poor stability and more time consuming. The proposed method can overcome the shortcomings of the earlier methods and is simpler. rapid, precise and reproducible. 164 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey References Bhatia Neela, Ganbavale Santosh, More Harinath ( 2008) Spectrophotometric estimation of ambroxol hydrochloride and cetirizine hydrochloride in tablets. Asian Journal of Pharmaceutics ; Vol.2, Issue 3, pp. 159-162 Goweker, NM, Pande, VV, Kasture AV, Takede AR.Chandorker jJGSpectrophotometric estimation of ambroxol and cetirizine hydrochloride from tablet dosage form; Pak. Jour. of Pharma; pp:250-251 ; 2007. Bhatia Neela M. ,* Ganbavale S. K. , Bhatia M. S. , More H. N. , and. Kokil S. U;RP-HPLC and Spectrophotometric Estimation of Ambroxol Hydrochloride and Cetirizine Hydrochloride in Combined Dosage Form; Indian J Pharm Sci. ): 603–608 ; Sep– Oct 2008; Birajdar S, Meyyanathan S. N , Raja R. B. , Krishanaveni N. , Suresh B. ; Simultaneous analysis of ambroxol HCl with cetirizine HCl and of ambroxol HCl with levo-cetirizine dihydrochloride in solid dosage forms by RP-HPLC; Acta chromatographica; vol 20; pp. 411-421; September 2008 Paw, Misztal G. , Hopkala H. and Drozd J. ; Development and validation of a HPLC method for the determination of cetirizine in pharmaceutical dosage forms ;journal pharmazie; pg no313-315;2002. Lisiane Bajerski, Simone G Cardoso, Isabel Fraçao Diefenbach, Marcelo Donadel Malesuik, Helena Sílvia, Miollo Borgmann; Liquid chromatographic determination of cetirizine in oral formulations. journal of aoac international; vol 88; pg no 424- 427. www.wikkipedia.com www.sciencedirect.com 21

Xenobiotics: Uses and Applications

Dr. Kamalinee Deodhar*

Abstract

Xenobiotics is a foreign chemical substance found within an organism that is not normally naturally produced by or expected to be present within that organism. It can also cover substances which are present in much higher concentrations than are usual. Specifically, drugs such as antibiotics are xenobiotics in humans because the human body does not produce them itself, nor are they part of a normal food. Natural compounds can also become xenobiotics if they are taken up by another organism, such as the uptake of natural human hormones by fish found downstream of sewage treatment plant outfalls, or the chemical defenses produced by some organisms as protection against predators. The term xenobiotics, however, is very often used in the context of pollutants such as dioxins and polychlorinated biphenyls and their effect on the biota, because xenobiotics are understood as substances foreign to an entire biological system, i.e. artificial substances, which did not exist in nature before their synthesis by humans. Xenobiotics may be grouped as antioxidants, carcinogens, drugs, environmental pollutants, food additives, hydrocarbons, and pesticides.Xenobiotics that are released into the environment on a large scale are numerous different halogenated aliphatic and aromatic compounds, nitro-aromatics, phthalate esters, and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons. In this review article scientific and environmental perspective of Xenobiotics are mentioned Keywords: Xenobiotics, antioxidants, foreign chemical substance.

Introduction All organisms are exposed constantly and unavoidably to foreign chemicals, or xenobiotics, which include both manufactured and natural chemicals such as drugs, industrial chemicals, pesticides and pollutants, pyrolysis products in cooked food, alkaloids, secondary plant metabolites, and toxins produced by molds, plants, and animals. The sources and uses of xenobiotics in urban

* Department of Botany, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 166 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey environments are very diverse, making structured approaches to source and use classification a fundamental requirement for effective pollution management. This Paper provides a general introduction to the topic, sources and uses.

Methodology The paper is based on the review of last few major inventions through which the ‘Xenobiotics’ is emerged as separate branch. The earliest history of xenobiotic metabolism is interwoven with the birth of organic chemistry. Many individual investigations over the first 100 years of metabolism research led to the classic compilation of R.T. Williams “Detoxification Mechanisms” in (11). This tome heralded the birth of xenobiotic/drug metabolism as a distinct branch of science. Biochemical research in the early 1950s unveiled the mechanisms of a wide variety of transformation reactions. The pioneering studies of James and Elizabeth Miller and Julius Axelrod revealed the subcellular localization of metabolism reactions and the identification of the enzymes responsible for catalysis of the transformation (1 &

7). The discovery of the role of cytochrome P450 in metabolism by Omura and Sato (9HYPERLINK “http://dmd.aspetjournals.org/content/29/6/779.full”) and Estabrook, Cooper, and HYPERLINK “http://dmd.aspetjournals.org/content/29/6/779.full”Rosenthal (5HYPERLINK “http:// dmd.aspetjournals.org/content/29/6/779.full”) was an invitation to scientists from many peripheral disciplines to take an interest in metabolic transformations. In the clinical setting, the discovery of the genetic polymorphism involved in debrisoquine (6) and sparteine (4) metabolism and the presence of isozymes of cytochrome P450 (10) and other metabolizing enzymes emphasized the importance of individual response to drugs. Our understanding of control of enzyme synthesis, transcription of DNA, and molecular mechanisms of cellular control has been greatly enhanced by the study of the body’s response to foreign compounds. The rapidly accelerating pace of scientific discovery, exemplified by the sequencing of the human genome, foretells the increasingly important role of metabolism in designing individual drug therapy. The drug industry has routinely targeted the average individual for therapy, while it has become increasingly clear that all patients are unique in both their pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic response to drugs. Monitoring individual pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic response will be the challenge of modern pharmacotherapy. Knowledge of individual characteristics including genetic inheritance, phenotypic expression, concomitant therapy, age, sex, and other physiological factors can all help to predict the disposition of new drugs. Biological systems have the ability to specifically recognize individual molecules and by enzymatic amplification convert the recognition into an electronic signal. Harnessing our growing insight into biochemical mechanisms to monitor drug exposure may provide the breakthrough necessary for truly individualized therapy. The combination of our advanced understanding of metabolism with modern diagnostic techniques including genomics and proteomics will allow the generation of individualized paradigms for the treatment of disease. Drug metabolism scientists are uniquely positioned to bring about this revolution in individual therapy. We are finally approaching the goal of xenobiotic metabolism research as stated by Marcel Nencki in 1870 whereby “one will on the one hand be able to establish laws allowing predictions on the fate of new compounds, and on the other hand gain increasing insight into the organism as a ‘chemical agent’” (8). Xenobiotics is an emerging branch which is having lot of scope in different fields. Due to their extensive range of physico-chemical properties, xenobiotics can be used for an extremely diverse Xenobiotics: Uses and Applications 167 range of potential applications. Indeed a great deal of time and money is spent in developing new substances specifically designed to have the appropriate characteristics for a particular use. Some substances are perfectly suited to a rather narrow range of specialist uses (e.g. 95 % of 1, 2- dichloroethane is used to produce vinyl chloride which is further converted to polyvinyl chloride. (2), whereas other substances may be suitable for a wide variety of applications (e.g. the use of polybrominateddiphenylethers (PBDEs) as flame retardants in polystyrene, textile coatings, wire and cable insulation, electronics etc. (3 & 12).

Results and Observations The data collected from review is presented in tabular form (Observation Table 1). It’s observed that in day to day life we come across so many xenobiotic compounds; but we are not aware about them as Xenobiotic compounds. The data is also reviewed for its source’s classification. It is represented in observation table 2.

Table: 1. Application of Xenobiotics in Different Fields. Sr. No Application Field 1 Agricultural industry (e.g. pesticides) 2 Chemical industry: basic chemicals (e.g. solvents) 3 Chemical industry: chemicals used in synthesis (e.g. intermediates) 4 Electrical/ electronic engineering industry (e.g. semiconductors) 5 Personal/ domestic (e.g. cosmetics; cleaning agents; insecticides fordomestic use) 6 Public domain (e.g. products used in public areas such as offices; cleaningagents; insecticides) 7 Leather processing industry (e.g. dyestuffs) 8 Metal extraction, refining and processing industry (e.g. heat transferring agents) 9 Mineral oil and fuel industry (e.g. motor oil; fuel additives; gasoline) 10 Photographic industry (e.g. antifogging agents; sensitizers) 11 Polymers industry (e.g. stabilisers; softeners; antistatic agents) 12 Pulp, paper and board industry (e.g. dyestuffs; toners) 13 Textile processing industry (e.g. dyestuffs; flame retardants) 14 Paints, lacquers and varnishes industry (e.g. solvents; viscosity adjusters) 15 Engineering industry: civil and mechanical (e.g. construction materials; hydraulic fluid)

Table 2: Classification of Sources of Xenobiotics and its Causing Examples. Sr. No Sources of Xenobiotics Example 1 Process Household to Industrial processes 2 Mobile sources(Moving sources) Aeroplane, cars or ships 168 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

3 Point sources Pollutants coming from car 4 Natural Sources Volcano, Forest fire 5 Indoor & Outdoor sources Indoor and outdoor activities 6 Intentional & unintentional sources Hazardous chemicals from chemical industries

Conclusion From the paper it is concluded that the xenobiotics is one of the leading branch in coming future with lots of applications from household to industrial area. There is a lot of scope in study and finding such xenobiotic compounds present around us which are having applications in different area. The study should also include the analysis of such compounds and their effect.

References Axelrod J. The enzymatic deamination of amphetamine (benzedrine) J BiolChem (1955) 214:753–763. BMU. Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) 1, 2-dichloroethaneScreening Information Data Set (SIDS). Initial Assessment Report (SIAR) for 14thSIDS Initial Assessment meeting (SIAM), Paris, France. Retrieved March 2002, from http://www.chem.unep.ch/irptc/sids/OECDSIDS/DICHLOROETH.pdf. Danish EPA. Brominated flame retardants substance flow analysis and assessment ofalternatives. (1999) Environmental Project no. 494, from http://www2.mst.dk/udgiv/Publications/1999/87-7909-416-3/html/kap01_eng.htm Eichelbaum M, Spannbrucker N, Dengler HJ. A probably genetic defect of the metabolism of sparteine. in Biological Oxidation of Nitrogen, edGorrod JW (Elsevier, Amsterdam), (1978) pp 113–118. Estabrook RW, Cooper DY, Rosenthal S (1963) The light-reversible carbon monoxide inhibition of the steroid C-21 hydroxylation system of the adrenal cortex. Biochem Z 338:741–755. Mahgoub A, Dring LG, Idle JR, Lancaster R, Smith RL. Polymorphic hydroxylation of debrisoquine in man. Lancet 2: (1977) 584–586. Mueller GC, Miller JA. The reductive cleavage of 4-dimethylamino-azo-benzene by rat liver: the intracellular distribution of the enzyme system and its requirement for triphosphopyridine nucleotide. J BiolChem (1949) 180:1125. Nencki M. du Bois-Reymond’s Arch Anat. Physiol., 399; as quoted in Conti A and Bickel MH. History of Drug Metabolism: Discoveries of the Major Pathways in the 19th Century. Drug Metab Rev (1870) 6:1–50. Omura T, Sato. A new cytochrome in liver microsomes. J BiolChem (1962).237:1375–1376. Thomas PE, Lu AY, Ryan D, West SB, Kawalek J, Levin W. Multiple forms of rat liver cytochrome P-450. J BiolChem (1976) 251:1385–1391. Williams RT. Detoxication Mechanisms. (John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,(1947). US EPA. Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDEs) project plan. Retrieved March 2006,from http://www.epa.gov/oppt/ pbde/pubs/proj-plan32906a.pdf. 22

Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health

Anjali Sudam Mane*

Abstract

Nanotechnology has been considered as a science and technology based transformation and is termed as a promising new growth innovator of the 21st century. It offers a range of potential for healthcare and medical innovation, including targeted drug delivery systems, extendedrelease vaccines, diagnostic and imaging technologies, and antimicrobial coating. Brief explanation of various types of pharmaceutical nano systems is given. Classification of nano materials based on their dimensions is given.These innovations have become a major focus not only for government policy initiatives and investment, but have also directed for both nanomedicine and pharmaceutical industries. This paper explores the rising nanotechnology development in the health sector in India. The paper also contributes to policy making by providing new information on the commercialization of nanotechnology in the health sector. The paper also analyses the prospective and challenges in the development of rapidly growing nanotechnology research in the health sector in India. It also highlights the regulatory players involved in nanotechnology in the health sector in India. The paper is based on both primary and secondary research.Nanotechnology is the study of extremely small structures, having size of 0.1 to 100 nm. Nano medicine is a relatively new field of science and technology. Brief explanation of various types of pharmaceutical nano systems is given. Classification of nano materials based on their dimensions is given. An application of Nanotechnology in various fields such as health and medicine, electronics, energy and environment, is discussed in detail. Applications of nano particles in drug delivery, protein and peptide delivery, cancer are explained. Applications of various nano systems in cancer therapy such as carbon nano tube, dendrites, nano crystal, nano wire, nano shells etc. are given. Applications ofnanotechnology in surgery, visualization, tissue engineering, antibiotic resistance, immune response are discussed in this article. Nano pharmaceuticals can be used to detect diseases at much earlier stages. Keywords: nanotechnology; nanomedicine; health; R&D, India Nano devices; Nano material; Nano medicine; Nano pharmaceutics; Drug delivery

* Assistant Teacher in Physics, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 170 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Introduction Development in the field of nanotechnology and its applications to the field of medicines and pharmaceuticals has revolutionized the twentieth century. Nanotechnology [1] is the study of extremely small structures. The prefix “nano” is a Greek word which means “dwarf “. The word “nano” means very small or miniature size. Nanotechnology is the treatment of individual atoms, molecules, or compounds into structures to produce materials and devices with special properties. Nanotechnology involve work from top down i.e. reducing the size of large structures to smallest structure e.g. photonics applications in nano electronics and nano engineering, top-down or the bottom up, which involves changing individual atoms and molecules into nanostructures and more closely resembles chemistry biology. Nanotechnology deals with materials in the size of 0.1 to 100 nm; however it is also inherent that these materials should display different properties such as electrical conductance chemical reactivity, magnetism, optical effects and physical strength, from bulk materials as a result of their small size. Nanotechnology works on matter at dimensions in the nanometer scale length (1-100 nm), and thus can be used for a broad range of applications and the creation of various types of nano materials and nano devices.

History of Nanotechnology The development in the field of nanotechnology started in 1958 and the various stages of development have been summarized in Table 1 TABLE -1 Periodical Development in Nanotechnology.

Year Development in Nanotechnology 1959 R. Feynman initiated thought process 1974 The term nanotechnology was used by Taniguchi for the first time. 1981 IBM Scanning Tunneling Microscope 1985 Bucky Ball” 1986 First book on nanotechnology Engines of Creation published by K. Eric Drexler, Atomic Force Microscope 1989 IBM logo was made with individual atoms 1991 S. Iijima discovered Carbon Nano tube for the first time. 1999 1st nano medicine book by R. Freitas “Nano medicine” was published 2000 For the first time National Nanotechnology Initiative was launched 2001 For developing theory of nanometer-scale electronic devices and for synthesis and characterization of carbon nanotubes and nano wires, Feynman Prize in Nanotechnology was awarded 2002 Feynman Prize in Nanotechnology was awarded for using DNA to enable the self- assembly of new structures and for advancing our ability to model molecular machine systems Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 171

2003 Feynman Prize in Nanotechnology was awarded for modeling the molecular and electronic structures of new materials and for integrating single molecule biological motors with nano-scale silicon devices. 2004 First policy conference on advanced nanotech was held. First center for nano mechanical systems was established, Feynman Prize in Nanotechnology was warded for designing stable protein structures and for constructing a novel enzyme with an altered function. 2005-2010 3D Nano systems like robotics, 3D networking and active nano products that change their state during use were prepared. 2011 Era of molecular nano technology started

Nano scale and Nanostructures The nano scale is the place where the properties of most common things are determined just above the scale of an atom. Nano scale objects have at least one dimension (height, length, depth) that measures between 1 and 999 nanometres (1-999 nm) (Figure 1). The short explanation of pharmaceutical nano system is as follows: As shown in the schematic diagram (Figure 2), pharmaceutical nanotechnology is divided in two basic types of nano tools viz. nano materials and nano devices. These materials can be sub classified into nano crystalline and nano structured materials. Nano structure consists of nano particles, dendrimers, micelles, drug conjugates, metallic nano particles etc.

Figure 1:Nanoscale and Nanostructures 172 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Figure 2: Schematic diagram of various types of pharmaceutical nano systems

Figure 3: Surface functionalized gold nano particle

Figure 4: Structure of Liposome’s Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 173

Figure 5: Schematic representation of a Dendrimers showing core, branches, and surface. Liposome’s: These have been extensively explored and most developed nano carriers for novel and targeted drug delivery due to their small size, these are 50-200 nm in size. When dry phospholipids are hydrated, closed vesicles are formed (Figure 4). Liposome’s are biocompatible, versatile and have good entrapment efficiency. It finds application as long circulatory and in passive and active delivery of gene, protein and peptide. Dendrimers: Dendrimers are hyper branched, tree-like structures. It contains three different regions: core moiety, branching units, and closely packed surface (Figure 4). It has globular structure and encloses internal cavities. Its size is less than 10 nm. These are used for longfor their size, shape, and have unique physical properties. Nano tubes have some special advantages over other drug delivery and diagnostic systems (Figure 3) due to their unique physical properties. Metallic nano particles: Metallic nano particles have used in drug delivery, especially in treatment of cancer and also in biosensors. Amongst various metals, silver and gold nano particles are of prime circulatory, controlled delivery of bioactive material, targeted delivery of bioactive particles to macrophages and liver targeted delivery.

Classification of Nano Materials Nano materials can be classified dimension wise into following categories: Classification Examples 1. Nano rods, nano wires have dimension less than 100 nm. 2. Tubes, fibers, platelets have dimensions less than 100 nm. 3. Particles, quantum dots, hollow spheres have 0 or 3 Dimensions < 100 nm. On the basis of phase composition, nano materials in different phases can be classified as, 1. Thenano material is called single phase solids. Crystalline, amorphous particles and layers are included in this class. 2. Matrix composites, coated particles are included in multi-phase solids. 3. Multi-phase systems of nano material include colloids, aero gels, Ferro fluids, etc. 174 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Manufacturing Approaches The two major methods [2] to get nano materials are -one is the bottom up and the other is top down approach. Bottom up create components which are made of single molecules, and covalent forces hold them together that are far stronger than the forces that hold together macro-scale components. Huge amount of information could be stored in devices build from the bottom up. Top manufacturing involves the building of parts through methods such as cutting, carving and moulding and due to our boundaries in these processes highly advanced nano devices are yet to be manufactured. Laser ablation, milling, nano-lithography, hydrothermal technique, physical vapor deposition and electrochemical method (electroplating) uses top down approach for nanoscale material manufacturing.

Applications of Nanotechnology The different fields that find probable applications of nanotechnology are as follows: a. Health and Medicine b. Electronics c. Transportation d. Energy and Environment e. Space exploration

Nanotechnology in Health and Medicine Even today various disease like diabetes, cancer, Parkinson’s disease, Alzheimer’s disease, cardiovascular diseases and multiple sclerosis as well as different kinds of serious inflammatory or infectious diseases (e.g. HIV) constitute a high number of serious and difficult illnesses which are posing a major problem for the mankind. Nano-medicine is an application of nanotechnology which works in the field of health and medicine. Nano-medicine makes use of nano materials, and nano electronic biosensors. In the future, nano medicine will profit molecular nanotechnology. The medical area of nano science application has many future benefits and is potentially priceless for all human races. With the help of nano medicine early detection and prevention, enhancedverdict, proper treatment and follow-up of diseases is possible. Certain nano scale particles are used as tags and labels,the testing has become more responsive and more flexible. Gene sequencing has become more competent with the invention of nano devices like gold nano particles, these gold particles when tagged with short segments of DNA can be used for detection of genetic sequence in a sample. With the help of nanotechnology, damaged tissue can be reproduced or repaired. These so called artificially stimulated cells are used in tissue engineering, which might transform the transplantation of organs or artificial implants. . Nanotechnology has made stupendousinput in the fieldof stem cell research. For example, magnetic nanoparticles (MNPs) have been successfully used to separate and group stem cells. Quantum dots have been used for molecular imaging and tracing of stem cells, for delivery of gene or drugs into stem cells, nano materials such as carbon nano tubes, fluorescent CNTs and fluorescent MNPs have been used. single nanostructures were considered for convenient regulation of propagation and differentiation of stem cells is done by designed unique nano structures. All these advances speed up the progress of stem cells toward the application in regenerative medicine [3]. The recent Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 175 applications of nanotechnology in stem cell research promises to open new avenues in regenerative medicine. Nanotechnology can be a valuable tool to track and image stem cells, to drive their differentiation into specific cell lineage and ultimately to understand their biology. This will hopefully lead to stem cell-based therapeutics for the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of human diseases [4].

Figure 6: Nanotechnology applications in stem cell biology and medicine. Nano devices can be used in stem cell research in tracking and imaging them. It has its applications for basic science as well as translational medicine. Stem cells can be modulated by mixing of nano carriers with biological molecules (Figure 6). Nano devices can be used for intracellular access and also for intelligent delivery and sensing of biomolecules. These technologies have a great impact in stem cell microenvironment and tissue engineering studies and have a great potential for biomedical applications [5].

Nanotechnology, Energy and Environment Nanotechnology will play a crucial role in coming 50 years by defending the environment and providing adequate energy for a growing world. The advanced techniques of nanotechnology can help storage of energy, its conversion into other forms, ecofriendly manufacturing of materials and by better improved renewable energy sources. Nanotechnology can be used for less expensive energy production and for renewal energies, in solar technology, nano-catalysis, fuel cells and hydrogen technology. Carbon nano tube fuel cells are used for storage of hydrogen, thus finds application in power cars. Nanotechnology is used on photovoltaic , for making them cheap, light weight and more efficient, which can reduce the burning of engine pollutants by nano porous filters, and can clean the exhaust mechanically, with the help of catalytic converters made up of nano scale noble metal particles and by catalytic coatings on cylinder walls and catalytic nanoparticles as additive for fuels. Nanotechnology can help in developing new ecofriendly and green technologies that can minimize undesirable pollution. Solid state lightening can reduce total electricity consumption. Nano technologicalapproaches can lead to a strong reduction of energy consumption for illumination. 176 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Medical use of Nano Materials Nano medicine is a relatively new field of science and technology. By interacting with biological molecules at nano scale, nanotechnology broadens the field of research and application. Interactions of nano devices with bio molecules can be understood both in the extracellular medium and inside the human cells. Operation at nano scale allows exploitation of physical properties different from those observed at micro scale such as the volume/surface ratio. Two forms of nano medicine that have already been tested in mice and are awaiting human trials; use of gold nano shells to help diagnose and cure cancer, and the use of liposome as vaccine adjuvant and as vehicles for drug transport [6,7]. Similarly, drug detoxification is also another application for nano medicine which has been used successfully in rats. Medical technologies can make use of smaller devices are less invasive and can possibly be implanted inside the body, and their biochemical reaction times are much shorter. As compared to typical drug delivery nano devices are faster and more sensitive [8].

Drug Delivery Nano medicines used for drug delivery, are made up of nano scale particles or molecules which can improve drug bioavailability. For maximizing bioavailability both at specific places in the body and over a period of time, molecular targeting is done by nano engineered devices such as nano robots [9]. The molecules are targeted and delivering of drugs is done with cell precision. In vivo imaging is another area where Nano tools and devises are being developed for in vivo imaging. Using nano particle images such as in ultrasound and MRI, nano particles are used as contrast. The nano engineered materials are being developed for effectively treating illnesses and diseases such as cancer. With the advancement of nanotechnology, self-assembled biocompatible nano devices can be created which will detect the cancerous cells and automatically evaluate the disease, will cure and prepare reports. The pharmacological and therapeutic properties of drugs can be improved by proper designing of drug delivery systems, by use of lipid and polymer based nano particles [10]. The strength of drug delivery systems is their ability to alter the pharmacokinetics and bio-distribution of the drug. Nano particles are designed to avoid the body’s defense mechanisms [11] can be used to improve drug delivery. New, complex drug delivery mechanisms are being developed, which can get drugs through cell membranes and into cell cytoplasm, thereby increasing efficiency. Triggered response is one way for drug molecules to be used more efficiently. Drugs that are placed in the body can activate only on receiving a particular signal. A drug with poor solubility will be replaced by a drug delivery system, having improved solubilityto presence of both hydrophilic and hydrophobic environments [12]. Tissue damage by drug can be prevented with drug delivery, by regulated drug release. With drug delivery systems larger clearance of drug from body can be reduced by altering the pharmacokinetics of the drug. Potential nano drugs will work by very specific and well-understood mechanisms; one of the major impacts of nanotechnology and nanoscience will be in leading development of completely new drugs with more useful behavior and less side effects. Thus nano particles are promising tools for the advancement of drug delivery, as diagnostic sensors and bio imaging. The bio-distribution of these nanoparticles is still imperfect due to the complex host’s reactions to nano- and micro sized materials and the difficulty in targeting specific organs in the body. Efforts are made to optimize and better understand the potential and limitations of nano particulate systems. In the excretory system study of mice dendrimers are encapsulated for drug deliver of positively-charged gold nano particles, which were found to enter the kidneys Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 177 while negatively-charged gold nanoparticles remained in the important organs like spleen and liver. The positive surface charge of the nanoparticle decreases the rate of opsonization of nanoparticles in the liver, thus affecting the excretory pathway. Due to small size of 5 nm, nano particles can get stored in the peripheral tissues, and therefore can get collected in the body over time. Thus nano particles can be used successfully and efficiently for targeting and distribution, further research can be done on nano toxicity so that its medical uses can be increased and improved [13].

The Applications of Nano Particles in Drug Delivery Abraxane, is albumin bound paclitaxel, a nano particle used for treatment of breast cancer and non-small- cell lung cancer (NSCLC). Nano particles are used to deliver the drug with enhanced effectiveness for treatment for head and neck cancer, in mice model study,which was carried out at from Rice University and University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center. The reported treatment uses Cremophor EL which allows the hydrophobic paclitaxel to be delivered intravenously. When the toxic Cremophor is replaced with carbon nanoparticles its side effects diminished and drug targeting was much improved and needs a lower dose of the toxic paclitaxel [14]. Nano particle chain was used to deliver the drug doxorubicin to breast cancer cells in a mice study at Case Western Reserve University. The scientists prepared a 100 nm long nano particle chain by chemically linking three magnetic, iron-oxide nano spheres, to one doxorubicin-loaded liposome. After penetration of the nano chains inside the tumor magnetic nanoparticles were made to vibrate by generating, radiofrequency field which resulted in the rupture of the liposome, thereby dispersing the drug in its free form throughout the tumor. Tumor growth was halted more effectively by nanotechnology than the standard treatment with doxorubicin and is less harmful to healthy cells as very less doses of doxorubicin were used [15,16]. Polyethylene glycol (PEG) nano particles carrying payload of antibiotics at its core were used to target bacterial infection more precisely inside the body, as reported by scientists of MIT. The nano delivery of particles, containing a sub-layer of pH sensitive chains of the amino acid histidine, is used to destroy bacteria that have developed resistance to antibiotics because of the targeted high dose and prolonged release of the drug. Nanotechnology can be efficiently used to treat various infectious diseases [17,18]. Researchers in the Harvard University Wyss Institute have used the biomimetic strategy in a mouse model .Drug coated nano particles were used to dissolve blood clots by selectively binding to the narrowed regions in the blood vessels as the platelets do [19]. Biodegradable nanoparticle aggregates were coated with tissue plasminogen activator, tPA, were injected intravenously which bind and degrade the blood clots. Due to shear stresses in the vessel narrowing region dissociation of the aggregates occurs and releases the tPA-coated nano particles. The nano therapeutics can be applied greatly to reduce the bleeding, commonly found in standard thrombosis treatment. The researchers in the University of Kentucky have created X-shaped RNA nano particles, which can carry four functional modules. These chemically and thermodynamically stable RNA molecules are able of remaining intact in the mouse body for more than 8 hours and to resist degradation by RNAs in the blood stream. These X-shaped RNA can be effectively performing therapeutic and diagnostic functions. They regulate gene expression and cellular function, and are capable of binding to cancer cells with precision, due to its design [20,21]. ‘Minicell’ nano particle are used in early phase clinical trial for drug delivery for treatment of patients with advanced and untreatable cancer. The minicells are built from the membranes of mutant bacteria and were loaded with 178 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey paclitaxel and coated with cetuximab, antibodies and used for treatment of a variety of cancers. The tumor cells engulf the minicells. Once inside the tumor, the anti-cancer drug destroys the tumor cells. The larger size of minicells plays a better profile in side-effects. The minicell drug delivery system uses lower dose of drug and has less side-effects can be used to treat a number of different cancers with different anti-cancer drugs [22,23]. Nano sponges are important tools [24] in drug delivery, due to their small size and porous nature they can bind poorly-soluble drugs within their matrix and improve their bioavailability. They can be made to carry drugs to specific sites, thus help to prevent drug and protein degradation and can prolong drug release in a controlled manner.

Proteins and Peptide Delivery Protein and peptides are macromolecules and are called biopharmaceuticals. These have been identified for treatment of various diseases and disorders as they exert multiple biological actions in human body. Nano materials like nano particles and dendrimers are called as nanobiopharmaceuticals , are used for targeted and/or controlled delivery.

Applications Nano particles were found useful in delivering the myelin antigens, which induce immune tolerance in a mouse model with relapsing multiple sclerosis. In this technique, biodegradable polystyrene micro particles coated with the myelin sheath peptides will reset the mouse’s immune system and thus prevent the recurrence of disease and reduce the symptoms as the protective myelin sheath forms coating on the nerve fibers of the central nervous system. This method of treatment can potentially be used in treatment of various other autoimmune diseases [25,26].

Cancer Due to the small size of nano particles can be of great use in oncology, particularly in imaging. Nano particles, such as quantum dots, with quantum confinement properties, such as size-tunable light emission, can be used in conjunction with magnetic resonance imaging, to produce exceptional images of tumor sites. As compared to organic dyes, nano particles are much brighter and need one light source for excitation. Thus the use of fluorescent quantum dots could produce a higher contrast image and at a lower cost than organic dyes used as contrast media. But quantum dots are usually made of quite toxic elements.Nano particles have a special property of high surface area to volume ratio, which allows various functional groups to get attached to a nano particle and thus bind to certain tumor cells. Furthermore, the 10 to 100 nm small size of nanoparticles, allows them to preferentially accumulate at tumor sites as tumors lack an effective lymphatic drainage system. Multifunctional nano particles can be manufactured that would detect, image, and then treat a tumor in future cancer treatment [27]. Kanzius RF therapy attaches microscopic nano particles to cancer cells and then “cooks” tumors inside the body with radio waves that heat only the nanoparticles and the adjacent (cancerous) cells. Nano wires are used to prepare sensor test chips, which can detect proteins and other biomarkers left behind by cancer cells, and detect and make diagnosis of cancer possible in the early stages from a single drops of a patient’s blood [28]. Nano technology based drug delivery is based upon three facts: i) efficient encapsulation of the drugs, ii) successful delivery of said drugs to the targeted region of the body, and iii) successful release of that drug there. Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 179 Nano shells of 120 nm diameter, coated with gold were used to kill cancer tumors in mice by Prof. Jennifer at Rice University. These nano shells are targeted to bond to cancerous cells by conjugating antibodies or peptides to the nano shell surface. Area of the tumour is irradiated with an infrared laser, which heats the gold sufficiently and kills the cancer cells [29]. Cadmium selenide nano particles in the form of quantum dots are used in detection of cancer tumors because when exposed to ultraviolet light, they glow. The doctor injects these quantum dots into cancer tumours and can see the glowing tumour, thus the tumour can easily be removed. Nano particles are used in cancer photodynamic therapy, wherein the particle is inserted within the tumor in the body and is illuminated with photo light from the outside. The particle absorbs light and if it is of metal, it will get heated due to energy from the light. High energy oxygen molecules are produced due to light which chemically react with and destroy tumors cell, without reacting with other body cells. Photodynamic therapy has gained importance as a noninvasive technique for dealing with tumors. The applications of various nano systems in cancer therapy [30] are summarized as: Carbon Nano Tubes, 0.5–3 nm in diameter and 20–1000 nm length, are used for detection of DNA mutation and for detection of disease protein biomarker. Dendrimers, less than 10 nm in size are useful for controlled release drug delivery, and as image contrast agents. Nano Crystals, of 2-9.5 nm size cause improved formulation for poorly-soluble drugs, labeling of breast cancer marker HeR2 surface of cancer cells. Nano Particles are of 10-1000 nm size and are used in MRI and ultrasound image contrast agents and for targeted drug delivery, as permeation enhancers and as reporters of apoptosis, angiogenesis. Nano Shells find application in tumor-specific imaging, deep tissue thermal ablation. Nano Wires are useful for disease protein biomarker detection, DNA mutation detection and for gene expression detection. Quantum dots, 2-9.5 nm in size, can help in optical detection of genes and proteins in animal models and cell assays, tumor and lymph node visualization

Surgery The technique developed by Rice University, two pieces of chicken meat is fused by a flesh welder, by placing two pieces of chicken touching each other. In this technique, green liquid containing gold-coated nano shells is allowed to dribble along the seam and two sides are weld together. This method can be used arteries which have been cut during organ transplant. The flesh welder can be used to weld the artery perfectly [38].

Visualization Drug distribution and its metabolism can be determined by tracking movement. Cells were dyed by scientists to track their movement throughout the body. These dyes excited by light of a certain wavelength to glow. Luminescent tags were used to dye various numbers of cells. These tags are quantum dots attached to proteins which penetrate cell membranes. The dots were of various sizes and bio-inert material. As a result, sizes are selected so that the frequency of light used to make a group of quantum dots fluoresce, and used to make another group incandesce. Thus both groups can be lit with a single light source. 180 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Tissue Engineering In tissue engineering, nanotechnology can be applied to reproduce or repair damaged tissues. By using suitable nanomaterial-based scaffolds and growth factors, artificially stimulated cell proliferation, in organ transplants or artificial implants therapy nano technology can be useful, which can lead to life extension.

Antibiotic Resistance Antibiotic resistance can be decreased by use of nano particles in combination therapy. Zinc Oxide nano particles can decrease the antibiotic resistance and enhance the antibacterial activity of Ciprofloxacin against microorganism, by interfering with various proteins that are interacting in the antibiotic resistance or pharmacologic mechanisms of drugs [39].

Immune Response The nano device bucky balls have been used to alter the allergy/ immune response. They prevent mast cells from releasing histamine into the blood and tissues, as these bind to free radicals better than any anti-oxidant available, such as vitamin E [40].

Nano Pharmaceuticals Nano pharmaceuticals can be used to detect diseases at much earlier stages and the diagnostic applications could build upon conventional procedures using nanoparticles. Nano pharmaceuticals are an emerging field where the sizes of the drug particle or a therapeutic delivery system work at the nanoscale. Delivering the appropriate dose of a particular active agent to specific disease site still remains difficult in the pharmaceutical industry. Nano pharmaceuticals have enormous potential in addressing this failure of traditional therapeutics whichoffers site-specific targeting of active agents. Nano pharmaceuticals can reduce toxic systemic side effects thereby resulting in better patient compliance. Pharmaceutical industry faces enormous pressure to deliver high-quality products to patients while maintaining profitability. Therefore pharmaceutical companies are using nanotechnology to enhance the drug formulation and drug target discovery. Nano pharmaceutical makes the drug discovery process cost effective, resulting in the improved Research and Development success rate, thereby reducing the time for both drug discovery and diagnostics.

Application of Nanotechnology in Modified Medicated Textiles Using nanotechnology newer antibacterial cotton has been developed and used for antibacterial textiles. Developmental works using nanotechnology, new modified antibacterial textiles have been developed. Application of conventional antimicrobial agents to textiles has been already reported. This technique has been advanced by a focus on inorganic nano structured materials that acquire good antibacterial activity and application of these materials to the textiles [41].

Conclusion Nano materials have increased surface area and nano scale effects, hence used as a promising tool for the advancement of drug and gene delivery, biomedical imaging and diagnostic biosensors. Nano materials have unique physicochemical and biological properties as compared to their larger counterparts. The properties of nano materials can greatly influence their interactions with bio molecules and cells, due to their peculiar size, shape, chemical composition, surface structure, Role of Nano Technology in Medicine and Health 181 charge, solubility and agglomeration. For example, nano particles can be used to produce exceptional images of tumor sites; single-walled carbon nanotubes, have been used as high- efficiency delivery transporters for biomolecules into cells. There is a very bright future to nano technology, by its merging with other technologies and the subsequent emergence of complex and innovative hybrid technologies. Biology-based technologies are intertwined with nanotechnology-nanotechnology is already used to manipulate genetic material, and nano materials are already being built using biological components. The ability of nanotechnology to engineer matter at the smallest scale is revolutionizing areas such as information technology cognitive science and biotechnology and is leading to new and interlinking these and other fields. By further research in nanotechnology, it can be useful for every aspect of human life. Medicine, regenerative medicine, stem cell research and nutraceuticals are among the leading sectors that will be modified by nanotechnology innovations.

References Yousaf SA, Salamat A (2008) Effect of heating environment on fluorine doped tin oxide (f: SnO/sub 2/) thin films for solar cell applications. Faculty of Engineering & Technology. Islamabad. Khan Y (2007) The great partition: The making of India and Pakistan. Wang Z, Ruan J, Cui D (2009) Advances and prospect of nanotechnology in stem cells. Nanoscale Res Lett 4: 593-605. Ricardo PN e Lino F (2010) Stem cell research meets nanotechnology. Revista Da Sociedade Portuguesa D Bioquimica, CanalBQ 7: 38-46. Deb KD, Griffith M, Muinck ED, Rafat M (2012) Nanotechnology in stem cells research: advances and applications. Front Biosci (Landmark Ed) 17: 1747- 1760. Boisseau P, Loubaton B (2011) Nanomedicine, nanotechnology in medicine. ComptesRendus Physique 12: 620-636. (2010) Nanotechnology in Targeted Cancer Therapy. University of Waterloo. Med chem ISSN: 2161-0444 Med chem, an open access journal Volume 5(2): 081-089 (2015) - 89 Citation: Nikalje AP (2015) Nanotechnology and its Applications in Medicine. Med chem 5: 081-089. doi:10.4172/2161-0444.1000247 LaVan DA, McGuire T, Langer R (2003) Small-scale systems for in vivo drug delivery. Nat Biotechnol 21: 1184-1191. Cavalcanti A, Shirinzadeh B, Freitas RA, Hogg T (2008) Nano robot architecture for medical target identification. Nanotechnology 19: 15. Allen TM, Cullis PR (2004) Drug delivery systems: entering the mainstream. Science 303: 1818-1822. Bertrand N, Leroux JC (2012) The journey of a drug-carrier in the body: an anatomo-physiological perspective. J Control Release 161: 152-163. Nagy ZK, Balogh A, Vajna B, Farkas A, Patyi G, et al. (2012) Comparison of electrospun and extruded SoluplusÂ®-based solid dosage forms of improved dissolution. J Pharm Sci 101: 322-332. Minchin R (2008) Nanomedicine: sizing up targets with nanoparticles. Nat Nanotechnol 3: 12-13. Hollmer M (2012) Carbon nanoparticles charge up old cancer treatment to powerful effect. Fierce drug delivery. Garde D (2012) Chemo bomb’ nanotechnology effective in halting tumors. Fierce drug delivery. Peiris PM, Bauer L, Toy R, Tran E, Pansky J, et al. (2012) Enhanced delivery of chemotherapy to tumors using a multicomponent nanochain with radio-frequency-tunable drug release. ACS Nano 6: 4157-4168. Trafton A (2012) Target: Drug-resistant bacteria. MIT news. Radovic-Moreno AF, Lu TK, Puscasu VA, Yoon CJ, Langer R, et al. (2012) Surface charge-switching polymeric nanoparticles for bacterial cell wall-targeted delivery of antibiotics. ACS Nano 6: 4279-4287. 182 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Wyss Institute (2012) Harvard’s Wyss Institute Develops Novel Nano therapeutic that Delivers Clot-Busting Drugs Directly to Obstructed Blood Vessels. Nourmohammadi N (2012) New Study Shows Promise in Using RNA Nanotechnology to Treat Cancers and Viral Infections. Nanomedicine: Notes, Fierce Drug Delivery. Haque F, Shu D, Shu Y, Shlyakhtenko LS, Rychahou PG, et al. (2012) Ultrastable synergistic tetravalent RNA nanoparticles for targeting to cancers. Nano Today 7: 245-257. Suzanne E (2012) Bacterial ‘minicells’ deliver cancer drugs straight to the target Fierce Drug Delivery. (2012) First trial in humans of ‘minicells’: A completely new way of delivering anti-cancer drugs. The European CanCer Organisation (ECCO) Science daily. Ahmed RZ, Patil G, Zaheer Z (2013) Nanosponges - a completely new nano-horizon: pharmaceutical applications and recent advances. Drug Dev Ind Pharm 39: 1263-1272. Laurance J (2012) Scientists develop nanoparticle method to help tackle major diseases. The Independent. Miller Stephen, Getts D, Martin A, McCarthy D, Terry R, et al. (2012) Micro particles bearing encephalitogenic peptides induce T-cell tolerance and ameliorate experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis. Nature Biotechnology 30: 1217-1224. Nie S, Xing Y, Kim GJ, Simons JW (2007) Nanotechnology applications in cancer. Annu Rev Biomed Eng 9: 257-288. Zheng G, Patolsky F, Cui Y, Wang WU, Lieber CM (2005) Multiplexed electrical detection of cancer markers with nanowire sensor arrays. Nat Biotechnol 23: 1294-1301. Loo C, Lin A, Hirsch L, Lee MH, Barton J, et al. (2004) Nanoshell-enabled photonics-based imaging and therapy of cancer. Technol Cancer Res Treat 3: 33-40. Nahar M, Dutta T, Murugesan S, Asthana A, Mishra D, et al. (2006) Functional polymeric nanoparticles: an efficient and promising tool for active delivery of bioactives. Crit Rev Ther Drug Carrier Syst 23: 259-318. Wong HL, Wu XY, Bendayan R (2012) Nanotechnological advances for the delivery of CNS therapeutics. Adv Drug Deliv Rev 64: 686-700. Davide B, Benjamin LD, Nicolas J, Hossein S, Lin-Ping Wu, et al. (2011) Nanotechnologies for Alzheimer’s disease: diagnosis, therapy and safety issues. Nano medicine: Nanotechnology, Biology and Medicine 7: 521-540. Freitas RA Jr (2005) Nanotechnology, nanomedicine and nanosurgery. Int J Surg 3: 243-246. Sivaramakrishnan SM, Neelakantan P (2014) Nanotechnology in Dentistry - What does the Future Hold in Store? Dentistry 4: 2. Zarbin MA, Montemagno C, Leary JF, Ritch R (2013) Nanomedicine for the treatment of retinal and optic nerve diseases. CurrOpinPharmacol 13: 134- 148. Zhang W, Wang Y, Lee BT, Liu C, Wei G, et al. (2014) A novel nanoscale-dispersed eye ointment for the treatment of dry eye disease. Nanotechnology 25: 125101. Sahoo SK, Dilnawaz F, Krishnakumar S (2008) Nanotechnology in ocular drug delivery. Drug Discov Today 13: 144-151. Gobin AM, O’Neal DP, Watkins DM, Halas NJ, Drezek RA, et al. (2005) Near infrared laser-tissue welding using nanoshells as an exogenous absorber. Lasers Surg Med 37: 123-129. Banoee M, Seif S, Nazari ZE, Jafari FP, Shahverdi HR, et al. (2010) ZnOnano particles enhanced Antibacterial activity of ciprofloxacin against Staphylococcus aureus and Escherichia coli. J Biomed Mater Res B ApplBiomater 93: 557-561. Abraham SA (2010) Researchers Develop Bucky balls to Fight Allergy. Virginia Commonwealth University Communications and Public Relations. Fouda MM, Abdel-Halim ES, Al-Deyab SS (2013) Antibacterial modification of cotton using nanotechnology. CarbohydrPolym 92: 943-954. 23

AYUSH : “Usage and Acceptability of Indian Systems of Medicines”

Deepak Gaikwad*

Abstract

Fighting disease with drugs is an endless task that originated from the existence of mankind. The drugs can be sourced from plant, animal and mineral sources or may be synthetic or semi-synthetic. Allopathic medicines are the most preferred option by majority of populations across globe as they give instant relief from pain or problem but they have major side effects. However, growing tendency towards the use of alternative systems of medicines through application of modern scientific methods has also been reported. In spite of the great progress made by modern scientific system of medicines, non allopathic medicines are still used by masses for treatment of chronic diseases like heart diseases, asthma, diabetes mellitus and a host of others diseases globally. These treatments take little longer and consistent duration for treatment but have almost negligible or no side effects on human body. There is a growing interest in the world concerning herbal remedies in AYUSH i.e. Ayurveda, Yoga, Unani, Siddha and Homoeopathy. It has contributed a lot in the field of medicine since past and people seeking these treatments are increasing today. Recently AYUSH therapy is becoming more and more noticeable from the point of view of dissatisfaction with modern medicine. Keywords: Allopathic, Synthetic, Ayurveda, Yoga, Unani, Siddha, Homoeopathy

Introduction Technology is the practical application of knowledge. Health technology is the practical application of knowledge to improve or maintain individual and population health. According to WHO health can be defined as the state of complete physical, mental and social well being and not merely an absence of disease. Health has been the matter of concern for human being since his evolution. The methodology adapted by him changed as time rolled on. Evidences of the same are still recorded in holy books like Ramayana and Mahabharata. The timeline of medicine and medical

* Department of Zoology, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 184 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey technology has changed from herbal medicines of Stone Age 3000 BC to face transplants of 21st century. Allopathic medicines are the most preferred one by majority of populations across globe as they give instant relief from pain or problem but they have major side effects. The other group of medicines AYUSH is an abbreviation formed from the initial letters of of Ayurveda, Yoga, Unani, Siddha, and Homeopathy. The non-allopathic medical systems have contributed a lot in the field of medicine since past and people seeking these treatments are increasing today. These treatments take little longer and consistent duration for treatment but have almost negligible or no side effects on human body.

Objectives: WHY AYUSH 9 AYUSH treats patients on the physical, mental and emotional levels, and each treatment is tailored to a patient’s individual needs. 9 These treatments are generally safe treatments, as it uses medicines in extremely diluted quantities or derived from plants so there are usually minimal side effects. 9 Its non-toxicity makes it a good choice for the treatment of children. 9 Another benefit of AYUSH is the cost of treatments; remedies are inexpensive, often fraction of the cost of conventional drugs. 9 AYUSH is a good treatment to explore for acute and chronic illnesses, particularly if these are found in the early stages and where there is not severe damage. 9 They can be used to assist the healing process after surgery or chemotherapy.Homeopath doctors double in two decades 9 Studies have been published in British medical journals confirming the efficacy of homeopathic treatment for rheumatoid arthritis. 9 Recently Ayurvedic therapy is becoming more and more noticeable from the point of view of dissatisfaction with modern medicine.

The Ayurveda Ayurveda is most commonly practiced form of complementary and alternative medicine in India. About 80% of Indian patients use Ayurvedic therapy. It aims to integrate and balance the body, mind, and spirit to help prevent diseases and promote wellness. Recently Ayurvedic therapy is becoming more and more noticeable from the point of view of dissatisfaction with modern medicine During early stages of human evolution i.e. 3300 BC doctors (Vaidyas) used very primitive forms of medicines. Ayurveda originated during 3000B.C. Ayurveda consists of two Sanskrit words - ‘ayur’ meaning age or life, and ‘veda’ which means knowledge. Thus, the literal meaning of Ayurveda is the science of life or longevity. Ayurveda constitutes ideas about ailments and diseases, their symptoms, diagnosis and cure, and relies heavily on herbal medicines, including extracts of several plants of medicinal values. This reliance on herbs differentiates Ayurveda and it has also disassociated itself from witch doctors and voodoo. In ancient India, Medical Science supposedly made many advances. Specifically these advances were in the areas of plastic surgery, extraction of cataracts, and dental surgery. There is documentary evidence to prove the existence of these practices. AYUSH : “Usage and Acceptability of Indian Systems of Medicines” 185

Ayurvedic Treatment of Past Source: Google images The ayurvedic period was dominated by many famous doctors in India during ancient times. Some of such famous doctors were Sushruta who is commonly known as ‘Father of Indian surgery’. He lived in Kashi, now called Varanasi 2000 years ago and was the first doctor to perform surgery in India. The surgeries included rhinoplasty, cataract, dental surgery, etc. His famous medical compendium ‘Sushrut- Samahita’ describes at least seven surgeries under eight heads Chedya (excision), Lekhya (scarification),Vedhya (puncturing), Esya (exploration), Ahrya (extraction), Vsraya (evacuation) and Sivya (Suturing). The compendium is translated in various languages like Latin and still used now by present doctors for references. Other well known doctors included Charaka famous as ‘ Father of Ayurveda’ Preliminary he introduced concepts of genetics also has theorized blindness from the birth is not due to any defect in the mother or the father, but owes its origin in the ovum and the sperm. In spite of the absence of anaesthesia, complex operations were performed.

The Yoga Yoga is an Art and Science of healthy living. The term ‘Yoga’ is derived from the Sanskrit root ‘YUJ’, meaning ‘to join’ or ‘to yoke’ or ‘to unite’ This is one of the oldest sciences of the world, originated in India, which is very useful for preserving and maintaining one’s physical and mental health and also for ‘spiritual evolution’ The practice of Yoga is believed to have started with the very dawn of civilization, Mythologically, the Lord Shiva is considered to be the first teacher of Yoga. Though Yoga was being practiced in the pre-Vedic period (2700 B.C.), the great Sage Maharshi Patanjali systematized and codified the then existing practices of Yoga, its meaning and its related knowledge through his Yoga Sutras. Following are the latest news articles about popularity of yoga in western countries: The latest study of Yoga in America It shows that 20.4 million Americans practice yoga, compared to 15.8 million from the previous 2008 study, an increase of 29 percent. In addition, practitioners spend $10.3 billion a year on yoga classes and products, including equipment, clothing, vacations and media. The previous estimate from the 2008 study was $5.7 billion. Data sources: Sports Marketing Surveys USA on behalf of Yoga Journal. 186 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Preliminary Evidence That Yoga Practice Progressively Improves Mood and Decreases Stress in a Sample of UK Prisoners By Megan Thielking @meggophone November 5, 2015 Yoga devotees overwhelmingly do their downward dogs to improve their general health — and, by and large, it seems to be working, according to a new roundup of data from the Centres for Disease Control and Prevention and the Department of Health and Human Services. The study of nearly 35,000 adults in the US looked at wellness practices such as yoga, chiropractic care, acupuncture, and dietary supplement use. The goal: To see how the practices made people feel about their health. Source : Hindawi Publishing Corporation Evidence-Based Complementary and Alternative Medicine Volume 2015, Article ID 819183, 7 pages http://dx.doi.org/10.1155/2015/819183

The Unani Medicine It is a traditional medicine as practiced in Mughal India and in Muslim culture in South Asia and modern day Central Asia. This system of medicine was in turn based on the teachings of the Greek physicians Hippocrates and Galen These drugs may be any substance or product including herbs, minerals, etc. for animals and human beings and can even be that prescribed by practitioners of Unani or Ayurvedic system of medicine. In recent days, awareness has been created related to safety and adverse drug reaction monitoring of herbal drugs including Unani drugs. After diagnosing the disease, Usoole Ilaj (principle of management) of disease is determined on the basis of etiology in the following pattern: Izalae Sabab (elimination of cause) Tadeele Akhlat (normalization of humors) Tadeele Aza (normalization of tissues/organs)

Origin of Unani medicine is still visible in its being based on the classical four humours: 1. Phlegm (Balgham), 2. Blood (Dam), 3. Yellow bile (bafra) 4. Black bile (Sauda).

Source: Google images AYUSH : “Usage and Acceptability of Indian Systems of Medicines” 187

Siddha Medicine : “Food itself is medicine and medicine itself is food” Tamil Citta- or Tami;-maruttuvam is a system of traditional medicine originating in Tamil Nadu in South India. The Siddha science is a traditional treatment system generated from Dravidian culture. Palm leaf manuscripts say that the Siddha system was first described by Lord Shiva to his wife Parvati. Parvati explained all this knowledge to her son Lord Muruga. He taught all these knowledge to his disciple sage Agasthya. Agasthya taught 18 Siddhars and they spread this knowledge to human beings. Traditionally, it is taught that the siddhars laid the foundation for this system of medication. The eight supernatural powers. Agastya is considered the first siddha and the guru of all siddhars. The Central Council of Indian Medicine (CCIM), a statutory body established in 1971 under AYUSH, monitors higher education in areas of Indian medicine, including siddha medicine. The diagnostic methodology in Siddha treatment is unique as it is made purely on the basis of the clinical acumen of the physician. The pulse, skin, tongue, complexion, speech, eye, stools and urine are examined. This approach is collectively known as “Eight types of examination”, and among the eight, the examination of pulse is very important in confirming the diagnosis. It is assumed that when the normal equilibrium of the three humors — Vaadham, Pittham and Kabam — is disturbed, disease is caused. The factors assumed to affect this equilibrium are environment, climatic conditions, diet, physical activities, and stress. Under normal conditions, the ratio between Vaadham, Pittham, and Kabam are 4:2:1, respectively. According to the Siddha medicine system, diet and lifestyle play a major role in health and in curing diseases. This concept of the Siddha medicine is termed as pathiyam and apathiyam, which is essentially a list of “do’s and don’ts”. The Homeopathy Name “homeopathy”, which comes from the Greek ” hómoios “-like” and ” pathos”- “suffering”. Homeopathy is a system of complementary medicine in which ailments are treated by minute doses of natural substances that in larger amounts would produce symptoms of the ailment. The pioneer of pharmacology, Paracelsus declared that small doses of “what makes a man ill also cures him”. Homeopathic pills are made from an inert substance (often sugars, typically lactose), upon which a drop of liquid homeopathic preparation is placed and allowed to evaporate. According to homeopaths the ‘therapeutic powers’ of the substance are retained by the diluent (water, sugar, or alcohol), but that the dilution removes any toxic effects. The end product is so diluted that it is indistinguishable from pure water, sugar or alcohol by laboratory tests but is still claimed to have an effect on consumers. Samuel Hahnemann German physician (1755–1843) gave homeopathy its name and expanded its principles in the late 18th century. It is based on his doctrine of like cures like a claim that a substance that causes the symptoms of a disease in healthy people would cure similar symptoms in sick people. In the late 18th and 19th centuries, mainstream medicine used methods like bloodletting and purging, and administered complex mixtures, such as Venice treacle, which was made from 64 substances including opium, myrrh, and viper’s flesh. These treatments often worsened symptoms and sometimes proved fatal. He was much disturbed by themedical system of his time, believing that its cures were crude and some of its strong drugs and treatments did 188 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey morehar m than good to patients. Hahnemann performed experiments on himself using Peruvian bark, which contains quinine,a Malaria remedyHe concluded that in a healthy person, quinine creates the same symptoms as malaria, includingfevers a nd chills, which is the reason why it is effective as a remedy. He then began to analyze the remedies available innature by what he called provings. Provings of homeopathic remedies are st ill compiled by dosing healthy adult’s wi thvarious substances and documenting the results, in terms of the dose needed to produce the symptoms and the length of the dose effectiveness. He published a collection of provings in 1805, and a second collection of 65 preparations appeared in his book, ”Materia Medica Pura”, in 1810. He gathered and published a complete overview of his new medical system in his 1810 book, ”The Organon of the Healing Art”, whose 6th edition, published in 1921, is still used by homeopaths today. Homeopaths select homeopathics by consulting reference books known as repertories, and by considering the totality of the patient’s symptoms, personal traits, physical and psychological state, and life history. The recent data about “Usage and acceptability of Indian systems of medicines” is as following: One reason for the growing popularity of homeopathy was its apparent success in treating people suffering from infectious disease epidemics. During 19th-century epidemics of diseases such as cholera, death rates in homeopathic hospitals were often lower than in conventional hospitals, where the treatments used at the time were often harmful and did little or nothing to combat the diseases. And the other important cause is it has no side effects; treatment is effective, but that there is evidence that using these treatments produces harm and can bring indirect health risks by delaying conventional treatment. Homeopathy achieved its greatest popularity in the 19th century. It was introduced to the United States in 1825 by Hans Birch Gram, a student of Hahnemann. The first homeopathic school in the US opened in 1835, and in 1844, the first US national medical association, the American Institute of Homeopathy, was established. Homeopath Doctors Double In Two Decades Kounteya Sinhai TNN: Sept 1, 2012, 3/16 AM IST NEW DELHI: Western countries may find homeopathy “unscientific” for which dozens of systematic reviews have “failed to produce convincing evidence of effectiveness” India registered homeopathic practitioners have more than doubled in two decades- increased from 1.05 lakh in 1980 to 2.46 lakh in 2010. Also the number of homeopathic hospitals/ dispensaries has increased fourfold- from 1,686 in 1980 to about 7,000 in 2010. Union health minister Gulam Nabi Azad said on Friday that a recent study called “Usage and acceptability of Indian systems of medicines” conducted by the Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) found that the annual average outdoor patient attendance was higher in homeopathy in comparison to Ayurveda, Unani, Siddha .Azad said “The demand for homeopathic treatment has increased in the country. Under a centrally sponsored scheme, a onetime assistance up to Rs. 10 crores is being provided to the states on 50:50 matching share basis for opening of new homeopathic institutions in states not having such institutes.” Source : Times of India Sept 1, 2012 AYUSH : “Usage and Acceptability of Indian Systems of Medicines” 189

Key words: Bloodletting, Purging, Venice treacle, Miasms Details of patients treated in 2004 and 2010 System 2004 2010 Out In Out In patients patients patients patients Siddha 15475528 199857 20231946 157936 Ayurveda 383977 19128 980916 33419 Unani 187317 20354 224264 15050 Homeopathy 1099756 18261 1595621 19985 Yoga 25153 149215 0 Total 17171731 257600 23181962 226390

Source: Government of Tamilnadu, Performance budget, 2005-06 and 2010-11

Findings and Suggestions Ayurvedic and homeopathy medicine do not cause any side effects as they are derived from the nature itself and not artificially prepared. So, that way in may be, rather should be taken together. In due course, comparing the results, slowly, Allopathy will give instant relief, but it will not remove the root problem, Allopathy medicines should be gradually reduced. If you mix up the systems, you will be unable to judge the effectiveness of the drugs. It is not only harmful but also leads to confusion and failure in disease treatment management.

Conclusion Ultimately whatever suits us for a longer period, with least side effect should be tried. Last but not the least, our attitude and faith plays a vital role in our treatment.

References http://nischennai.org/siddhamedicine.html http://dx.doi.org/10.1155/2015/819183 Evidence-Based Complementary and Alternative Medicine Volume 2015 (2015), Article ID 819183, 7 pages Times of India News paper : Sept 1, 2012, 3/16 AM IST Kayne :Homeopathic Pharmacy: Theory and Practice Paperback – 31 Jan 2006 Goodman Clifford S.: .Introduction to health technology assessment Yashashr Suchita R.:A cross-sectional study at a tertiary care hospital in India

Section 4 Environmental Concerns

Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection

Ashwini P. Parab*

Abstract

Man has to depend upon the nature around him for his survival. If his surrounding nature is polluted then his survival is at a threat. Therefore, for his wellbeing protection of environment becomes very essential. An understanding of the environmental challenges faced by the nations and their collective legal affords to protect it is very crucial. The atmosphere of the earth is a common heritage of all mankind. Man’s life is so connected to the environment that, changes in the environment affects human life. Therefore, environmental protection is responsibility of all nations. An understanding of environment and its pollution has gained momentum in recent past as the nations have realized the hazardous effect the environment on the individual health and wellbeing The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 defined the Environment to mean to include water, air and land and the inter-relationship which exists among and between water, air and land, and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organism and property unless the context otherwise to be required.3 According to the Physical existence of the environment, it has generally been segregated into four segments- ‘Atmosphere’, ‘Hydrosphere’, ‘Lithosphere’ and ‘Biosphere’. The ‘atmosphere’ implies the protective blanket of gases, surrounding the earth. The ‘Hydrosphere’ comprises all types of water resources oceans, seas, lakes, rivers, streams, reservoir, polar icecaps, glaciers, and ground water. The ‘Lithosphere’ is the outer mantle of the solid earth. It consists of minerals occurring in the earth’s crush crusts and the soil e.g. minerals, organic matter, air and water. And the ‘Biosphere’ indicates the realm of living organisms and their interaction with environment, viz atmosphere, hydrosphere and lithosphere and biosphere1. Key Words: Environment, Mankind, Creatures, Hydrosphere, Reservoir

Historical Background The In India, since historical period, people have had the consciousness of environmental protection and have realized the necessity of preserving the ecology. Saints lived in forests and had harmonious living with the environment. Vedas, puranas and Upanishads speak in length about protection of flora and fauna and how each form of life is unique in itself and has to be preserved. Sages used to * Asstistant Professor , KLE Society’s B. V. Bellad Law College, Belagavi, Karnataka 194 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey worship nature and seeking protection from natural calamities. Trees were worshiped and schooling was amidst the nature. The Hindu philosophy speaks about the concept of Panch Tatva i.e., human body is made up of the five elements of nature namely air, water, fire, earth and sky. The sages lived in the forest and performed rituals for protection of nature. Gurukulas where students accepted by the guru had to plant a sapling at the beginning of his shiksha and had to nurture it as long as he was getting his shiksha denoting growth. Peepal trees were worshiped and prayed. Ceremonies were performed under such old trees seeking their blessings. Herbs and other plants were major sources of medicine. Manu, Narada, Yagnavalkya and like wrote in length about protection of environment. They advised people to eat fresh food and not to contaminate the air and water. All the civilization have flourished on the banks of rivers. The forests and water sources have self purifying micro organisms which have to be protected and preserved. All the religions also mention that about protecting the environment and preserving it for the betterment of the mankind2. Kings like Ashoka, Chandragupta Maurya, Krishnadevaraya, and Kautilya’s Arthashastra explain how protection of environment is the duty of state and the kings have to make laws to see that nature have to be preserved and wildlife should not be harmed. The encouraged people the plant more and more trees, hunting of certain species which were at the verge of extinction were prohibited. Good sanitation facilities were provided by the state and prohibited any pollution of environment. Severe pecuniary liability and in some cases even punishment were provided for committing breach of these rules3.

Pre-Independence and Post Independence Scenario The British had invaded India with an intention to exploit her natural resources. Deforestation was rampant to meet the need of such huge British government military needs. But during the British reign in India some laws relating to preservation of some unique species of trees were afforded. Hunting of animals was the favourite sport enjoyed during the British time so that led to damage to the fauna in India. Soon after the independence, environmental protection was not a priority. But enactments like The Factories Act, 1948, The Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960, The Atomic Energy Act, 1962, The Insecticides Act 1968 showed concern about the government towards the sensitive issue of environment protection. Stockholm Convention was a turning point in the history of world environment. India was a party to this Convention and started playing its role in implementing the resolutions of the convention in the state. By 42nd Amendment to the constitution , Articles 48A and 51A (g) were added providing for the State responsibility to protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the forests and wild life of the country and to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wild life, and to have compassion for living creatures…. Apart from this there Environmental 9Protection0 Act 1986, Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, Wildlife Protection Act 1972 etc were also major laws passed by the state for the cause of healthy and safe environment for mankind. Further, the judiciary through its various judgments has played the crusader role to fight before the cause of environmental protection. Environmentalists like M. C. Mehta by filing several public interest litigations have made the nation aware about the importance of environmental issues and how the entire nation’s efforts are necessary in combating the evil of environmental pollution. Environmental pollution is no more the issue or problem of one individual nation but is a common problem faced by the all nations in the international sphere. So a collective approach from all the Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 195 nations in this regard is essential. The atmosphere of the earth is a common heritage of all mankind. Man’s life is so connected to the environment that, changes in the environment affects human life. Therefore, environmental protection is responsibility of all nations. All the nations have to work towards sustainable development of the earth atmosphere. All the nations have to make such development policies which will not have any adverse effect on the environment. . In Vellore Citizens’ Welfare forum v. Union of India4, Supreme Court observed that “Sustainable Development means a kind of development that meets the needs of the present generation without compromising the ability of the future generations to meet their own needs. To preserve the genetic resources for future, which are being increasingly threatened by pollution, deforestation and shirking of land races is the common concern of all nations and to save the future generations from the holocaust of these developments, close cooperation is required amongst nations. The environmental problems of poor countries like India are becoming acute and they deserve immediate attention in terms of planning and investment programmes. Since the depletion of resources in faster than their regeneration in these countries, it is absolutely essential to design or adopt technologies that are appropriate to both sound environment and sustained developments. Customary international law does not contain any specific rules on the protection and preservation of the environment. Hence treaties can play a vital role in the formulation of rules to regulate the conduct of States and in this regard the role of the United Nations is very significant which has laid down all impressive institutional frame work for this purpose.”

International Perspective of Environment The United Nations Organization has made several affords in improving the world environment by conducting conferences of General Assembly and adopting Conventions for its protection. The most important effort was in form of The Stockholm Conference, 1972. The declaration in general adopted by the conference was as follows- Man has fundamental right to freedom, equality and adequate condition of life in the environment of a quality that permits a life of dignity and well being. Man bears a solemn responsibility to protect and improve the environment for present and future generations. It requires that the natural resources of the earth including the air, water, land, flora and fauna, and especially representative samples of natural ecosystems must be safe-guarded for the present and future generations through careful planning or management, as appropriate. It recognizes that economic and social development is essential for ensuring a favorable living and working environment for man and for creating conditions on earth that are necessary for the improvement of the quality of life. The environmental policies of all States should enhance and not adversely affect the present or future development potential of developing countries, nor should they hamper the attainment of better living conditions for all, and appropriate steps should be taken by States and International Organizations with a view to reaching agreement on meeting the possible national and international economic consequences resulting from the application of environmental measures. States have, in accordance with the Charter of the United Nations and the principles of international law, the sovereign right to exploit their own resources pursuant to their own environmental policies, and the responsibility to ensure that activities within their jurisdiction or control do not cause damage to the environment of other States or of areas beyond the limits of national jurisdiction. States shall cooperate to develop further the international law regarding liability and compensation for the victims of pollution and other environmental damage caused by activities within the jurisdiction or control of such States to areas beyond their jurisdiction5. International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources1981 it passed a resolution related to environmental conservation and world conservation strategy. 196 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Nairobi Declaration, 1982 it resolved for the creation of a special commission to propose long- term environmental strategies for achieving ‘Sustainable Development to the year 2000 and beyond our common future”. It also emphasized on the conservation of natural resources while striving for the development goals. The politics should be geared to achieve sustainable development appropriate to the needs of today’s generation, yet without jeopardizing future generation’s chances of satisfying their own needs and choosing their life style. The demand that the development be made ‘sustainable’ applied to all countries and all people. Rio Summit, 1992 It concentrated on sustainable development and idea that the International Trade and the protection of the environment are of complimentary value. It further provided to halt and reserve the effects of environmental degradation in the context of increased national and international efforts to promote sustainable and environmentally sound development in all countries. It also emphasis on International cooperation to accelerate sustainable development in developing countries, combating poverty, changing consumption patterns, demographic dynamic and sustainability, protecting and promoting human health, promoting sustainable human settlement Policy making for sustainable development, Protecting the atmosphere, making the energy transition, an integrated approach to land resource use, combating deforestation, protection mountain ecosystems, meeting agricultural needs without destroying the land, sustaining biological diversity, management of biotechnology in an environmentally sound way, safeguarding the ocean’s resources, managing and protecting fresh water resources, safe use of toxic chemicals, managing hazardous wastes, seeing solutions to solid waste problems, management of radioactive wastes6.

Constitution of India and Environment The Stockholm conference was the major turning point in the history of the Indian Constitution which till then had no specific provision regarding states and citizens duty to preserve and protect the environment. However, the right to healthy environment was manifested under Right to Life under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution. Article 21 provides that-”No person shall be deprived of his life or personal liberty except according to procedure established by law.”7 The judicial prouncements have made it possible to bring clean and healthy environment in the ambit of this right to life under this Article. Right to life means right to lead a life in a healthy and pollution free environment. Right to life shall have no meaning if a person has to live in a contaminated atmosphere where there is constant threat to him of being infected by deadly diseases which will be violating his fundamental right under Part III of the constitution. Further, Article 48A provides that-”The State shall endeavor to protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the forests and wild life of the country.”8 And Article 51A (g) provides that- “It shall be the duty of every citizen of India to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wild life, and to have compassion for living creatures”9. These Articles therefore, it is the State and citizens have the responsibility to protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the forests and wild life of the country and to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wild life, and to have compassion for living creatures…. In this case, Rural Litigation and Entitlement Kendra v. State of U.P.10- limestone-mining activities in the Mussoorie-Dehradun region caused ecological disturbance and, therefore, are they violating the right to life of the people living and working in that region. The Supreme Court declared that these activities polluted the environment and, thus, violated the right to life of the people. While Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 197 ordering the closure of some of the limestone quarries, the Supreme Court implicitly read the right to clean environment in the right to life. “This would undoubtedly cause hardship to them, but it is a price that has to be paid for protecting and safeguarding the right of the people to live in healthy environment with minimal disturbance of ecological balance and without avoidable hazard to them and to their cattle, homes and agricultural land and undue affection of air, water and environment.” In another leading case, Charan Lal Sahu v. Union of India, the Supreme Court observed that “In the context of our national dimensions of human rights, right to life, liberty, pollution free air and water is guaranteed by Constitution under Articles, 21, 48A, and 51(g), it is the duty of the State to take effective steps to protect the guaranteed constitutional rights.”11 In M.C. Mehta v. Union of India12, popularly known as Oleum Gas Leakage cas), the Supreme Court once again impliedly treated the right to live in pollution free environment as a part of fundamental right to life under Article 21 of the Constitution. In another case Subhash Kumar v. State of Bihar13, it was observed that “Right to life is a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Constitution and it includes the right to enjoyment of pollution-free water and air for full enjoyment of life. If anything endangers or impairs that quality of life is derogative of laws, a citizen has right to have recourse to Article 32 of the Constitution for removing the pollution of water or air which may be detrimental to the quality of life.” The Supreme Court reiterating the above view on right to life in Virender Gaur v. State of Haryana14, as: “Article 21 protects Right to Life as fundamental right. Enjoyment of life and its attainment including the right to life with human dignity encompasses within its ambit, the protection and preservation of environment, ecological balance free form pollution of air and water, sanitation without which life cannot be enjoyed. Any contra acts or actions would cause environmental pollution, etc. should be regarded as amounting to violation of Article 21. Therefore, hygienic environment is an integral part of right of healthy life and it would be impossible in live with human dignity without a human and healthy environment.....Therefore, there is a constitutional imperative on the State Government.... not only to ensue and safeguard proper environment but also an imperative duty to take adequate measures to promote, preserve and improve both man-made and the natural environment. “ In another significant decision of the Supreme Court on right to life is A.P. Pollution Control Board v Prof. M.V. Nayudu15 In this case, the court has clarified the contours of the right to hygienic environment in the light of Article 48-A, 51-A(g) read with Article 21 of the Constitution. Delivering the judgment on behalf of the entire bench, Justice Jagannatha Rao stated that the environmental concerns were as important as the human rights concerns as both were founded on Article 21 which guaranteed the fundamental right to life and personal liberty. According to his Lordship, “While environmental aspects concern ‘Life’ human rights aspects concern ‘Liberty’.” His Lordship further declared that, in the context of the emerging environmental jurisprudence, it was the duty of the Court to render justice by taking all aspects into consideration. A clarion call was given by the Andhra Pradesh High Court when in monumental judgment of T. Damodhar Rao v. S.O. Municipal Corporation, Hyderabad16, it is observed :”It would be reasonable to hold that the enjoyment of life and its attainment and fulfillment guaranteed by Article 21 of the Constitution embraces the protection and preservation of nature’s gifts without (which) life cannot be enjoyed. There can be no reason why practice of violent extinguishment of life alone should be regarded as violative of Article 21 of the Constitution. The slow poisoning by the polluted atmosphere caused by environmental pollution and spoliation should also be regarded as amounting to violation of Article 21 of the Constitution”. 198 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Thus, right to live in healthy environment was specifically declared to be a part of Article 21 of the Constitution. In this case, the petitioners prayed that the land kept for recreational park under the developmental plan ought not to be allowed to be used by the Life Insurance Corporation or Income Tax Department for constructing residential houses. In Charan Lal Sahu v. Union of India17, the Supreme Court of India while upholding the validity of the Bhopal Gas Leak Disaster (Processing of Claims) Act, 1985, held :”In the context of our national dimensions of human rights, right to life, liberty, pollution free air and water is guaranteed by the Constitution under Articles 21, 48-A, and 51-A(g). It is the duty of the State to take effective steps to protect the guaranteed constitutional rights”. The above observations of the Supreme Court put it beyond doubt that right to live in healthy environment is our fundamental right under Article 21 and has to be read with Articles 48-A and 51-A(g) thereby putting obligation on the State as well as citizens to protect and improve it. In F.K. Hussain v. Union of India18, the Kerala High Court pointed out that the right to sweet water and the right to free air, are attributes of the right of life, for, those are the basic elements which sustain the life itself. In Subhash Kumar vs State of Bihar19, the Supreme Court observed : “Right to live is a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Constitution and it includes the right of enjoyment of pollution free water and air for full enjoyment of life. If anything endangers or impairs that quality of life in derogation of laws, ‘a citizen has right to have recourse to Article 32 of the constitution”. Environmental protection is a integral part of the Indian constitution under Part IV i. e., Directive Principles of State Policy and Part IV A, i. e., fundamental duties of the citizens respectively. Article 47 of the Constitution provides that-”The State shall regard the raising of the level of nutrition and the standard of living of its people and the improvement of public health as among its primary duties and, in particular, the State shall endeavor to bring about prohibition of the consumption except for medicinal purposes of intoxicating drinks and of drugs which are injurious to health.” Article 48A of the Constitution, Provides that-”The State shall endeavor to protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the forests and wild life of the country.” Article 51A (g) of the Constitution provides that-” It shall be the duty of every citizen of India to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wild life, and to have compassion for living creatures……” From all the above provisions it is clear that it is the responsibility of the state to improve the health and wellbeing of its citizens. And the health and wellbeing of the human is closely connected with a healthy environment. Human being and environment are so closely interdependent on each other that any degradation or change in one affects another. Therefore, maintaining both in a perfect and accurate condition is the responsibility of the state. Further the state has to improve and protect the flora and fauna of the nation. Further the natural resources like lakes, rivers, minerals, etc should also be preserved for the betterment of the future generations. The state has to make policies which will help it to maintain a healthy and good environment. In Shri Sachidanand Pandey vs State of W.B.20,the Supreme Court observed that whenever cases on environmental issues come before it, the court should decide the case bearing in mind the provisions of Articles48A and 51A (g) and laid down the following precedent- “When the Court is called upon to give effect to the Directive Principles and the fundamental duty, (Articles 48-A and 51-A(g) in this case), the Court is not to shrug its shoulders and say that priorities are a matter of policy and so it is a matter for the policy making authority. The least the Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 199 Court may do is to examine whether appropriate considerations are borne in mind and irrelevancies excluded. In appropriate cases, the Court may go further, but how much further must depend on the circumstances of the case. The Court may always give necessary directions. However, the Court will not attempt to nicely balance relevant considerations. When the question involves the nice balancing of relevant considerations, the Court may feel justified in resigning itself to acceptance of the decision of the concerned authority”. Further, both the central legislature as well as the state legislatures have made all their endeavors in giving effect to policies on the matters coming under their particular lists and have connection with the environment. For instance in List I or Union List we have matters like atomic energy, shipping, major ports, regulation of air traffic, inter-state transportation, regulation and development of oil fields, mines and mineral development and inter-state rivers, etc. in List II or State List we have matters concerning public health and sanitation, agriculture, water supplies, irrigation, drainage and fisheries, etc. List III or Concurrent List contains subject maters on which both, i. e., Parliament and the State Legislatures have overlapping and shared jurisdiction. This List contains matters like, forests, the protection of wild life, mines and minerals development not covered in the List-I, population control and family planning, minor ports and factories, etc. In the light of these provisions the legislatures have taken several measures by enacting laws for preservation, protection and improvement of the environment. The legislature has passed laws like the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972; the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981; the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980; Wildlife (Protection) Amendment Act, 1986 and the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986; and the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1977, The Conservation of the forest Act, 1980, Factories (Amendment) Act, 1987, etc and necessary timely amendments to them as needed by the environmental conditions.

Role of Judiciary in Protection of the Environment The Judiciary has played the crusaders role in dealing with environmental protection issues. There is a constant conflict between human development and preservation of the environment. If human development has to be achieved through industrialization then it will certainly have adverse and degrading effect on the environment. The solution to this was found in the Stockholm Conference in the form of “Sustainable Development” ‘Sustainability’ is defined in ‘Caring for the Earth’ as ‘characteristic or state that can be maintained indefinitely’, whilst ‘Development’ is defined as ‘increasing the capacity to meet human needs and improve the quality of human life. What this seems to mean is ‘to increase the efficiency of resource use in order to improve human living standards21’. In Goa Foundation vs Diksha Holdings Pvt. Ltd.22, another division bench of the Supreme Court again faced a contest in the claims of sustainability and development. Diksha Holdings sought permission to build a hotel in Goa which it claimed would contribute to business of tourism which was the main resource earner for the State of Goa. The Goa Foundation contended that the hotel was located in an area which fell in the Coastal Regulation Zone-I (CRZ-I) where no building was allowed. It also contended that the construction of the hotel will destroy the ecology of coastal areas. The Supreme Court restated the principle that there should be a proper balance between the protection of environment and the development process. The society shall have to prosper but not at the cost of environment and the environment shall have to be protected but not at the cost 200 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey of the development of the society. The Court held that the land in question on which the hotel was being built was not in the CRZ-I area. The court even refused to be persuaded by an expert of the National Institute of Oceanography because two of the scientists who had signed the report had earlier signed another report which favoured the builders. Benerjee J. laid down the following principle: “While it is true that nature will not tolerate after a certain degree of its destruction and it will have its tone definitely, though, may not be felt in present and the present day society has a responsibility towards posterity so as to allow normal breathing and living in cleaner environment but that does not by itself mean and imply stoppage of all projects”23 (2001) 2 SCC 97 at p 108 While the court upheld the claims of the builders, it was more for the reason that the nature of the land in question could not be proved beyond doubt. Faced with uncertainties, the court preferred to favour development even at the cost of some risk to the environment. However, in Diksha Holdings as well as in the Nayudu, the court never formulated a scheme of balancing. In Nayudu, the court preferred to decided on the basis of precautionary principle but why it did not do so in Diksha Holdings can perhaps only be explained by the fact that in Nayudu, the right to drinking water was involved which is undoubtedly a pressing human need while in Diksha Holdings, there was no material to show the value of sand dunes to the environment save in terms of aesthetics which the court was willing to sacrifice to ensure development. While both the Nayudu and Diksha Holdings cases surely established the presence of sustainable development as a fundamental principle of environmental law, they yield little material guidance to ensure proper balancing. Nayudu can be used as a precedent holding for primacy of human needs while Diksha Holdings is for giving weight to claims of development where the societal interests have no primacy. The two together can mean that where basic human needs are threatened, development must be allowed to proceed. These cases also show that objective scientific evidence is of relevance only when it is unblemished24. In another leading case, M.C. Mehta vs Union of India25, a three judge bench of the Supreme Court was considering the question of issuing directions to substitute diesel vehicles on the roads of city of Delhi with vehicles driven by Compressed Natural Gas (CNG). The matter had been in the court for as long as established under Section 3 of the Environmental Protection Act, 1986 and its report was accepted by the court on 28 July 1998. A time limit was fixed for switching over diesel vehicles to CNG vehicles. The government had been dragging its feet and sought to dilute the directions of the Bhure Lal Committee by constituting another committee called the Mashelkar Committee which recommended that emission norms must be laid down but the choice of fuels must be left with the user. The Supreme Court categorically rejected the suggestion of the Mashelkar Committee on the ground that nothing concrete had resulted from adopting the process fixing emission norms and directed that a time bound programme of replacing diesel buses with CNG buses be implemented. The opinion of the court is particularly noticeable for pronouncing the fundamental nature of sustainable development as an underlying principle. The court observed : “One of the principles underlying environmental law is that of ‘Sustainable Development’. This principle requires such development to take place which is ecologically sustainable. The two essential features of sustainable development are – (a) the precautionary principle, and (b)the polluter pays principle. “ Precautionary Principles an environmental measures imposing duty upon the State Government and the statutory authorities directing them to anticipate, prevent and attack the causes of environmental degradation. And whenever, they feel that there are threats of serious and Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 201 irreversible damage, lack of scientific certainty should not be used as reason for postponing measures to prevent environmental degradation. Further it is also provided that, the ‘Onus of Proof’ is on the actor or the developer/industrialist to show that his action is environmentally compassionate. The precautionary Principle was stated in Article 7 of the Bergen Ministerial Declaration on sustainable development and read as follows- “Environmental measures must anticipate, prevent, and attack the causes of environment degradation. Where there are threats of serous or irreversible damage, lack of scientific certainty should not be used as a reason for postponing measures to prevent environmental degradation.”26 Polluter Pays Principle The ‘Polluter Pays’ Principle has been held to be a sound principle by Supreme Court in Indian Council for Enviro Legal Action vs Union of India27, observed: The polluter Pays Principle demands that the financial costs of preventing or remedying damage caused by pollution should lie with the undertaking which cause the pollution, or produce the goods which cause the pollution. Under the principle it is not the role of government to meet the costs involved in their prevention such damage, or in carrying out remedial action, because the effect of this would be to shift the financial burden of the pollution incident to the taxpayer. The ‘Polluter Pays’ Principle was promoted by the Organization for economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) during the 1970s when there was great public interest in environmental issues. During this time there were demands on Government and other institutions to introduce policies and mechanisms for the protection of the environment and the public from the threats posed by pollution in a modern industrialized society. Since then there has been considerable discussion of the nature of the Polluter Pays Principle, but the precise scope of the principle and its implications for those involved in past, or potentially polluting activities have never been satisfactorily agreed. The Court ruled that ‘Once the activity carried on is hazardous or inherently dangerous, the person carrying on such activity is liable to make good the loss caused to any other person by his activity irrespective of the fact whether he took reasonable care while carrying on his activity. The rule is premised upon the very nature of the activity carried on’. Consequently the polluting industries are ‘absolutely liable to compensate for the harm caused by them to villagers in the affected area, to the soil and to the underground water and hence, they are bound to take all necessary measures to remove sludge and other pollutants lying in the affected areas’. The ‘Polluter Pays Principle’ as interpreted by this Court means that the absolute liability for harm to the environment extends not only to compensate the victims of pollution but also the cost of restoring the environmental degradation. Remediation of the damaged environment is part of the process of ‘Sustainable Development’ and as such polluter is liable to pay the cost to the individual sufferers as well as the cost of reversing the damaged ecology. The ‘Precautionary Principle’ and ‘Polluter pays Principle’ have been accepted as part of the law of the land. This principle has also been held to be a sound principle in the case of Vellore Citizens’ welfare Forum v. Union of India65. The Court observed that the Precautionary Principle and the Polluter Pays Principle have been accepted as part of the law of the land. The Court in the said judgment, on the basis of the provisions of Articles 47, 48-A and 51-A(g) of Constitution, observed that we have no hesitation to holding that the Precautionary Principle and the Polluter Pays Principle are part of the environmental laws of the country. Public Interests Litigation is another brain child of Judicial Activism. Earth atmosphere is a common dwelling ground for all people. Anu degradation of the atmosphere affects the public at large. Therefore, the Supreme Court under the banner of Public Interest Litigation has given several 202 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey landmark decisions upholding the responsibility of state and every individual to preserve the atmosphere. The earth atmosphere is not a individuals property or subject to private ownership. The said resources being a gift of nature, they should be made freely available to everyone irrespective of the status in life In the case of M.C. Mehta vs Kamal Nath28, the Supreme Court observed that: “We are fully aware that the issues presented in this case illustrate the classic struggle between those members of the public who would preserve our rivers, forests, parks and open lands in their pristine purity and those charged with administrative responsibilities, who, under the pressures of the changing needs of an increasingly complex society, find it necessary to encroach to some extent upon open lands heretofore considered inviolate to change. The resolution of this conflict in any given case is for the legislature and not the courts. If there is a law made by Parliament or the State Legislature the courts can serve as an instrument of determining legislative intent in the exercise of its powers of judicial review under the Constitution. But in the absence of any legislation, the executive acting under the doctrine of public trust cannot abdicate the natural resources and convert them into private ownership, or for commercial use. The aesthetic use and the pristine glory of the natural resources, the environment and the ecosystems of our country cannot be permitted to be eroded for private, commercial or any other use unless the courts find it necessary, in good faith, for the public good and in public interest to encroach upon the said resources.” Article 32 of the Indian Constitution Provides that- (1) The right to move the Supreme Court by appropriate proceedings for the enforcement of the rights conferred by this Part is guaranteed. (2) The Supreme Court shall have power to issue directions or orders or writs, including writs in the nature of habeas corpus, mandamus, prohibition, quo warranto and certiorari, whichever may be appropriate, for the enforcement of any of the rights conferred by this Part. (3) Without prejudice to the powers conferred on the Supreme Court by clause (1) and (2), Parliament may by law empower any other court to exercise within the local limits of its jurisdiction all or any of the powers exercisable by the Supreme Court under clause (2). (4) The right guaranteed by this article shall not be suspended except as otherwise provided for by this Constitution. Further Article 226 of the Indian Constitution Provides- (1) Notwithstanding anything in Article 32 every High Court shall have powers, throughout the territories in relation to which it exercise jurisdiction, to issue to any person or authority, including in appropriate cases, any Government, within those territories directions, orders or writs, including writs in the nature of habeas corpus, mandamus, prohibitions, quo warranto and certiorari, or any of them, for the enforcement of any of the rights conferred by Part III and for any other purpose. (2) The power conferred by clause (1) to issue directions, orders or writs to any Government, authority or person may also be exercised by any High Court exercising jurisdiction in relation to the territories within which the cause of action, wholly or in part, arises for the exercise of such power, notwithstanding that the seat of such Government or authority or the residence of such person is not within those territories. (3) Where any party against whom an interim order, whether by way of injunction or stay or in any other manner, is made on, or in any proceedings relating to, a petition under clause (1), without- Legal Perspective of Environmental Protection 203 (a) furnishing to such party copies of such petition and all documents in support of the plea for such interim order; and (b) giving such party an opportunity of being heard, makes an application to the High Court for the vacation of such order and furnishes a copy of such application to the party in whose favor such order has been made or the counsel of such party, the High Court shall dispose of the application within a period of two weeks from the date on which it is received or from the date on which the copy of such application is so furnished, whichever is later, or where the High Court is closed on the last day of that period, before the expiry of the next day afterwards on which the High Court is open; and if the application is not so disposed of, the interim order shall, on the expiry of that period, or , as the case may be, the expiry of the aid next day, stand vacated. (4) The power conferred on a High Court by this article shall not be in derogation of the power conferred on the Supreme Court by clause (2) of Article 32. Both these Articles are providing remedies to the individuals as well as group of individual to approach the Supreme Court or High Courts respectively whenever their fundamental rights are violated. As right to clean and healthy environment is also a essential aspect of right to life under Article 21 of the Constitution, and therefore, whenever this fundamental is violated one can approach the Supreme Court and High Courts for necessary directions orders or writs.

Conclusion Man is creation of Mother Nature and like every child it is his duty to take care of his mother. He should not degrade the environment. He should harmonize his personal with the environmental wellbeing. Man’s life is so connected to the environment that, changes in the environment affects human life. Protection and preservation of the environment has become need of the hour for all the nations. The problem in connection with the degradation of environment is growing at an alarming rate, threatening the very existence of this world and has become a major challenge faced by all nations, whether developed or developing.

Endnotes 1 Section 2 (a) of The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 2 Foment Resorts and hotels Ltd. V. Minguel Martins, (2009) 3 SCC 57 3 B.N. Tiwari, Hindu Culture and Ecology in Gautam Sarma (ed.) Environment, Man and Nature (1989) at pp. 23-37 4 AIR 1996 SC 2715 5 Dr. Krushna Chandra Jena, Ecological and Environmental Protection Movements : A Brief Conspectus. AIR 2005 Journal 288 6 Mahesh Mathur, Legal control of environmental Pollution, New Delhi: Deep & Deep Publication (1999) at pp 35-36 7 Article 21, Constitution of India 8 Article 48A, Constitution of India 9 Article 51A(g), Constitution of India 10 AIR 1985 SC 652 11 A.I.R. 1990 SC 1480 204 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

12 A.I.R. 1987 S.C. 1086 13 21 AIR 1990 SC 420 14 22 (1995) 2 SCC 577 15 AIR 1999 SC 812 16 A.I.R. 1987 A.P. 171 17 A.I.R. 1990 SC 1480 18 A.I.R. 1990 Ker. 321 at 323 19 (1991) 1 SCC 598 20 AIR 1987s.c. 1109 21 P. Leela Krishnan, Law and Environment, (1992) p. 126 22 (2001) 2 SC 62 23 (2001) 2 SCC 97 at p 108 24 Javaid Talib, Constitutionalising the Problem of Environment, 47 JILI (2005) at pp 535-536 25 AIR 2002 SC 1969 AT 1698 26 Karnataka Industrial Areas development board v. C. Kenchappa, 27 AIR 2006 SC 2038 at p 2046 28 AIR 1996 SCW 1069 29 ((1997) 1 SCC 388) 25

The Impact of Solar Energy on Environment Sustainability in the Indian Context

Dr. Ela Atheaya* & Deepali Atheaya**

Abstract

Solar energy has been considered as an inexpensive and easily accessible energy source. The implementation of solar energy projects in India will lead to less environmental hazards. Using solar energy instead of conventional fuels such as coal and petroleum protects our environment. The solar energy can be utilized to draw both the thermal and electrical energy. In this research paper a review has been done on various solar energy technologies such as solar water heater, solar distillation and dryers to be used in house hold appliances and industries. With the rapid industrialization and globalization, clean water availability, food supplies and requirement of hot water for household work and industries is the prime necessity for humankind. Also due to the soaring costs of fossil fuels, significant consideration has been given to solar energy as an alternative means for heating greenhouses which improves productivity of crops. It has been observed that the solar energy utilization offered a significant source leading to the environment sustainability. Keywords Solar radiation, Solar distillation, Photovoltaic and Sustainability

Introduction There is a restricted supply of conventional energy sources such as coal, petroleum etc leading to the innovation of unconventional energy sources. Solar energy is a major energy source which can be used to solve this energy scarcity. Boyle (2004) suggested that solar water heating system (SWHS) is a well accepted solar thermal appliance and it constitutes 80% of the solar market globally. Earlier most SWHS used widely on houses and industries were simple flat plate collectors which were installed on roofs. The design of photovoltaic thermal (PVT) was firstly developed by Kern and Russell (1978). It was noted that when water was passed below the PV module heat transfer from the PV module takes place which lessens the temperature of PV module and leads

* KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai , Maharashtra ** Centre for Energy Studies, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi 206 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey to enhancement in the electrical efficiency. It is a well known prediction that world war III will be because of water shortage all across the globe. Desalination of brackish water is necessary to resolve this water scarcity issue. Solar distillation is one of the oldest methods to manufacture potable water. The solar distillers are also more cost-effective and require unskilled labor to maintain and hence most suitable for underdeveloped and developing countries (Tiwari et al. 2015). Solar drying is the removal of moisture from any crop to dry it and this practice has been followed since ancient period. Kumar et al. (2006) conducted an experiment on chilli drying and they have reported that drying process in the greenhouse is faster than open sun drying. This solar crop dry offers a good option to cut the spoilage of fruits and vegetables. In this research paper the basic principles of solar water heater system, solar distillation solar crop drying have been described briefly.

Description of a Solar Water Heater System (SWHS) It is a renewable and self sustainable energy technology used to draw hot water. Figure 1 shows a simple water heater system. Solar radiation from sun descends on a flat plate collector which is made up of a metal absorber plate and pipe carrying water below it. The solar radiation heats the plate which further heats the water then it is further stored in an insulated water tank. Nowadays researchers have developed hybrid photovoltaic thermal solar heating systems which lead to increased thermal efficiencies [Kalogirou and Tripanagnostopoulos (2006); Kumar and Tiwari (2009); Tiwari and Dubey (2009); Ziapour et al. (2014); Wang et al. (2015)].

Figure 1: Diagram of a Solar Water Heating System

Description of a Solar Distillation System (SWS) The airtight solar basin is made up of concrete or fiber reinforced plastic material with its top surface covered with a glass. Solar radiation falls on the blackened lower surface and it heats water which rises upwards. The evaporated water gets condensed on the inner surface of the glass cover and the distilled water is collected at the lower end of the glass cover as seen in Figure 2. Single slope solar still with condenser was developed by Faith (1998) and it was observed that it improved the productivity. Abu-Quadait et al. 1996 have proposed a hybrid single slope solar still. Sandhu (2009) have suggested that the productivity of solar stills can be increased by using preheated water. Different designs of solar stills were presented by Mousa (2004); Tiwari et al (2015); Al-Hinai et al. (2002). The Impact of Solar Energy on Environment Sustainability in the Indian Context 207

Figure 2: Solar Distillation System

Description of a Solar Crop Drying System The solar radiation is incident on the glass cover and is further transmitted to the crop which is kept inside the dryer. The moisture has been taken away by the air which flows out from the dryer. Various designs of solar dryers have been presented by Singh et al. (2006) and Saleh and Badran (2009) and it was reported that it lead to reduced drying cost. Amer et al. (2010) have suggested that the solar drying has been considered as an advancement of natural sun drying process as well as environment friendly technology. Barnwal and Tiwari (2008) designed, fabricated and experiment a hybrid photovoltaic integrated greenhouse dryer and it was observed that its performance was superior as compared to open greenhouse dryer.

Figure 3: Solar Crop Drying System ( Tiwari, 2002) 208 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Results and Discussion A transition to sustainable and renewable energy source is desirable due to limited reserves of conventional energy sources and also because of environmental hazards which lead to global warming. Usage of solar energy is essential to eradicate completely the negative impacts of fossil fuels. Solar water heating systems when integrated with photovoltaic modules is a self sustainable technology. From the present research work it can be recommended for villages, distant areas and chemical industries. The benefits of solar distillation systems are remarkable due to its non requirement of external power supply, cost effectiveness and high efficiency. Solar drying is an effective means of crop preservation because the dried crops will be protected from rainfall, dust, winds, insects and birds during the drying process. Photovoltaic based solar dryer system is a self sustained system. Therefore, solar drying is an effective technique to preserve food items. There is a necessity to construct the solar thermal systems to serve the end user based on solar energy (heat and electricity).

Abbreviation SWHS Solar Water Heating System PVT Photovoltaic Thermal SDS Solar Distillation System

References Abu-Qudais, Md., Abu –Huleh, B., Othman, O.N., (1996). Experimental study and numerical simulation of a solar still using an external condenser. Energy 21, 251- 253. Al-Hinai, H., Al-Nassr, M.S., Jubran, B.A., (2002) Effect of climatic, design and operational parameters on the yield of a simple solar still. Energy Conversion and Management 43, 1639–1650. Amer, B.M.A., Hossain, M.A., Gottshalk, K., (2010). Design and performance evaluation of a new hybrid solar dryer for banana. Energy Conversion and Management 51, 813-820. Barnwal P., Tiwari, G.N., (2008). Design, construction and testing of hybrid photovoltaic integrated greenhouse dryer. International journal of agriculture research 3(2), 110-120. Boyle, G., (2004) Renewable energy: power for a sustainable future .seconded. UK: Oxford University Press. Cappelletti, G.M., (2002) An experiment with a plastic solar still. Desalination 142, 221–227. Dubey, S., Tiwari, G.N., (2008) Thermal modeling of a combined system of photovoltaic thermal (PV/T) solar water heater. Solar Energy 82, 602–612. Faith, H.E.S., (1998) Solar Distillation. Mech. Engg., Faculty of Engg., Alexandria University, Alexandria, Egypt, personal communication. Hendrie, S.D., (1979) Evaluation of combined photovoltaic /thermal collectors. In: Proceedings of international conference ISES, Atlanta, Georgia, USA , 3, 1865-1869. Kalogirou, S.A., Tripanagnostopoulos, Y., (2006) Hybrid PV/T solar systems for domestic hot water and electricity production. Conversion and Management 47, 3368–3382. Kern, E.C, Russell, M.C., (1978) Combined photovoltaic and thermal hybrid collector systems. In: Proceedings of the 13th IEEE Photovoltaic Specialists, Washington DC, USA, June 5-8, 1153–1157. Kumar, A., Chauhan, P.S., Sharma, A., (2012) Drying behavior of chilli under open sun and greenhouse conditions. Proceedings of international conference on energy security, global warming and sustainable climate, 492-502. Sandhu, G.S., (2009) Hybrid photovoltaic /thermal water heating system. Ph.D. Thesis, CES, IIT Delhi. The Impact of Solar Energy on Environment Sustainability in the Indian Context 209

Saleh A., Badran, I., (2009) Modeling and experimental studied on a domestic solar dryer. 34, 2239-2245. Singh, P.P., Singh, S., Dhaliwal, S.S., (2006). Multishelf domestic solar dryer. Energy conversion and management. 47, 1799-1815. Tiwari, G.N., (2002) Solar Energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. Tiwari, G.N., Yadav J.K., Singh, D.B., Al-Helal I.M., Abdel-Ghany, A.H., (2015) Exergoeconomic and enviroeconomic analyses of partially covered photovoltaic flat plate collector active solar distillation system. Desalination 367, 186–196. Wang, Z., Yang, W., Qiu F., Zhang, X., Zhao, X., (2015) Solar water heating: From theory, application, marketing and research. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews 41, 68–84. Ziapour, B.M., Palideh, V., Mohammadnia, A., (2014) Study of an improved integrated collector-storage solar water heater combined with the photovoltaic cells. Energy Conversion and Management 86, 587–594. 26

Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity

Swati Yeole*

Abstract

Civilization and globalization needs to change in agricultural and gardening sectors. Hydroponics is the new wave of cultivation of plants in a limited and protected environmental area without soil. It also provides a golden opportunity to fulfil hobby in flat system of city life. Increase in soil pollution leads to many diseases in plants which affect healthy growth of plants and it is resolved by hydroponics. At present,drought is a serious problem faced by our country. Therefore, hydroponics in this situation is a panacea for agriculture as 80 to 90% less water is required for healthy growth of plants .It has a remarkable benefit to survive in drought because water can be reused for domestic purpose. Industrialization and civilization has resulted in decrease of land under cultivation and at the same time alarming population of country is increased which affected the food production and become prior problem which can be controlled at certain level by hydroponics. In future, hydroponics can be considered as one of the most useful and resourceful way to balance and fulfil needs of society. Economically, it is a beneficialtechnology as there is no need to use insecticides and fungicide for soil borne diseases. Expenditure of energy for growth of root system is switched to growth of other parts of plants hence growth of hydroponic plants is faster as compared to soil plants. Hydroponics can be done in the area where soil is not suitable for healthy growth of plants and also helps to conserve natural resources like petrol as transportation is not required .As agricultural land used for growing vegetables can be used for plantation of trees which will provide natural habitat for wild animals and also help for sustainable development. Hydroponics has definitely opened new horizons for further research in agricultural sector. Hence this topic and paper provides wide scope for life of agriculture, conservation of natural resources, economy of nation, researchers and also overcome serious problems like drought. Keyword: Hydroponics, Drought, Protected Environment, Insecticides.

Introduction Hydroponics functions as an epitome especially for an agricultural sector of India particularly indrought condition. The global competition and decreased rainfall has provided golden

* Department of Botany, KLE Society’s College of Science & Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai , Maharashtra Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity 211 opportunity for hydroponics. Soil is the natural source for the growth of plants but it also invites many challenges like soil bornediseases, salinity, microbial disorders, imbalanced nutrient. The traditional method increases unavoidable expenses of farmers for removing weeds and spray insecticides and pesticides and it can be avoided by hydroponics. Hydroponics –Growing plants in nutrient containing water without soil has opened new successful technique for commercial farmers, gardeners, researchers and horticulturist for growing plants at faster rate than traditional method of farming. At present, this technique is extensively used for production of horticultural crops like tomatoes, strawberry and lettuce. Hydroponics hasalsoprovided immense scope for scientists and researchers to identify only required inorganic nutrient elements for healthy growth of plants. It also helps to understand the strategies for better improvements to obtain desirable characters in plants.

Table 1: History of Hydroponics Year Development in Hydroponics Origin - Built around 600 B.C. It started in the ancient city of Babylon with its famous hanging gardens which are listed as one of the Seven Wonders of the Ancient World. It was probably one of the first successful attempts to grow plants hydroponically. The famous Hanging Gardens of Babylon in Babylonia, or Mesopotamia the gardens were situated along the River Euphrates. First Century Growing of off-season cucumbers under “transparent stone” for the Roman Emperor Tiberius .The Hydroponics technology was rarely employed, During the 10th and On the basis of hydroponics, Aztecs developed a system of 11th centuries, floating gardensin the marshy shore of Lake Tenochtitlan located in the great central valley of Mexico. 1699 John WoodwardinEngland grew plants in water containing various types of soil. He prepared the first man-made hydroponics nutrient solution and found that the greatest growth occurred in water which contained the most soil. 1856 Salm-Horsmar developed techniques using sand and other inert media and various research workers had demonstrated by that time that plants could be grown in an inert medium moistened with a water solution containing minerals required by the plants. The next step highlighted is to eliminate the medium entirely and grow the plants in a water solution containing these minerals. 1859-1865 During these years, two German scientists Julius von Sachs (1860) who wasProfessor of Botany at the University of Wurzburg (1832-1897) and W. Knop (1861) an Agricultural Chemist accomplished this technique. Therefore,Knop has been called “The Father of Water Culture”. 212 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

1860 Professor Julius von Sachs published the first standard formula for a nutrient solution that could be dissolved in water and in which plants could be successfully grown. Between 1925 and 1935, Nutriculture, chemiculture and aquiculture were other terms used to describe soilless culture. Dr. William F. Gericke of the University of California extended his laboratory experiments and work on plant nutrition to practical crops growing outside for large scale commercial applications. He alsocalled these Nutriculture systems as “Hydroponics”. His work is considered as the basis for all forms of hydroponic growing. But, it was primarily limited to the water culture without the use of any rooting medium. Until 1936 Growing plants in a water and nutrient solution was a practice restricted only to laboratories. In 1936 Dr.Gerick grew vegetables hydroponically including root crops such as beets, radishes, carrots, potatoes, and cereal crops, fruits, ornamentals and flowers using water culture in large tanks in his laboratory at the University of California. He succeeded in growing tomatoes to the heights of 25 feet. W. F. Gerick and J. R. Travernetti of the University of California published an account of the successful cultivation of tomatoes in a water and nutrient solution. Subsequently, a number of commercial growers started experimenting with the techniques and researchers and agronomists at a number of agricultural Colleges began working to simplify and perfect the procedures. Numerous hydroponics units, some on a very large scale, have been built in Mexico, Puerto Rico, Hawaii, Israel, Japan, India, and Europe. In the United States, without much public awareness, hydroponics has become big business, more than 500 hydroponics greenhouses have been started. In the early 1940s. Dr.Gericke’s application of hydroponics soon proved itself by providing food for troops stationed on non-arable islands in the Pacific. late 1940 Robert B. and Alice P. Withrow working at Purdue Universityintroduced gravel method of hydroponics, sometimes also termed nutriculture. In 1945 U. S. Air Force solved its problem of providing its personnel with fresh vegetables by practicing hydroponics on a large scale giving new impetus to the culture. 1945 Air Ministry in London took steps to commence soilless culture at the desert base of Habbaniya in Iraq and at the arid island of Bahrein in the Persian Gulf Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity 213

During 1952 After World War II The military command continued to use hydroponics. For example, The United States Army has a special hydroponics branch which grew over 8,000,000 lbs. of fresh produce during 1952. It was considered as a peak year for military demand. Until 1946. Hydroponics did not reach India. During 1946-1947 In India, careful appraisal of salient problems resulted in the development of the Bengal System of hydroponics 1975 In America, four different commercial Hawaiian growers were producing tomatoes hydroponically and more installations were planned. Stateside, more than five hundred commercial hydroponic greenhouses were in operation in the United States. 1955 Hydroponics were used with plastic beds 1960 Allen Cooper of England developed the Nutrient film technique 1982 The Land Pavilion at Walt Disney World's EPCOT Center opened a variety of hydroponic techniques. In recent decades NASA has done extensive hydroponic research for Controlled Ecological Life Support System (CELSS). Hydroponics intended to take place on Mars are using LED lighting to grow in a different color spectrum with much less heat. Ray Wheeler, a plant physiologist at Kennedy Space Center's Space Life Science Lab, believes that hydroponics will create advances within space travel. He terms this as a bio regenerative life support system Recent surveys have indicated that there are over 1,000,000 household soil-less culture units operating in the United States for the production of food.Other prominent countries such as Russia, France, Canada, South Africa, Holland, Japan, Australia and Germany are also receiving the attention in the realm of Hydroponics.

Technique Hydroponic is a technique in which plants are grown using nutrient solution 1 in water without soil or an aquatic based environment.The word was derived from two Greek words, hydro meaning water and ponos meaning labor - literally "water-working". As per our requirement we can grow plants at any time and place irrespective of environmental conditions only through hydroponics.

Basic Types of Hydroponic Systems Hydroponics is also popularly known as "Liquid Hydroponics Methods"in which plants are grown in only solution culture. Mainly, it is classified in two types. 214 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

1] Non Circulating Method - It is also known as open system or static solution culture. In this method, the plants are grown without electricity and pumps .The entire crop can be grown with only an initial application of water and nutrients. At seeding or transplanting time, the growing containers are supported by the tank cover with their lower portion being immersed in nutrient solution. This moistens the growing medium in the containers by capillary action, thus automatically watering and fertilizing the plants. Plant growth causes the nutrient solution to lower and creates an expanding moist air space and an expanding root system. The main function of the roots in the moist air space above the nutrient solution is aeration whereas the roots extending into the nutrient solution absorb water and nutrients.

Figure 1: Non Circulating Method of Hydroponics for One Plant

Figure 2: Non Circulating Method of Hydroponics for Many Plants Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity 215 2] Circulating Method - It is also known as closed system or continuous flow solution culture. In this technique, the nutrient solution is continuously supplied to the roots of the plants which needs use of electricity and pump 24 hrs.

Figure 3: Circulating Method of Hydroponics Various types of Hydroponics systems consists of: Ebb and flow system Continuous drip systems Circulating systems Nutrient film systems Siphon system Water culture Growing Substrates - Different growing substrates are used in hydroponics according to their needs are enlisted below: ¾ Growstones ¾ Coir peat ¾ Rice husks ¾ Perlite ¾ Vermiculite ¾ Pumice ¾ Sand ¾ Gravel ¾ Wood fibre 216 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey ¾ Rock wool ¾ Sheep wool ¾ Brick shards ¾ Expanded clay aggregate

Nutrient Solution The nutrient solution is very important factor for healthy growth of the plants in hydroponics. It is directly linked with remarkable quantity and quality of crop. Basically, nutrient solution is a solution which contains essential elements in the form of inorganic ions from their soluble salts. At present, 17 elements are considered as an essential elements for the proper growth of plants and these are carbon (C), hydrogen (H), oxygen(o), nitrogen(N2), phosphorus(P), potassium(K), calcium (Ca), magnesium (Mg), sulphur(S), iron(Fe), copper(Cu), zinc(Zn), manganese(Mg), molybdenum(Mo), boron (B), chlorine(Cl)and nickel(N).Out of 17 essential elements carbon and oxygen are obtained from atmosphere and rest of all are obtained from nutrient medium. However, the nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium and sulphur are considered as basic elements of all nutrient solution.Composition of nutrient medium playsa key role for maintaining pH, electrical conductivity andosmotic potential of solution which is very essential for smooth absorption of water and minerals.

Composition of the Nutrient Solution Hydroponics needs compulsory all nutrients through solution because it is only one source to feed the plants for their growth. According to the amount required for the normal growth of plants, they are rightly categorized into two types: Macronutrients - The nutrients which are required in large amounts like - Carbon, phosphorous, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, sulphur, potassium, magnesium and calcium. Micronutrients.- The nutrients which are required in less amounts but are essential like - zinc, nickel, boron, copper, iron, manganese, molybdenum, boron and chlorine. Many scientists from different research centre formulated many nutrient medium. The following table shows comparative account of them. It is as follows

Table 2: -Different Concentrations of Essential Elements from Different Nutrient Solutions According to Various Scientist. (Data Collection is from Cooper, 1988; Steiner, 1984; Windsor & Schwarz, 1990) Nutrient Hoagland &Arnon (1938) Hewitt (1966) Cooper (1979) Steiner (1984) mg L-1 N 210 168 200-236 168 P31416031 K 234 156 300 273 Ca 160 160 170-185 180 Mg 34 36 50 48 Hydroponics- Panacea for 21st Century Scarcity 217

S 64 48 68 336 Fe 2.5 2.8 12 2-4 Cu 0.02 0.064 0.1 0.02 Zn 0.05 0.065 0.1 0.11 Mn 0.5 0.54 2.0 0.62 B 0.5 0.54 0.3 0.44 Mo 0.01 0.04 0.2 Not Considered

Limiting Factors of Nutrient Medium 1. pH - pH of a solution plays an important role for absorption of minerals in hydroponics. It also varies nature of essential elements in the form of different states2.which is directly affecting solubility of elements in the form of ions in solution. 2. Electrical Conductivity [EC]3- Osmotic pressure (OP)4solute potential or osmotic potential5 ,water potential;6.are important factors for maintaining standard EC value of a nutrient solution. Every crop has specific ideal value of EC which is also controlled by environmental condition. Approximate EC values for hydroponic systems range from 1.5 to 2.5 ds m-1.For proper uptake of water and nutrient elements of Hydroponic system is completely controlled by value of EC. 3. Temperature- Temperature of nutrient medium plays vital role in uptake of water and nutrients. Ideal temperature is also different for different crops. It also shows effect in the process of photosynthesis of plant. Temperature is also responsible factor for consumption of oxygen by plant. 4. Water- It is very important to use pure water in hydroponics as availability and uptake of nutrients in nutrient solution is directly related with water. Different processes can be applied to the water before used in hydroponics like heat treatment, UV radiation, chemical treatment etc. for maintaining quality of water.

Discussion Hydroponics is an epitome over soil culture plants because- ¾ Environmental degradation can be avoided through hydroponics technique as sterile water in controlled condition is used in the system. ¾ Hydroponics is an eco-friendly technique because in this system water can be conserved and reused for multiple times. ¾ It is very helpful mechanism in drought condition to fulfil need of food as it requires 80-90 % less water as compared tothe traditional method of soil culture. ¾ Nutritional value of hydroponic plants is always more than soil culture plants. ¾ Hydroponics plants grow at faster rate and requires less space as compare to traditional soil plants ¾ Hydroponics gives relief of stress as it is completely independent of natural climatic conditions. 218 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey ¾ It is very helpful for developing countries as it is less expensive than traditional method of farming because it requires less labour.It does not require fertilizers and easy method of harvesting. ¾ Hydroponics is a boon because seasonal crops can be cultivated at anytime and anywhere. ¾ Hydroponics is one of the best techniques of growing plants because one can achieve one's hobby without any garden plot. Conclusion ¾ Mantra behind the success of Hydroponics is that plants get only what they want at exact time. ¾ Recently, hydroponics is used globally for commercial growth of many vegetables, aromatic plants as well as medicinal plants. ¾ The scheme of Skill India launched by our Prime Minister Honourable Narendra Modi can become a reality through the effective application of Hydroponics in India by providing training to the farmers as it conserves water. ¾ It opens new avenues of research. ¾ As NASA has done extensive hydroponic research for Controlled Ecological Life Support System (CELSS) this technique can be used on another planets to sustain life ¾ Advantages are more than the disadvantages hence technique can be used by everybody in the world. ¾ One of the best methods of growing plants and maintaining hobby for people having allergy problem as it is clean method of growing plants.

Endnotes 1. Nutrient solution - Solution which contains all mineral 2. State -It isphysical property may be gaseous,liquid or solid. 3. Electrical conductivity [EC] An indirect way to estimate the osmotic pressure of the nutrient solution is the electrical. 4. Osmotic pressure [OP]-Osmotic pressure is the minimum pressure which needs to be applied to a solution to prevent the inward flow of water across a semipermeable membrane. 5. Osmotic potential -Osmotic potential: the potential of water molecules to move from a hypotonic solution to a hypertonic solution across a semi-permeable membrane. 6. Water potential - The measure of the relative tendency of water to move from one area to another, and is commonly represented by the Greek letter ? (Psi).

References George F. Van: Hydroponic Basics- December 30, 2004. Benton Jones J., Jr: Complete Guide for Growing Plants Hydroponically CRC press USA.2014. Jason John: Hydroponics: A Beginners Guide to Growing Food Without Soil 29 Sep 2014 John P. Hennessy: DIY Hydroponics: System Builders Guide 3rd Addition Paperback - December 10, 2011 Stoner, R:(1983) Aeroponics Versus Bed and Hudroponic Propagation Florist Review, Vol 173 No.4477, September 22 Douglas, James S., Hydroponics, 5th ed. Bombay: Oxford UP, 1975 Anna Heiney, Farming for the Future, nasa.gov, August 27-04 http://www.rain.org/global-garden/hydroponics-history.html Section 5 From Bullion to Commodity Trade in the Globalised World

Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries

Gopika B. Hosamani *

Abstract

The main aim of the companies is to earn profit out of its operations. Company is formed with a contribution of many contributors who may be in the form of investors, lenders or depositors. Whosoever provides the money, expects the return on his investment and a company has no stand with excuses as far as the question of satisfying its capital contributors is concerned, otherwise the problem of scarcity of funds will become the most difficult question to be solved by the companies in the future. Every company is formed with a notion of generating more and more revenues so that it can discharge all of its liabilities and contribute towards the maximization of company’s wealth.1 Companies that respect and listen to their stakeholders must naturally be concerned by their growth and profitability, but they must also be aware of the economic, environmental, social and societal impacts of their activities. As the world is shrinking due to globalization the concept of Corporate Social Responsibility CSR has acquired an undeniably high degree of relevance and scope in a large number of sectors. Corporate Social Responsibility CSR is a concept whereby companies integrate social, environmental and health concerns in their business strategy (policy) and operations and in their interactions with stakeholders on a voluntary basis. The social responsibility of business encompasses the economic, legal, ethical, and discretionary expectations that society has of organizations at a given point in time.2This paper aims to analyze the legal perspective of Corporate Social Responsibility in developing countries. In this paper the literature covering most relevant theories and practices on CSR are presented to see whether they are focusing on the aspects like education, health and environment. At the same time, an attempt is made to situate these theories and approaches within a general framework based on country wise contribution to the concept of CSR describing the current panorama regarding the role of business in society.

Meaning and Definition of Corporate Social Responsibility There is no single, commonly accepted definition of “Corporate Social Responsibility” (CSR). Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a concept whereby companies integrate social,

* Assistant Professor, KLE Society’s B. V. Bellad Law College, Belagavi, Karnataka 222 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey environmental and health concerns in their business strategy (policy) and operations and in their interactions with stakeholders on a voluntary basis. The social responsibility of business encompasses the economic, legal, ethical, and discretionary expectations that society has of organizations at a given point in time. The Council for Sustainable Development defines CSR as “The Commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to economic development while improving the quality of life of the workforce and their families as well as of the local community and society at large”.3 The European Commission defines CSR as “the responsibility of enterprises for their impacts on society”. To completely meet their social responsibility, enterprises “should have in place a process to integrate social, environmental, ethical human rights and consumer concerns into their business operations and core strategy in close collaboration with their stake holders”. 4 The World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD) provides that “Corporate social responsibility is the commitment of business to contribute to sustainable economic development, working with employees, their families, the local community and society at large to improve their quality of life.5 While proposing the Corporate Social Responsibility Rules under Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013, the Chairman of the CSR Committee mentioned the Guiding Principle as follows: “CSR is the process by which an organization thinks about and evolves its relationships with stakeholders for the common good, and demonstrates its commitment in this regard by adoption of appropriate business processes and strategies. Thus CSR is not charity or mere donations. CSR is a way of conducting business, by which corporate entities visibly contribute to the social good. Socially responsible companies do not limit themselves to using resources to engage in activities that increase only their profits. They use CSR to integrate economic, environmental and social objectives with the company’s operations and growth. From the above definitions, it is clear that: • The CSR approach is holistic and integrated with the core business strategy for addressing social and environmental impacts of businesses. • CSR needs to address the well-being of all stakeholders and not just the company’s shareholders. • Philanthropic activities are only a part of CSR, which otherwise constitutes a much larger set of activities entailing strategic business benefits.7

International Perspectives on CSR CSR initiatives have developed along different routes in different jurisdictions, varying from the encouragement of voluntary initiatives by the European Commission, to the adoption of mandatory reporting of CSR activities by Denmark. This section will consider the status of efforts to implement CSR in the United States, Canada, Denmark, and the European Union.

The United States CSR in the United States has primarily been approached through the initiatives of its corporations, rather than through the legal developments or government actions seen in other jurisdictions. 8Currently, approximately 59% of American companies report information relating to their actions regarding the environment and social policies publically.9 Further, major American corporations have actively promoted both voluntary CSR initiatives, and have called for the adoption of mandatory standards. An example of this may be seen in the United States Climate Action Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 223 Partnership, which counts corporations such as the Ford Motor Company, Chrysler, Shell and General Electric as members, and calls for “strong national legislation to require significant reductions of greenhouse gas emission.10 Apart from the initiatives of individual corporations, and participation in voluntary CSR initiatives, there are interesting requirements for the reporting of corporate activities pertaining to the environment in the United States as a part of securities regulation. These requirements emerge from Regulation S-K of the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (The SEC), which specifies that listed companies must report any material effects that environmental laws may have upon their earnings, or competitive position.11 Companies are also required to report any legal proceedings they are involved in regarding these laws, where the potential penalty exceeds a certain threshold. These reporting requirements may serve as valuable sources of information regarding a company’s environmental activities for individuals or institutional investors wishing to undertake SRI, as well as third parties such as lenders or insurance agencies wishing to confirm compliance with contractual CSR obligations.

Canada- Bill C-300- “Corporate Accountability for the Activities of Mining, Oil or Gas in Developing Countries”. As in the United States, the corporate law of Canada has a tradition of shareholder primacy. However, it also has a greater tendency to recognize stakeholder interests to a greater degree through the regulatory actions of the Federal Government.12 Exemplary of this is legislation which has recently been introduced in the Canadian Parliament, which if passed will specifically regulate the behavior of corporations in the mining and gas industries when they operate in developing countries.13 The Bill specifies that they will incorporate the IFC’s Policy on Social & Environmental Sustainability, the Performance Standards on Social & Environmental Sustainability, and the Environmental, Health and Safety General Guidelines(ibid, cl.5) As such they would include requirements to provide workers with a “safe and healthy work environment”, and to mitigate the conversion or degradation of natural habitats.14 By adopting standards initially adopted by another organization, Bill C-300 provides an example of the use of legislation to both expand the application of, and provide enforcement means for existing CSR standards.

Denmark: The Mandatory Reporting of CSR In 2008, the Danish Parliament adopted the “Act amending the Danish Financial Statements Act (Accounting for CSR in large businesses)”.15 The Act defines CSR to include the manner in which “businesses voluntarily include considerations for human rights, societal, environmental and climate conditions as well as combating corruption in their business strategies and corporate activities. However, the Act does not mandate that any specific activities need to be undertaken by corporations in respect of CSR, instead leaving it “up to the businesses to decide how it makes sense for them to work on corporate social responsibility”.16 The Danish Government has also adopted an “Action Plan for CSR”, of which the legislation of mandatory reporting for CSR formed a part. The Action Plan identified four “Key Goals” for CSR which are as follows: (1) Propagating business driven CSR, (2) The promotion of CSR through state action (3) Climate responsibility, and (4) Responsible growth. 224 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Currently, the Action Plan is being promoted by the ‘Danish Government Centre for CSR’, which operates under the Ministry for Economic and Business Affairs. 17 (Ibid .p.7)

The European Union The European Commission, the executive body of the European Union, has stated that the incorporation of social and environmental concerns into a corporation’s operations is “fundamentally about voluntary business behavior”. As such, it has suggested that approaches involving increased regulation may be “counter productive”. Instead, in its most recent Communication in respect of CSR, issued in 2006, it proposed a series of actions for the promotion of CSR practices. These proposals include raising awareness about CSR through the promotion of voluntary environmental initiatives, and increased involvement for stakeholders and NGO’s. Further, CSR may provide a benefit to the corporation’s public image and reputation, and allow it to act in accordance with its corporate values. To achieve these aims, the Commission has established a High Level Group on Corporate Social Responsibility, which meets twice yearly to “facilitate the sharing of knowledge and information on new initiatives in the field of CSR.18

CSR in Asia In Asia, the concept of CSR is taking firm hold. Like India, there are a number of good examples of alliances and networks promoting the essence of CSR amongst businesses and the general public alike. Partners in Change of the South Asian Alliance for Responsible Business: building networks and alliances in the South Asia region, Partners in Change is a founder member of South Asian Alliance for Responsible Business (SARB) which seeks the cause of CSR in South Asia. The group comprises participants from Nepal, Pakistan, India, Bangladesh and Sri Lank and is in the process of developing a CSR Self-Appraisal Toolkit for use by corporate sector. CSR Asia was founded in Hong Kong in 2004 to provide information and develop tools for CSR in the Asia-Pacific Region. CSR Asia, in association with its partners (such as Centre for Social Markets, CSR in China, etc.), publishes specialized reports, provides training and education on CSR issues, facilitates stakeholder dialogues and undertakes customized contract research for multinational and NGO clients. CSR Asia also informs people about CSR issues as they arise through their daily internet news service, online news database and online weekly CSR Asia Newsletter. The Asia Pacific CSR Group was launched in July 2004, bringing together 9 CSR organizations in the region. Members of the Asia Pacific CSR Group engage in active learning exchanges and practices, networking and sharing of information with the aim of supporting each other to achieve the vision of the members or goals of the group. Goals include the recognition of standards and benchmarks that may commonly apply like governance as well as good business practices in the fields of environmental protection/conservation, equitable human resource management amongst others. The Group plans to undertake a study of a CSR Index for the region to raise the level of CSR across the region and facilitate and enhance consumer confidence through acceptable benchmarks.19

History of CSR in India India has a long rich history of close business involvement in social causes for national development. In India, CSR is known from ancient time as social duty or charity, which through different ages is changing its nature in broader aspect, now generally known as CSR. From the origin of business, which leads towards excess wealth, social and environmental issues have deep roots in the history of business. India has had a long tradition of corporate philanthropy and industrial welfare has Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 225 been put to practice since late 1800s. Historically, the philanthropy of business people in India has resembled western philanthropy in being rooted in religious belief. Business practices in the 1900s that could be termed socially responsible took different forms: philanthropic donations to charity, service to the community, enhancing employee welfare and promoting religious conduct. Corporations may give funds to charitable or educational institutions and may argue for them as great humanitarian deeds, when in fact they are simply trying to buy community good will. The ideology of CSR in the 1950s was primarily based on an assumption of the obligation of business to society. In initial years there was little documentation of social responsibility initiatives in India. Since then there is a growing realization towards contribution to social activities globally with a desire to improve the immediate environment (Shinde, 2005). It has also been found that to a growing degree companies that pay genuine attention to the principles of socially responsible behavior are also favored by the public and preferred for their goods and services. This has given rise to the concept of CSR.20

Development of CSR in India after Independence After Independence, JRD Tata who always laid a great deal of emphasis to go beyond conducting themselves as honest citizens pointed out that there were many ways in which industrial and business enterprises can contribute to public welfare beyond the scope of their normal activities. He advised that apart from the obvious one of donating funds to good causes which has been their normal practice for years; they could have used their own financial, managerial and human resourced to provide task forces for undertaking direct relief and reconstruction measures. Slowly, it began to be accepted, at least in theory that business had to share a part of the social overhead costs of. Traditionally, it had discharged its responsibility to society through benefactions for education, medical facilities, and scientific research among other objects. The important change at that time was that industry accepted social responsibility as part of the management of the enterprise itself. The community development and social welfare program of the premier Tata Company, Tata Iron and Steel Company was started the concepts of “Social Responsibility.”21 The last decade of the twentieth century witnessed a swing away from charity and traditional philanthropy towards more direct engagement of business in mainstream development and concern for disadvantaged groups in the society. This has been driven both internally by corporate will and externally by increased governmental and public expectations .22 This was evident from a sample survey conducted in 1984 reporting that of the amount companies spent on social development, the largest sum 47 percent was spent through company programs, 39 percent was given to outside organizations as aid and 14 percent was spent through company trusts.23In India as in the rest of the world there is a growing realization that business cannot succeed in a society which fails. An ideal CSR has both ethical and philosophical dimensions, particularly in India where there exists a wide gap between sections of people in terms of income and standards as well as socio-economic status.24

Recent Scenario of CSR in India The much awaited Companies Bill, 2012 was passed by the upper house of Parliament on 8 August 2013 and received president’s assent on 29th Aug, 2013. From April 1, 2014, it has become legally binding for companies in India to be “socially responsible”. Section 135 of the new Companies Act 2013, reads with the CSR Rules makes it mandatory for companies, meeting certain criteria, to set aside two per cent of their net profits for undertaking and promoting socially beneficial activities and projects in India. To implement this, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) recently issued 226 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey the CSR Rules, 2014, to implement this legislative mandate, which came into effect on April 1, 2014. Entities Covered by the CSR Obligations: The threshold coverage levels for CSR are low. Companies are subject to the CSR requirements if they have, for any financial year: • A net worth of at least Rs. 5 billion • A turnover of at least Rs. 10 billion or • Net profits of at least Rs. 50 million Companies meeting these thresholds are required to develop a CSR policy, spend a minimum amount on CSR activities and report on these activities, or prepare to explain why they didn’t. It is estimated that a total of 8,000 companies in India would be required to meet the CSR requirements among the 9 lakh active companies in India and the 2% CSR expenditure would translate to companies’ spending around Rs 12,000 crore to 15,000 crore annually The Act lists out a set of activities eligible under CSR. Companies may implement these activities taking into account the local conditions after seeking board approval. The indicative activities which can be undertaken by a company under CSR have been specified under Schedule VII of the Act.( Nitin Kumar “Corporate Social Responsibility: An Analysis of Impact and Challenges in India”, Abhinav International Monthly Refereed Journal of Research in Management & Technology, Volume 3, Issue 5 (May, 2014) p.102)

The Activities Undertaken by the Companies under CSR The CSR Activities shall be undertaken by the company, as per its stated CSR Policy. These can be projects or programmes or activities (either new or ongoing), excluding activities undertaken in pursuance of its normal course of business. The Board of a company may decide to undertake its CSR activities approved by the CSR Committee, through a registered trust or a registered society or a company established by the company or its holding or subsidiary or associate company under section 8 of the Act or otherwise:25 If such trust, society or company is not established by the company or its holding or subsidiary or associate company, it shall have an established track record of three years in undertaking similar projects or programmes; • The company has specified the project or programmes to be undertaken through these entities, the modalities of utilization of funds on such projects and programmes and the monitoring and reporting mechanism. • A company may also collaborate with other companies for undertaking projects or programmes or CSR activities in such a manner that the CSR Committees of respective companies are in a position to report separately on such projects or programmes in accordance with these rules. • According to Schedule VII, activities which may be included by companies in their Corporate Social are: • Eradicating poverty, promoting preventive healthcare and sanitation • Promotion of education and livelihood projects • Reducing inequalities faced by socially and economically backwards • Promotion of flora & fauna, animal welfare, agro-forestry etc. • Working towards protection of national heritage, art & culture. Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 227 • Measures for benefit of armed forces veterans, war widows and their dependents • Training to support sports • Contribution to PM’s fund or any other fund set up by the Central Government or the State Governments for socio-economic development and relief and funds for the welfare of the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes, other backward classes, minorities and women. • Contributions provided to technology incubators located within academic institutions which are provided by Central Government. • Rural development projects.

Role of CSR in Community Development Community development is the process of developing active and sustainable communities based on social justice and mutual respect. It is about influencing power structures to remove the barriers that prevent people from participating in the issues that affect their lives. The role of CSR in Community development as results of social commitment of corporations to the overall development of the community and social system are discussed as follows: 1. To Share the Negative Consequences as a Result of Industrialization This is related to increasing conscience-focused marketplaces necessitating more ethical business processes. E.g., higher UK road tax for higher emission vehicles, thus, reduces the burden of small vehicle owners in a community. By doing so, small vehicle owners share less the tax burden, hence could re-channel the money for more productive uses in the community. 2. Closer ties Between Corporations and Community Through CSR the existence of corporations in the social system is felt beyond a perception that corporation is a place just to get employment and producers of goods and services. By doing so, corporations and community would stay in peace and harmony. This becomes a social capital that is essential in community development. 3. Helping to Get Talents Organizations with a reputation for CSR can take advantage of their status and strengthen their appeal as an attractive employer by making their commitment part of their value proposition for potential candidates. It is also found that when employees view their organization’s commitment to socially responsible behavior more favorably, they also tend to have more positive attitudes in other areas that correlate with better performance. They believe their organizations recognize and reward great customer service, act quickly to address and resolve customer concerns, and are led by people in senior management who act in the best interest of customers. There is a correlation between a company’s success in the marketplace is often influenced by its capacity for innovation, the perception of the employees to the organization. It is also a factor in attracting and retaining talents. 4. Role in Transfer of Technology (TOT) Closer ties help in TOT between MNCs that give concerns on CSR and communities in the host countries. MNC is a corporation that has its facilities and other assets in at least one country other than its home country. Such companies have offices and/or factories in different countries and usually have a centralized head office where they coordinate global management. Very large multinationals have budgets that exceed those of many small countries.. Through TOT coupled 228 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey with CSR processes, the targeted community would gain in the various aspects of product development and marketing, such as better price and quality, as well as concern for people’s wellbeing. 5. CSR helps to Protect Environment Some of the world’s largest companies have made a highly visible commitment to CSR, for example, with initiatives aimed at reducing their environmental footprint. These companies take the view that financial and environmental performance can work together to drive company growth and social reputation. This attitude can only serve to enhance the employment value proposition such as interest in “going green” gains traction.26 “We green the earth” slogan made by some MNCs in Malaysia who own large golf areas within the vicinity of residential areas is another CSR initiative seems to protect environment. Many non-profit organizations have been involved in learning and advocacy of environmental protection of CSR such as those reported by the United Nations. They are for Example- a) “Friends of the Earth” who highlights the environmental impact of some MNCs and campaign for stronger laws on environmental responsibility; b) “Green Peace mission” is another example of CSR initiative that gives benefit to society and community in preserving the latter’s rights towards reaping healthy environment.27 Green Peace is an independent global campaigning organization that acts to change attitudes and behavior, to protect and conserve the environment and to promote peace by many ways, one of which is campaigning for sustainable agriculture and environment by encouraging socially and ecologically responsible farming practices. Green Peace utilizes direct action, lobbying and research to achieve its goals. This influential non-governmental organization has its presence in 42 countries with national and regional offices, are largely autonomous in carrying out jointly agreed global campaign strategies within the local community context. 6. CSR is for Human Right Corporate Sustainability The United Nations have launched the “Global Compact” – an initiative to convince international companies to commit themselves to universal principles in relation to protection of human rights.28Being the world’s largest voluntary corporate responsibility initiative, the UN Global Compact is also seen a strategic policy for businesses that are committed to aligning their operations and strategies within the areas of human rights, labor, and environment. This ever-increasing understanding is reflected in the growth of the Global Compact, which today stands as the largest corporate citizenship and sustainability initiative in the world — with over 4700 corporate participants and stakeholders from over 130 countries. 7. Interdependency Between a Corporation and Community The close link between a corporation and community is another aspect of CSR role in CD because in long run it creates sustainable development. This could be seen e.g. Shell Foundation involvement in the Flower Valley in South Africa and Marks and Spencer in Africa. The CSR projects give aids to local organization and impoverished communities. This certainly leads to sustainable community development29 8. A CSR Program can be seen as an aid to Alleviate Poverty An example is a Malaysian reality program Bersamamu of TV3 which is sponsored by Syarikat Faiza Sendirian Berhad (SFSB), a local enterprise-cum-philanthropist who responds to government’s appeal to help impoverished community to improve their livelihoods30 SFSB gets help from the Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 229 local media company TV3 for publicity and audience support. This TV program is focused on the life reality of the poor, helpless and misfortune people in their survival. Every purchase of Faiza’s Product, will entitle the buyer to make a donation to Tabung Bersamamu TV3 (a fund of the broadcasting agency). Through this collaboration it may trigger other corporations to help the nation in its effort to alleviate poverty and, hence, in developing communities. 9. A CSR Program helps in Data Gathering for other Public Organization Function For instance in the United States, Intel and IBM (examples of mega ICT firms) assisted under- staffed police departments with information gathering and processing by installing cameras with video processing abilities in areas where there are high rates of crimes. Intel has also conducted initiatives to educate local communities on how they can use technology to prevent crime or at least to use it to detect who committed the crime.31 Few Corporate Initiatives Related to CSR in India: • Organizations like Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited, Maruti Suzuki India Limited, and Hindustan Unilever Limited, focus holistic development in the villages they have adopted. They provide better medical and sanitation facilities, build schools and houses, and help the villagers become self-reliant by teaching them vocational and business skills. • Reliance Industries initiated a project named as “Project- Drishti” to bring back the eyesight of visually challenged Indians from the economically weaker sections of the society. This project has brightened up the lives of over 5000 people so far. • GlaxoSmithKline Pharmaceuticals’ CSR programs primarily focus on health and healthy living. They work in tribal villages where they provide medical check-ups and treatment, health camps and health awareness programs. • SAP India, in partnership with Hope Foundation (an NGO that works for the betterment of India’s poor and the needy) throughout India, has been working on initiatives for short and long-term rehabilitation of the tsunami victims. • As part of its Corporate Service Corps (CSC) programme, IBM has joined hands with the Tribal Development Department of Gujarat for a development project aimed at upliftment of tribal in the Sasan area of Gir forest. • The financial services sector is going green in a steady manner. Efforts by companies such as HSBC India, Max New York Life and Standard Chartered Bank have ensured that the green movement has kept its momentum by asking their customers to shift to e-statements and e- receipts. • The Tata Steel Rural Development Society aims to improve agricultural productivity and raise farmers standard of living. • Oil & Natural Gas Corporation offers community-based health care services in rural areas through 30 Mobile Medicare Units (MMUs). The ONGC-Eastern Swamp Deer Conservation Project works to protect the rare species of Easter Swamp Deer at the Kaziranga National Park in Assam. • Infosys: The Infosys Science Foundation, set up in 2009, gives away the annual Infosys Prize to honour outstanding achievements in the fields of science and engineering. The company supports causes in health care, culture and rural development • BHEL & Indian Airlines have been acclaimed for disaster management efforts. BHEL has also adopted 56 villages having nearly 80,000 inhabitants.32 230 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Key Challenges Hindering CSR Initiatives in India Now, since the passing of Companies Act,2013 around 8,000 companies in India – including private and public companies need to focus on planning, designing and implementing CSR initiatives pertain to areas, such as, care for all stakeholders, ethical functioning, respect for workers’ rights and welfare, respect for human rights, environment and social and inclusive development etc. The practical implementation of CSR is faced with a lot of issues and challenges. As a result, there are several key challenges, which are anticipated. These challenges are listed below: • Lack of Community Participation in CSR Activities: There is a lack of interest of the general public in participating and contributing to CSR activities of companies. CSR is largely misunderstood by Indian businesses and their stakeholders. There is a view that businesses are already socially responsible, when they are clearly not. The situation is further aggravated by a lack of communication between the companies involved in CSR and the general public at the grassroots. • Need for Capacity Building of the Local Non-Governmental Organizations: There is a need for capacity building of the local non -governmental organisations as there is serious dearth of trained and efficient organisations that can effectively contribute to the ongoing CSR activities initiated by companies. This seriously compromises scaling up of CSR initiatives and subsequently limits the scope of such activities. • Issues of Transparency: There is an expression by the companies that there exists lack of transparency on the part of the local implementing agencies as they do not make adequate efforts to disclose information on their programmes, audit issues, impact assessment and utilization of funds. This reported lack of transparency negatively impacts the process of trust building between companies and local communities, which is a key to the success of any CSR initiative at the local level. • Non-Availability of Well Organized Non-Governmental Organizations: There is non-availability of well organized nongovernmental organizations in remote and rural areas that can assess and identify real needs of the community and work along with companies to ensure successful implementation of CSR activities. This also builds the case for investing in local communities by way of building their capacities to undertake development projects at local levels. Visibility Factor: The role of media in highlighting good cases of successful CSR initiatives is welcomed as it spreads good stories and sensitizes the local population about various ongoing CSR initiatives of companies. This apparent influence of gaining visibility and branding exercise often leads many nongovernmental organizations to involve themselves in event-based programs; in the process, they often miss out on meaningful grassroots interventions. • Narrow Perception Towards CSR Initiatives: Non-governmental organizations and Government agencies usually possess a narrow outlook towards the CSR initiatives of companies, often defining CSR initiatives more donor-driven than local in approach. As a result, they find it hard to decide whether they should participate in such activities at all in medium and long run. Legal Perspectives on Corporate Social Responsibility In the Developing Countries 231 • Non-Availability of Clear CSR Guidelines: There are no clear cut statutory guidelines or policy directives to give a definitive direction to CSR initiatives of companies. It is found that the scale of CSR initiatives of companies should depend upon their business size and profile. • Lack of Consensus on Implementing CSR Issues: There is a lack of consensus amongst local agencies regarding CSR projects. This lack of consensus often results in duplication of activities by corporate houses in areas of their intervention. This results in a competitive spirit between local implementing agencies rather than building collaborative approaches on issues. This factor limits company’s abilities to undertake impact assessment of their initiatives from time to time.33

Conclusion In the developing countries the CSR regime is in a nascent stage and there will be hitches, and a lot of fine-tuning will be required before we hit the perfect balance. Business houses all over the world are realizing their stake in the society and engaging in various social and environmental activities. The need of the hour is to formulate effective strategic policies and adopt various instruments according to the company history, its content, peculiarity in relationship with its different stakeholders so that CSR can be best implemented towards its goals – sustained environmental, social and economic growth. Nurturing a strong corporate culture which emphasizes Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) values and competencies is required to achieve the synergistic benefits.

Endnotes 1. ww w.legalserviceindia.com2 Carroll, A. B., A Three-dimensional conceptual model of corporate performance (1979), Academy of Management Review, Vol. 4 No. 4, pp. 497-505 3. Mehran Nejati, The Concept of Corporate Social Responsibility in India, Global Business and Management Research: An International Journal Vol.2 No.1 P.43 4. The European Commission, Communication From The Commission To The European Parliament, The Council And The European Economic And Social Committee, Implementing The Partnership For Growth And Jobs: Making Europe A Pole Of Excellence On Corporate Social Responsibility, COM(2006) p.136. 5. World Business Council for Sustainable Development, Corporate Social Responsibility the WBCSD’s journey, January 2002 at pg.2 7. Pwc, Handbook on corporate social responsibility, available at www.pwc.in 8. M. Kerr, R. Janda and C. Pitts, Corporate Social Responsibility, A Legal Analysis, LexisNexis Canada Inc., Markham Ont. 2009, p.572 9. Ibid, p.33 10. http://www.us-cap.org/ 11. Standard Instructions for Filing Forms under the Securities Act of 1933, Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, Regulation SK. 12. R. Kuras Corporate Social Responsibility: A Canada-U.S. Comparative Analysis, (2002) 28 Man. L.J. pp.303 – 319 13. Canada, Bill C-300, An Act respecting Corporate Accountability for the Activities of Mining, Oil or Gas in Developing Countries, 2nd Sess., 40th Parl., 2009 232 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

14. International Finance Corporation, Performance Standards on Social & Environmental Sustainability, April 30th, 2006, at Performance Standards p.2. 15. Proposal for an Act amending the Danish Financial Statements Act. (Report on social responsibility for large businesses),8 October 2008. 16. Danish Commerce and Companies Agency, Reporting on corporate social responsibility – an introduction for supervisory and executive boards, 2009, at pg. 6. 17. Ibid,p.7 18. http://www.csrgov.dk/sw56464.asp 19. Richa Gautam and Anju Singh Corporate Social Responsibility Practices in India: A Study of Top 500 Companies, Global Business and Management Research: An International Journal, Vol. 2, No. 1, 2010, pp. 44-45 20. Ibid, p.45 21. A.D.Gupta, Social responsibility in India towards global compact approach, International Journal of Social Economics, Vol.34, (2007), pp. 637-663 22. Mohan, A. Corporate citizenship: perspectives from India, Journal of Corporate Citizenship, Vol. 12 No. 2, (2001), pp. 107-117 23. Working Document of EU India CSR, 2001 24. G.N. Bajpai, Corporate Social Responsibility in India and Europe: Cross Cultural Perspective, available at: http:// www.ficci.com 25. Nitin Kumar Corporate Social Responsibility: An Analysis of Impact and Challenges in India Abhinav International Monthly Refereed Journal of Research in Management & Technology, Volume 3, Issue 5 (May, 2014) p.102 26. Suryah S.G. Critical Analysis on Corporate Social Responsibility, available at http//www.lawyersclubindia.com. 27. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corporate_social_responsibility 28. Overview of the UN Global Compact. Available at: http://www.unglobalcompact.org/AboutTheGC/index.html 29. Corporate Social Responsibility. Available at: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corporate_social_responsibility. 30. http://www .faizarice.com/index.htm. 31. http://blogs.intel.com/csr/2007/06. 32. Supra Note 25.Nitin Kumar p.97 33. Ibid, pp.100-101

Links www.legalserviceindia.com http://www.cuts-international.org/pdf/Draft-CSR_ Rules_2013 http://www.us-cap.org/ http://www.csrgov.dk/sw56464.asp http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corporate_social_responsibility http://www .faizarice.com/index.htm. http://blogs.intel.com/csr/2007/06. 28

The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy

Snehal Anant Patil*

Abstract

The subsistence of the commodity market in India belongs to an earlier time. The greatest knowledge of this system was the development of the determined market. These markets influence the dynamics of production and resource allocation in the primary sector, along with pricing system of this market. With the recent pace of growth India will come forward as a major player in international market in terms of commodity consumption, production and trade. India is emerging as top producers of commodities, 5th largest in the world, holds 57% of the world population and put in 22% to the GDP of the country. Trading in commodity derivatives also increased along with the hasty growth of trading in all derivative markets. This trading was directly related to the search for higher yields in a low interest rate environment. The research paper discussed the mechanism and the role of trading, MCX and Indian Economy. The study undertaken beneath has been drawn on the theme of the commodity markets functioning in India. The paper has been divided into four parts: Role of the commodity market, sector-wise commodity market development, initiatives in the form of developmental activities undertaken by the Government of India, challenges faced by the commodity market. Keywords: Commodity Market, MCX, Future Market, Indian Economy

Introduction Commodity trading in food and other agricultural products, metals and energy products is not a new phenomenon. It is probably one of the most ancient economic activities and therefore, it would not be incorrect to state that commodity trading is as old as human civilization. Over the centuries, commodity trading has undergone tremendous changes from the barter system to spot markets to futures markets.

* Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 234 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

In the past few decades, trading in commodity futures has also evolved from “open-outcry” methods (which involved trading through a combination of hand signals and verbal orders in trading pits) to computer-powered electronic trading. Nowadays, big traders use sophisticated tools such as algorithmic trading (which involves no human intervention) for trading in commodity futures and individuals often use mobile phones for placing orders. As a result, trading in commodity futures around the globe has now become more sophisticated, convenient and quicker than in the past. India is a commodity based economy where two-third of the one billion populations depends on agricultural commodities; unexpectedly it has been increased under the developed commodity market. Commodities: A commodity market is a market that trades in primary economic sector rather than manufactured products. Commodities are products that can be bought, sold or traded in different kinds of markets. Commodities are the raw materials that are used to create products which are consumed in everyday life around the world from food products in India to building new homes in Europe or to running cars in the US. Two Main Types of Commodities: • Soft commodities – Agricultural products such as corn, wheat, coffee, cocoa, sugar, soybean and livestock. • Hard commodities – Natural resources that need to be mined or processed such as crude oil, gold, silver and rubber. In the Global Markets, there are four Categories of Commodities in which Trading Takes Place: • Energy (e.g., crude oil, heating oil, natural gas and gasoline) • Metals (e.g., precious metals such as gold, silver, platinum and palladium; base metals such as aluminium, copper, lead, nickel, tin and zinc; and industrial metals such as steel) • Livestock and meat (e.g., lean hogs, pork bellies, live cattle and feeder cattle) • Agricultural (e.g., corn, soybean, wheat, rice, cocoa, coffee, cotton and sugar) History of Commodity Market: Unbelievably Futures Trading dates back to 17 th Century Japan. The first ever case noted concerned rice. However, there is also evidence that rice futures were traded in China as far back as 6,000 years ago. Future trading is a natural progression of things in response to the difficulties of maintaining a year round supply of products which are dependable on seasons like agricultural crops. In ancient Japan, rice to be stored in warehouses for future consumption by the rice merchants. To raise funds, these merchants would then sell their “rice tickets” (receipts of the stored rice). Later, these rice tickets came to be regarded as a sort of all-purpose currency. As trading in rice tickets became more widespread, rules to standardize the trading of these rice tickets were introduced. In a way, these rules were akin to the current rules of the US Futures trading. Futures trading began in the US only towards mid 1800s. The Chicago Board of Trade (CBOT) was setup in 1848. The New York Coffee , Cotton and Produce exchanges were only established in the 1870s and 1880s. Up to today, there are already ten commodity exchanges established in the US, with the CBOT being the largest. The other established exchanges are The Chicago Mercantile Exchange, New York Mercantile Exchange, New York Commodity Exchange and New York Coffee, Sugar and Cocoa Exchange. The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 235 History of Commodity Market in India: The history of organized commodity derivatives in India goes back to the nineteenth century when Cotton Trade Association started futures trading in 1875 about a decade after they started in Chicago. Over the time datives market developed in several commodities in India. Following Cotton, derivatives trading started in oilseed in Bombay (1900), raw jute and jute goods in Calcutta (1912), Wheat in Hapur (1913) and Bullion in Bombay (1920). However many feared that derivatives fuelled unnecessary speculation and were detrimental to the healthy functioning of the market for the underlying commodities, resulting in to banning of commodity options trading and cash settlement of commodities futures after independence in 1952. The parliament passed the Forward Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1952, which regulated contracts in Commodities all over the India. Types of Commodity Market: There are two types of commodity markets: spot (physical) and derivatives (such as futures, options and swaps). • In a Spot Market, a physical commodity is sold or bought at a price negotiated between the buyer and the seller. The spot market involves buying and selling of commodities in cash with immediate delivery. There are spot markets for individual consumers (retail market) and the business-to-business (wholesale market) category. Spot markets also include traditional markets such as Delhi’s AzadpurMandi that deal in fruits and vegetables. • On the other hand in Derivatives Market, a commodity can be sold or bought via derivatives contract as well. A futures contract is a pre-determined and standardized contract to buy or sell commodities for a particular price and for a certain date in the future. For instance, if one wants to buy 10 tonne of rice today, one can buy it in the spot market. But if one wants to buy or sell 10 tonne of rice at a future date, (say, after two months), one can buy or sell rice futures contracts at a commodity futures exchange. A derivative contract is an enforceable agreement between two parties where the value of the contract is based or derived from the value of an underlying asset. The underlying asset can be a commodity, stock, precious metal, currency, bond, interest rate, index, etc. Some of the widely used derivative contracts are as following: • Forwards: A forward contract is a non-standardized or customized contract between two parties to undertake an exchange of the underlying asset at a specific future date at a predetermined price. It is a bilateral agreement whose terms are negotiated and agreed upon between two parties. It is transacted over-the-counter and is not traded on an exchange. The contract is executed by both parties on the due date by delivery of asset by the seller and payment by the buyer. • Futures: Commodity futures contracts are agreements made on a futures exchange to buy or sell a commodity at a pre-determined price in the future. The futures contracts are traded on regulated exchanges and the terms of the contract are standardized by the exchange. What is negotiated by the counterparties (buyer and seller of a futures contract) is only the price. The price is discovered through the offers and bids process. As explained in the previous chapter, all contracts are settled by cash or physical delivery of the underlying commodity on the expiry date of the contract. In Indian exchanges, almost all commodity futures contracts are cash-settled. • Options: Commodity options are contracts that give the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell an agreed amount of a commodity on or before a specified future date. 236 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • Swaps: A commodity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange cash (flows) on or before a specified future date based on the underlying value of commodity, currency, stock or other assets. Unlike futures, swaps are not exchange-traded instruments. Swaps are usually designed by banks and financial institutions that also arrange the trading of these bilateral contracts. Multi Commodity Exchange of India Ltd (MCX) (BSE: 534091) is an independent commodity exchange based in India. It was established in 2003 and is based in Mumbai. It is India’s largest commodity futures exchange and the turnover of the exchange for the year 2015. MCX offers futures trading in bullion, non-ferrous metals, energy, and a number of agricultural commodities (mentha oil, cardamom, crude palm oil, cotton and others). Commodity exchange in India plays an important role where the prices of any commodity are not fixed, in an organized way. Earlier only the buyer of produce and its seller in the market judged upon the prices. Others never had a say. Functions of Multi-Commodity Exchange : India‘s first listed exchange, the Multi Commodity Exchange of India Limited (MCX), is a commodity futures exchange that facilitates online trading and clearing and settlement of commodity futures transactions. Hence, MCX provides a platform for risk management. MCX functions within the regulatory framework of the Forward Contracts Regulation Act, 1952 and regulations there under. Offering trading in more than 50 commodity futures contracts throughout segments, including bullion, ferrous and non-ferrous metals, energy, and agricultural commodities, MCX concentrates on providing commodity ecosystem participants with neutral, secure and transparent trade mechanisms, and formulating quality parameters and trade regulations, in accordance with the regulatory framework Which are the Biggest Global Commodity Derivatives Trading Exchanges? In the 1970s and 80s, the United States was a leading player in commodity derivatives trading which began there with corn contracts at the Chicago Exchange in the mid-19th century and cotton at the New York Exchange. By the early 1980s, the US was home to 13 major futures and options exchanges, including the Chicago Board of Trade (CBOT), one of the world’s biggest futures and options exchange; Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME); and New York Mercantile Exchange (NYMEX). However, Europe emerged as a clear leader in the mid-1990s, particularly in the non- agricultural commodities and tilted the balance away from the US in its own favour. Table 1: Top 16 Derivatives Exchanges Worldwide Based on Number of Contracts Traded and/or Cleared (2013) Ranking Exchange No. of Contracts 1 CME Group (US) 3,161,476,638 2 Intercontinental Exchange* (US) 2,807,970,132 3 Eurex (Germany) 2,190,548,148 4 National Stock Exchange of India 2,135,637,457 5 BM&F BOVESPA (Brazil) 1,603,600,651 6 CBOE Holdings (US) 1,187,642,669 7 NASDAQ OMX (US) 1,142,955,206 8 Moscow Exchange (Russia) 1,134,477,258 The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 237

9 BM&F BOVESPA (Brazil) 1,603,600,651 10 Korea Exchange (South Korea) 820,664,621 11 MCX India (India) 794,001,650 12 Dalian Commodity Exchange (China) 700,500,777 13 Shanghai Futures Exchange (China) 642,473,980 14 Zhengzhou Commodity Exchange 525,299,023 15 Japan Exchange Group 366,145,920 16 Hong Kong Exchanges & Clearing 301,128,507

*Includes NYSE Euronext. Source: www.futuresindustry.org.

Why Invest in Commodities? Studies have shown that commodity price movements have traditionally been negatively correlated to price movements of other financial instruments (such as equities or bonds), so a natural resource investment can provide important portfolio diversification. Equities, bonds and other financial instruments have shown that they tend to follow the same trend in times of economic crisis. In addition, equities are also bound by country-specific economic pressures. In contrast, commodities such as zinc and wheat or orange juice will rarely rise and fall in parallel, regardless of economic fundamentals, and they reflect the global economy.

The Modernisation of Commodity Futures Markets For the reasons described, commodities are now seen as an essential part of an investment portfolio. Industry contacts that we spoke to were confident that funds flowing into the sector are here to stay for the longer term. Even if prices ‘correct,’ an exodus is not expected, since the institutional and pension funds are just beginning to invest, and typically do so on a long-term basis for 30+ years. While market fundamentals have made investments in commodities more attractive, the evolution of the futures markets has made access easier for investors.

Challenges and Risks Given the marked change in the landscape of commodities investment, several challenges and risks exist. Here we detail these challenges and the risks we perceive for firms, Recognised Investment Exchanges, and consumers exposed to the commodities markets. • Lack of Expertise: If inexperienced traders don’t fully understand the nature of the commodities markets they operate in, this could harm the interests of both individual firm and the markets as a whole. • Ineffective Risk Management: Several markets have become much more volatile, and many analysts believe that the market is not responding to fundamentals as perhaps it used to. Electronic access has speeded up the markets and algorithmic trading enables the trading of large volumes very quickly. So the daily price range can be much wider than before. • Acquisition of Physical Assets: In addition to the changing risks facing firms due to increased volatility some firms have become involved with commodities through the acquisition of 238 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey physical assets such as power stations. This presents a significantly different element to their portfolio of risk, which is otherwise determined by the management of exposure to financial instruments based on underlying commodities. It is vital that firms have appropriate arrangements in place to manage this very different type of exposure and the resulting range of risks. • Increased cost of Trading: In times of sustained volatility the clearing houses increase initial margins. Larger firms can afford to buy or sell, but smaller players have had to reduce the number of contracts they hold, which has reduced overall market open interest, and may lead to greater volatility in the market (which in itself may discourage more conservative investors). • Liquidity Issues: Several participants felt that the influx of money into the commodity markets had caused increased tightness in some markets, especially in the front months where index rolling takes place. As is always the case with physically delivered markets a risk may exist that some speculative investors are unable to trade out of certain positions, resulting in the delivery of physical assets on occasions. • Preventing Market Abuse: There is no suggestion that these markets are more susceptible to market abuse than any other, but firms must ensure they act properly at all times.

Review of Indian Economy The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation released the provisional estimates of Annual National Income 2014-15 and quarterly estimates of GDP for Q4 of 2014 15. As per the provisional estimates of National Income, 2014-15, the Growth in GDP at constant prices (2011-12) during 2014-15 is estimated at 7.3 per cent as compared to the growth rate of 6.9 per cent in 2013-14. Agriculture sector’s growth has been estimated at 0.2 per cent in 2014-15 as against 3.7 per cent in 2013-14. Manufacturing and Services sector are estimated to grow at 6.6 per cent and 9.4 per cent, respectively in 2014-15. As per quarterly estimates of GDP for Q4 of 2014-15 as per the new series, GVA growth was registered at 6.1 per cent as compared to 6.8 per cent in the previous quarter and 5.3 per cent during the corresponding period of 2013-14.

Table 2: Quarterly Estimates of GVA (Y-o-Y) (at 2011-12 prices)

Items 2013- 2014- 2013-14 2014-15 14 15 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 (NS) (PE) 1. Agriculture & allied activities 3.7 0.2 2.7 3.6 3.8 4.4 2.6 2.1 -1.1 -1.4 2. Industry Mining & Quarrying 5.4 2.4 0.8 4.5 4.2 11.5 4.3 1.4 1.5 2.3 Manufacturing 5.3 7.1 7.2 3.8 5.9 4.4 8.4 7.9 3.6 8.4 Electricity, Gas, Water Supply& 4.8 7.9 2.8 6.5 3.9 5.9 10.1 8.7 8.7 4.2 Other Utility Services The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 239

3. Services Construction 2.5 4.8 1.5 3.5 3.8 1.2 6.5 8.7 3.1 1.4 Trade, Hotel, Transport, 11.1 10.7 10.3 11.9 12.4 9.9 12.1 8.9 7.4 14.1 Communication and services related to broadcasting Financial, Real Estate & 7.9 11.5 7.7 11.9 5.7 5.5 9.3 13.5 13.3 10.2 Professional Services Public Administration, 7.9 7.2 14.4 6.9 9.1 2.4 2.8 7.1 19.7 0.1 Defence and Other services Gross Value Added at Basic Price 6.6 7.2 7.2 7.5 6.6 5.3 7.4 8.4 6.8 6.1 GDP 6.9 7.3

Source: CSO (Central StasisticalOrganisation of India) Commodities Market: Turnover of the commodity exchanges increased by 16.63 per cent to Rs. 11.11 lakh crore during April-May 2015. The turnover at the commodity exchanges stood at Rs.9.52 lakh crore during the same period in 2014. The turnover from bullion fell by 6.6 per cent to Rs3.26 lakh crore during April-May2015, as against Rs3.49 lakh crore in the year-ago period. In the review period, the business from energy items like crude oil increased by 55 per cent to Rs3.22lakh crore from Rs 2.07 lakh crore in the previous fiscal, while the turnover from metals increased by 16.7 per cent to Rs2.35 lakh crore from Rs 2.01 lakh crore.

Table 3: Commodity Market Trading During April-May 2015 Name of the Commodity Volume (lakh tonnes) Value (in Rs. crore) Agricultural Commodities Food Items 305.25 1,58,362.80 Non-food Items 135.32 68,823.63 Bullion Gold 0.01 1,73,243.12 Silver 0.41 1,53,407.15 Metals 116.89 2,35,048.35 Energy 1,066.27 3,22,156.19 Total 1,624.14 11,11,041.24

Source: FMC What are the major commodity exchanges in India? There are currently 19 commodity derivatives exchanges in India. However, the bulk of trading (99.88%) is concentrated in the following national- level commodity exchanges: 240 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

1. Multi Commodity Exchange of India (MCX), Mumbai 2. National Commodity and Derivatives Exchange of India (NCDEX), Mumbai 3. National Multi Commodity Exchange (NMCE), Ahmedabad 4. Indian Commodity Exchange (ICEX), New Delhi 5. ACE Derivatives & Commodity Exchange Limited, Mumbai 6. Universal Commodity Exchange Limited, Navi Mumbai. Are Commodity Derivatives New in India? India has always been a country of market imperfections and prices fluctuations. Though India has an agricultural economy, it never had a national common market for agricultural products. There were always shortages and surpluses – with wide discrepancy in the prices at various levels. There was always price heterogeneity because of information asymmetry in the markets. In rural India, mandis were the traditional market places for food and agri-commodities. In different parts of India, mandis developed as wholesale trading hubs for vegetables, grains, pulses, spices, condiments, fruits, timber, gems, diamonds and livestock. India has a long history of derivatives trading in commodities. Commodity futures trading dates back to the ancient times. Researchers have found the mention of forward trading in commodities in Kautilya’s Arthashastra. In 1875, the first organized futures market for cotton contracts was established by the Bombay Cotton Trade Association. In independent India, the Forward Contracts (Regulation) Act was enacted in 1952 to regulate the commodity trading in forward and futures contracts.

Current Future Market While the first futures trading involved primarily the farmers and dealers, today’s traders could include your neighbour or co-worker. Currently, the ten most active exchanges conduct over one billion trades per year, and there are exchanges in over 30 countries. During the early years of the 21st century, several markets combined to form super-exchanges which offer a broader selection of contracts that can be traded. Through Internet activity, futures traders on remote islands can interact through brokers in large cities worldwide, thus creating a diverse global marketplace for establishing commodity pricing.

Trends in Derivatives Segment Equity Derivatives: India is one of the vibrant markets for exchange traded equity derivatives in the world. The trading volumes in the equity derivatives market surpassed that of the equity cash segment by 13.3 times in January 2016. The monthly total turnover in equity derivative market at NSE increased by 25.9 percent to ‘58,29,029 crore in January 2016 from ‘46,31,172 crore in December 2015 (Figure 4). The index options segment has been the clear leader in the product-wise turnover of the futures and options segment in the NSE. In January2016, the turnover in the index options category was 75.3 percent of the total turnover in the F&O segment of the NSE. During January 2016, index futures, stock futures, index options and stock options recorded increases in turnover over the previous month. The open interest in value terms in equity derivative segment of NSE increased by 11.2 percent to ‘1,72,320 crore as on January 31, 2016 from ‘1,54,964 crore as on December 31, 2015. The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 241

Figure: 1: Trends of Equity Derivatives Segment at NSE (‘crore) Source: (SEBI Bulletin) The monthly total turnover in equity derivative segment of BSE increased by 10.2 percent to ‘1, 32,590 crore in January 2016 from ‘1, 20,288 crore in December 2015. While index options comprised 97.8 percent of BSE’s equity derivative turnover, stock options constituted 1.9 percent. During January 2016, index futures, stock futures, index put options and stock options recorded decreases in turnover over the previous month, while only index call options registered an increase in turnover over the same period. The open interest in value terms in equity derivatives segment of BSE increased marginally by 0.8 percent to ‘237 crore as on January 31, 2016 from ‘235 crore as on December 31, 2015. In January 2016, NSE had 97.8 percent share in total equity derivatives turnover in India while BSE’s share was 2.2 percent. In terms of open interest (in value terms), NSE had 99.86 percent share while BSE had 0.14 percent share (Exhibit 4). Table 4: Trends in Equity Derivatives Market Particular NSE BSE Jan-16 Dec-15 Percentage Jan-16 Dec-15 Percentage Change Change Over Month Over Month 1 234567 A. Turnover (‘crore) (i) Index Futures 3,79,137 3,00,357 26.2 379 381 -0.6 (ii) Options on Index Put 19,82,824 15,39,487 28.8 19,239 23,423 -17.9 Call 24,08,349 18,80,247 28.1 1,10,478 90,213 22.5 (iii) Stock Futures 6,98,909 6,30,521 10.8 7 27 -72.7 (iv) Options on Stock Put 1,19,710 90,667 32.0 895 3,280 -72.7 242 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Call 2,40,100 1,89,893 26.4 1,593 2,965 -46.3 Total 58,29,029 46,31,172 25.9 1,32,590 1,20,288 10.2 B. No. of Contracts (i) Index Futures 71,51,363 53,97,473 32.5 7,693 7,353 4.6 (ii) Options on Index Put 3,64,71,724 2,70,61,557 34.8 3,92,434 4,65,551 -15.7 Call 4,24,76,467 3,17,97,538 33.6 21,80,479 17,14,077 27.2 (iii) Stock Futures 1,46,05,105 1,24,28,874 17.5 172 551 -68.8 (iv) Options on Stock Put 24,98,473 18,23,472 37.0 18,866 64,064 -70.6 Call 46,29,447 35,47,704 30.5 29,215 57,044 -48.8 Total 10,78,32,579 8,20,56,618 31.4 26,28,859 23,08,640 13.9 C. Open Interest in terms of Value ( ‘crore) (i) Index Futures 18,867 18,564 1.6 207 224 -7.7 (ii) Options on Index Put 41,702 30,876 35.1 7 2 185.9 Call 46,306 39,419 17.5 5 2 151.3 (iii) Stock Futures 58,067 60,744 -4.4 1 1 8.3 (iv) Options on Stock Put 2,956 1,932 53.0 17 6 197.0 Call 4,422 3,429 28.9 1 0 605.5 Total 1,72,320 1,54,964 11.2 237 235 0.8 D. Open Interest in terms of No of Contracts (i) Index Futures 3,45,761 3,20,341 7.9 4,155 4,289 -3.1 (ii) Options on Index Put 7,45,192 5,23,583 42.3 131 43 204.7 Call 8,26,389 6,66,610 24.0 102 38 168.4 (iii) Stock Futures 12,67,282 12,04,470 5.2 39 29 34.5 (iv) Options on Stock Put 65,712 38,932 68.8 406 81 401.2 Call 98,847 67,861 45.7 24 2 1,100.0 Total 33,49,183 28,21,797 18.7 4,857 4,482 8.4 The Imperative Role of the Commodity Market in The Growth of Indian Economy 243 Objectives • To study an Imperative Role of Commodity Market in growth of Indian Economy • To analyse the Commodity market development. • To evaluate the role of MCX in commodity market of India. • To find out the challenges faced by the commodity market.

Research Methodology Second Are Data: Secondary data collected from external sources. External sources include journals, research papers, websites, newspapers and magazines, Books, Bulletins, Government Sources etc.

Findings: • MCX retained a major market share of over 85% in the commodity futures market, followed by NCDEX and NMCE. • Commodity derivatives market is likely to end the year 2015 with a modest turnover growth but hopes are high for a rebound in 2016 with expectations of new products and new investors being allowed in the new regulatory regime. • The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) is also working on further steps to ensure transparency in areas like price discovery and risk management. • The commodities market remained under pressure in 2015 due to fall in prices of gold, crude oil and other agricultural commodities amid farm production concerns. The imposition of Commodities Transaction Tax also affected the daily turnover.

Recommendations • Implementing various new regulatory requirements may allow trading in options and indexes, for which MCX has requisite skill-sets, systems and technology. • Today, commodity exchanges are purely speculative in nature. Before discovering the price, they reach to the producers, end-users, and even the retail investors, at a grassroots level. It brings a price transparency and risk management in the vital market. • The commodity futures exchanges are your gateway to the futures markets; in fact, they are the commodity futures markets. However, because of the severe competition in these markets and because of the complexity of exchange traded products, you should only trade directly in the commodity futures markets if you have an iron clad grasp of the technical aspects of the markets and have a rock solid understanding of the market fundamentals. • Producers, who use commodities as inputs to create finished goods, want to shelter themselves from the daily fluctuations of global commodity prices.

Limitations • The main constraint related to our study is time limitation • Stronger evidence of various limiting factors as well as enhancing factors can be concluded in a larger population of learner’s. 244 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • The study is based on descriptive analysis. • A lack of data is a significant obstacle in finding a trend and a meaningful relationship. Conclusion India and other developing countries such as China, Brazil and South Africa have important commodity derivatives markets. The monthly turnover in Indian commodity exchanges is next only to the US and China. However, despite rapid growth in trading volume, the commodity futures markets have frequently courted controversy in India due to numerous factors, including pervasive market abuses and manipulation that have badly affected market integrity, weakened integration of spot and futures markets, raised concerns over price rise, and poor regulation and supervision.

References MaraviA(2015) , Research Scholar, Department of Commerce IRACST – International Journal of Commerce, Business and Management (IJCBM), Performance Analysis of Indian Agricultural Commodity Market, ISSN: 2319–2828 Vol. 4, No.2, April 2015, 1125. Kumari N, (2014) Research Hindu University, Varanasi, India Scholar, Faculty of Commerce, Banaras, Volume 3, Issue 12 (December, 2014) Online ISSN-2320-0073 Sharma K R S, June 2013, A Study of Commodity Futures in India, Volume No: 2 Issue: 4, Asia Pacific Research Journal, ISSN- 23205504 Shalini H S, Raveendra P V, A Study of Derivatives Market in India and its Current Position in Global Financial Derivatives Markets, IOSR Journal of Economics and Finance (IOSR-JEF) e-ISSN: 2321-5933, p-ISSN: 2321-5925.Volume 3, Issue 3. (Mar-Apr. 2014), PP 25-42 Neeti A. & Kaur G. (2013), Agricultural Commodity Future Trading and its Implications – An Overview, AIMA Journal of Management & Research, ISSN: 0974 – 497, May 2013, Volume 7, Issue 2/4. Isha, Mehta S (2013), Market Behavior and Price Discovery in Indian Agriculture Commodity Market, , International Journal of Scientific and Research Publications, Volume 3, Issue 3, March 2013 1 ISSN 2250-3153 Annual Report, 2013-14, Forward Markets Commission (FMC), Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance, Government of India. Monthly Refereed Journal of Research in Management & Technology, Recent Trends In Commodity Markets Of India.(2014). https://www.google.co.in/?gws_rd=ssl#q=A+Beginner%E2%80%99s+Guide+to+Indian+Commodity+ Futures+Markets http://www.thehindu.com/business/commodity-exchanges-eye-revival-under-sebi-after-modest-2015/article8010843.ece http://business.mapsofindia.com/india-market/commodity.html http://www.ciatnews.cgiar.org/2011/09/28/too-hot-for-chocolate/. http://www.rockefellerfoundation.org/what-we-do/current-work/developing-climate-change-resilience/african-agriculture- climate-change. http://www.world-food-dialogue.ch/documents/10_04/presentation_kagwanja.pdf. http://www.ifpri.org/sites/default/files/publications/pr21.pdf. Renewables include biofuels, hydropower, solar, wind (onshore and offshore), biomass, geothermal and ocean tidal waves. BP Energy Outlook 2030 (London: BP, January 2013). http://www.nasdaq.com/article/commodity-trading-chapter-1-history-of-commodity-trading-cm118267 Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis Review, January/February 2011, 93(1), pp. 37-48. 29

Importance of Micro, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises in Economic Development of India

Eknath G. Pokharkar*

Abstract

The importance of MSME has been recognized in recent years in both developed and developing countries. MSME is satisfying various socio-economic objectives such as higher growth of employment, output, promotion of export and fostering entrepreneurship .They played a vital responsibility in the industrial development of the country. The MSME is an important pillar of Indian economy as it contributes greatly to Indian economy. The sector even assumes greater importance now as the country move towards a faster and inclusive growth agenda. Moreover, the MSME sector which can help realize the target of proposed National Manufacturing policy of raising the share of manufacturing sector in GDP from 16% to 25% by or the end of 2022. This research paper is an attempt to focus the present status of performance of MSME’s in India and its importance in socio- economic development of India. It is concluded that this sector contributes significantly to manufacturing output, employment and export of country. Keywords: MSME, GDP and Employment Growth.

Introduction Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSME) sector has emerged as a highly vibrant and dynamic sector of the Indian economy over the last five decades. They also play a key role in the development of the economy with their effective, efficient, flexible and innovative entrepreneurial spirit. The MSME sector contributes significantly to the country’s manufacturing output, employment and exports and is credited with generating the highest employment growth as well as accounting for a major share of industrial production and exports. They have unique advantages due to their size; they have comparatively high labor-capital ratio; they need a shorter gestation period; they focus on relatively smaller markets; they need lower investments; they ensure a more equitable distribution of national income; they facilitate an effective mobilization of resources of capital and

* Department of Commerce, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. 246 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey skills which might otherwise remain unutilized; and they stimulate the growth of industrial entrepreneurship. The MSME sector in India is highly heterogeneous in terms of the size of the enterprises, variety of products and services, and levels of technology. It complements large industries as ancillary units and contributes enormously to the socioeconomic development of the country. The MSME sector is an important pillar of Indian economy as it contributes greatly to growth of Indian economy with a vast network of around 30 million units, creating employment of about 70 million, manufacturing more than 6000 products, contributing about 40% to manufacturing output and about 40% of exports, directly and indirectly. This sector even assumes greater importance now as the country moves towards a faster and inclusive growth agenda. Moreover, it is the MSME sector which can help realize the target of proposed National Manufacturing Policy of raising the share of manufacturing sector in GDP from 16% at present to 25% by the end of 2022. The present paper is an attempt to focus the present status of performance of MSMEs in India and highlights the major challenges for growth of MSMEs and initiatives taken to solve the constraints by both government level and institutional level.

Objectives of the Study The broad objective of the paper is to assess the importance of MSME’s sector in India. However, this paper highlights the following areas also. 1. To analyze contribution of MSME in employment generation in India. 2. To examine the growth and performance MSMEs. 3. To reveal the contribution of MSMEs to the growth of the GDP.

Data and Methodology The Data required for the study has been collected from secondary sources. The Data Collection includes (i) Annual Reports of Ministry of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises, Government of India; (ii) Various Websites connected with the relevant topics of MSMEs (iii) other relevant sources for MSMEs. Data collected for a period of five years from 2009-10 to 2013-14 for which relationship tested. The relevant data of MSMEs’ growth and performance collected and presented, which belongs to the after the introduction of Micro Small and Medium Enterprises act, 2006 only.

Conceptual Highlight Definition Small Scale Industrial Unit: An industrial undertaking in which the investment in fixed assets in plant and machinery, whether held on ownership terms, or on lease, or by hire purchase, does not exceed Rs. 100 lakhs as on 31-03-2001 is to be treated as a Small Scale Industrial Unit. Micro Small Medium Enterprises (MSME): MSME Sector consists of any enterprises, whether proprietorship, Hindu Undivided Family, association of persons, co-operative society, partnership or undertaking or any other legal entity, by whatever name called, engaged in production of goods pertaining to any industry specified in the first schedule of Industries Development and Regulation Act, 1951 and other enterprises engaged in production and rendering services. Under the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006, MSMEs are classified as under: Importance of Micro, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises in Economic Development of India 247 Table 1: Classification of MSMEs

Description Manufacturing Enterprises Service Enterprises Investment Investment in Plant and in Equipment (Rs.) Machinery ( Rs.) Micro Enterprises Up to 25 Lakhs. Up to 10 Lakhs. Small Enterprises Above 25 lakhs and Above 10 Lakhs and Up to 5 Crores Up to 2 Lakhs. Medium Enterprises Above 5 Crores and Above 2 crores and Up to 10 Crores Up to 5 crores. Source: http://www.dcmsce.gov.in/MSME-DO/about_us.htm32

Major Players In spite of their limitations, the SMEs have made a significant contribution towards technological development and exports. They are established in almost all-major sectors in the Indian industry such as: Food Processing, Textiles and Garments, Agricultural Inputs, Leather and leather goods, Chemicals and Pharmaceuticals, Bio-engineering, Engineering, Electricals, Sports goods, Electronics, Plastics products, Electro-medical equipment, Computer Software, etc.

Evaluation of Performance of MSME As per the provisions of the Act, all MSMEs are required to file Entrepreneurs Memorandum (Part-I) at District Industries Centers (DICs). After commencement of the project, the entrepreneur concerned is required to file Entrepreneurs Memorandum (Part-II) [EM (Part-II)]. Prior to enactment of the MSMED Act, 2006 there was a system of registration to small scale industrial units by the DICs. Table No. 1 shows category wise entrepreneurs under Micro, Small and Medium for the last five years ending 2013-14 those who filed their memorandum to DICs.

Table 2. Status of Filing of EnTrepreneurs Memorandum Part-II

Year No. of EM – II Filed Pertaining to Micro Small Medium Total 2009-10 185180 23870 1409 213206 2010-11 205112(10.76) 29125(22.1) 1263(-10.36) 238429 2011-12 242539(18.24) 34225(17.51) 2959134.28) 282428 2012-13 275867(13.74) 41502(21.26) 5449(84.15) 322818 2013-14 296526(7.48) 59127(42.46) 7338(34.66) 362991 Average 241044 37569 3683 283974 CAGR 12.56% 25.81% 60.68% 14.25% The figures in bracket show the percentage growth over the previous year. Source: EM Part-II data on MSME sector, Development Commissioner, MSME, GoI, 2013-14 248 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Figure 1. Growth of Micro Scale Industries in India During the Period of 2009-10 to 2013-14

Figure 2. Growth of Small Scale Industries in India During Period of 2009-10 to 2013-14

Figure 3. Growth of Medium Scale Industries in India During the Period of 2009-10 to 2013- Importance of Micro, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises in Economic Development of India 249 14 The average growths of Micro, Small and Medium enterprises are 241044, 37569 and 3683 respectively with overall average growth rate of 14. 25 %. The maximum growth was witnessed by medium scale enterprises i.e. 60.68 %. At the year ending 2013-14, there were 2, 96,526 micro enterprises with annual growth rate of 12.56 %.

Growth and Performance The micro, small and medium enterprises (MSMEs) sector contributes significantly to the manufacturing output, employment and exports of the country.

Table 3: Growth and Performance of MSMEs in India MSME units, Investment, Production and Employment. Year Total Working Fixed Investment Total Production Total Employment MSMEs.( Lakhs) ( Cr.) ( Cr.) (Lakhs) 2009-10 410.80 1038546.08 1488352 921.79 2010-11 428.73 1105943.09 1653622 965.15 2011-12 447.64 1182757.64 1788584 1061.69 2012-13 447.54 1268763.67 1809976 1061.40 2013-14 488.46 1363700.54 N.A. 1114.29 Average 444.634 1191942.204 1313045.5 1024.864 CAGR 4.474083281 7.047362607 6.820619056 4.915551984 Source: MSME Annual Report-2014-15, Government of India.

Analysis of Prospects of MSMEs in India From the Above Table 3 it is Clear that: • The total numbers of MSMEs have increased from 410.80 lakhs in 2009-2010 to 488.46 lakhs in 2013-2014. The MSMEs have grown by 4.47% in a span of 5 years. However, they grow consistently till 2011-12 but in 2012-13 growth rate was negligible i.e. 0.02%. • The fixed investments in these industries have gone up from Rs.10, 38,546.08 cr. to Rs.13,63,700.54 cr. in 2013-14. The growth rate the fixed investment in these industries grows at consistently by 6 % to 7%. This indicates that large amount of investment has been made in MSMEs to increase their development. • The production from these industries has grew from 14, 88,352 cr. to 18, 09,976 cr. in 2013- 14. Further, these industries contributed lot in providing employment opportunities to unemployed workforce. There is 7.82 % growth in the production of MSME. • The number of persons employed in these industries have increased from 921.79 lakhs in 2009-10 to 1114.29 lakhs in 2013-2014 growth rate was 4.91 per cent, which indicates that there has been considerable increase in employment in a span of 5 years. The growth rate in employment is not consistent. In 2010-11 it was around 4%, in 2011-12 it was around 10%, in 2012-13 it was negative i.e.0.2% and in 2013-14 it was around 4%. 250 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Table 4: Contribution of MSME to Manufacturing Output and in GDP Year Contribution to Contribution to GDP manufacturing output 2009-2010 39.63 7.49 2010-2011 38.50 7.49 2011-2012 37.47 7.28 2012-2013 37.33 7.04 2013-2014 N.A. N.A Source: MSME Annual Report Published by GOI in 2014-2015. Table 4 discloses the contribution of MSME sector to total manufacturing output and GDP over five years. It shows constant trend over the period of study. During the financial year ending 2012-13 this sector contributes 37% approx. of the total industrial production and 7% approx. to overall GDP of the country. During the period of five years i.e. 2009-10 to 2013-14 this sector contributes 38% approx. of the total industrial production and 7% approx. to overall GDP of the country. Table 5: Comparative Growth Rate of MSME Sector to Industrial Sector. Year Growth Rate of MSME Growth Rate of all over Industry 2009-10 10.45 10.50 2010-11 11.83 9.8 2011-12 18.45 3.6 2012-13 14.43 2.4 2013-14 12.44 4.1 Source : Annual Report of Ministry of MSME for the year 2013-14

Figure 4. Comparative Growth of MSME and Overall Industries Importance of Micro, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises in Economic Development of India 251 From Table 5 and Fig. 4, it is clear that the growth rate of MSME sector has witnessed a higher growth as compared to overall industrial growth of the country. During financial year 2011-12 this sector contribute maximum growth of 18.45% and growth rate of overall industries was least in the year of 2012-13, i.e. 2.4% because of sub-prime crises in world economy. During the period of five years MSME’s average growth rate was 13.52%, and overall industrial growth rate was only 6.8 %. It shows role of MSME in industrial development. Govt. Initiatives in Financial Year 2012 to Revitalise the MSME Sector 1. The BSE and NSE got the approval for SME platforms from the SEBI and have began functioned. This will serve as an opportunity for Indian SMEs to raise funds from capital markets 2. To achieve the overall target set by the Prime Minister’s National Council on Skill Development, Ministry of MSME and the agencies conducted the skill development programmes for 478,000 people during FY12. During FY13, the Ministry aims to provide training to 572,000 people through its various programmes for development of self employment opportunities as well as wage employment opportunities in the country. 3. To improve the productivity, competitiveness and capacity building of MSMEs, the Government of India has adopted a cluster based approach. During Apr-Jan 2012, the government has taken 8 new clusters for diagnostic study, 5 for soft interventions, and 4 for setting up of common facility centers. Till Jan 2012, the government has taken a total of 477 clusters for diagnostic study, soft interventions and hard interventions and 134 infrastructure development projects. Conclusion Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) contribute to economic development in various ways such as creating employment opportunities for rural and urban population, providing goods and services at affordable costs by offering innovative solutions and sustainable development to the economy as a whole. SMEs in India face a number of problems - absence of adequate and timely banking finance, non-availability of suitable technology, ineffective marketing due to limited resources and non availability of skilled manpower. The Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSME) sector contributes significantly to manufacturing output, employment and exports of the country. It is estimated that in terms of value, the sector accounts for about 45 % of the manufacturing output and 40% of total exports of the country. To make this sector to become more vibrant and significant player in development of the Indian economy the Government of India has taken various initiatives. The definition and coverage of the MSME sector was broadened. MSME Development Act 2006 which recognized concept of ‘enterprise’ to include both manufacturing and service sector

References Annual Report on MSME, Government of India, 2011-12 and 2012-13, 2013-14, 2014-15. Report of the working group on MSMEs growth in 12th five year plan 2012-17, GOI. http://www.dcmsce.gov.in/MSME-DO/about_us.htm32 http://www.smechamberofindia.com/About_MSMEs.aspx www.kpmg.com ( Indian Economic Survey 2014-15,(27th Feb.15) “http://www.gov.in/”ww.gov.in ( Sector wise share to the GDP) www.dcmsme.gov.in/ssiindia/msme_in.htm www.msmementor.in/MSME_Sector_India.asp msme.gov.in/Web/Portal/New-Default.aspx 30

Common Practices of Corporate Social Responsibilities in Pharmaceutical Companies

Lekha J Varma*

Abstract

Today the Corporate Social Responsibility is tied to a company’s core business. It has been exploited as a strategic management and marketing tool. It is the moral obligation of the society to maintain the health of all. The paper analyses the current trends followed by pharmaceutical companies towards improving awareness, accessibility, affordability and adaptability on health care segment. The present paper was based on the studies of data collected from Pharmaceutical Companies which concludes that they are directly and indirectly responsible for providing awareness and services to the society. Primary data from a Pharmaceutical Company as well as a secondary data has been used for comparative study. In India population is expected to be 1.2 billion. Out of them 62% are living in villages and depend on agriculture for their living. Most of them are below poverty line. Every company independently defines CSR in their own ways and implement without lacunae to convey the needs for implementing the responsibilities that company have to reach out not just to the urban people but also to the rural people. Key Words: Corporate Social Responsibilities, Awareness, Accessibility, Affordability and Adaptability.

Introduction CSR is an integrated approach which includes socially, environmentally and ethically responsible behaviour. This behaviour will helps corporate industries to generating value and long term sustainability by making contributions towards the betterment of the society. The Stakeholders includes investors, customers, employees, business partners, local community, the environment and the society. The growing emphasis on transparency should help the managers in development of a CSR in the companies. CSR is a continuing commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to economic development while improving the quality of life of the work force, their families and the local community.

* Department of Commerce, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Common Practices of Corporate Social Responsibilities in Pharmaceutical Companies 253 Evolution of Social Responsibility The historical background suggests that Corporate Social Responsibility practices were voluntary and in the nature of philanthropy i.e. charity which means that it is not obligatory and cannot be forced. Traditionally CSR activities had been dominated by religious or philanthropically oriented families of Parsis and Jains. Later on India witnessed a notable contribution in the field by many industrialists groups such as Tatas and Birlas. But most of these activities were focused on their employees and immediate neighbouring areas where they functioned. In 2008, a survey was carried out by (TNS) India, a world leader in market research and the Times foundation with the aim of understanding the role of corporate in CSR. The results revealed that most of CSR ventures were done as internal project while a small portion was as direct financial support to voluntary organisations. It also reveals that most of the initiatives and plans fail to transform their projects into sustainable programs.

New Companies Act, 2013 India‘s new Companies Act 2013 (Companies Act) has introduced several new provisions which change the face of Indian corporate business. One of such new provisions is Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). It is no more considered as a philanthropic activity but an integrated, inclusive and sustainable method of doing business in society. The concept of CSR rests on the ideology of give and take. Companies take resources in the form of raw materials, human resources etc from the society. By performing the task of CSR activities, the companies are giving something back to the society. Ministry of Corporate Affairs has recently notified Section 135 and Schedule VII of the Companies Act as well as the provisions of the Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Rules, 2014 (CRS Rules) which has come into effect from 1 April 2014. It would be mandatory for all organisations which meet the criteria as laid down in section 135(1) of the Act, to spend at least 2% of the average net profits of the three immediately preceding financial years in pursuance of their CSR activities as stipulated in the Act and the CSR Rules. This stipulated percentage of average net profits is to be spent every year in a manner specified in the Act and CSR Rules. In case a company fails to spend such amount, it shall have to specify the reasons for not spending it. According to the Act companies should undertake activities such as eradication of hunger, poverty and malnutrition. They should indulge in ‘promoting healthcare, including preventive healthcare and sanitation, including contribution to the Swachh Bharat Kosh set-up by the Central Government for the promotion of sanitation. It also includes rural development projects and slum area development under different categories of the Act.

Importance CSR has become increasingly important because today’s heightened interest in the proper role of business in society has been promoted by increased warmth to and awareness of environmental and ethical issues. Issues such as environmental damage, improper treatment of workers, and faulty production leading to customer inconvenience or danger are being highlighted during the last decade; elsewhere, investors and investment fund managers have began to take account of a firm’s CSR policy in making investment decisions; some consumers have become increasingly sensitive to the CSR programmers of the firms from which they buy their goods and services. 254 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey It helps in new Business to • Increase customer retention • Develop and enhance relationships with customers, suppliers and networks • Attract, retain and maintain a happy workforce. • Save money on energy and operating costs and manage risk • Differentiate yourself from your competitors • Generate innovation and learning and enhance your influence • Improve business reputation and standing • Provide access to investment and funding opportunities • Generate positive publicity and media opportunities due to media interest in ethical business activities.

Objectives The main objective of this paper is to study the new trends adopted by the Pharmaceutical Companies in adopting CSR. It also focuses on the challenges faced by them in adopting it.

Methodology Primary data from a pharmaceutical company as well as secondary data has been used for comparative study. Books, articles and web have been used for the purpose.

Table 1: Trends of CSR in India

Period Year Nature of First Pre-industrialization 1800 CSR activities were undertaken in the form of philanthropy with religious belief Second Pre-industrialization 1800-1914 CSR activities were undertaken in the form of donations with social welfare objectives Third Industrialization 1950-1980 CSR activities were undertaken in the form of responsible behaviour with progressive approach Fourth Post industrialization 1980-until today CSR activities are being performed in various forms by keeping in view multi stakeholders benefit. (Source: IJBMR Phases) In India, in the pre independence era, the businesses which pioneered industrialization along with fighting for independence also followed the idea. They put the idea into action by setting up charitable foundations, educational and healthcare institutions, and trusts for community development. The donations either monetary or otherwise were irregular activities of charity or philanthropy that was taken out of personal savings which neither belonged to the shareholders nor did it constitute an integral part of business. The term CSR itself came in to common use in the Common Practices of Corporate Social Responsibilities in Pharmaceutical Companies 255 early 1970s although it was hardly ever shortened. By late 1990s, the concept was fully recognized; people and institutions across all sections of society started supporting it.

Detailed Analysis of the Challenges Various approaches have been tried in order to understand the real segmentation of population. The CSR approaches by pharmaceutical companies in order to focus clearly on the beneficiaries. The Company’s CSR program has been pyramid approach. This is a popular approach all over the globe. This approach is also endorsed by WHO (World Health Organisation), the arm of the United Nations who are the custodian and the guideline providers of healthcare initiatives across the world.

In India population is expected to be 1.3 billion. Out of them 62% are living in villages and depend on agriculture for their living. (Source: World Bank 2013) Most of them are below poverty line. (The Pyramid shows) the different sections of people in India. They can be mainly divided into four groups: • The top of the pyramid represents people from big cities which are around 8%who are highly aware of diseases, their causes. • The middle of the pyramid represents the people from town which are about 23% of the total population; they also have a good awareness but prefer medicines of economic pricing based on their income. 256 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • The bottom of the pyramid represents the people from villages which are about 69% of the total population. Even though they are having money but they are not aware of taking medicines. They are sensitive to its pricing. • Lowest part of the pyramid represents the people belonging to below poverty line. They are extremely poor and need Government aid and free medicine for their survival. • In economics the bottom of the pyramid is the largest but the poorest socio economic group. In global terms, this is the 3 billion people who live on less than $2.50/ day. (Source https:// en.eikipedia.org/wiki/Bottom_of_the_pyramid) the concept of the fortune at the bottom of the pyramid appeared as an article by C.K Prahlad and Stuart L Hart in the business journal strategy published in August 5, 2004.

CSR Activities of Some Pharmaceutical Companies • Glaxo Smith Kline Pharmaceuticals CSR programs primarily focus on health and healthy living. They work in tribal villages where they provide medical check-up and treatment, health camps and health awareness programs. They also provide money, medicines and equipment to non-profit organizations that work towards improving health and education in under-served communities. • Wipro Cares: Focus area of Wipro cares is on taking educational and health care initiatives for migrated communities and environmental issues and disaster rehabilitation. • Novatis: Arogya Parivar “Healthy Family” and Treatment for Leprosy Free Multi Drug therapy. Cured 4.5 million patients • Cipla started Cipla Cancer Palliative Care Centre. • For fulfilling CSR of Pharmaceutical companies concentrate on last two sections of the pyramid. According to a survey people in this group: • Does not have awareness and to essential medicines. • Does not have accessibility to medicines and health care facilities. • Cannot afford medicines which is highly priced and • Adaptability i.e., communication problem

Awareness Most of the villagers are illiterate and they will not be aware of the importance of treatment, medicines and its prices. They may have money but not willing to spend. Lack of awareness may lead to chronic diseases.

Accessibility Most of the villages are far away from towns and cities and it will be difficult to reach towns and cities due to transportation facilities. Dispensaries in these remote areas will not have sufficient doctors and medicines.

Affordability Medicines are of high cost and the poor villagers cannot afford the expenses. They will not take medicines and leads to serious issues. Common Practices of Corporate Social Responsibilities in Pharmaceutical Companies 257 Adaptability Villages have their own language which is difficult to understand. This can create constraint for doctors and NGO’s to communicate with them.

Findings of the Study In a developing country like India, more than 60% of the people belong to lower level of the pyramid. These people do not have education and other health care facilities, which may lead to diseases. This will affect the productivity and national income of the country. Every company is working on their own way to accomplish their corporate social responsibility according to their fund availability. For achieving the goal social, sustainable and scalable approach should be taken. For creating awareness among villagers, • Health educators should be appointed. They should conduct disease and health awareness programs among the villagers. • They should be given awareness programs regarding hygiene, nutrition, disease prevention methods, sanitation methods, etc. For creating accessibility to health care: • Pharmaceutical companies should set up rural distribution network formally or informally by sending cases of medicines in buses without directly visiting the village. • City doctors in collaboration with pharmaceutical companies visit these places and conduct health camps and provide screening, diagnosis & treatment in villages that lack access to healthcare. For making the treatment and medicines affordable: • Pharmaceutical companies are providing necessary medicines at affordable price or free of cost. • Doctors also provide services without charging fees or concessional charges according to the need. Screening, diagnosis & treatment in villages that lack access to healthcare are given necessary help. For solving the adaptability (communication problem) with villagers: • Health educators are appointed from among themselves from each village. • They were given training in communicating them in their local language. • They were also given training in hygiene and disease prevention methods. • They were trained to create awareness programs on various health needs such as • Malaria, Tuberculosis, Gastro intestinal infections, Iron & Calcium deficiencies, Diabetes, respiratory infections, treatment compliance, Acute & Chronic pain etc. • Health messages delivered through easy to understand, storytelling approach for behavioural change. • Health awareness agenda compliments the medical/ drug access needs addressed by Arogya product portfolio. 258 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Besides this, Health educators and sales personnel together engage Qualified HCP’s (Health Care Professional) like doctors, to examine people in villages KOL empanelment for high quality healthcare access to villages. KOL stands for Key Opinion Leaders which include medical and paramedical staffs like doctors, nurses, lab technicians, pharmacists etc. These are those well reputed and highly respected doctors within the medical fraternity, who have a very high level of experience and expertise in their designated field. Their treatment approaches/ prescriptions have a very high degree of influence among the followers and medical community. The common trait of KOL is that they will have high domain knowledge as well as excellent presentation skills. They are considered as an authority in their chosen stream. • Doctors offer their services free of charge, fulfilling their commercial and social needs • Conduct Cancer detection camp in partnership NGOs. • Continued collaboration Health camps.

Conclusion Corporate no doubt have made significant contributions towards the sustainable development our country. Considering the limitations of the corporate in their CSR activities, some recommendations which can be used towards satisfaction like companies should extend their CSR activities in less privileged states rather than concentrate in resource rich states. It is essential that companies develop an effective value chain system of their products through their CSR activities, which is essential for competing in the global market. It will give better results if activities are based on a more practical & participatory approach and touch the grassroots level. Voluntarism among employees should be encouraged and institutionalized through recognition and incentives. There is also need for public-private partnership with well-defined controls and process for the best use of resources for social change. Special training needs to be given to business managers in working with social issues. Participation of small and medium business should be encouraged. Experience has shown that working with NGOs is more worthwhile and result-oriented. Joining hands with related NGOs is therefore advisable.

References Chatterji M: (2013) Oxford Corporate Social Responsibility, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Khanna P & Gupta G.: .(2011). Status of Corporate Social Responsibility: in Indian context The World Business Council for sustainable Development definition of CSR Corporate Social Responsibility: Meeting changing expectation Prahlad C.K and Stuart L. Hart, August 5, 2004 in the Business Journal Strategy Gupta R. (2012). Emerging trends of Corporate Social responsibility in India- An Overview, IJBMR, vol.2, issue 1, ISSN: 2249-6920, PP. 39-49. World Bank Report, 2013 India Pharma 2020, McKinley Report 2010 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bottom_of_the_pyramid www.csrquest.net 31

E-commerce and its Impact on Society

Shuhangi S. More*

Abstract

Electronic Commerce is process of doing business through computer networks. A person sitting on his chair in front of a computer can access all the facilities of the Internet to buy or sell the products. Unlike traditional commerce that is carried out physically with effort of a person to go & get products, ecommerce has made it easier for human to reduce physical work and to save time. The research strategy shows the importance of the e- commerce in developing countries for business applications. The main advantage of e-commerce over traditional commerce is the user can browse online shops, compare prices and order merchandise sitting at home on their PC.For increasing the use of e-commerce in developing Ecommerce (or electric commerce) refers to the buying and selling of goods and services via electronic channels, primarily the Internet. Online retail is decidedly convenient due to its 24-hour availability, global reach and generally efficient customer service. As the number of internet users grows, many believe e-commerce will soon be the main way to complete business transactions. There are purchasers and business alike that are affected by e-commerce. Keywords-E-commerce, B2B, Commerce, Electronic commerce

Introduction E-Commerce which was started in early 1990’s has taken a great leap in the world of computers, but the fact that has hindered the growth of e-commerce is security. Security is the challenge countries the B2B e-commerce is implemented for improving access to global markets for firms in developing countries. For a developing country advancement in the field of e-commerce is essential. Electronic commerce, commonly written as e-commerce, is the trading or facilitation of trading in products or services using computer networks, such as the Internet. Electronic commerce draws on technologies such as mobile commerce, electronic funds transfer, supply chain management, Internet marketing, online transaction processing, electronic data interchange (EDI), inventory management systems, and automated data collection systems.

* KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. 260 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Electronic commerce or ecommerce is a term for any type of business, or commercial transaction that involves the transfer of information across the Internet. It covers a range of different types of businesses, from consumer based retail sites, through auction or music sites, to business exchanges trading goods and services between corporations. It is currently one of the most important aspects of the Internet to emerge. Modern electronic commerce typically uses the World Wide Web for at least one part of the transaction’s life-cycle, although it may also use other technologies such as e-mail. E-commerce is business transactions through electronic means, including the internet, telephones, televisions and computers. E-commerce is business transactions through electronic means, including the internet, telephones, televisions and computers. As the number of internet users grows, many believe e-commerce will soon be the main way to complete business transactions. There are purchasers and business alike that are affected by e-commerce.Let’s take a look and see the main e-commerce advantages and disadvantages.

Working of E-Commerce The consumer moves through the internet to the merchant’s web site. From there, he decides that he wants to purchase something, so he is moved to the online transaction server, where all of the information he gives is encrypted. Once he has placed his order, the information moves through a private gateway to a Processing Network, where the issuing and acquiring banks complete or deny the transaction. This generally takes place in no more than 5-7seconds.There are many different payment systems available to accommodate the varied processing needs of merchants, from those who have a few orders a day to those who process thousands of transactions daily. With the addition of Secure Layer Technology,E-C0mmerce is also a very safe way to complete transactions.

The Social Impact of E-Commerce Along with the e-commerce and its unique charm that has appeared gradually, virtual enterprise, virtual bank, network marketing, online shopping, payment and advertising, such this new vocabulary which is unheard-of and now has become as familiar to people. This reflects that the e-commerce has huge impact on the economy and society from the other side. For instance, B2B is a rapidly growing business in the world that leads to lower cost and then improves the economic efficiency and also bring along the growth of employment. To understand how the e-commerce has affected the society and economy I will mention three issues below: 1. The e-commerce has changed the relative importance of time, but as the pillars of indicator of the country’s economic state that the importance of time should not be ignored. 2. The e-commerce offers the consumer or enterprise various information they need, making information into total transparency, will force enterprise no longer is able to use the mode of space or advertisement to raise their competitive edge. Moreover, in theory, perfect competition between the consumer sovereignty and industry will maximize social welfare. 3. In fact, during the economic activity in the past, large enterprise frequently has advantage of information resource, and thus at the expense of consumers. Nowadays, the transparent and real-time information protects the rights of consumers, because the consumers can use internet E-commerce and its Impact on Society 261 to pick out the portfolio to the benefit of themselves. The competitiveness of enterprises will be much more obvious than before, consequently, social welfare would be improved by the development of the e-commerce. 4. The new economy led by the e-commerce change humanistic spirit as well, but above all, is the employee loyalty. Due to the market with competition, the employee’s level of professionalism becomes the crucial for enterprise in the niche market. The enterprises must pay attention to how to build up the enterprises inner culture and a set of interactive mechanisms and it is the prime problem for them. Furthermore, though the mode of e- commerce decrease the information cost and transaction cost, however, its development also makes human being are overly computer literate. In hence, emphasized more humanistic attitude to work is another project for enterprise to development. Life is the root of all and high technology are merely an assistive tool to support our quality of life.

E-Commerce Advantages for Customers • Convenience. Every product is at the tip of your fingers on the internet, literally. Type in the product you are looking for into your favourite search engine and every option will appear in a well organized list in a matter of seconds. • Time saving. With e-commerce there is no driving in circles while looking and digging in hopes of finding what you need. Stores online offer their full line as well as use warehouses instead of store fronts—products are easy to locate and can be delivered to your door in just days. • Options, options, options! Without driving from store to store the consumer can easily compare and contrast products. See who offers the best pricing and have more options to choose from. While a physical store has limited space, the same store on the internet will have full stock. • Easy to compare. Side by side comparisons are readily available and easy to do. When products are placed online, they come with all the specifics, and they want you to compare them with others, know they have the best options and come back for more! • Easy to find reviews. Because the competition is high, companies online want you to look at other consumer reviews. Good and bad reviews are on every site, not only can you see if the product is liked, you can also see the reasons behind the thumbs up or down. • Coupons and deals. With every online business wanting you, more and more coupons and deals can’t be avoided, which are totally great for customers. With major sites that act as department store, you may find items up to 80% off! Take advantage of the competition and find the best price available.

E-Commerce Advantages for Businesses • Increasing customer base. The customer base is every business’s main concern, online or off. When online, a business doesn’t have to worry about getting the best property in town, people from around the world have access to their products and can come back at anytime. • Rise in sales. By not managing a storefront, any business will have more sales online with a higher profit margin. They can redistribute money to make the consumer shopping experience faster and more efficient. While being available to international markets, more products will sell. 262 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • 24/7, 365 days. If it’s snowing and the roads are closed, or it’s too hot and humid to even step outside in the summer, or a holiday that every store in town closes, your online business is open for consumers 24/7 every day of the year. The doors never close and profits will keep rising. • Expand business reach. A great tool on the internet is…translation! A business online does not have to make a site for every language. With the right marketing, every consumer around the globe can find the business site, products and information without leaving home. • Recurring payments made easy. With a little research, every business can set up recurring payments. Find the provider that best suits your needs and billing will be done in a consistent manner; payments will be received in the same way. • Instant transactions. With e-commerce there is no more waiting for the check to clear, or a 30-day wait for certain other types of payment. Transactions are cleared immediately or at most two to three days for the money to clear through the banking system.

E-Commerce Disadvantages for Customers • Privacy and security. Before making instant transactions online, be sure to check the sites certificates of security. While it may be easy and convenient to shop, no one wants their personal information to be stolen. While many sites are reputable, always do your research for those with less than sufficient security. • Quality. While e-commerce makes everything easily accessible, a consumer cannot actually touch products until they are delivered to the door. It is important to view the return policy before buying. Always make sure returning goods is an option. • Hidden costs. When making purchases, the consumer is aware of the product cost, shipping, handling and possible taxes. Be advised: there may be hidden fees that won’t show up on your purchasing bill but will show up on your form of payment. Extra handling fees may occur, especially with international purchases. • Delay in receiving goods. Although delivery of products is often quicker than expected, be prepared for delays. A snow storm in one place may throw off the shipping system across the board. There is also a chance that your product may be lost or delivered to the wrong address. • Need access to internet. Internet access is not free, and if you are using free wifi, there is the chance of information theft over an unsecure site. If you are wearing of your public library, or cannot afford the internet or computer at home, it may be best to shop locally. • Lack of personal interaction. While the rules and regulations of each e-commerce business is laid out for you to read, there is a lot to read and it may be confusing when it comes to the legalities. With large or important orders, there is no one you can talk to face to face when you have questions and concerns.

E-Commerce Disadvantages for Businesses • Security issues. While businesses make great efforts to keep themselves and the consumer safe, there are people out there that will break every firewall possible to get the information they want. We have all seen recently how the biggest and most renown business can be hacked online. E-commerce and its Impact on Society 263 • Credit card issues. Many credit card businesses will take the side of the consumer when there is dispute about billing—they want to keep their clients, too. This can lead to a loss for e-commerce business when goods have already been delivered and the payment is refunded back to the consumer. • Extra expense and expertise for e-commerce infrastructure. To be sure an online business is running correctly, money will have to be invested. As an owner, you need to know transactions are being handled properly and products are represented in the most truthful way. To make sure you get what you need, you will have to hire a professional to tie up any loose ends. • Needs for expanded reverse logistics. The infrastructure of an online business must be on point. This will be another cost to the business because money will need to be invested to ensure proper handling of all aspects of buying and selling, especially with disgruntled consumers that want more than a refund. • Sufficient internet service. Although it seems that everyone is now on the internet all the time, there are still areas in which network bandwidth can cause issues. Before setting up an e-commerce business, be sure your area can handle the telecommunication bandwidth you will need to run effectively. • Constant upkeep. When a business has started as e-commerce, they must be ready to make changes to stay compatible. While technology grows, the systems that support your business must be kept up to date or replaced if needed. There may be additional overhead in order to keep data bases and applications running.

Objective of Study ¾ To study the meaning of e-commerce ¾ To study impact of e-commerce on society ¾ Recent challenges facing e-commerce

Methodology This study involves secondary data such as statistic data, report from previous studies, government reports, articles, archive material, newspaper, books and websites. The study is based on descriptive and analytical.

Conclusion E-Commerce refers to all forms of business activities across the internet. This can include E-tailing, B2B, intranets and extranets, online advertising, and simply online presence of any form that are used for some type of communication. E-Commerce has several advantages and disadvantages as indicated in these papers.E-Commerce applications that started in early 1970’s needs to be still developed in terms of security and efficiency. For the developing country like our India advancement in e-commerce is a challenge to compete with the developed countries. The e-commerce is not a kind of new industry, but it is creating a new economic model. Most of people agree that the e-commerce indeed to be important and significant for economic society in the future, but actually that is a bit of clueless feeling at the beginning, this problem is exactly prove the e-commerce is a sort of incorporeal revolution. Generally speaking, as a type of business active procedure, the e-commerce is going to leading an unprecedented revolution in the world, the influence of this model far exceeded the commercial 264 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey affair itself. Except the mentioned above, in the area of law, education, culture and also policy, the e-commerce will continue that rise in impact. The e-commerce is truly to take human beings into the information society. Along with the e-commerce and its unique charm that has appeared gradually, virtual enterprise, virtual bank, network marketing, online shopping, payment and advertising, such this new vocabulary which is unheard-of and now has become as familiar to people. This reflects that the e-commerce has huge impact on the economy and society from the other side. For instance, B2B is a rapidly growing business in the world that leads to lower cost and then improves the economic efficiency and also bring along the growth of employment

References Chaudhury, Abijit; Kuilboer, Jean-Pierre (2002). E-Business and e-Commerce Infrastructure. McGraw-Hill. ISBN 0-07- 247875-6. Kotler, P. (2009). Marketing Management. Pearson: Prentice-Hall. ISBN 978-81-317-1683-0. Online shopping: The pensioner who pioneered a home shopping revolution. BBC News. 16 September 2013. Power, M. Online highs are old as the net: the first e-commerce was a drugs deal. The Guardian (London). Retrieved 17 June 2013. Springer. P. 255. ISBN 978-3-642-05018-3. Retrieved 28 March 2011. The first pilot system was installing in Tesco in the UK (first demonstrated in 1979 by Michael Aldrich). Tkacz, Ewaryst; Kapczynski, Adrian (2009). Internet — Technical Development and Applications. ht:tp://www.studymode.com/essays/E-Commerce-1554293.html “E Commerce – Essays – Hpandurang92”. http://www.nytimes.com/1994/08/12/business/attention-shoppers-internet-is-open.html www.riti_internews.ro/ecommerce.htm-71k. www.eccnet.com/papers.html-11k. http://www.studymode.com/essays/E-Commerce-1554293.html “E Commerce – Essays – Hpandurang92”. Study mode. Retrieved 17 June 2013. http://www.certiprosolutions/erp-and-ecommerce 32

Review of the Impact of WTO in the Indian Context

Umashankar B. Pandey*

Abstract

The World Trade Organization (WTO) is a global organization that helps countries and exporters and importers conduct their business producers of goods deal fairly and smoothly with conducting their business across international borders. It mainly does this through WTO agreements, which are negotiated and signed by a large majority of the trading nations in the world. These documents act as contracts that provide the legal framework for conducting business among nations. There are several groups within the WTO, with the highest decision- making authority going to a group known as the Ministerial Conference, which can make decisions on all matters and trade disputes among members. This paper focuses on the role of India in World trade organisation and its related issues. Key words: GATT, Uruguay round agreement, India’s role in WTO, India’s achievement with WTO

Introduction WTO is the global international organization dealing with the rules of trade between nations and signed by the bulk of the world’s trading nations and ratified in their parliaments. The goal is to help producers of goods and services, The World Trade Organization (WTO) is a global organization that helps countries and exporters and importers conduct their business producers of goods deal fairly and smoothly with conducting their business across international borders. It mainly does this through WTO agreements, which are negotiated and signed by a large majority of the trading nations in the world. These documents act as contracts that provide the legal framework for conducting business among nations. There are several groups within the WTO, with the highest decision-making authority going to a group known as the Ministerial Conference, which can make decisions on all matters and trade disputes among members.

* Assistant Professor, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 266 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

History The WTO is the successor of GATT (General Agreement on Tariff and Trade). GATT was commenced in 1947 and WTO was established on 1st January 1995. By 30th Nov.2015 WTO have 162 member countries. The WTO assures consumers and producers that they can enjoy sufficient supplies and greater choice of the finished products, components, raw materials and services they can use. The WTO aims at creating a more prosperous and peaceful economic world. The WTO was officially created in January of 1995 and essentially replaced the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), which had been in force since 1948, a few years after the Second World War. Before the WTO was created, an initiative to start something similar known as the International Trade Organization (ITO) took place. Unfortunately, the ITO agreement was not approved by the U.S. and a few other countries and ultimately never went into effect. In the 1980s, as the world economies became more global in trade and business, it became clear that GATT was not built or structured to address many of the new global trading challenges that were arising. As a result, the biggest trade negotiating event on record began in 1986. It was known as the Uruguay Round, seeing as it took place in Punta del Este, Uruguay. One of the final accomplishments of this round was the creation of the WTO. WTO at a Glance: 1) Location: Switzerland 2) Established: 1st January, 1995. 3) Head: Pascal Lamy (Director- General). 4) Created by: Uruguay round negotiations (1986-94) 5) Budget: 197 million Swiss francs for 2013

Meaning of Global Free Trade Global free trade means unrestricted purchase and sale of goods and services between countries without the imposition of constraints such as tariffs, duties and quotas.

Points In Favor of Global Free Trade Free Trade Creates Substantial Cooperative Relationships Between Trading Partners. WTO is more effective in promoting development and cooperative relationships. Being collaborated through trading relationships decreases the likelihood of war. If you are engaged in a mutually beneficial relationship with other countries, then there is no incentive to damage this relationship through aggression. 1. The Theory of Comparative Advantage: This explains that by specializing in goods where countries have a lower opportunity cost, there can be an increase in economic welfare for all countries. Free trade enables countries to specialize in those goods where they have a comparative advantage. 2. Increased Exports: As well as benefits for consumers importing goods, firms exporting goods where the UK has a comparative advantage will also see a big improvement in economic welfare. Lower tariffs on UK exports will enable a higher quantity of exports boosting UK jobs and economic growth. Review of the Impact of WTO in the Indian Context 267 3. Economies of Scale: If countries can specialize in certain goods they can benefit from scale and lower average costs, this is especially true in industries with high fixed costs or that require high levels of investment. The benefits of economies of scale will ultimately lead to lower prices for consumers and greater efficiency for exporting firms. 4. Increased Competition: With more trade, domestic firms will face more competition from abroad therefore there will be more incentives to cut costs and increase efficiency. It may prevent domestic monopolies from charging too high prices. 5. Trade is an Engine of Growth: World trade has increased by an average of 7% since the 1945, causing this to be one of the big contributors to economic growth. 6. Make use of Surplus Raw Materials: Middle Eastern counties such as Qatar are very rich in reserves of oil but without trade there would be not much benefit in having so much oil. Japan on the other hand has very few raw material without trade it would be very poor. 7. Tariffs may Encourage Inefficiency: If an economy protects its domestic industry by increasing tariffs, DOMESTIC industries may not have any incentives to cut costs.

Purpose of WTO: • Ensures linkage between trade, environment and development policies. • To raise the standard of living of member countries. • Maximum utilization of world resources. • Developing least developed countries and give them a secure place in International trade. • To develop an integrated multilateral trading system.

Objective of Research • To know the current status of India in WTO • To evaluate the role of India in WTO.

Research Methodology The present research study is ‘Explanatory’ in nature. So major emphasis is on discovery of ideas. The study is primarily based on secondary data which is compiled from different books and periodicals. Successful Functions Of WTO: • Cooperating to IMF and the World blank and other affiliated agencies to frame progress policies around the world. • To look after the administration, operations, settlement of disputes between member countries. • Acts as a forum for negotiations among the member countries. • Agreement between nations regarding trade policies. • Provide world resources to the entire world. • To help the member countries for the economic growth and development. • WTO prepares its own trade policies. 268 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • WTO broadened the trade in investment, services and property. • WTO increased sustainable trade development by which trade expanded in size and units and varieties. • WTO provides the more choices to consumers at discounted rate. • WTO participated China (China has 85% of world’s population and 95% of global trade.) • WTO encouraged liberalization due to which global GDP increased. • Reduction in the customs duties on industrial products. Failures of WTO • WTO failed to maintain democracy because rich countries are able to maintain high import duties but poor countries are not able. • Many developed countries are not able to follow the rules and participating activities in the Uruguay round. • WTO giving encourage to private goods and discouraging to public goods. • WTO is creating the environment pollution. • WTO reducing tariffs in use of natural resources which increased their exploitation. India’s Position at the WTO on Patents and Intellectual Property Rights- WTO is a platform for member countries to raise economic issues since its establishment in 1994- 95. WTO has played the role of negotiator between the developed and the developing countries. Rules related to trade, tariff, and patent, intellectual rights etc. are framed with common understanding and the entire world’s economics are governed under same set of rules framed by the WTO. India is founding member of WTO. She has always supported and favored the rights of developing countries. Most important Task of any developing country is to protect its domestic trade and industry from exploitation of industries of developed countries. India’s position has been in site of its liberalization policy, the manufacturers and producers should be protected. In recent times many firms from United States have challenged India for her protectionist stand. They alleged that India do not follow the internal Agreements of WTO on intellectual property rights i.e. TRIPS. TRIPS are an agreement on trade related aspects of intellectual property rights. It is to follow minimum standards for intellectual property regulations by member countries.

India’s Role in World Trade Organization India has continuously taken the stand that the launch of any new round of talks depends on a full concentration of views amongst the entire WTO membership on the scope and framework for such negotiations. Our more urgent task is to decide the concerns [agenda] of developing countries on implementation of the Uruguay Round agreements. We are against calls for new commitments from the developing world for achieving settlement and equity in the existing agreements. Incorporating Livelihood Clause: Ensuring food and livelihood security is critical, particularly for a large agrarian economy like India. India’s proposal in ongoing negotiations includes suggestions like allowing developing countries to maintain appropriate level of tariff bindings, stepping with their developmental needs and the preventing disbalances in international markets. Review of the Impact of WTO in the Indian Context 269 We are also seeking a separate safeguard mechanism including provision for imposition of quantitative restrictions under specified circumstances, particularly in case of a surge in imports or decline in prices; exemptions for developing countries from obligations to provide minimum market access; exemptions of all measures taken by developing countries for poverty alleviation, rural development and rural employment. Our immediate priority is that the agreements reached earlier with the developing countries should be implemented so as to correct imbalances in some of the Uruguay Round agreements. Sincere and meaningful implementation of commitments undertaken by developed countries and operationalisation of all special and differential treatment clauses for developing countries in the various agreements is made. We also strongly favor extension of higher levels of protection to the geographical indications for products like Basmati rice, Darjeeling tea, and Alphonso mangoes at par with that provided to wines and spirits under the Trade-related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) agreement.

Developed Countries’ Demand Developed countries are pushing for a comprehensive agenda like rules on investment, environment, competition policy, trade facilitation, transparency in government procurement, labour standards etc. They are pressing for incorporating non-trade issues of environment and labour standards. Using as an excuse that production of products in developing countries are not being done under proper environment and labour standards they can ban the imports of their products or impose other non-tariff restrictions. The developing countries are opposed to these non-trade issues WTO and Indian Agriculture and Farmers: Some critics of WTO have expressed the fears that Indian farmers are threatened by the WTO. There is however no adverse impact. India has bound its tariff to the extent of 100 per cent for primary agricultural products, 150 per cent for processed agricultural products and 300 per cent for edible oils. A few agricultural products had been bound historically at low levels but these bindings have been raised following the Article XXVIII negotiations held in this regard. It has also been possible to maintain without hindrance the domestic policy instruments for promotion of agriculture or for targeted supply of food grains. Domestic policy measures like the operation of minimum support price, public distribution system as well as provision of input Subsidies to agriculture have not in any way been constrained by the WTO agreement. Certain provisions in the Agreement on Agriculture (AoA) also give us flexibility to provide support for research, pest and disease control, marketing and promotion services, infrastructure development, payments for relief from natural disasters, payments under the regional assistance programmes for disadvantaged regions and payments under environmental programmes. Indian farmers now need to take advantage of the opportunity provided by the AoA, by addressing productivity issues and making their products more competitive globally. WTO and Indian Industries: Indian industry has had to face greater competition in the wake of globalization. But it has successfully completed, as can be inferred from the fact that there has been no particular surge in imports. In fact, as per the provisional data for 2000-01 our non-oil imports declined by 14 per 270 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey cent while our exports rose by over 20 per cent in the same period. A close watch is also being kept to ensure that Indian industry does not have to face unfair competition from dumped or subsidized imports of other countries. As for drug prices, safeguards are provided like compulsory licensing, price controls, and parallel imports which should help address this concern. It must also be recognized that the prices of medicines are influenced by several factors including the level of competition, size of market, purchasing capacity etc. The issue of affordable access to treatment for AIDS, which has gathered international attention in recent months, is hopefully a pointer in the right direction. The TRIPS agreement should not be allowed to hinder the efforts of developing countries to provide affordable access to medicines.

WTO and INDIA in 2015 WTO is receiving the deepest involvement of everyone, as it is affecting the major sectors of Indian economy and agriculture in particular now and more intensively in the coming years. A major concern growing with the increasing impact of WTO is, as to how the small and marginal farmers’ who dominate the Indian agriculture, depend heavily on agriculture for their livelihood, have small marketable surplus and operate under heavy constraints to be competitive in a subsidized agriculture production and trade regime, could benefit from WTO. The challenge to policy makers is how to protect Indian agriculture from the WTO threat, enhance the competitiveness of Indian farming and make farming a viable and self-sustaining enterprise to improve and ensure livelihood security of the farmers. A strategy to address this challenge shall necessarily involve re-orientation and injection of market linked dynamism in Indian agricultural R&D, strengthening of supportive institutions to serve the resource poor farmers, and changing fast with appropriate policies and trained human ware. The Deliberations of the Workshop Suggested the Following Policy Initiatives and Action Points: India needs to frame appropriate domestic policies (extensive domestic market reforms, heavy investment in building and maintaining infrastructure, etc.) to improve efficiency and competitiveness of domestic produce. It should continue to play leadership role in negotiating agreements with sound analytical basis and support of other developing countries with similar interest. A dedicated group of about 100 experts, on full time basis, should work on the WTO issues to provide analytical basis for negotiations and to help in planning appropriate strategies to strengthen Indian agriculture to face increasing trade liberalization and globalization. Export of high value products, horticulture products, processed products, marine products and rice should be promoted. India has to counter the challenges in the export of traditional items from the developing countries.

Conclusion In May last year, the WTO set up a dispute settlement panel to examine a complaint by the US against India’s domestic content requirements under the country’s solar power programme. The US is especially keen on taking a slice of this market, given US President Barack Osama’s aim of doubling US exports by 2015. India blocked the first request by the US to set up a dispute settlement panel after negotiations failed between the two countries. But under WTO rules, the trade body Review of the Impact of WTO in the Indian Context 271 was obliged to set up the panel after the US made a request for the second time. The US charged India with violating provisions in what are called the trade-related investment measures (TRIMS) by imposing local content requirements that discriminate against foreign products. The US claimed that the Indian government’s measures to impose national content provisions and deny “national” treatment have weakened benefits accruing to American companies. India spoke repeatedly against the US at WTO’s committee on subsidies and adjusting measures, stating that American subsidy schemes relating to local or domestic content requirements for its solar companies are inconsistent with its global trade obligations. New Delhi has provided a five- page questionnaire listing US programmes such as solar energy credits that are contingent upon compliance with domestic content requirements. The ruling in the solar dispute between the US and India goes against the spirit of an agreement signed early this year. In the agreement, the two sides agreed to promote clean energy and expand solar energy initiatives.

References Govt. of Maharashtra ,Organization of commerce and management 2013-14 http\\:www.yourarticlelibrary.com http\\:www.legalservicesindia.com/rule/wto http\\:www.commerce.nic.in http\\:www.wto.org/introduction http\\:www.globalsources.com/wto http\\:www.tradingeconomics.com/india/exports 33

History and Evolution of Corporate Social Responsibility

Dr. Jyoti Marwah*, Gayatri Nair**, Ajay Srivastava**, Sankalp Navrekar**, Muniza Shaikh** & Ayifa Shaikh**

Abstract

This research paper aims at highlighting the role of corporate social responsibility (CSR) in Human development in the 21st century connecting it to the past history of the evolution of human development in its various aspects- Social, Political, Economic and Ethical. CSR plays an important role in polishing and uplifting those sides of human development that are the basic essentialities for the growth and progress of mankind at various levels. By creating awareness that corporates are not money mending machines but they are more into taking care of the overall development of society, they are emphasising their social role in the public and private sectors. In the earlier history, the kings played the role of a government, a trade body as well as a corporate looking after the welfare of the people. Today, corporates have embodied all these roles into one stream. India has the richest corporate culture with its roots in ancient human history. CSR in India showed its relevance in the pre- independence days when the East India Company got actively involved in looking after the development of different sectors in incorporating its agendas and polices towards carrying its social responsibilities. Even socialists like Mahatma Gandhi worked hard towards bringing drastic change in the rural India. He should be given the due credit to coin in the idea of “Trusteeship”. In the new India, CSR is under the ethical as well as legal binding. It is for sure contributing in the rural sector as a social responsibility but this should not be limited to the large businesses only. There should be greater participation by small and medium business also. Key words: Corporate, Responsibility, Ethical, Government, History, Business

Introduction Even before the Company’s Act of 2013 (Clause135) made CSR holistic and integrated it with core business strategy, India has had a traditional and wholesome history in philanthropy, to ensure maximum happiness of maximum people. The concept of business is also ingrained in human

* Principal, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra TYBA, ICLES MJ College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra ** TYBA, ICLES MJ College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra History and Evolution of Corporate Social Responsibility 273 society. Man has traded and bartered to fulfil his needs ever since he civilized. These business horizons have grown with the passage of time as the requirements of evolving societies and regenerating civilizations expanded. From the period of Indus valley Culture to the rule of Kings and Emperors in history high priority has been given to the welfare of the people. Be it Emperor Vikramaditya or Emperor Ashoka in ancient times to rulers in medieval times and those of the Vijaynagar Empire there are outstanding instances of efforts at the establishment of Welfare State. These were initiated for building efficient administration, giving justice without delay, building a society free of cheating and corruption as the punishments meted out were severe and harsh. Though, today CSR goes beyond the magnanimous act of philanthropy as societies have become increasingly complex and demanding. The British regime in India no doubt introduced the concept of Rule of Law and well intentioned Viceroys like Lord Ripon believed in the righteous claims for the Indians in India. Not to say much but a reflection on his wise policy is seen in the repeal of the hated Gagging Act –The Vernacular Press Act, introduction of Village Panchayats, District Bodies, Taluqqa Boards, Municipalities and local bodies and the construction of roads, irrigation canals and railway lines. However, India suffered immensely due to the prioritized policies of economic exploitation of India for the benefit of Britain.

Cooperative Movement in India The concept of cooperation and cooperative activities are very old in India. Earlier the village communities collectively created permanent assets like village tanks or village forests called Vanaraiwas common. Similarly, they pooled their resources such as food grains after a harvest to share with the needed members before the next harvest or collected small contributions to lend it to the members of their village or group as chit funds in the Madras presidency, Kuries in Travancore, Bhishies in Kolhapur. The Phads of Kolhapur impounded water by putting bunds to ensure equitable distribution of water and Lanas which were partnerships of peasants to cultivate jointly and distribute evenly among themselves. The agricultural conditions and absence Of institutional arrangements in British India, to provide finance to agriculturists during the latter part of the nineteenth century had led to mounting distress and discontent among the people leading to riots. Taking cognizance of these developments in 1904 the Cooperative Societies Act was implemented and after independence the movement received a boost as it played a vital role in the various five year plans by the Planning Commission. Cooperatives are basically voluntary organisation. It has originated in the struggle of the people to find ways and means to achieve economic and social goals. The degree of success in a cooperative organisation is determined by the awareness of the members towards their rights and responsibilities. Cooperatives function as institutions with institutional values of prosperity, growth, participation, self-regulation, leadership and constant efforts at imparting knowledge, skill and understanding among its members to participate in decision making and business.

Post- Independence Developments It was with the Independence in 1947 that the efforts were institutionalized for the extension of welfare schemes and policies for the people in regions all over the country. The preamble of the Constitution of India clearly states that the objectives and goals shall ensure justice, social, economic and political liberty of thought, expression, belief and equality of status and opportunity to all. 274 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Mahatma Gandhi had already put in place his principles of trusteeship, community welfare and decentralized political and economic system under the village panchayats. Jayaprakash Narayan had underlined that the problems of democracy were complicated by India’s economic backwardness – so he had proposed development with ‘Rajniti’ and ‘Lokniti’, the former being party power and the latter being people’s power. Peoples self- restraint and self- development were the internal agencies for developing people’s power and the external agencies being the government, NGO’s and VO’s contributed in developing Rajniti for achieving the goals of development. The Constitution of India guaranteed to the people a set of Fundamental Rights which were paralleled with the Directive Principles of State Policy for the creation of a welfare state. The people were invested with the supreme power to delegate power to their representatives who in turn were to perform the scared task of upholding the constitution for the welfare of the people. Since 1952 Community Development programmes were introduced and till today Panchayati Raj institutions exist to form and play an integral role in the rural development agenda. They have been described as twin pillars of rural development and are most imperative when 80 % of the country’s population lives in rural India. The country’s achievement in socio economic sphere will to a large extent depend upon raising the standard of living of this two third population living in rural India. These institutions are based on decentralization, devolution and democratization of power along with the responsibility for planning. However, implementation of rural development and welfare programmes is achieved by people’s participation and active co-operation. However, all responsibility rested with the government and the departments thereof constituted for meeting the needs of the people.

Gram and Village Panchayats, VO’s, NGO’s It was in the 1970’s that the government recognised the role of voluntary agencies in supplementing governments efforts at development particularly in rural areas. Though NGO’s had already been formed by religious institutions and enlightened public for running hospitals and educational institutions. By way of example with international donor agencies the Ministry of Agriculture had formed an independent organisation called ‘Freedom from Hunger Campaign’ to support VO’s in rural development. Gradually this organisation was renamed and reorganised several times to become the ‘Council for Advancement of People’s Action and Rural technology’—CAPART. Voluntary Organisations, NGO’s, Community Based Organisations work with The Village Level Workers (VLW) and can persuade the people to take part in the various development schemes for their own good. They connect with the Gram Panchayat and the Block Development Officers to initiate and promote implementation of programmes for the upliftment of hitherto neglected communities by improving literacy, health, sanitation, housing, transport and communication and thus help to bring economic development and social change. The role of NGO’s in building a more humane society cannot be overlooked as they become an important link between the organisation and the people in different parts and regions of the country.

CBO’s and Civil Society Organisations Civil society and civil society organisations have a significant role in the development in general and the development of marginalised sections of the society in particular. They are non- profit organisations and closer to local communities, who can raise their voice for the needs of these History and Evolution of Corporate Social Responsibility 275 communities. Their role has become increasingly acceptable as they benefit the poorest of the poor. Development agencies have started implementing rural development programmes in partnership with Community Based Organisations and its smaller unit the Self Help Group. CBOs are a group of individuals in a self- defined community with indigenous identity, who have joined together for a common cause or interest. They consist of people living near one another in a given rural or urban neighbourhood. Studies by Pradhan (1995) indicate that CBOs are the most effective and efficient channels for delivery of development programmes in rural areas as compared to bureaucratic ones. Programmes in partnership with CBOs are more transparent, participatory, cost saving and more efficient. In every society inequality and exclusion are common features in other words opportunities are not available equally for all sections of the people. These inequalities and exclusion become a stumbling block for the advancement of the individual as well as the community and the nation at large. The Five Year Plans laid greater emphasis on rural development to usher in economic, social and cultural enhancement. This impacted productivity, spread of education, improvement in transport and communication and a general rise in standards of living. CBOs have performed a characteristic role in overcoming this inequality and exclusion of the marginalised sections.

Understanding Development Development is an extremely complex phenomenon and an even more complex process as its meaning and emerging impact on society have been undergoing a change. It has multiple disciplinary perspectives, differing ideological approaches and varying usages by development agencies both at international and national level. However, development denotes progress which is brought about by planned and programmed efforts for an orderly transformation of a society in a desired direction. This has resulted in building an intricate network of methodology to reach out to the people through large number of organisations both public and private or sometimes by partnership between the two. For several decades, development was understood essentially as an economic activity and the modernization theories of the 1950’s and 1960’s believed it to be synonymous with per capita growth, industrialisation and other economic indicators. However, in 1962 the UN Economic and Social Council argued that ‘development is growth and change’ and change in turn is social, cultural, technological and educational hence it is both quantitative and qualitative. The right to development (RTD) has been an aspect of international debate on human rights for thirty years but there has been a conspicuous neglect of the basic principles in the development practice. A small beginning was made when United Nations adopted the eight Millennium Development Goals in 2000 to reduce poverty, strengthen social activism, build gender equity and usher environment stability for the right based development.

Social Development Social development refers to qualitative changes in structure and functioning of the society to make it a better place to live in, for all sections of the society. Development in all historical periods has been an upward ascending movement with greater productivity, enhanced efficiency, increased complexity, creativity, mastery and accomplishment. Social development means fair and equitable development and by nature development is social as it embodies a set of social values. It brings benefits across communities, social groups and organisations. Korten and Alfonso (1981) argue 276 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey that ‘all development is social development’. Abel- Smith (1967:16) point out that all ends are social while economic growth and development is only one of the means of achieving them. The basic principles of development are: 1) People are the reason for development 2) People are the means of development 3) Increasing specialisation and interdependence has led to a new relationship in the world. 4) Governments definitely play a vital role in shaping the social policy for an enabling environment 5) Government cannot solely fulfil the responsibility and so have to partner the market and the society for the required sustainable development.

Human Development From social development has emerged the concept of Human Development making it imperative to invest in people so that they can achieve their full potential. They are not to be treated merely as a human resource and a means for better economic efficiency but as the ultimate end of the development process. Thus the human development paradigm shifted from the earlier quantitative to qualitative improvement of human life making equity, sustainability, productivity and empowerment the essential components of this process. Noble Laureate Amartya Sen adhering to this school of thought has defined development as a ‘process of enlarging peoples’ choices’ by enhancing their capabilities. The most important and critical being the opportunity to live a long and healthy life, to be educated and to have access to resources for improved standards of living. The concept of human development received greater recognition when United Nations Development Programme adopted HDI indices to evaluate the progress of a nation in 1991. HDI for India ranks the country at 134 out of 182 countries indicating that much needs to be done to invest and improve the Human Resource of the country.

CSR for Sustainable Human Development The need for sustainable human development is development that lasts forever. The general principles outlined by the World Commission on Environment and Development are that the, ‘Current generations should meet their needs without compromising the ability of the future generations to meet their own needs.’ Reconciling these two aspirations is at the heart of Sustainable Development that make environment, social and economic demands of the people the three pillars of sustainability. The institutional dimensions of sustainable development is concerned with the participation of all community members in the decision making process through information that directly affects their lives. CSR has become one effective tool that synergises the efforts of corporates and the social sector agencies towards sustainable growth and development of societal objectives at large. CSR today holds a very important place in the development scenarios companies have shown great concern for the immediate community and their stakeholders. It can be rightly said that the fate of the society lies in the hands of the corporates. CSR is also referred to as corporate citizenship or corporate social and environmental responsibility. The concept of CSR originated in 1950s in USA and since then it has come into prominence in History and Evolution of Corporate Social Responsibility 277 public debates in the 1960s and 1970s. During 1980 to 2000 corporates generally recognised their responsibility to society and development weighing it against the demand of being competitive in a rapidly changing global economy. Since then CSR has become a philosophy or a vision about its relativity between business and society — a caring capitalism in contrast to financial capitalism. Thus it is business with a proactive façade to promote public interest by encouraging and engaging with community growth and development. This voluntarily eliminates that harm the public or eludes legality. The three perspectives of CSR as outlined by Samuel and Saari (2007) are business perspective, eco –socio perspective and rights based perspective discharging social responsibility through traditional corporate philanthropy, corporate social responsibility and ethical business. The diagram below gives the process and evolution of CSR as an activity for community wellbeing Thus ideally CSR is both ethical and philosophical particularly in the context of India where there is a wide gap between sections of people with regards to income, standards and socio-economic disparities. As discussed earlier CSR is not new to India it has been an integral part of a sacred relation and understanding between the rulers and the ruled. Today a large number of companies are discharging their social responsibility with some satisfaction though the need is much greater. The private sector is the engine of growth as it benefits the poor by providing economic opportunities. The Indian corporates have contributed to the rural sector as their social responsibility but this should not be limited to the large corporations. There should be greater participation by small and medium business also. CSR has broadened implications as there is a reduced dependence on the government for social change. Further, government programmes are many times riddled with political manipulation, corruption, communal overtones and infighting of which the corporate world is free of. Corporate Activism is visible in health care, education, housing, sanitation, environment conservation, potable water facilities etc. by some leading firms in India. To mention a few, they are Infosys, Wipro, Tata, TVS, Dr. Reddy’s Labs, BPCL, Indian Oil, ITC and multinationals like Yoyota and more. They are supporting hundreds of NGOs and Local units in their efforts for CSR. According to Michael Walton from Kennedy School of Government Harvard University there has begun a debate on the parallels and comparison between the enormous private wealth in India today, due to corporate activity which however remains to be unevenly distributed and the private wealth of the ‘gilded age’ of America. During this period private wealth had increased manifold in the nineteenth and early twentieth century America creating inequalities in the society which in turn had led to the Progressive Movement. This movement was focused on building a more equitable society with increased demands for welfare concerns. Further it is also time for India to learn from the ‘Occupy Wall street’ movement that brought thousands of people in America against the capitalism of Multinational corporates, being held responsible for increased inequalities in society. Hence CSR must reduce the feeling of deprivation and make it more realistic and extensive to reach out to all.

References Chanda, R., & Gupta P., Globalization of Legal Services and Regulatory Reforms, Sage Publications, 2014 Wang, L., A Comparative Study on the Role of Universities in Transformation of Knowledge and Skills in Rural Areas, Sage China Studies, 2014 278 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Manchanda, R., Sage Series in Human rights of Peace Processes, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2014 Mishra, V., Combating Human Trafficking, Sage Publications, 2014 National Institute of Rural Development, Livelihoods and Resources, Hyderabad, 2010 National Institute of Rural Development, Policies and Programmes for Rural Development, Hyderabad, 2010 National Institute of Rural Development, Rural Society and Sustainable Development, Hyderabad, 2010 Singh, L., Joseph K.J., Johnson D.K., Technology, Innovations and Economic Development, Sage Publications, 2014 Journals Seth, V.K., Emerging Economic Studies, International Management Institute, New Delhi and Sage Clancy, J., et al. Gender, Technology and Development, Asian Institute of Technology Thailand and Sage Kohli, H.S., Global Journal of Emerging Market Economies, Emerging Markets Forum Washington DC and Sage Krishna, V.V., Science, Technology and Society, Promotion of Science and Technology Studies and Sage Section 6 Magna Carta Spurring Mathematical Abilities

Mathematical Analysis of the Impact of Industrialization on Environmental Pollution

Dr. Shikha Gaur*

Abstract

It is evident that pollution from various sources particularly from industries has negative impact on environment, irreversible in nature, cause extinction of species, resulting in loss of unique genetic resources of great use. This is a transition period for many developing economies like India, so there is a strong need to strike a balance between industrial development and physical environment so as to reduce the intensity of pollution. In this paper an attempt has been made to analyse the ill effects of industrialisation on the environmental pollution. The central theme of this paper is to highlight the analysis of effect of industrial pollution on the quality and status of life and scientific majors taken. The prior step in any industry plan is to set right location for industry. In this paper, a wavelet based scheme is used to plan how to site an industry which is a major source of air pollution or water pollution, so that it will not affect the nearby population. Keywords: Industry, Environment, Pollution and Wavelets.

Introduction Industrialization is a process that leads to the growth of industry and economic development, and that leads to urban- specific changes in specialization and human behaviours. Due to uncontrolled urbanization in India, environmental degradation has been occurring very rapidly and causing many problems like shortages of housing, worsening water quality, excessive air pollution, noise, dust and heat, and the problems of disposal of solid wastes and hazardous wastes. Survey responses from branch plant start-ups were examined to determine characteristics of places selected for the plant location. Findings indicate that survey responses and community characteristics were correlated only for easily observed criteria (e.g., distance to airport or interstate highway) and location factors of critical importance to the firm (e.g., availability of skilled labour for high-tech firms). While taking up developmental activities, the assimilative capacities of the

* Department of Mathematics, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 282 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey environmental components i.e., air, water and land to various pollution should also be considered. Also, lack of proper land use control is resulting in poor land use compatibility. The haphazard and uncontrolled developmental activities leading to overuse, congestion, incompatible land use and creating high risk environment to the city residents in the form of deterioration of the natural and socio-economic living conditions which specifically includes overcrowding, congestion, lack of sufficient water supply, unhygienic living conditions, air and noise pollution. However, in large urban accumulation, the problems cannot merely be solved by pollution control measures such as control of pollution at source, providing sewage treatment facilities etc. The environmental aspects are not usually considered while preparing master plans or budget plans to produce well co-ordinated and balanced developmental plans right at the planning stage itself. The best use of the land needs to be assessed in terms of not only the economic aspects but also the environmental aspects. In order to know the impact of the effluent release on the environment, modelling is an essential task. The modelling referred to here as categorized into environmental modelling. With a reference to this, atmospheric dispersion modelling is our present issue. Basic aim in this issue is to compute the concentration of a pollutant at any spatial grid/mesh point and at any instant of time within a domain of interest. Solving this problem in a computationally efficient way, the computational meshes adapt dynamically in time to reflect local changes in the solution. Though several methodologies exist with various adaptive meshing techniques, presently we are interested on one such class of methods, named as “Wavelet Method”. The justification for selecting wavelet method is that it takes advantage of the fact that functions, with localized regions of sharp transition, are well compressed using wavelet decomposition. The overall objective of the study has been to incorporate environmental considerations into industrial planning for improving the environmental quality. The specific objectives of the study are: to map the characteristics and environmental profile of urban area and to identify the environmental pollution hot spots; prepare an environmental management plan that includes rehabilitation and mitigation measures; and to recommend guidelines for environmentally compatible land use planning. This study is concern about air pollution due to gases fuels coming from industries. Impacts of Industrialization on Various Components of Environment Probably most of the major environmental problems of the next century will result from the continuation and sharpening of existing problems. The problems are not necessarily noticed in many countries or then nothing is done even the situation has been detected. The most emerging issues are climate changes, freshwater scarcity, deforestation, and fresh water pollution and population growth. These problems are very complex and their interactions are hard to define. It is very important to examine problems through the social-economic-cultural system. Even the interconnections between environmental problems are now better known, we still lack exact information on how the issues are linked, on what degree they interact and what are the most effective measures. One problem is to integrate land- and water use planning to provide food and water security (UNEP 1999). Survey responses from branch plant start-ups were examined to determine characteristics of places selected for the plant location. Findings indicate that survey responses and community characteristics were correlated only for easily observed criteria (e.g., distance to airport or interstate highway) and location factors of critical importance to the firm (e.g., availability of skilled labour Mathematical Analysis of the Impact of Industrialization on Environmental Pollution 283 for high-tech firms). While taking up developmental activities, the assimilative capacities of the environmental components i.e., air, water and land to various pollution should also be considered. Also, lack of proper land use control is resulting in poor land use compatibility. The haphazard and uncontrolled developmental activities leading to overuse, congestion, incompatible land use and creating high risk environment to the city residents in the form of deterioration of the natural and socio-economic living conditions which specifically includes overcrowding, congestion, lack of sufficient water supply, unhygienic living conditions, air and noise pollution. However, in large urban accumulation, the problems cannot merely be solved by pollution control measures such as control of pollution at source, providing sewage treatment facilities etc. The environmental aspects are not usually considered while preparing master plans or budget plans to produce well co-ordinated and balanced developmental plans right at the planning stage itself. The best use of the land needs to be assessed in terms of not only the economic aspects but also the environmental aspects. There is a need to study the necessity of structural changes in the cities and to introduce planning approaches that can help in achieving environmentally compatible. The wavelet technology proved to be right tool to map and analyze the spatial information. The overall objective of the study has been to incorporate environmental considerations into urban planning and prepare an Environmental Management Plan for improving the environmental quality. The specific objectives of the study are: to map the characteristics and environmental profile of urban area and to identify the environmental pollution hot spots; prepare an environmental management plan that includes rehabilitation and mitigation measures; and to recommend guidelines for environmentally compatible land use planning. This study is concern about air pollution due to gases fuels coming from industries.

Impacts on the Atmosphere and Climate 1. The Creation of Heat Island Materials like concrete, asphalt, bricks etc absorb and reflect energy differently than vegetation and soil. Cities remain warm in the night when the countryside has already cooled. 2. Changes in Air Quality Human activities release a wide range of emissions into the environment including carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, ozone, sulfur oxides, nitrogen oxides, lead, and many other pollutants. 3. Changes in Patterns of Precipitation Cities often receive more rain than the surrounding countryside since dust can provoke the condensation of water vapour into rain droplets.

Figure 1 Impact of Industry on environment 284 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey 4. Pollution Pollutants are often dispersed across cities or concentrated in industrial areas or waste sites. Lead- based paint used on roads and highways and on buildings is one such example of a widely dispersed pollutant that found its way into soil. Impacts on the Hydrosphere and Water Resources • Flow of Water into Streams Natural vegetation and undisturbed soil are replaced with concrete, asphalt, brick, and other impermeable surfaces. This means that, when it rains, water is less likely to be absorbed into the ground and, instead, flows directly into river channels. • Flow of Water through Streams Higher, faster peak flows change streams channels that have evolved over centuries under natural conditions. Flooding can be a major problem as cities grow and stream channels attempt to keep up with these changes. • Degraded Water Quality The water quality has degraded with time due to industrialization that ultimately leads to increase sedimentation there by also increasing the pollutant in run-off.

Research Methodology This study considers a two-dimensional model of pollutant concentration in atmosphere which is governed by advection-dispersion equation;

∂ C ∂ C ∂ C ∂ 2 C ∂ 2 C = − u − u + D + D , ∂ t x ∂ x y ∂ y x ∂ x 2 y ∂ y 2 where C(x,y,t) (kg/l ) denotes the solute concentration; x (m) and y (m) represent the special coordinates in the longitudinal and transverse direction; t (day) denotes time; u x and u y (m/ day) are average velocities in the longitudinal and transverse direction, respectively; Dx and Dy are dispersion coefficients in longitudinal and transverse directions, respectively. Wavelets offer distinct advantages in the solution of parabolic PDEs arising from fluid dynamics especially when the solution exhibits a sharp gradient or singularities in certain regions of domain. In these situations the “multiscale” wavelet based finite element method performs better as compared with classical FEM and other “single scale” methods. Here the term multiscale means that the method is capable of resolving solution features in multiple resolutions without remeshing and recomputing the solution in the whole domain. The finest scale finite element solution space is projected onto the scaling and wavelet spaces resulting in the decomposition of high- and low-scale components. Repetition of such a projection results in multi-scale decomposition of the fine scale solution. In the proposed wavelet projection method, the fine scale solution can be obtained by any other numerical method also. Subsequently the properties of the wavelet functions are exploited to eliminate the nodes from the smooth region where the wavelet coefficients will not exceed a preset tolerance. This wavelet-based multi-scale transformation hierarchically filters out the less significant part of the solution, and thus provides an effective framework for the selection of significant part of the solution. In this process, the ‘big’ coefficient matrix at the finest level will be calculated once for complete domain whereas the ‘small’ adaptively compressed coefficient matrix for a priory known localized dynamic zone of Mathematical Analysis of the Impact of Industrialization on Environmental Pollution 285 high gradient, which will be considerably less expensive to solve, will be used for the solution in every step of the solution. Then with help of the concentration calculated distance from the fixed location to the industry can be calculated on the basis of which siting of industry can be made. • Air Pollution The abandoned and closed industrial sites within the city area are the only available free space in the heart of the built-up city area. Renovating and commissioning of these units may again adversely affect the urban environment. In view of the future expansion of city in these directions, the viability of industrial growth has to be looked into. Mixed type of land use can be seen in the areas adjoining the industrial estate. These areas are inhabited by slums/rural settlements, which are the target group in case of any industrial hazard as well as steady pollution from the industries. Though there are many industrial sources involved in burning of fossil fuel, existence of gaseous pollutants namely SO2, NOx are generally within prescribed limits. The concentration of lead was found exceeding the standards at some of the busy road intersections in the city. Specific gaseous emissions like ammonia from fertiliser industry, mercaptants from IOCL bottling and storage facilities are prominent along the lea ward wind direction of those units.

Figure 2. Graphical Representation of Physics of the Problem. Particulate matter, sulphur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, carbon monoxide, lead and ammonia gas are the major air pollutants generated. The sources of pollutants in the city through domestic & commercial sources, vehicular traffic, industrial sources and natural sources

Study of Emissions from Fuels

Emissions Sources Emissions Rate Types of Fuel PM SO2 NOx CO Coal 350 532.00 104 3132 Kerosene 213 357.00 163 21 LPG 38 0.04 164 40 Wood & related fuel 205 15.00 150 30 286 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • Forecasting for Industrialization The recommendations are mainly oriented towards environmentally related factors. The recommendations of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) deal in two parts, one is the structural plan related and the other is various practices/options for reducing the environmental problems. • City Structure and City Development Concept Urban areas need a Master Plan incorporating environmental considerations into each of the development sectors (environment, transport, housing, industry etc.). The objectives of environmental compatible development must be reflected in the Master Plan. Siting of industries should not be permitted in the residential areas. For siting of industries or processes that are essential in or close proximity of residential areas, such as repair shops, grinders etc. areas/land use should be designated in the Master Plan. No industry or process not complying with the some conditions should be permitted in the residential areas • Industrial Emission Control The type of industries and number of industries which the city can accommodate are to be decided based on the present level of pollution, the carrying capacity of the area and landuses around these areas. The new industrial areas should be earmarked only after careful environmental assessment, ensuring compatibility of the designated areas with the surround land uses. The industries that may not be permitted and the guidelines for siting of industries are depends upon several factors, and one of them that is related to environment is discussed in this paper. Fig. 1. shows the physics of the problem considered. This shows that how the industrial area affects the residential areas through harmful gases coming from it. If the gases coming from it have concentration more than a fixed threshold then this can be harmful for human being due to this in that area no residential area should be there. Therefore, our main objective is to calculate concentration of gases coming out from industries and then a fix threshold concentration is observed from this which is not harmful. And than distance from that location can be calculated using inverse method. This distance will decide where an industry can be sited. Result and Discussion In this paper, advection-dispersion equations which govern the atmospheric problem is solved (Shikha et al. (2011 and 2012)) in Fig. 3. concentration at fixed distance is given and in Fig. 4 corresponding wavelets coefficients are given with the help a this adaptive calculation is done. As it is already discussed that if the concentration crosses a threshold value then we can say that the particular gases fuels are harmful. With help of this concentration value distance from that particular position can be calculated using inverse method. Therefore, with this distance calculation we can plan that in which area an industry can be settled so that it will not harm the population. Mathematical Analysis of the Impact of Industrialization on Environmental Pollution 287

Figure 3. Solution of the Linear Advection-Dispersion Equation Using Method I.

Figure 4. Wavelet Coefficients

Figure 5 Proposed Method for 2D Ddvection-Dispersion Equation for Dx=0, Dy=0, ux=50, uy=0. Conclusions In this paper it is tried to provide a general analysis of integrate input and output and environmental issues from the viewpoint of planning for pollution decline industries. We analyzed the process of major industries and find out that these industries create air pollution, water pollution, noise pollution etc. This is the social cost because these industries generate various negative externalities. Rapid industrialization has deteriorated the environment and created various problems related to health. We cannot stop this but we can try to reduce the environmental degradation with efforts and the polices mentioned above in this paper. 288 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey References O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor, (2000), Finite Element Method Volume 3: Fluid Dynamics, Fifth ed. Butterworth- Heinemann Behradmehr N, (2010), Portfolio Allocation Using Wavelet Transform, Middle Eastern Finance and Economics, 7 K. Sandeep, Gaur S, D. Dutta, H.S. Kushwaha, Wavelet based schemes for linear advection–dispersion equation. Appl. Math. Comput., 218, 3786-3798 (2011). Gaur S, L.P. Singh, Vivek Singh and P. K. Singh (2012), Wavelet based multiscale scheme for two-dimensional advection– dispersion equation, applied mathematical modeling http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.apm.2012.07.052. E.J. Stollnitz, T.D. Derose and D.H. Salesin, (1996), Wavelets for Computer Graphics, Morgan Kaufmann Pub. Inc., California 209-213 Ramsey, J. B. (1999), The contribution of wavelets to the analysis of economic and financial data, Philosophical Transactions, Mathematical, Physical and Engineering Sciences, 357, Royal Society of London Philosophical Transactions Series A Donoho, D. L. (1995), Denoising via soft thresholding. IEEE transactions on Information Theory, 41, 613-627 Gencay, R., F. Selcuk and B. Whitcher ,An Introduction to Wavelets and Other Filtering Methods in Finance and Economics. Academic Press (2002). Census of India, Population Projections for India and States 2001, Report of the Technical Group on Population Projections Constituted by the National Commission on Population(2001). Mohan R. (1996), Urbanisation in India: Patterns and Emerging Policy Issues in The Urban Transformation of the Developing World. Josef Gugler (Ed.). Oxford University Press, Oxford MoRTH. Motor Transport Statistics of India. Transport Research Wing, Ministry of Road Transport and Highways,Government of India, New Delhi , (2000). Sunil Kumar , J.K. Bhattacharyya, A.N. Vaidya, Tapan Chakrabarti, Sukumar Devotta, A.B. Akolkar (2009), Assessment of the status of municipal solid waste management in metro cities, state capitals, class I cities, and class II towns in India: An insight , Waste Management 29 883–895. United Nations Environment Programme, 1999 Annual Evaluation Report, Evaluation and Oversight unit, August (1999). World Resources, A guide to the global environment, The urban environment, (1996- 97). 35

Creative Methods of Teaching Mathematics

Kanchan Ukirde*

Abstract

Modern teaching in maths methodology offers various possibilities for solving the problem of involving students in independent and research work; it develops their problem solving skills and develops their creative thinking processes and skills. One of these possibilities is in the area of scientific framework. The foundation of mathematical modelling is the principle of mathematics and mathematical research methods. The paper describes creative methodology in various segments of mathematics teaching beginning with the nature of problem to mathematical tasks as an important method in shaping the system of basic mathematical knowledge, abilities and habits in students. Teaching of mathematics is not only concerned with the computational knowledge how of the subject but is also concerned with the selection of the mathematical content and communication leading to its understanding and application. In the end, some drawbacks in mathematical teaching are mentioned which occur due to the inappropriate treatment of subject in the teaching process. Keywords: Mathematics, Teaching Mathematics, Scientific Approach, Science Principle Mathematical Concept, Theorem, Problem – Task.

Introduction Mathematics is an important subject and occupying a central position since the Ancient period still it has not been the interest of many students. Mathematics is highly abstract and it is concerned with ideas rather than objects; with the manipulation of symbols rather than the manipulation of object. It is a closely-knit structure in which ideas are interrelated. Mathematical concepts are hierarchical and interconnected, much like a house of cards. Unless lower-level concepts are mastered, higher-level concepts cannot be understood. Student’s who discover some of the structures of mathematics, are often impressed by its beauty. They note the lack of contradiction, and they see how a new technique can be derived from one that has already been learned. Teaching of mathematics is not only concerned with the computational know how of the subject but is also concerned with the selection of the mathematical content and communication leading to its

* KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra 290 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey understanding and application. The teaching and learning of mathematics is a complex activity and many factors determine the success of this activity. The nature and quality of instructional material, the presentation of content, the pedagogic skills of the teacher, the learning environment, the motivation of the students are all important and must be kept in view in any effort to ensure quality in teaching-learning of mathematics. In this paper the presenter has made an effort to discuss innovations and innovative practices in teaching mathematics, under teaching methods, strategies and pedagogic resources. The process of innovation is generally described as consisting of three essential steps, starting with the conception of an idea, which is then proposed and is finally adopted. Though many ideas have been conceived to bring about change in the teaching of mathematics, it is yet to be proposed and adopted. So, the innovations discussed may not be new in terms of the idea but is new in terms of practice.

Aims of Teaching Mathematics Aims of teaching mathematics are to be framed in the light of the educational values of the subject. Value is the spring-board of aim. We know that mathematics has wide applications in our daily life. It has great cultural and disciplinary values. Thus we may mention the aims of teaching mathematics as under: For solving mathematical problems of daily life, we have to select the content and methods of teaching so that the students are able to make use of their learning of mathematics in daily life. 1. To enable the students to understand the contribution of mathematics to the development of culture and civilization. 2. To develop thinking and reasoning power of the students. 3. To prepare a sound foundation needed for various vocations. Mathematics is needed in various professions such as those of engineers, bankers, scientists, accountants, statisticians etc. 4. To prepare the child for further learning in mathematics and the related fields. School mathematics should also aim at preparing him for higher learning in mathematics. 5. To develop in the child desirable habits and attitudes like habit of hard work, self-reliance, concentration and discovery. 6. To give the child an insight into the relationship of different topics and branches of the subject. 7. To enable the child to understand popular literature. He should be so prepared that he finds no handicap in understanding mathematical terms and concepts used in various journals, magazines, newspapers etc. 8. To teach the child the art of economic and creative living. 9. To develop in the child rational and scientific attitude towards life. Aims of teaching mathematics are genially scope whereas objectives of the subject are specific goals leading ultimately to the general aims of the subject. The objectives of teaching mathematics in school can be described as under: Creative Methods of Teaching Mathematics 291 A. Knowledge Objectives:Through mathematics, a pupil acquires the knowledge of the following: (i) He learns mathematical language, for example, mathematical symbols, formulae figures, diagrams, definitions etc. (ii) He understands and uses mathematical concepts like concept of area, volume, number, direction etc. (iii) He learns the fundamental mathematical ideas, processes, rules and relationships. (iv) He understands the historical background of various topics and contribution of mathematicians. (v) He understands the significance and use of the units of measurement. B. Skill Objectives Mathematics develops the following skills: (i) The child learns to express thoughts clearly and accurately. (ii) He learns to perform calculations orally. (iii) He develops the ability to organize and interpret the given data (iv) He learns to reach accurate conclusions by accurate and logic reasoning. (v) He learns to analyze problems and discover fundamental relationships. (vi) He develops the ability to use mathematical apparatuses and tools skillfully. C. Appreciation Objectives The child learns to appreciate: (i) The contribution of mathematics to the development of various subjects and occupations. (ii) The role played by mathematics in modern life. (iii) The mathematical type of thought which serves as model for scientific thinking in other fields. (iv) The cultural value of mathematics. D. Attitude Objectives: Mathematics helps in the development of following attitudes: (i) The child develops the attitude of systematically pursuing a task to completion. (ii) He develops heuristic attitude. He tries to make independent discoveries. He develops the habit of logical reasoning. (iv) He is brief and precise in expressing statements and results, (v) He develops the habit of verification. (vi) He develops power concentration and independent thinking.

Methodology The creative method of teaching mathematics is critically examined, evaluated and some modifications in the delivery of knowledge are suggested. As such, the strengths and weaknesses of each teaching methodology are identified. 292 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Innovations in Teaching Mathematics Innovations in teaching of mathematics can be diversified in terms of Methods, Pedagogic Resources and used in teaching-learning process. 1. Methods: Method is a style of the presentation of content in classroom. The following are the innovative methods that can be used to make teaching-learning process of Mathematics effective. Inductive-Deductive Method: It is a combination of inductive and deductive method. Inductive method is to move from specific examples to generalization and deductive method is to move from generalization to specific examples. In classroom usually the instructions directly start with the abstract concepts and are being taught in a way that does not bring understanding on the part of majority of the students. Formulas, theorems, examples, results are derived, proved and used. But teacher needs to start with specific examples and concrete things and then move to generalizations and abstract things. Then teacher again needs to show how generalization can be derived and it holds true through specific examples. This method will help students for better understanding; students don’t have to cram the things and will have long lasting effect.

Example: Pythagoras Theorem – In a right-angle ABC right angled at B,

(Considering right angle triangles of different measurement leading to generalization and then establishing it through the theoretical proof).

Problem-Solving Method This method aims at presenting the knowledge to be learnt in the form of a problem. It begins with a problematic situation and consists of continuous meaningful well-integrated activity. Choose a problem that uses the knowledge that students already have i.e. you as a teacher should be able to give them the problem and engage them without spending time in going over the things that you think they should know. After students have struggled with the problem to get solution, have them share their solutions. This method will help them in developing divergent thinking. Example: Put a problem of finding the amount of water in a given container instead of deploy- Way Method .This method consists of the activities that include a sort of fun or play and give joy to the students. Students don’t realize that they are learning but in a way they are gaining knowledge through participating in different activities. This method helps to develop interest in mathematics, motivates students to learn more and reduces the abstract nature of the subject to some extent. Example: Mathematical games and puzzles. Laboratory Method: Laboratory method is based on the principles of “learning by doing” and “learning by observation” and proceeding from concrete to abstract. Students do not just listen to the information given but do something practically also. Principles have to be discovered, generalized and established by the students in this method. Students learn through hands on experience. This method leads the student to discover mathematical facts. After discovering something by its own efforts, the student starts taking pride in his achievement, it gives him happiness, mental satisfaction and encourages him towards further achievement. Example: Making and observing models, paper folding, paper cutting, and construction work in geometry. Creative Methods of Teaching Mathematics 293 2. Pedagogic Resources: Pedagogic resources are the resources that a teacher may integrate in a method for the transaction of a particular content and draw upon to advance the students’ learning. Teaching Aids: Teaching aids are the materials used for effective teaching and enhancing the learning of students. It can be anything ready-made or made by the teacher or made by students. Different teaching aids should be used in teaching mathematics like Charts, Manipulative, Programmed Learning Material (PLM), computers and television. Charts: It can be used to display formulae, symbols, mathematical and geometrical figures. Charts can be used for making students familiar to the symbols and for memorization of basic formulae. Even it can be used to bring to the students two-dimension geometry and the graphical representation in a better way. Manipulative: They are objects or materials that involve mathematics concepts, appealing to several senses that can be touched and moved around by the students (not demonstrations of materials by the teacher). Each student needs material to manipulate independently. With students actively involved in manipulating materials, interest in mathematics will be aroused. Canny (1984) has shown that mathematics instruction and students’ mathematics understanding will be more effective if manipulative materials are used. Models can be used to make things concrete like three dimension figures in geometry. Programmed Learning Material (PLM) – It is a self-learning material in which learner can proceed at his own pace. It has the characteristics of all sequential steps, learner’s response, self-pacing, immediate feedback, reinforcement and self-evaluation. It is helpful in acquisition of concepts like fractions, number systems, etc. and can be used as a remedy for slow learners for a specific content. Computers and Television: Computer can be used for multimedia presentation for the concepts that requires visualization and imagination. Computer can also be used for providing Computer Assisted Instruction (CAI), it is similar to PLM i.e. it is a computerized PLM. Television can be used to show some good mathematics education show. Activities here include all such work where in students play an active role, has to interact with different resources and generate knowledge. It includes Quiz competition, Projects, Role play, Seminars, Discussion, Mathematics club, Assignment, Field trips, etc. In any curriculum, content and presentation of content are the two most important and inseparable components. It is difficult to say anything definitely about which method and pedagogic resource is going to be most effective for presentation of a particular type of content. Selection of method and pedagogic resource depends on many factors like type of content, objectives to be achieved, level of the students, entry behaviour, and availability of resources. Also acceptance of innovative methods and positive attitude of teachers towards it is an important factor for the selection of method and pedagogic resource. The things included under innovations are existing in books, also there are researches which show that some innovations are carried out in the classroom and learning process but their practical usage and implementation in classroom is not seen to the expected level. Guidelines for a Teacher in Incorporating Innovations in Teaching Mathematics • For effective transaction of the curriculum and achievement of curricular objectives appropriate method and pedagogic resources should be used in providing learning experiences to the students. 294 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

• A number of factors need to be considered while making use of a particular method and pedagogic resource: learners’ capabilities, availability of resources, entry behaviour, school environment, objectives to be achieved, the nature of content and the teacher’s own preparation and mastery. • Decide on and plan in advance the innovative idea that the teacher would be incorporating to transact a particular concept so that loss of instructional time is prevented or minimized. • The immediate environment of the learner both natural and human should be used when and where possible for making learning concrete and meaningful. • Involve the students in the process of learning by taking them beyond the process of listening to that of thinking, reasoning and doing. • In order to promote self-study skills use of library and resource centre needs to be encouraged. • Receiving regular feedback for teaching and learning should be an inbuilt component of teaching-learning process. Continuous and comprehensive evaluation has to be ensured as it plays an important role for the required modification in teaching-learning process. • Mathematics-teachers’ organizations at different levels should be formed where sharing of ideas and experiences, developing resources in a collaborative manner and the mechanisms that enable teachers to carry out innovations is being discussed. Mathematics-teachers’ organizations can be instrumental in establishing a climate of confidence in carrying out innovations and a positive attitude to new approaches in teaching mathematics. • Properly instruct and guide the students for carrying out different activities and precautionary measures should be taken so that students are not misguided. • Study mathematical journals and modern books of professional interest. Any facilities of in- service training should be availed of for improving teaching of mathematics. The teacher can always ask himself two questions: 1) Is there some new way in which I can present this material in order to make it more meaningful and more interesting?’ 2) What activities, demonstrations, teaching aids, etc. would enrich the classroom presentation and direct attention of students to the important elements?’ arouse interest and enthusiasm in the class, he will be able to use these ideas again the following year, since those will be new and fascinating to a different class. But teacher should keep in mind that as time passes, the world undergoes a change, the environment surrounding students changes and their needs also changes, so one has to continuously go on modifying and discovering new ways of teaching which proves him a better teacher.

Conclusion The researchers believe that the core objective of teaching is passing on the information or knowledge to the minds of the students. Any method using computers or modifying the existing conventional chalk-talk method are innovative if they ultimately serve the attainment of core objective of teaching. The analysis reveals some of the suggestions that the teaching community can practice in the classrooms. Ultimately the teaching people are satisfied when he could reach the students community with his ideas and views. So, teaching depends upon successful mode of Creative Methods of Teaching Mathematics 295 communication and Innovation though we mean the changes that we propose to be included in our medium of communication or even inclusion of some other elements in communicating information.Teaching should be interactive.

References Bhatia, K. Identification and Remedy of Difficulties in Learning Fractions with Programmed Instructional Material(1992). Copeland, R. W. How Children Learn Mathematics: Teaching Implications of Piaget’s Research (1970). Ducharme, R. E. & Ducharme, M. K., Using Teacher Reflective Practice to Evaluate Professional Development in Maths and Science, Toronto: The Macmillan Company. (1999). Dutta, A, Learning Disability in the Reasoning Power of the Students in Geometry, Journal of Teacher Education. 50 (1). 42, (1990). In J. P. Sharma (Ed.), An Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of Kalyani. Fifth Survey of Educational Research. New Delhi: NCERT. Edge, D. & Freedman, E. Math Teacher’s Ten Commandments. Gardner, K. L., Glenn, J. A. & Renton, A. I. G. Children Using Mathematics: A Report of the Mathematics Section of the Association of Teachers in Colleges and Departments of Education(1973). Indian Educational Review, 27(3). 102-106. Canny, M. E. (1984) The Relationship of Manipulative Materials to Achievement in Three Areas of Fourth-Grade Mathematics: Computation, Concept Development and Problem Solving. Dissertation-Abstracts International, 45 A. 775-776. http://www.mathpower.com/tencomm.html 36

Mathematical Modeling

Shiuli Dhar*

Abstract

Mathematics is a rich and interesting discipline. It provides a set of ideas and tools effective in solving problems which arise in other fields like history, philosophy, sciences, sociology, political science, life sciences, medical sciences, engineering, etc. Mathematics may be applied to specific problems, already posed in mathematical form, or it may be used to formulate such problems. Problem formulation and theory construction involve a process known as Mathematical Modelling. Our objective is to introduce the basic concepts of mathematical modelling and discuss the process of development of a mathematical model. The approach, which is my main concern throughout this presentation, has a number of advantages which we shall be illustrating through examples. A mathematical model is a conversion of a real world problem into an abstract mathematical problem involving mathematical concepts such as constants, variables, functions, equations, inequalities, etc. Translation into a mathematical model is one of the many approaches to solving real-world problems. Through this paper, I would highlight my explorations, define a mathematical model, realise the need for developing a mathematical models, translate a real world problem into its equivalent mathematical formulation with context taken from biology, physics, economics, finance, medicine, etc. Keywords: Mathematical Modelling, Physical Models, Schematic Models, Verbal Models, Statistical Models, Optimization Models, Game Theoretic Models.

Introduction Mathematics is a very effective tool in solving real world problems. The critical step in the use of mathematics for solving real world problem is the building of a suitable mathematical model. A model is an abstraction of reality or a representation of a real object or situation. It could be a simple drawing of office plans or a complicated functional representation of a complex machinery part. A model airplane may be assembled from children’s kit, or it may actually contain an engine and a rotating propeller that enable it to fly like a real plane.

* Department of Mathematics, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra Mathematical Modeling 297

Some models are replicas of the physical properties (relative shape, form, and weight ) of the object they represent. Some are physical models but do not have the same physical appearance as the object of their representation. Each of these models can be classified in to four main categories: physical models, schematic models, verbal models and mathematical models. Mathematical models are the most abstract of the four classifications. Other approaches include experimentations with physical models or schematic models or with the real world directly, Mathematics may be applied to specific problems in mathematical form, or it may be used to formulate such problems. In theory construction, mathematics provides abstract structures which may be used as tools in understanding problems arising in other fields. Problem formulation and theory construction involve a process known as mathematical modelling or mathematical model building. A mathematical model is an abstract model that uses mathematical language to describe a system. It can be viewed as a representation of the essential aspects of an existing system (or a system to be constructed) which presents knowledge of that system in useable form.

What is a Mathematical Modelling? A mathematical model is an abstract model that uses mathematical language to describe a system. It can be viewed as a representation of the essential aspects of an existing system (or a system to be constructed) which presents knowledge of that system. Mathematical modelling usually begins with a situation in the real world. These situations may arise in different disciplines like engineering, physics, physiology, psychology, ecology, wildlife management, chemistry, economics, sports etc. A psychologist, for example, observes certain type of behaviour in rats running in a maze, a wildlife ecologist notes the number of eggs laid by endangered sea turtles, or an economist records, the volume of international trade under a specific tariff policy. Each tries to observe and predict future behaviour. Their efforts may be based completely on intuition, but often they are the result of detailed study, experience and observing the similarities between the current situation and other situations which are better understood. This study of the system, the accumulation and organisation of information and stating the problem to be studied is in fact the first step in model building. The second step is to make the problem simpler by making certain assumptions and approximations. It requires to identify and select the concepts / information to be retained in the problem. The third step in modelling is to replace the real quantities and processes by mathematical symbols, a set of variables and a set of equations / inequalities that establish relationship between these variables. The values of the variables can be practically anything, real or integer numbers, Boolean values or strings. After the problem is formulated the fourth step is the study of the resulting mathematical system using appropriate mathematical tools and techniques. This may involve a calculation, solving an equation, proving a theorem, etc. The motivation is to produce new information about the problem being studied. It is likely that new information can be obtained by using well-known mathematical concepts and techniques. If not, we may need to develop new techniques or adopt tested methods from other disciplines. The final step in the model – building process in the evaluation of a mathematical model – building process is the evaluation of a mathematical model i.e comparison of the results predicated on the basis of the mathematical analysis with the real world. It is important to know whether or not our model gives reasonable answers i.e Does our model reflect all the important aspects of the real world problem? If a model is not accurate enough, then we need to refine our model. We may 298 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey need a new formulation, a new mathematical analysis and hence a new evaluation. It usually happens that the model – building process proceeds through several iterations, each a refinement of the preceding, until, finally, an acceptable one is found. Broadly we can divide the modelling process as follows: Formulation: Which involves the following three steps? • Studying the Problem: Accumulating and organising the information about the real world problem. Describing the context of the problem and stating the problemwith in the context. • Identifying Relevant Information: Identifying and selecting the concepts / information which are significant and to be retained in the problem. • Mathematical Representation: Replacing real quantities and process by mathematical symbols, a set of variables and a set of equations / inequalities that establish relationship between variables. Mathematical Analysis: Which studies the formulated problem using appropriate mathematical tools and techniques? Evaluation: Which decides whether the model and its analysis explain the phenomenon / problem we are interested in. If it is not a good model then we need to refine it. There are no unique or correct models; but there are good models and bad models. After a model is evaluated and found good, there are several uses of the model. 1. It helps inn our better understanding of the real physical system, 2. It can serve as tool in the prediction of the future state of the system which is currently unknown, 3. It can help in doing trial experiments by changing the parameter value or in perturbing the system to produce desirable condition i.e many unknown parameter values can be estimated. Let us now discuss at some simple mathematical models: Example: Model of a Particle in a Box: The particle in a box (also known as the infinite potential well or the infinite sequence well) is a problem consisting of a single particle inside an infinitely deep potential well, from which it cannot escape, and which loses no energy when it collides with the walls of the box. In one dimensional case, the experiences no force i.e. it is at zero potential rises to infinity, forming an impenetrable wall. In classical mechanics, the problem can be modelled using Newton’s laws of motions and the solution to the problem is trivial. The particle moves in a straight line, always at the same speed until it reflects from a wall. A quantum – mechanical solution of the problem becomes very interesting and reveals some decidedly quantum behaviour of the particle that agree with observations but contrasts sharply with the predictions of classical mechanics., According to quantum theory, particles has no definite position or velocity. Rather, a probabilistic interpretation is given to the state of the particle in terms of a time – independent wave function function , is a probability density. The problem of a particle situated in 1- dimensional infinite square well with momentum only in the direction of quantum confinement (the x – direction) is described by the Schrodinger equation, a basic equation of quantum mechanics given by:

+ V(x) = E Mathematical Modeling 299 Where h is the reduced plank constant, m is the mass of the particle, is the complex – value stationary time independent wave function V(x) is the spatially varying potential and E is the energy, a real number. For the case of the particle in a 1-dimensional box of length L, the potential is zero inside the box, but rises to infinity at x = 0 and x = 1. Thus the equation reduces to The solution to which can be found easily under appropriate boundary conditions. One of the possible choice is The motivation for this choice is that the particle is unlikely to be found at a location with a high potential (the potential repulses the particle), Thus the probability of finding the particle, must be infinitesimally small or 0, Why Formulate a Mathematical Model? : As we mentioned earlier, the use of mathematics is one of many approaches for understanding and solving a real world problem. Other includes experimentation with scaled physical models in a laboratory on a smaller scale simulating all the conditions of the real situation, or with the real world directly. But these may be highly risky and costly as they may involve the use of explosive and expensive chemicals or materials; on the other hand mathematical approach has many advantages. Mathematical modelling is very inexpensive and provides systematic approach to problem solving. Mathematical modelling requires users to accumulate and organize information and, in the process, to indicate areas where additional information is needed, and hence increases the understanding of the problem. For metrological purposes, rockets are launched so that they reach certain a attitude and record atmospheric conditions such as temperature and pressure. In such cases we are confronted with the following problem. For example: What is the rocket thrust level and duration necessary ensures that the rocket reaches the desired altitude? For this problem a solution based on experimentation involving rocket launches with different thrust – time, is unacceptable due to the cost and the uncertainty of success. Further the solution to this problem cannot be obtained using scale – model experiments. For this kind of study, a mathematical approach is preferred.

Classifying Mathematical Models According to the structure of the models we can classify mathematical models into the following four types: Linear vs Nonlinear Mathematical models are usually composed by variable, which are abstractions of quantities of interest in the described systems, and operators that act on these variable, which can be algebraic operators, functions, differential operators, etc. If all the operators in a mathematical model present linearity, the result mathematical model is defined as linear. A model is considered to be nonlinear otherwise. For Example: consider the equation Equation (1) is one – dimensional diffusion equation (also known as Fick’s II law ), where C(x,t) is 300 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey the concentration of diffusing substance, x is the space coordinate and D is the diffusion coefficient. This equation represents the diffusion of a substance in the x direction due to a concentration gradient in that direction .In some cases, e.g, diffusion in high polymers, D depends on concentration C. For the case when D is a constant, equation (1) becomes Which is a linear differential equation and hence is said to be a linear model of the problem? Equation (1) is a second order linear partial differential with C as dependent variable and t and x as independent variable. In general equation (2) along with appropriate initial and boundary conditions is solvable. If, on the other hand, D is not a constant but depends on C, say, for example, if D = exp [ ( C - )] where , , are constants then Equation (1) reduces to Equation (3) is a non-linear PDE and hence the model obtained is a non – linear one. Static vs. Dynamic: A Static model does not account for the element of time and hence the variables and relationships describing the system are time-independent. Consider, for instance, the transportation problem generally associated with industries Suppose there are m origins , i = 1, 2, 3,……………., m in an industry, where various amount of a commodity are produced or stored for transportation to n destinations It is then required to transport all units of the commodity from all , exhaustively, to all , exactly satisfying all their requirements in such a way that the total transportation cost becomes minimum. The following assumption is made: i) The origin can supply exactly a, unit of the commodity. ii) The destination can accept exactly unit. iii) The cost of transportation of one unit from to is. This transportation problem, therefore, is essentially a minimization problem. Mathematically, if = number of units transported from to , then we want to Equation (4) – (7) defines the transportation problem where all variables are independent of time. Such a system is a static system. In contrast to the static system, in dynamic system, time plays a very important role. The relationship between the variables describing the system changes with time. If we look at the problem of rocket launch then it can be described in terms of a closed system consisting of two objects-the rocket and the earth. The variables describing the rocket are its position and velocity relative to some fixed point on the earth, and the interaction between the two objects is given by the theory of dynamics.

Discrete vs. Continuous Mathematical model may be discrete or continuous according as the variables involved are discrete or continuous. In models involving changes over time, the changes may take place continuously with time and the variable of the system are described for all time instants over the interval of interest. On the other hand, the change may occur at discrete instants of time and the variables described only for the relevant time instants. Thus, one should be clear whether to treat the time element as continuous or discrete. In certain instances, the data available are such that a discrete treatment of time is more appropriate composed to continuous. For instance, if a soft drink Mathematical Modeling 301 manufacturing company is interested in estimating the weekly demand of the soft drink, then the time element is a week and hence it has to be treated as a discrete variable. Models involving continuous variables are often expressed through differential equations – ordinary or partial, whereas, those involving discrete characterisation result in difference equations. Consider for instance, the mathematical model, referred to as the classical Malthusian population scheme for population growth given by Thomas R. Malthus (1766 – 1834). The model is based on the idea that the population size for one generation depends on the size of the previous generation. This is expressed mathematically by the following equation: Where: t: represents the time period (which could be minutes, hours, weeks, years, etc.) depending on the species being considered. Pt: represents the population size at time t. The units of time could be hours, days, years, etc. pt+1: represents the population size at next time period. Again it could be the next hours, next days, next year, etc,; and r: referred to as the Malthusian factor, is the multiple that determines the growth rate. The model given by Equation (8) which is a difference equation is a discrete model. It allows us to find out the value of p at different discrete time intervals say, at years 3, 4, 5, etc. We could not use this model to find out the size of P when t = 3.578 because t = 3.578 does not represent a prescribed discrete time. The value of r in Equation (8) has a strong impact on how fast the population will growth. Analogous continuous model of the population growth resulting in differential equation is given by the equation: x (0) = ………………….(9) Where x (t) ( is the size of the population at time t, is the size of the population at the initial time and r represents the net growth rate. Deterministic vs. Stochastic: A system is said to be deterministic if the values assumed by the variables or the changes in the variable are known with certainty. Consider for instance, the problem of rocket launch considered in Example discussed, the variables of the system are the position and velocity of the rocket. The laws of classical dynamics can be used to describe the motion fairly accurately and the changes in the position and velocity can be predicted with a high degree of certainty. Hence in this case we can view the system as being deterministic. On the other hand, in a stochastic model, randomness is taken into account and variables are described by probability distributions instead of unique values. For example, a manufacturer, having trouble deciding whether to build a large or small facility knows that the solution to this capacity problem depends upon the volume of demand. High demand would require a large facility while low demand would require a small facility. While the manufacturer has no way of knowing with certainty what the exact demand will be , he can , at least, determine the probability of the occurrence of each(high or low). For example, if the manufacturer estimates that the probability of the occurrence of high demand is 70 percent and the occurrence with the monetary of low demand is 30 percent, he can use this information along with the monetary value (expected pay–off) of each situation to construct mathematical models such as pay-off matrices to find an optimal decision. This type of model is said to be a stochastic optimization model. Another example is considered at the problem of supermarket operation. The problem is to determine the optimum number of checkout counters in a supermarket to maximize the expected 302 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey profit. The model can be successful once a relationship between some measure of queue (e.g. average queue length or average time period for which the customer has to wait before being served and the number of checkout counters is obtained. The variables characterizing the system are the number of customers, their arrival rate, their departure rate, service time, peak period, etc. Hence the arrival of customers, departure of customers and their service time are all random. They cannot be determined uniquely; rather they are given by certain probability distributions. Stochastic models based on fitting this probability distribution to the arrival, departure and service time can be obtained. In real life, there is always uncertainty. If the uncertainty is insignificant then it can be ignored and the system can be treated as a deterministic system. This is a process of simplification. If the uncertainty is significant then it cannot be ignored and must be taken into account while characterising then it cannot be ignored and must be taken into account while characterising the system. As mentioned earlier, most of the discrete and stochastic models lead to difference / algebraic equations whereas the knowledge of algebraic / differential equations is required while dealing with linear / nonlinear, static / dynamic, and continuous models. The skills you have in algebra, calculus, analysis, differential equations, optimization and probability theory will be useful for successfully dealing with mathematical modelling. The type of mathematics required depends on the type of model formulated.

Limitations of a Mathematical Model Mathematical modelling is a multistage activity to its involving various concepts and techniques, Ideally, a mathematical model ends by returning to its origin. We need to check whether the model and its analysis explain the phenomenon we are interested in. The whole art of mathematical modelling lies in its self-consistency. A mathematical model is an adequate mathematical model if it captures the salient features of the system associated with the problem and is capable of yielding a meaningful solution to the original problem. It is rare that we obtain an adequate mathematical model at the first attempt for the problem under consideration. In general, an iterative procedure is needed where improvements are progressively made until an adequate mathematical model is obtained. The adequacy of a model is established by checking the validity of the assumptions made in building the model and by the closeness of the agreement between the behaviour of the model and the system under consideration. For example, while developing a mode to describe the motion of a simple pendulum if the time interval of study is sufficiently small, so that the energy loss due to frictional drag is very small, then the assumption that the frictional drag is negligible is valid. However, if the time interval of study is large then the assumption of negligible frictional drag is not valid, sine the effect of drag on the pendulum motion is cumulative. In a rocket launch model, the assumption that the thrust generated by the rocket is an impulsive is valid if the thrust lasts for a very small fraction of the total flight time, something that is not known initially. Only after a first solution, can this be checked and if the need be, the model has to be modified. This emphasizes the iterative nature of modelling.

Conclusion Mathematical model uses mathematical language to describe a real world problem. Mathematical models are built using numbers, symbols, variables related together by means of functions, Mathematical Modeling 303 formulas, empirical laws, equations or equalities and can take many forms like statistical models, optimization model, algebraic, differential equations or game theoretic models, etc. The process of mathematical modelling involves three main steps-formulation, mathematical analysis and evaluation. Depending on the mathematical structure of the underlying formulation, mathematical models can be classified into linear / nonlinear, static / dynamic, discrete / continuous and deterministic / stochastic models. The skills in subjects like algebra, calculus, analysis, differential equations, statistics optimization, matrix theory and probability theory are useful for dealing with mathematical modelling. The type of mathematics required depends on the type of model formulated. A mathematical model is adequate if it captures the salient features of the system associated with the problem and is capable of yielding a meaningful solution to the original problem. Mathematical modelling is an iterative process where improvements are progressively made until an adequate mathematical model is obtained.

References Rutherford Aris, Mathematical Modelling Techniques, Dover publication, 1994. J. D. Murray, Mathematical Biology, An Introduction, third edition Springer, 2002. Charles P. Jones, Investments, Analysis and Management, Ninth edition, John Wiley, 2004. 37

Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems

N .V. Pawar*

Abstract

A differential equation is a mathematical equation that relates some function with its derivatives. In applications, the functions usually represent physical quantities. The derivatives represent their rates of change and the equation defines a relationship between the two. These relations are extremely common thus differential equations play a prominent role in many disciplines including engineering, physics, economics, and biology. The study of differential equations is a wide field in pure and applied mathematics, physics, and engineering. All of these disciplines are concerned with the properties of differential equations of various types. Pure mathematics focuses on the existence and uniqueness of solutions, while applied mathematics emphasizes the rigorous justification of the methods for approximating solutions. Differential equations play an important role in modeling virtually every physical, technical, or biological process. Differential equations such as those used to solve real- life problems may not necessarily be directly solvable, i.e. they do not have closed form solutions. Instead, solutions can be approximated using numerical methods. Many fundamental laws of physics and chemistry can be formulated as differential equations. In biology and economics, differential equations are used to model the behavior of complex systems. The mathematical theory of differential equations first developed together with the sciences where the equations had originated and where the results found application. Keywords: Mathematical Equations, Differential Equations and Mathematical Modeling

Introduction Many times people find difficulties in face rate related problems in our day-to-day life. For example, if we consider the Assets A of a person at a timet, thenA may increase or decrease with time t then therelation between A and t cannot be easily determined but if the rate of change of A with respect to time t is known then we can establish a relation between A and t which leads to anequation involving the variable and its derivative. Any equation involving one independent and one or

* Dept. of Mathematics, KLE Society’s college of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems 305 more dependent variables and their differential coefficients is called a differential equation. Differential equations are very important in pure and applied Mathematics, Engineering, Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Economics and other disciplines. They arise in many areas of science and technology. Differential equations such as that use to solve a real life problem may not necessarily be directly solvable but can be approximated using numerical methods differential equation are applied in the study of financial mathematics, environmental science, population growth and decay. Most of the physical phenomena formulated into the mathematical model which gives rise to differential equations .Practical mathematical model are becoming an accepted part of most of medical and scientific disciplines they cover an over expanding range of topics but most the difficult problem is to translate physical phenomenon into the set of equations and this set of equations is called the model of the system.

Objectives • To highlight the application of differential equations in pure and applied mathematics. Physics, engineering, biology, chemistry, economics and day to day life problems. • To highlight wide applications of differential equations to model natural phenomena. • To understand the relation between mathematics and real world phenomena. • To show how mathematical descriptions of real world phenomena are created.

Methodology • In present work differential equation is presented as the relation between any particular physical quantity and its rate of change with respect to time. • Most of the physical phenomena are formulated in to the mathematical model, which gives rise to differential equations. Practical mathematical models are becoming an accepted part most of medical and scientific discipline as they cover an over expanding range of the topic. • Differential equations are applied to solve real life problems after formulating the model.

Applications Real Life use of Differential Equations Differential equations have a remarkable ability to predict the world around us. They are used in a wide variety of disciplines, from biology, economics, physics, chemistry and engineering. They can describe exponential growth and decay, the population growth of species or the change in investment return over time. A differential equation is one which is written in the form; dy/dx = ky Some of these can be solved to get, y = +_a ek, Simply by integrating, others require much more complex mathematics.

Application inPhysics • Euler–Lagrange equation in classical mechanics • Hamilton’s equations in classical mechanics 306 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey • Radioactive decay in nuclear physics • Newton’s law of cooling in thermodynamics • The wave equation • The heat equation in thermodynamics • Laplace’s equation, which defines harmonic functions • Poisson’s equation • The geodesic equation • The Navier–Stokes equations in fluid dynamics • The Diffusion equation in stochastic processes • The Convection–diffusion equation in fluid dynamics • The Cauchy–Riemann equations in complex analysis • The Poisson–Boltzmann equation in molecular dynamics • The shallow water equations • Universal differential equation • The Lorenz equations whose solutions exhibit chaotic flow. Application in Biology • Verhulst equation – biological population growth • Von Bertalanffy model – biological individual growth • Replicator dynamics – found in theoretical biology • Hodgkin–Huxley model – neural action potentials Application in Chemistry The rate law or rate equation for a chemical reaction is a differential equation that links the reaction rate with concentrations or pressures of reactants and constant parameters (normally rate coefficients and partial reaction orders). To determine the rate equation for a particular system one combines the reaction rate with a mass balance for the system.

Application in Economics

∂kt() α • The key equation of the Solow–Swan model is =−s ⎡⎤kt()δ kt () ∂t ⎣⎦ • The Black–Scholes PDE • Malthusian growth model • The Vidale–Wolfe advertising model • Applications of Differential Equations to real world problems This paper presents examples where differential equations are widely applied to model natural phenomena, engineering systems and many other situations. Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems 307 Application 1 : Exponential Growth - Population Let P(t) be a quantity that increases with time t and the rate of increase is proportional to the same quantity P as follows d P / d t = k P whered p / d t is the first derivative of P, k > 0 and t is the time. The solution to the above first order differential equation is given by P(t) = A ek t where A is a constant not equal to 0.

If P = P0 at t = 0, then 0 P0 = A e which gives A = P0 The final form of the solution is given by k t P(t) = P0 e

Assuming P0 is positive and since k is positive, P(t) is an increasing exponential. d P / d t = k P is also called an exponential growth model .This techniques is applied in calculating expected population of certain region at given time ,if initial population is known. Population Models One of the most basic examples of differential equations is the Malthusian Law of population growth dp/dt = kp shows how the population (p) changes with respect to time. The constant k will change depending on the species. Malthus used this law to predict how a species would grow over time. More complicated differential equations can be used to model the relationship between predators and prey. For example, as predators increase then prey decrease as more get eaten. But then the predators will have less to eat and start to die out, which allows more prey to survive. The interactions between the two populations are connected by differential equations.

Source: The picture above is taken from an online predator-prey simulatorHYPERLINK “http:// www.sims.scienceinstruction.org/predprey/” . 308 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey This allows you to change the parameters (such as predator birth rate, predator aggression and predator dependence on its prey). You can then model what happens to the 2 species over time. The graph above shows the predator population in blue and the prey population in red – and is generated when the predator is both very aggressive (it will attack the prey very often) and also is very dependent on the prey (it can’t get food from other sources). As you can see this particular relationship generates a population boom and crash – the predator rapidly eats the prey population, growing rapidly – before it runs out of prey to eat and then it has no other food, thus dying off again.

This graph above shows what happens when you reach an equilibrium point – in this simulation the predators are much less aggressive and it leads to both populations have stable populations.

There are also more complex predator-prey models – like the one shown above for the interaction between moose and wolves. This has more parameters to control. The above graph shows almost- periodic behaviour in the moose population with a largely stable wolf population. Application 2 : Exponential Decay - Radioactive MaterialLet M(t) be the amount of a product that decreases with time t and the rate of decrease is proportional to the amount M as follows d M / d t = - k M where d M / d t is the first derivative of M, k > 0 and t is the time. Solve the above first order differential equation to obtain M(t) = A e- k t where A is non zero constant. It we assume that Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems 309

M = M0 at t = 0, then 0 M0 = A e which gives A = M0 The solution may be written as follows - k t M(t) = M0 e

Assuming M0 is positive and since k is positive, M(t) is an decreasing exponential. d M / d t = - k M is also called an exponential decay model. Both radioactive material and ice are reducing as per time possible care is taken accordingly in the nuclear power plant andin ice factory respectively.

Application 3 : Falling Object An object is dropped from a height at time t = 0. If h(t) is the height of the object at time t, a(t) the acceleration and v(t) the velocity. The relationships between a, v and h are as follows: a(t) = dv / dt , v(t) = dh / dt. For a falling object, a(t) is constant and is equal to g = -9.8 m/s. Combining the above differential equations, we can easily deduce the following equation d 2h / dt 2 = g Integrate both sides of the above equation to obtain

dh / dt = g t + v0 Integrate one more time to obtain 2 h(t) = (1/2) g t + v0 t + h0

The above equation describes the height of a falling object, from an initial height h0 at an initial velocity v0, as a function of time... An example of modelling a real world problem using differential equations is the determination of the velocity of a ball falling through the air, considering only gravity and air resistance. The ball’s acceleration towards the ground is the acceleration due to gravity minus the acceleration due to air resistance.Gravity is considered constant, and air resistance may be modelled as proportional to the ball’s velocity. This means that the ball’s acceleration, which is a derivative of its velocity, depends on the velocity (and the velocity depends on time). Finding the velocity as a function of time involves solving a differential equation and verifying its validity.

Application 4 : Newton’s Law of Cooling It is a model that describes, mathematically, the change in temperature of an object in a given environment. The law states that the rate of change (in time) of the temperature is proportional to the difference between the temperature T of the object and the temperature Te of the environment surrounding the object. d T / d t = - k (T - Te) Let x = T - Te so that dx / dt = dT / dt Using the above change of variable, the above differential equation becomes d x / d t = - k x 310 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey The solution to the above differential equation is given by x = A e - k t substitute x by T - Te T - Te = A e - k t Assume that at t = 0 the temperature T = To To - Te = A e 0 which gives A = To - Te The final expression for T(t) i given by T(t) = Te + (To - Te)e - k t This last expression shows how the temperature T of the object changes with time. This law has all sorts of applications ranging from determining the time required for a cup of tea or coffee to cool down to a drinkable temperature It can also be applied by a forensic expert who wishes to determine how long a corpse had been dead.When a person dies, the temperature of his body will gradually decrease from 37oC to the temperature of the surrounding.

Application 5 : RL Circuit Let us consider the RL (resistor R and inductor L) circuit shown above. At t = 0 the switch is closed and current passes through the circuit. Electricity laws state that the voltage across a resistor of resistance R is equal to Ri and the voltage across an inductor L is given by L di/dt (i is the current). Another law gives an equation relating all voltages in the above circuit as follows: L di/dt + Ri = E, where E is a constant voltage. Let us solve the above differential equation which may be written as follows L [ di / dt ] / [E - R i] = 1 which may be written as - (L / R) [ - R d i ] / [E - Ri] = dt Integrate both sides - (L / R) ln(E - R i) = t + c , c constant of integration. Find constant c by setting i = 0 at t = 0 (when switch is closed) which gives c = (-L / R) ln(E) Substitute c in the solution - (L / R) ln(E - R i) = t + (-L/R) ln (E) which may be written (L/R) ln (E)- (L / R) ln(E - R i) = t ln[E/(E - Ri)] = t(R/L) Change into exponential form [E/(E - Ri)] = et(R/L) Applications of Differential Equation to Real World Problems 311 Solve for i to obtain i = (E/R) (1-e-Rt/L) The starting model for the circuit is a differential equation which when solved, gives an expression of the current in the circuit as a function of time. The techniques can applied to domestic electricaland electronics apparatus so that they can work smoothlyand for long life. Some other uses of differential equations include: 1) In medicine for modelling cancer growth or the spread of disease 2) In engineering for describing the movement of electricity 3) In chemistry for modelling chemical reactions 4) In economics to find optimum investment strategies 5) In physics to describe the motion of waves, pendulums or chaotic systems. With such ability to describe the real world, being able to solve differential equations is an important skill for mathematicians.

Conclusion Real life modeling technique in the present work represents the construction and working of some system of interest .it is similar but simpler than the system it represents. One purpose of model is to enable the analyst to predict the changes on the system. It is close to the real system and incorporates most of the original important features.

References CHANEMD. R. S., Ordinary and partial differential equation by and company pvt.ltd, New Delhi (1.3 TO 2.76) and (11.1 TO 11.28) Bernoulli, Jacob (1695), Explicationes, Annotationes and Additiones ad ea, quae in Actis sup. de Curva Elastica, Isochrona Paracentrica, and Velaria, hincindememorata, and paratim controversalegundur; ubi de Linea mediarumdirectionum, alliisquenovis, Acta Eruditorum D’Alembert, Leonhard Euler, Daniel Bernoulli. (retrieved 13 Nov 2012)., For a special collection of the 9 groundbreaking papers by the three authors, see First Appearance of the wave equation: - the controversy about vibrating strings Herman HJ Lynge and Son. Allan D. Pierce, Acoustical Soc of America, 1989;For de Lagrange’s contributions to the acoustic wave equation, can consult Acoustics: An Introduction to Its Physical Principles and Applications page 18.(retrieved 9 Dec 2012) Speiser, David. (Basel: Birkhäuser, 2008), Discovering the Principles of Mechanics 1600-1800, p. 191 Fourier, Joseph (1822). Théorieanalytique de la chaleur (in French). Paris: FirminDidotPèreetFils. OCLC 2688081. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/OrdinaryDifferentialEquationOrder.html IUPAC Gold Book definition of rate law. Chemical Kinetics, the study of reaction rates in solution, 1991, VCH Publishers.

Section 7 Society - An Inclusive Denominator

Right to be a Woman - Legal Lineage from Magna Carta

Tejashree Prakash Bandekar*

Abstract

In modern days, UDHR by the UNO influenced its member nations to extend human rights to women also. Women rights are not some belated fascination of modernity. They have a legal lineage. Magna Carta charter is the beginning of a foundation of personal as well as women rights. This document codifies the marriage rights of noble heiresses and both the property and marriage rights of wealthy widows. The document had little impact on the lives of the vast majority of King John’s female subjects since the clauses concerning marriage rights related to elite women alone. Nevertheless, the identification of clear legal rights for heiresses and widows in 1215 set a model for legislation in future centuries. Keywords: UDHR: Universal Declaration of Human Rights

We habitually classify human on the basis of gender into groups of men and women. Nowhere in the history of human civilization men and women were treated equally and assigned statuses equally. In almost all societies numerous cultural expectations have been woven around male- female differences. The following explanation highlights such expectations, “Men should be competitive; women are supposed to be a cooperative; men can be impatient; women must have boundless patience. Men may be critical; women should always be accepting and supportive. Men can rush and be hurried; women are always supposed to have time for people; to sit and chat; to weave an effective network of mutual support and empathy. Men are expected to express anger; women should never be angry – at least they should certainly never show it. Men are supposed to gain gratification from the self recognition of a job well done”.1 This does not mean that men and women represent two different cultures or they are from two different planets! Men and women are born equal and they should always be treated so. When one preaches of women’s duties, one should show equal respect to women’s rights. Historically, it is a fact that women have been denied equal rights for centuries. The issue of gender equality assumed importance in the late 19th and 20th centuries.

* Visiting Faculty, ICLE’S Motilal Jhunjhunwala College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. 316 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey It is a wonder despite thousands and thousands years of human appearance on the earth, the rise and decline of great civilizations, monarchies and various such expressions failed to indicate equal status of women. Vedic period in India suggest ‘satisfactory’ position of women. Whether it was Harappan or South Indian history suggests mother as an important figure and we come across some women rebel like Razia in medieval days. But all are proved as ‘highlights’ of Indian history. We can find some similar ‘highlights’ in world history as well. Therefore it is difficult to explore episodes of gender equality in the pages of history. In modern days, UDHR by the UNO influenced its member nations to extend human rights to women also. But women rights are not some belated fascination of modernity but actually have a legal lineage. Magna Carta charter is the beginning of a foundation of personal as well as women rights. This document codified the marriage rights of noble heiresses and both the property and marriage rights of wealthy widows. The document had little impact on the lives of the vast majority of King John’s female subjects because the clauses concerning marriage rights related to elite women alone. Nevertheless, the identification of clear legal rights for heiresses and widows in 1215 set a model for legislation in future centuries. Feminism as a social movement took its origin in the 18th century in England which sought to achieve equality between the sexes by extension of rights to women. In the 1890s, radical women and men with liberal outlook campaigned for votes for women and women’s access to education and profession. 2 During First World War (1914-1918), large numbers of women were recruited into jobs vacated by men who had gone to fight in the war. The government began coordinating the employment of women through campaign and recruitments drives. This led to women working in areas of work that were formerly reserved for men, for example as railway guards, ticket collectors, bus and tram conductors, police, fire fighters, etc. However they received lower wages for doing the same job and thus began some of the earliest ‘demand for equal pay.’ Since women are considered weak and delicate, they were not permitted to undertake certain laborious tasks such as carrying heavy weight, driving heavy vehicles and so on. But above examples conclude that ‘gender traits of masculinity and femininity have no necessary connection to biological gender’.3 This self realisation of women and society led to growth of feminism and achievements of women in various sectors. Women are found in large numbers in the work force today. The great Industrial revolution and consequent industrialisation opened the doors of employment for women. Women started availing themselves of the employment opportunities in almost all the civilised countries including India. A large number of women have now become aware of their rights. The improvement in the status of Indian women especially after independence can be analysed in the light of the major changes that have taken place in areas such as legislations, education, economic and employment sector, political sharing and consciousness of their rights on the part of the women, etc. Women in India are not yet equal to men. There is no legal or constitutional obstacle to equality. There is only social hurdle. Women’s right to entry in religious places and the Shani Shingnapur episode is the latest example of this. After a long crusade by women activists demanding entry to the inner sanctum of the Shani temple, the temple trust finally granted women devotees’ passage into the temple.4 Women have great expectations from the society, such as greater freedom, better education, and self dependence, the right to decision and give birth and so on. Though lately society recognised their equal status legally, now it is time for social reorganisation from every section of the society. Right to be a Woman - Legal Lineage from Magna Carta 317 Endnotes 1. Smelser N.J. in Sociology (1993)page 204-205. 2. Shankar Rao C.N., Sociology principles of sociology with an introduction to social thought, page 832, 2006. 3. Ian Robertson in Sociology- pp 292 4. The Hindu, April 2016

References Hosken, Towards a Definition of Women’s Rights, Human Rights, Quarterly, Vol 3. Lockwood Bert, Women’s rights, human rights. Quarterly, ISBN 978801883743. Shankar Rao C.N.(2006) Sociology principles of sociology with an introduction to social thought, pp 832. 39

Rapid Urbanization

Sumaiya Fathima*

Abstract

Urbanization is the process by which a large number of people become permanently concentrated in relatively small areas, forming cities. Internal rural to urban migration means that people move from rural areas to urban areas. In this process, the number of people living in cities increase compared to the number of people living in rural areas. This paper considers the implications of population growth and the process of urbanization. It focuses its attention on the positive effects of urbanization, highlighting the fact that it provides higher income to the people in comparison to the workers who would earn on a farm and yield further opportunities to climb the income ladder. The paper also discusses on how new technology plays a fundamental role by attracting the quality of life that new technology offers and how urbanization since independence has been into focus through five year plans. Key words: Population growth Technology, Migration, Five year plans

Introduction Urbanization is a big issue in the world scale today, and it is occurring everywhere in different cultures, economies, and sizes of the cities. Over population in the cities has caused many problems considering enormous need of water, food and infrastructure, and tremendous pollution amounts to the air, soil and water. These problems are more evident in developing countries, which have made the situation even more difficult due to absence of finance and proper policies.

Urbanization The Process of society’s transformation from predominantly rural to a predominantly urban population is defined as, “Urbanization”. Urbanization is an increase in the proportion of people living in urban areas. It can cause number of problems such as congestion, lack of housing and environmental degradation etc.

* Principal, BET Sadathunnisa College, Bengaluru, Karnataka Rapid Urbanization 319 Much of urban migration is driven by rural populations’ desire for the advantages that urban areas offer. Urban advantages include greater opportunities to receive education, health care, and services such as entertainment. The urban poor have less opportunity for education than the urban non poor, but still they have more chance than rural populations. New technology is playing an even more fundamental role: it is changing the reason that cities exist in the first place. People used to be attracted to cities because of employment opportunities, now people are increasingly attracted by the quality of life a city offers. Exactly how each city evolves will be determined by the collective preferences of city governments, people and businesses. It is economically viable to deliver many infrastructure projects, such as public transportation. However, a higher population density also creates negative externalities, especially when urbanization is rapid, poorly-planned and occurs in a context of widespread poverty. As cities in developing countries are expanding rapidly, it is likely that infrastructure will not be able to keep pace with their growth nor the increased expectations of their populations. Action to close the infrastructure gap is urgently needed and will strongly influence the potential of risks to have catastrophic cascading effects. Urbanization creates opportunities but also exacerbates risks, and the speed at which it is happening challenges our capacity to plan and adapt. This is particularly true in developing economies. For rapid urbanization to provide opportunities to all, carefully considered urban planning and good governance with effective regulatory frameworks are required. However, governments of rapidly- growing cities often have little time for adjustment and learning. As a consequence, inadequate planning and ineffective governance can bring significant economic, social and environmental costs, threatening the sustainability of urban development.

An Increase in a Population in Cities and Towns Versus Rural Areas Urbanization began during the industrial revolution when workers moved towards manufacturing hubs in cities to obtain jobs in factories as agricultural jobs became less common. Cities offer access to wealth and services that many rural areas lack. Rural inhabitants typically move to cities to exploit economic opportunities and improve their social mobility. Rural to urban migration leads to the concentration of services and facilities, such as education, health and technology in urban centers, which leads to disadvantages for rural communities. It also causes psychological effects, such as stress that results from traffic, high cost of living and taxes. Urbanization has brought about the development of slums and shanty towns in the cities. The limited housing units available for consumption are not affordable to the urban poor. The high cost of rent has worsened the livelihoods of urban dwellers as huge proportion of income is spent on rent. The land market has also been affected tremendously as urban dwellers are not able to afford the cost of a plot of land due to urbanization. It can therefore be concluded that urbanization would continue to make the urban poor, poorer and the rich, richer if pragmatic efforts are not put in place to curtail the situation. Urbanization since independence has been focused through respective five year plans as follows: First Five Year Plan (1951-1956): Main importance was given for construction of institution building, houses for government employees and weaker section of the people under the Centre subsidized Scheme. 320 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Second Five Year Plan (1956-1961): Industrial Housing Scheme was broadened to include all workers and preparation of Master Plans (e.g., Delhi Development Authority (DDA)) for important towns by setting up the Town & Country Planning Legislations. Third Five Year Plan (1961- 1966): This plan emphasized the importance of towns and cities in balanced regional development. So, it advised urban planning to adopt regional approach. It also emphasized the need for urban land regulation, checking of urban land prices, preparation of master plan, etc. Fourth Five Year Plan (1969-1974): This plan continued with the theme of third plan and development plans for 72 urban areas were undertaken. Regional studies in respect of metropolitan regions around Delhi, Mumbai and Calcutta were initiated During Fifth Five year Plan (1974-1979): Urban land ceiling act was passed in 1976. It also advised the state governments to create metropolitan planning regions to take care of the growing areas outside administrative city limits. Mumbai metropolitan region development authority (MMRDA) in 1974 and Housing and urban development cooperation in 1975 were established. It also emphasized the urban and industrial decentralization. The Sixth Five Year Plan (1980-1985): This Plan encouraged setting up the new industries, commercial and professional establishments in small, medium and intermediate towns, positive inducements were suggested. The major importance was giving to integrated provision of basic services for the poor. The Integrated Development of Small and Medium Towns (IDSMT) was launched in towns with population below one lakh for provision of roads, pavements, minor civic works, markets, shopping complex, bus stands, etc. Seventh Five Year Plan (1985-1990):This plan expanded the base of housing finance, the National Housing Bank was set up, promoted commercial production of innovative building materials, Building Material Technology Promotion Council (BMTPC) and a network of Building Centers were set up and for the first time, the Plan also considered the problem of the urban poor and Urban Basic Services for the Poor (UBSP), Global Shelter Strategy (GSS), and National Housing Policy (NHP) were announced in 1988. During Eighth Five Year Plan (1992-1997), the Constitution (74th) Amendment Act, 1992 was made with a view to improve governance at the grass roots by stressing upon decentralization and creation of Democratic governance structure; devolution of funds and responsibilities was ensured for fulfilling the needs and aspirations of urban residents. For the first time, this Plan identified the role and importance of urban sector for the national economy and recognized the significance of the following issues: i. Poor suffered due to huge gap between demand and supply of infrastructural services. i. Shortage of housing was caused due to unabated growth of urbanization. ii. Higher level of incidence of urban poverty and marginal employment was evident. The Ninth Five year Plan (1997-2002): The Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY) was aimed to provide gainful employment to the urban unemployed or underemployed poor by encouraging the setting up of self-employment ventures or provision of wage employment . The Urban Self Employment Programme (USEP). The Urban Wage Employment Programme (UWEP), Nehru Rozgar Yojana (NRY) to provide employment to the urban unemployed and underemployed poor, Urban Basic Services for the Poor (UBSP) to achieve the social sector goals and Prime Minister’s Integrated Urban Poverty Eradication Programme (PM IUPEP) for Class II urban agglomerations development of urban poor. Rapid Urbanization 321 The Tenth Five Year Plan (2002-07), recognized the fact that urbanization played a key role in accelerating the economic growth in 1980s and 1990s as a result of the economic liberalization and also stressed that without strengthening the urban local bodies, the goal of urbanization cannot be achieved. Strengthening urban governance should be done through judicious devolution of functions and funds towards the elected bodies and ULBs. Land Policy and Housing: The repeal of the Urban Land (Ceiling and Regulation) Act, 1976 was a significant step towards reform in the urban land market. Mapping, urban indicators and data from the urban sector: Town and Country Planning Organization (TCPO) was established for urban mapping based on aerial photography, extending Plan Assistance for infrastructure through various programmes, such as accelerated Urban Water Supply Programme (AUWSP), IDSMT, Mega City Scheme, etc, urban poverty alleviation and slum improvement and improvement of civic amenities in urban areas through improvement in urban water supply, urban sanitation, and urban transport Under Eleventh Five year plan (2007-2012), major policy measures that were undertaken were as under: 1. Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission (JNNURM) 2. Urban Reform Incentive Fund (URIF) 3. Mega city scheme Integrated Development of Small and Medium towns (IDSMT) 4. Pooled Finance Development Fund (PFDF) 5. Development of satellite cities/counter Magnet cities 6. E-governance in municipalities National Urban Information System (NUIS) 7. National Capital Region Planning Board (NCRPB) 8. Strengthening urban local bodies through capacity building and better financial management. 9. Increasing the efficiency and productivity of cities by deregulation and development of land. 10. Dismantling public sector monopoly over urban infrastructure and creating conducive atmosphere for the private sector to invest. 11. Establishing autonomous regulatory framework to oversee the functioning of the public and private sector using technology and innovation in a big way. 12. Swarna Jayanti Shahri Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY) 13. Reducing incidence of poverty. 14. Accelerated Urban Water Supply Programme (AUWSP) 15. Improvement of urban basic services which includes water supply and solid waste management, others. Approach to twelfth five year plan( 2012-17) were as below: 1. Rapid Mass Transport (RMT) for better transportation system. 2. Reform of the urban water sector. 322 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey 3. Efficient use of urban land. 4. Long term strategic urban planning with the overall regional planning perspective. 5. The environmental sustainability of urban development. 6. Investment in new urban infrastructure assets and maintenance of assets. 7. Need to strengthen urban governance. 8. To strengthen the ‘soft infrastructure’. 9. Improvements of urban utilities such as water and sewerage NUHM (National Urban Health Mission) for better urban public health. 10. Need to fulfill the basic needs of the urban poor. Rapid urbanization has led to an alarming deterioration in the quality of city dwellers in India. Our cities suffer from various infrastructural deficiencies, poor sanitation and solid waste disposal, water shortage, polluted natural water resources, water logging in rainy seasons, frequent epidemics, inadequate health care, depletion of green areas, reducing the ground water level, proliferation of slums and lack of support for social and economic development of the socially and economically weaker sections of the society. Urbanization and urban sprawl seems inevitable in Indian cities as long as the growth is coupled with lack of holistic approaches in governance. Obviously, in a country like India where the growing magnitude of poverty and unemployment has been the major problem for the government, industrialization is the only alternative left with the government. To run the industries huge manpower, workforce is needed which is adequately available in the rural areas. Hence industrialization results in urbanization. Above all, the overall infrastructural development in the country like, available means of communication, transport, construction of roads, bridges and linkage of remote areas through railway, road and air has been instrumental in bringing urbanization, especially in developing countries. Thus, urbanization has been increasing at an accelerated rate. These days underdeveloped and developing countries are urbanizing more rapidly than the industrial countries did in the countries did in the heydays of their growth. Urbanization as a process of diffusion of certain modernizing traits or characteristics in a population is often considered to be a causal factor of modernization. In conclusion, uncontrolled urbanization is a very deep subject existing in the middle of a causal chain with causes; for example, more job opportunities and better services in urban life in contrast to absence of land in the rural areas and effects; such as unemployment, insufficiency of infrastructure, unwanted environmental events and unpleasant demographic theories. In the right hands, urbanization can determine or at least influence the destiny of a city and may be a turning point for its existence and optimistic future, whereas in unstable and unplanned conditions, urbanization creates nothing but a real mess. Thus, urbanization can be summarized as a process which reveals itself through temporal, spatial and sect oral changes in demographic, social, economic, technological and environmental aspects of life in a given society. Urbanization is certainly a phenomenon which is often debated in today’s world. Hardly a day goes by without at least one family deciding to move from countryside to city due to undeveloped financial and social facilities. However, even if people’s lives are more comfortable, the price they have to pay comes with the increasing pollution that affects their health and happiness. Rapid Urbanization 323 Critical Review Rapid urbanization brings challenges and wider opportunities. One key opportunity is that it can provide part of the solution to another of the megatrends – demographic shifts – as the challenge of the ‘greying planet’ grows. In the future, the majority of the world’s ageing population will probably live in cities. And as people remain healthier for longer, their continuing contribution to social and economic value – for example, by working beyond traditional retirement ages, helped by advancing technology – may produce a ‘longevity dividend’ rather than a burden. As all these initiatives and opportunities demonstrate, technology is changing the reason why cities exist. Their main attraction used to be jobs. Now people come seeking a better quality of life – at any age.

Recommendations and Possible Remedy for Urbanization Issues and Problems The most effectual way to resolve issues of urbanization is to make the economy of village and small scale fully viable. Economies must be revitalized if government undertakes huge rural development program. It is suggested that surplus manpower must be absorbed in village in order to migrate to urban areas. It is needed to control traffic congestion in urban region and people must be encouraged to use public transport. Government must make polices to construct low cast multi-storeyed flats in order to accommodate the slum dwellers. Government should provide funds to encourage entrepreneurship and also find solution for pollution in the nation. To summarize, Urbanization is the substantial expansion of urban areas due to rural migration and it is strongly related to modernization, industrialization, and the sociological process of rationalization. Urbanization commonly occurred in developing countries because government has keenness to accomplish a developed city status. As a result, almost all area in the city has been developed and in the worst case scenario, even the green areas are also turned into industrial or business area. It illustrates that speedy urbanization has many unconstructive implications especially towards social and environmental aspects. While the process of urbanization occurs at global scale, it is more visible in developing countries. This growth has led to concerns about the sustainability of these urban centres. Explosive growth in the world population and migration of people to in urban centres is causing major concern about the quality of life in these urban centres and the life-supporting capacity of the planet ecologically and communally. The government should not be keen to develop a city without considering the impacts toward the social and environmental aspect. Instead, the government should modify the urban development process in order to accomplish a developed city and make efforts to lessen the possibility of problems that might arise.

References Bhagat, R. B. (2011), Emerging pattern of urbanization in India. Economic and Political Weekly 46, 10-12. Deaton, A. (2003), Prices and poverty in India, 1987-2000. Economic and Political Weekly 38, 362-368. Government of India, Planning Commission, New Delhi: First Five-Year Plan 1951-56 Second Five-Year Plan 1956-61 Third Five-Year Plan 1961- 66 Fourth Five-Year Plan 1969-74 324 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Fifth-Five-Year Plan 1974-79 Sixth Five-Year Plan 1980-85 Seventh Five-Year Plan 1985-90 Eighth Five-Year Plan 1992-97 Ninth Five-Year Plan 1997- 2002 Tenth Five-Year Plan 2002-07 Eleventh Five Year Plan 2007-12 Approach to Twelfth Five Year Plan 2012-17 Javir, Problems of Urbanization in India, Preserve articles retrieved 15th June 2012 Pradhan R. P., Does Infrastructure play role in urbanization: evidence from India, Indian Journal of Economics and Business via High Beam Research. Shaw, A., (1996), Urban policy in post-independent India-an appraisal, Economic and Political Weekly 31, 224-228. Tripathi, S., (2013), Is urban economic growth inclusive in India?, MPRA Working Paper 43617, University Library of Munich, Germany. United Nations, (2009), World Urbanization Prospects: The 2009 Revisions, New York: United Nations, Population Database, Population Division, Department of Economic and Social Affairs. United Nations, (2011), World Urbanization Prospects: The 2011 Revisions, New York: United Nations, Population Database, Population Division, Department of Economic and Social affairs Urbanization, gender and urban poverty: Paid work and unpaid care work in the city, UNFPA 2012. 40

The Media Reach and Impact

Ayesha B. B.*

Abstract

Media plays a significant role in our society in the present scenario. In today’s modern society, Media has become a part and parcel of our Life. The impact of Media on the Society extends to both Social and Political Sectors. Media technologies are becoming an important aspect of today’s Society. Media imparts and shapes Society’s opinion on the subjects of Politics, Business, Culture and Sports. Media is a pillar of Society and a healthy society is not possible without Healthy Media. There are a variety of elements in each and media touches on both sectors and each element. It should be noted that the extent it affects each element varies as well. Each and every day, people interact with media of many different forms. Media is commonly defined as being a channel of Communication. Radio, newspapers, and Television are all examples of media. We live in a fascinating world and an even more fascinating society. One of the most powerful strengths the media has in any society is the ability to effect change, both on a social and government level. Media should take responsibility to Preserve Culture. The media has bought the people all over the world very close. The media and the public should help to drive away the negative effects of media. Media is a bridge between governing bodies and general public. It is a powerful and flexible tool that influences the public to a great extent. Media is a voice of the voiceless and a great force in building the nation. Keywords: Media, Part and parcel, Social and political sectors, Media technologies, Healthy society, Channel of communication, Fascinating world, Preserve culture, Building nation.

Introduction Media plays a significant role in our society in the present scenario. In today’s modern society, media has become a part and parcel of our Life. The impact of Media on the Society extends to both Social and Political Sectors. It is all around us, from the shows we watch on television, the music we listen to on the radio, to the books and magazines we read each day. Television, more than any of the other Medias, achieves myriad different goals. The mass media today encompasses newspapers, books, radio, television, cinema, the Internet, email and fax. Although the use of the

* Assistant Professor- Dept. of Commerce and Management BET Sadathunnisa College, Bengaluru, Karnataka 326 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Internet and email seem to be recent phenomena, the other media have co-existed for many decades. We live in a fascinating world and an even more fascinating society. In this day and age, life without technology feels utterly impossible and life without the media is simply unimaginable. Media provides us with entertainment, information and comfort. As the standard of living in the country is rising, people find themselves investing in digital cables and high speed Internet connections, thus increasing their exposure to such media as the World Wide Web and the hundreds of new channels. While we all are intelligent people, with the freedom and ability to make our own choices, I believe the role played by the media counts more in taking decisions. While the media has historically been viewed as being overly aggressive and insatiable in their plight for the latest and hottest news, their watchdog function is essential in a democratic society where people must know what their governments are doing. The media has the capacity to hold the government accountable, forcing them to explain their actions and decisions, all of which affect the people they represent. The assumption in some societies is that the press speaks for the people, thus the freedom of speech and freedom of the press acts in the countries. The reason for freedom of the press is to ensure that democracy is able to function, so it is important to understand that such legislation does not only protect the functions of the press. With press freedom we then know what the differing views in society are, opening the floor to debate and discussion, all of which aid healthy functioning of a democratic society. Finally, one of the most powerful strengths the media has in any society is the ability to effect change, both on a social and governmental level. All the journalists have the responsibility to report the unbiased, accurate information as it is received from reliable sources. It is their obligation to obtain all sides of a story and to report on both the good and the bad stuff. However, responsible journalism also requires a balance of the good and bad stuff in newspapers and in broadcast reports. The media today enjoys a wider coverage as well as a wider viewership than perhaps a decade ago. It has survived and has kept up its values to this day. The impact of media on the society extends to both social and political sectors. There are a variety of elements in each and media touches on both sectors and each element. It should be noted that the extent that it affects each element varies as well. It should also be taken into account that while there is a mass effect on everyone that media touches, the extent it affects the individual varies as well. One of the most powerful strengths the media has in any society is the ability to effect change, both on a social and governmental level. Media should take responsibility to Preserve Culture. Media is voice of the voiceless and a great force in building the Nation.

Objectives of the Study • To study the impact of media on society. • To know the role of media on society and democracy. • To study the positive and negative impact of media on society.

Research Methodology Research methodology is a way of systematically solving the research problem. It may be understood as a science of studying how research is done scientifically. This research paper is an attempt of exploratory research, based on the secondary data. Sources of secondary data have been collected from text books, research papers, websites, magazines, and journal. Available secondary data was extensively used for the study. The Media Reach and Impact 327 Need of the Study • To understand the impact of Media on Society. • To find out what is the role of Media in society and its influences. • To find the positive and negative effects of Media on society.

Role and Impact of Media on Society Media is an integral part of modern society. Media can change opinions because they access in people and this gives it a lot of strength. Media plays a vital role in every one’s life. Media is a tremendous source of information for individuals as well as society. This strength can either be used constructively by educating the people or it can be used destructively by misleading the innocent people. Power of media can transform the whole society especially in the developing countries it can be used as a weapon of mass destruction. The most important use of media is to educate the people about the basic human rights. Education and discipline is key to progress. This is the difference between a nation and a world. Media men have access to people and they have an audience. Media has lot of responsibilities on its shoulders as today’s society is very much influenced by the role of media. We can change our minds according to the information provided through it. The media helps to bring out the hidden talents of the people. The children learn many good things through media. The media conducts polls and let public to take part in social issues. Many people give voice about their opinions in different political and social matters. Media acts as a mirror to society. It helps keeping things in control. Show people what they actually do and what they must do. Media is an open window to the world. Media has Influenced Society in Many Ways- 1. Media technologies are becoming important aspects of today’s society. The people can get the latest news in fraction of seconds. The distance is not a barrier now. The news they get through Media helps them in their daily life a lot. 2. The Media help common person to exchange information and it acts as a common platform. 3. The public gets knowledge and awake to raise questions on seeing the news in Newspaper and T.V. 4. The time children spend using Media displaces time they would be doing physical activities. 5. Cross- promotions between food products and popular TV and movie characters are encouraging children to enact higher calorie food. 6. Each and every day people interact with media of many different forms. Media is commonly defined as being a channel of communication. 7. Media has brought about a positive sense of globalization and has been a good positive sense of globalization and has been a good base for Education. 8. As the standard of living in the country is rising, people find themselves investing in digital cables and high speed internet connections, thus increasing their exposure to such media as the World Wide Web and the hundreds of new channels. Media is having a tremendous impact on society and people. Just as a coin have two sides; the impact of Media also can have positive and negative impact on society and people. Some of the positive and negative impacts of media are: 328 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey

Positive Impact Negative Impact • Media provides news and information The traditional culture of a country is adversely required by the people. affected by Media. • Media can educate the public, children Entertainment has become the main component and youth. of media. This affects the primary objectives of media to inform and educate the people. • Media helps democracy function Media promotes violence. Studies have proved effectively. They inform the public about that violence shown on television and cinema government policies and programmes can has negative effects on children. be useful to them. This helps the public voice their feelings and helps government to make necessary changes in their policies or programmes. • Media can entertain people. Media promotes the desire in people to buy and own products that are advertised through the media but which may not be essential for them. • Media has brought people of the world Middle school age use more Media than any closer to each other. other age groups. This affects their academic achievements. • Media can act as an agent of change in Media is one way communication so development. improvement through feedback is virtually impossible. • Media promote trade and industry Media is a profit oriented society. Phenomena through advertisements. of paid news - News for sale. • Media can help the political and Some news given in the Media can create democratic processes of a country. negative feelings in the minds. Over exposure to media may cause health problems. • Media can bring in positive social changes. The advertisements shown in the TV and Newspapers have got negative impact on society.

Suggestions • Steps should be taken to ensure credibility of Media. We should encourage the Good Media. • We should give our Constructive criticism to them for Improvement. • We should participate in them by writing, Presentations and Video Programs. • We should make all others aware about the Nation building Media.

Conclusion Media provides real information and helps in Nation Building. Educated public can make educated decisions regarding Media selection. We found that Media is playing both constructive as well as destructive roles. On one hand, it has lots of advantages but on other hand, it has lot of disadvantages and at the end it is up to the individual and society to decide which to use. The Media Reach and Impact 329 References Bryant J., Zillman D., (ED.), Perspective on media effects, Hillsdale, N.J.: Erlbaum. Bausinger H., (1984), Media, technology and daily life, Media, Culture and Society, 6, 343 - 351. Clark (2010,May 11), Needs and tools for measuring media impact. 41

Rights of the Differently Abled Cresendoes to New Levels of Humanities

Ankush Landge*, Minakshee Jadhav*, Shayesha Lobo*, Deepika Dhanawat* & Sagar Malaviya**

Abstract

Renaissance had revolutionized the world with revival and spirit of inquiry. Original thinkers and philosophers had lent vigour to original thinking which was logical and innovative. Human activities were projected to be of prime importance as during the middle ages all activities were guided by religion and for the church. Humane outlook and humanism became the focus of new learning during Renaissance. However, there was no focused concern for the differently abled human. It could be indirectly derived from the introduction of new subjects for study as they emerged from the fact that intellectuals and scientists came up with new understanding of the human anatomy and innovations in their fields of their study.However, the rights of the differently abled has cresendoed only towards the close of the 20th century and has now reached to new levels of concern at the UNO and many countries have legislated laws to recognize their contribution in the growth and development stories in the 21st century. Disability of any nature is a serious health concern and society has to together assist in the rehabilitation process.This research paper discusses various issues and challenges, related to those who are differently abled. It also highlights the need to strengthen our health care system that should provide various services to those who are physically challenged and help them to overcome the challenges which could be physical, economical, physiological, psychological and social. This objective cannot be fulfilled by anyone agency or organization alone, it has to receive a helping hand from society and specially the able bodied young generation. They must be sensitive to the cause of the not- as -abled physically challenged peers. This sensitization can be incorporated in the youngsters through education. Education for the young generation should design a curriculum that focuses on instilling a culture and empathy for others who are not as fortunate as them.

* TYBA, ICLES MJ College, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. ** KLE Society's College of Science and Commerce, Kalmboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. Guided by Dr. Jyoti Marwah , Principal KLE Society's College of Science and Commerce, Kalmboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. Rights of the Differently Abled Cresendoes to New Levels of Humanities 331

In order to fulfil these different objectives, NGOs like, FELLOWSHIP OF THE PHYSICALLY HANDICAP providesan opportunityto differently-abled people with services like offering clothing, training them to be independent, healthy food, education and also seeking to make them confident and interactive. Regulations by UNO and different governments have made ruled and regulations for giving them jobs and secured social assistance. This paper has looked into the issue by collecting the primary data in the form of questionnaire, whereby, analysing the fact that differently-abled people do not find themselves being accepted by the society and are being treated as unequals““““““““““ at all levels. Keywords: Physical disability, societal attitude, Community, Common problems, Measures.

Introduction “The problem is not how to wipe out the differences but how to unite with the differences intact.” -Rabindranath Tagore (Quoted in Alur) Humanism is nothing but an assimilation of human intellectual achievement which generates culture. It is this process that helps to build identities for developing beliefs, faith, practices, customs, traditions, art, crafts, languages, food habits, dress and several other aspects of intangible culture. On the flip side, if not rightly channelized it promotes irreconcilable differences, discrimination, hatred and intolerance. The dualistic definition of Man is the beastly instinct of cruelty and the humane instinct of compassion. If cruelty increases compassion becomes frugal and if compassion grows society becomes humane and caring. So education must aim at building empathy by seasoning emotions. It cannot be denied that compassion, kindness, concern, love and gratitude are an integral part of the human trait and a dominant instinct of every human being. Education for the young needs to focus on instilling a culture of oneness and recognizing the needs of the society at large, in other words, of each other, with whom they interact or are closely and intimately connected with. For this the prerequisite requirement is the creation of an environment which is warm, understanding and humanitarian. This has a multiplier effect as it spreads warmth, love, compassion, generosity, kindness and concern to heal. ‘Sans Humanities, the centre of human education doesn’t hold’, feels Prof. Homi Bhabha, Director of Mahindra Humanities Centre at Harvard University, a Padma Bhushan awardee for his contributions to literature and education. He believes that humanities should be made part and parcel of the Indian Education system. It should be in-cooperated in the curriculum so that the young adults understand the importance of knowing how social science, technology applied science and other disciplines are closely related to Humanities this aspect of merging of Humanities with education would make India and its Youth, succeed in looking beyond ‘the space’and achieve the much required understanding for the differently abled people in society. Hence, the objectives of this paper are to look at issues to solve their social problems, to understand the role that our youth can play in the process by analyzing and suggesting change in society’s behavior towards them and above all to sensitize people on this issue. Disabilities are on the rise due to increased life expectancy, terror attacks, displacements due to internal or external conflicts, mutated genes, conflicts, natural disasters, rising crimes, aggressive life styles and an overall insensitivity to human concerns. These changes in life styles has enhanced the need and concern for an inclusive policy for the ability affected people. Due to these various reasons ability impairment could be as follows; 332 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Vision Impairment is a term used to describe any kind of a vision loss which could be partial or complete. Physical Impairment is a limitation on a person’s physical functioning, mobility, dexterity or stamina that affects daily living. These could also be respiratory disorders, blindness, epilepsy and sleep disorders. Sensory Impairment when one of the senses such as sight, hearing, smell, touch, taste and spatial awareness is not normal. Verbal Impairment are issues of communication involve hearing, speech, language, and fluency. Hearing Impairment is hearing loss that prevents a person from receiving sounds. Multi Impairment is several disabilities, such as a sensory disability associated with a motor disability. even a severe intellectual disability may be included in the term “multiple disabilities”. Acts for Disablity—- A number of acts have been enacted for the welfare of the differently abled people giving them a chance to avail the diverse opportunities.UNO for the first time included the topic of disability in the last recommendations of the ‘Principles and Recommendations for Population and Housing Census Revision I in 1998. These recommendations provided guidance on how to define population with disability—”a person who is limited in the kind or amount of activities that he or she can do because of ongoing difficulties due to a long term physical condition, mental condition or health problem”(UNO 1998)This was followed by the most important ‘Ratification of United Nation Convention on Rights of Persons with Disabilities’in 2007. India has followed up with some important Acts for the rights of the Disabled. These are as follows : 1. Rehabilitation Council of India Act, 1992. 2. Persons with Disabilities Act, 1995. 3. National Trust for Welfare of Persons with Autism, Cerebral Palsy, Mental Retardation and Multiple Disability Act, 1999. 4. National Policy on Person with Disabilities, 2005. Prime Minister of India Shri Narendra Modi announced an Accessibility Programme for the International Disability Day on 3rd December 2016. The Research Methodology for our paper was based on 1) Data collection:Primary Data was collected through questionnaire method 10 question were asked to 100 differently abled people in the college campus and at Kamala Raheja Paraplegic Centre at Vashi..Secondary Data was collected from various sources like journals, research papers, websites, newspapers and magazines, e

Individual level Challenges Common Problems of the Physically Challenged that were indentified were • The existing transportation and infrastructural facilities available to disabled are hardly adequate. • Public transport related problem comprises the problems related to design of the vehicles (high and incompatible steps of vehicles from the platform level). • Road constraints involve encroachment of bus stops by vendors, temporary structures and parked vehicles stopping of buses fat from actual bus bays. Thus causing great inconvenience to them. • Feeling of insecurity by the disabled while travelling in private buses. Rights of the Differently Abled Cresendoes to New Levels of Humanities 333 • The disabled person are largely dependent on a family because they get economically and emotional support from family. The disabled person also gets emotional support and encouragement from friends and relatives. The Government also as part of welfare measure introduced various welfare schemes to benefit physically challenged persons. However, there exists a gap in the utilization of the services. Hence, there is a need to study in detail about the problems, support systems and utilization of rehabilitation measures introduced by various agencies. As a matter of policy, Government has extended the rehabilitation programme in the field of medical, education, psychological support, for disabled persons.

Social Attitude Disable people continue to face challenges in many areas of the life and many of these challenges involve people attitude.Much of the literature on disability in India has pointed to the importance of the concept of karma in attitudes to disability, with disability perceived either as punishment for misdeeds in the past lives or the wrongdoings of their parents. The greatest challenge that disabled people have had to face has been society’s misperception that they are a “breed apart”. Discrimination has continued to exist in certain important areas. Some employers were reluctant to take on or promote disables people; some landlords refused to give the land on rent to them; and courts sometimes deprived them of basic rights, including custody of their own children. In addition to the attitudes of the general society, the attitudes of persons with disabilities and their families are important, in some ways even more important. “When there is no discrimination, we all will be given the opportunities to learn and to grow together as one people.” believesBindu a young Socialist. Imagine being turned away from school because you are unable to see as well as your friends. Think about what it would feel like to be told the health centre will not be treating you today because you have a disability. Is it right that as a disabled woman you will not be allowed to benefit from the land distribution happening in Southern Sudan, or that you will not be invited to join the local women’s savings group? These are not just questions to provoke discussion. Each example is a recent experience from the lives of people with disabilities around the world. They provide us with an insight into the types of challenges these young people face, challenges that have little to do with their physical limitations, but more to do with how they are treated by their families and communities. Discrimination, or treating people unfairly because of prejudice, can make the lives of people with disabilities very difficult. Despite having the same hopes and ambitions as nondisabled persons, they encounter barriers that make it much harder for them to succeed. Young people with disabilities experience significant discrimination in areas such as education, health, gender and equality. The types of discrimination they face can be linked to attitudes, the environment, local laws, or cultural practices. Research from urban and rural Andhra Pradesh in the early 2000s asked people about whether disability was a punishment or curse of God.The researchers found around 40 percent of respondents agreeing that it was, with the share of people holding such views increasing with age, being higher among women and higher those who are illiterate. In such views between urban and rural respondents, though urban people were slightly less likely to hold such views,which had found higher belief in medical causes of disability in urban populations. Research on attitudes towards disability and disabled people is steadily increasing, but there’s still much more that 334 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey needs to be done to understand the issues involved. In recent decades, this situation has undergone some positive changes through adjustments in legislation and public attitudes. Also people with disabilities have lobbied for their rights as full citizens and productive individuals. The survey Questionnaire and Graph: 1) Are you aware about Disability Act 1995? 2) Do you think there is equality between normal and disable people? 3) Do you think the disable people get normal treatment in society? 4) Are government policies properly implemented for disabled people? The graph below is a grim reminder of the unfortunate condition of the level of sensitivity among people as regards the rights and our duties towards the less fortunate.

Role of NGOs It is recognised that NGOs have played a significant role in the development of rehabilitation services for persons with disabilities worldwide. Many such NGOs are also active in various parts of India to eradicate the social injustice are being practice in society towards differently-able people. Now-a-days even governments are helping these Non-Governmental Organisations(NGOs). The Ministry of Social Justice & Empowerment is implementing various schemes or programmes through Non-Governmental Organizations and releases grant in aid to them based upon the inspection reports or recommendations from the States. Recent research indicates that the number of disabledchildren is steadily increasing all over the world.It has been estimated that 6 to 10 percent of children in India are born disabled with the total number of disabled in the world standing at 10 percent of the entire population. The proportion of disabled children in developing countries is generally higher than developed countries. Disabled persons in India are the most vulnerable group.NGOs are encouraging official aid and government ministries to adopt successful approaches for the development of differently-able people andeducating them. They are also creating wareness among the differently-abled people to ask for their rights and entitlement. In Mumbai FELLOWSHIP OF THE PHYSICALLY HANDICAP, SHARAN are doing notable work for those who are physically challenged and on the modification of attitudes toward disabled persons. This they do with successful interventions. Rights of the Differently Abled Cresendoes to New Levels of Humanities 335 Findings • Through this paper, we have analysed that the discrimination is still continued in our society towards them. • There is a need of motivation in the minds of youth to empathise them rather than showing sympathy. • The allowances and grants given by government should directly reach out to them. Recommendations In order to enable people with disabilities to access decent work, following recommendations can be made: - Promote access of persons with disabilities to education, skills development and life-long learning. - Promote social protection floors and social protection systems that include people with disabilities on an equal basis with others, take their specific requirements into account in defining benefits including schemes or programmes that guarantee income security, social health protection and other mechanisms to ensure universal health coverage, as well as schemes and programmes that facilitate their participation in employment. - Development efforts should be based on the principles of equality of opportunity, non- discrimination and accessibility. - Effective consultation with persons with disabilities and their representative organisations. Limitations: • The main constrain related to our research is”TIME” limitation. • Stronger evidence of limiting factors is population. Conclusion Public attitudes have an impact on the material and non-material aspects of everyone’s living standards, and disabled people in particular. We believe that we will not see change without a structured strategy for the improvement of the disabled people. Their standard of living will not improve without a change in attitude towards the challenged. Hence, participation by communities is most necessary. References MarwahJyoti. Humanities for the Youth – Educating Emotions for Building Empathy article Freedom First No 541 July 2012,pp32-34(magazine) Mbogoni M and Me Angelo, Reviewing the United Nations Census Recommendations on Disability, UN Statistics Division Report ( First Meeting of the Washington Group on Disability Status) Feb 2002 Survey and interview on problems faced by the Differently Abled at SHARAN.(Kamala Raheja Rehabilitation center for Paraplegic, Vashi) Survey with Differently Able Students from different faculties from ICLES MotilalJhunjhunwala college, Vashihttp:// www.un.org/esa/socdev/unyin/publications/youth-disabilities.pdf Current attitude towards disabled people.(accessed on 3th May 2016) http://www.scope.org.uk/Scope/media/Images/ Publication%20Directory/Current-attitudes-towards-disabled-people.pdf?ext=.pdf INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF INNOVATIVE RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT Problem Faced By Physically Challenged Persons And Their Awareness Towards Welfare Measures (accessed on 2nd May 2016) http://www.ijird.com/index.php/ijird/article/viewFile/35954/29136 42

Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era

Vivek Prabhakar Jadhav*

Abstract

Education is the act of imparting or acquiring general knowledge, developing the powers of reasoning and judgment and generally preparing oneself or others intellectually for mature life. Women education has undergone a sea change in the Indian society. It is appreciable that our women made a significant mark not only on the field of education but in different fields of life. They are contributing to economy of their family as well as to the National GDP. Indian society has really evolved and accepted the modern learned women. But the rural and urban India has two different perspectives about the women education. Though it is true that more and more females are becoming educated but rather than quantity it is quality which matters most. The present paper focuses whether really educational revolution took place among women in India by taking account of status of women in last decade from 2001-2011. Different sources such as Educational Statistics published by Ministry of HRD Govermment of India, Census Report, UNESCO Reports, various books and Research reports have been considered to understand state of education of women, issues and barriers to women education and State Policy affecting women education in India. Paper will recommend changes in policy at state level and grass root level to achieve empowerment of Women through education for building super power nation of tomorrow. Keywords: Women Education, Educational Revolution, Empowerment of Women.

Introduction Can you better the condition of your women?Then there will be hope for your well-being. Otherwise you will remain as backward as you are now — Swami Vivekananda Society cannot be imagined without women. No nation can progress without educated women. Women are one of the most powerful pillars of Nations in the modern world. She has hoisted flag

* Department Of Commerce, KLE Society’s College of Science and Commerce, Kalamboli, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra. Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era 337 of success in each and every field for country like India, Educated women is backbone of its growth and development. Women accounts for half of 1.25 billion populations. In post independence period women has made remarkable progress in the field of education as policy were formed by government to make women literate. But at the same time her social status has not been improved lot. Women can be empowered only through the education. Only education can make them stronger to face challenges of life and improve their economic status which will lead to enjoy commendable status in the society. Though there has been considerable growth in gender parity index from 32% (1961) to 75% (2011) there has been huge gap between male and female literacy. The gap even widens when it comes to Rural and Urban divide where gender parity index is 68% i.e. wide gap between literacy between male and female and it narrows in Urban area as gender parity index is just 87%.

Table 1: Rural Urban Adult Literacy Rate

Residence Male Female Total Gender ParityIndex Rural 74.1 50.6 62.6 68% Urban 88.3 76.9 82.8 87% Total 78.8 59.3 69.3 75% Residence Parity Index 84% 66% 76%

Table 2: Adult Literacy Rate age 15 Years and Above

Year Male Female Total Gender Parity Index 1961 41.5 13.2 27.8 32% 1971 47.7 19.4 34.1 41% 1981 54.9 25.7 40.8 47% 1991 61.9 34.1 48.5 55% 2001 73.4 47.8 61.0 65% 2011 78.8 59.3 69.3 75%

Source: Census of India, Office of the Registrar General, India.

Objective of the Study • The present paper will focus on whether education among women has really empowered them or not. • To review and compare education received by women in comparison to their counter parts. • To check find the challenges which are restricting women to become literate. • To give suggestion to improve education level among women in India. 338 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Data and Methodology The type of research is descriptive research where stress has been given on fact findings and correlating facts to answer the issue under consideration. The data used is secondary data as well as sourced different scholarly articles of different websites.

Indian Education System School education in India is organized in four stages, namely, primary, upper primary, secondary and higher secondary. The National System of Education envisages a common educational structure. At the elementary level, the national system of education comprises of five years of primary education and three years of upper primary. But some of the states follow seven year elementary education cycle. Under SarvaShikshaAbhiyan all states and union territories have been provided support to move to eight year elementary education cycle by 2013-14.

Primary and Secondary Education and Higher Secondary Education “India has made impressive progress in the provision of primary education but is struggling to do the same for lower secondary education,” the UN report said. This is the outcome of the Right of Children to Free and Compulsory Education (RTE) Act, 2009 which became operative in the country on April 1, 2010. This right implies that every child has a right to elementary education of satisfactory and equitable quality in a formal school which satisfies certain essential norms and standard. One would expect that with this promise of free education, there would be an equal number of girls enrolling in primary education. However, in reality the picture looks much different. According to the latest UNESCO Institute for Statistics data, there were more than 0.5 million out- of-school children of primary school age in at least 19 countries. At least one million children were denied the right to education in India, Indonesia, Kenya, Niger, Nigeria, Pakistan, the Philippines, South Sudan, Sudan and Tanzania. India had 1.7 million out of school children of primary school age in 2012.The latest numbers show that some 24 million children will never enter a classroom with girls remaining the most disadvantaged cohort figuring in the study.

Table 3: No of Girls Enrolled Per 100 Boys Enrolled in the Schools

Level/ Primary Upper Primary Secondary Senior Secondary Higher Year (I-V) (VI-VIII) (IX-X) (XI-XII) Education 1950-51 39 19 NA 15 13 1960-61 48 31 NA 26 21 1970-71 60 41 NA 33 28 1980-81 63 49 NA 45 36 1990-91 71 58 NA 49 46 2000-01 78 69 63 62 58 2005-06 87 81 73 72 62 2006-07 88 82 73 74 62 2007-08 91 84 77 76 63 Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era 339

2008-09 92 86 79 77 65 2009-10 92 88 82 80 67 2010-11 92 89 82 79 78 2011-12 93 90 84 81 80 2012-13(P) 94 95 89 87 81 2013-14(P) 93 95 90 89 NA

Source: Educational statistics at a glance:GOI, MHRD, 2014 From above data it is very clear that the enrolment of girl child was very poor since the year 1950- 51 to 2000-01. It improved since then but still the enrolment is not satisfactory. At primary level it improved from 39 (1950-51) to 93 (2013-14) (P) for every hundred boy students enrolled. As well as at Upper primary level it enhanced from 19 (1950-51) to 95 (2013-14) (P) for every hundred boy students enrolled. It improved from 63 (2000-01) to 90 (2013-14) (P) at Secondary level with similar improvement at Senior Secondary level as it improved from 15 (1950-51) to 89 (2013-14)(P). It is notable that at Higher education level it improved from 13 (1950-51) to 81 (2012-13) (P) for every hundred boy students enrolled. Though the data is showing enrolment is increasing but we don’t have to forget that it took us more than six decades for this improvement.

Table 5: Dropout Rate in School Education (All Category Students)

Classes/ Classes (I-V) Classes (I-VIII) Classes (I-X) Year Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total 1960-61 61.7 70.9 64.9 75.0 85.0 78.3 NA NA NA 1970-71 64.5 70.9 67.0 74.6 83.4 77.9 NA NA NA 1980-81 56.2 62.5 58.7 68.0 79.4 72.7 79.8 86.6 82.5 1990-91 40.1 46.0 42.6 59.1 65.1 60.9 67.5 76.6 71.3 2000-01 39.7 41.9 40.7 50.3 57.7 53.7 66.4 71.5 68.6 2005-06 28.7 21.8 25.7 48.7 49.0 48.8 60.1 63.6 61.6 2006-07 24.6 26.8 25.6 46.4 45.2 45.9 58.6 61.5 59.9 2007-08 25.7 24.4 25.1 43.7 41.3 42.7 56.6 57.3 56.7 2008-09 29.6 25.8 27.8 41.1 36.9 39.3 54.0 54.4 54.2 2009-10 31.8 28.5 30.3 41.1 44.2 42.5 53.3 51.8 52.7 2010-11 29.0 25.4 27.4 40.6 41.2 40.8 50.2 47.7 49.2 2011-12 23.4 21.0 22.3 41.5 40.0 40.8 48.6 52.2 50.3 2012-13(P) 23.0 19.4 21.3 41.8 35.7 39.0 50.4 50.3 50.4 2013-14(P) 21.2 18.3 19.8 39.2 32.9 36.3 48.1 46.7 47.4 Source: Educational statistics at a glance: GOI, MHRD, 2014 340 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey The dropout rate has been really reduced in case of girl students from 70.9 to 18.3 for the class of I to V over last 5 decades. But still dropout rate is higher for classes taken together from I-VIII as well as for class X. In case of classes I-VIII it is still higher that is 32.9 (2013-14) (P) and very high for class X which is 46.7(2013-14) (P). Even after pursuing the different policies and enhanced expenditure we can really conclude that drop out is very high and need to be restricted by immediate action at government and social level.

Higher Education India’s higher education system is the third largest in the world, after China and the United States. As per the All India Survey on Higher Education 2014-15 (provisional report) there are 757 Universities, 38056 Colleges and 11922 Stand Alone Institutions and out of them 716 Universities, 29506 Colleges and 6837 Stand Alone Institutions have responded during the survey. The survey has got certain satisfactory findings with respect to Higher Education such as Total enrolment in Higher Education has been estimated to be 33.3 million with 17.9 million boys and 15.4 million girls. Girls constitute 46% of the total enrolment. Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) in Higher Education in India is 23.6, which is calculated for 18-23 years of age group. GER for male population is 24.5 and female it is 22.7. It shows still enrolment of female population is less than male population.

Table 6: Gender Distribution at Different Levels % Enrolment in Different Programmes in Higher Education

Programme Male Female B.A 28.22 37.84 B.COM. 11.51 11.3 B.SC. 10.41 12.09 B.TEC. 9.1 4.46 B.E. 8.07 4.06 B.Ed. 1.34 2.84 L.L.B. 0.86 0.48 M.A. 3.45 5.42 M.SC. 1.59 2.31 M.B.A. 2.25 1.44 M.COM. 0.77 1.16 M.C.A. 0.92 1.75 M.B.B.S. 0.46 0.52 M.TEC. 0.61 0.39 M.E. 0.25 0.22 OTHER 20.2 14.72

Data source: AISHE Portal (www.aishe.gov.in) Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era 341 Key Issues Related To Women Education in India We know that during ancient India, Women enjoyed equivalent status and rights like their male counterparts.In early Vedic period they were properly educated which can be found from the works of Grammarians of Katyayana and Patanjali. But later on Indian society became male dominated society. Today, we know most of the economic and life affecting decisions are taken by Male member of family. Indian women are never given complete freedom of choice when it comes to education, employment, marriage or even spending their own money. No matter how literate women will be but will enjoy always a secondary position and not equal status in the families and organisations. Welkoff (1999) found that chief barrier to woman education in India are inadequate school facilities, shortage of woman teachers and gender bias in the curriculum (female characters being depicted as we can helpless). Jha and Jhingran’s (2002) detail study of schooling in communities across 10 districts of India shows the continued belief in the importance of marriage for girls at an early age and of maintaining asymmetries between men and women in educational attainment as a marker of relatively greater male social status. Even after the more than six decades of the independence, women education has not achieved the desire result despite of many inputs to promote and facilitate the process of sharing knowledge at district level whose reasons are - The Main Problems Facing Female Education are • Backward mindset: Family mainly male members in the family are not interest to give higher education to female as they see it as waste of expenditure as per them that expenditure won’t help them the way investment in male education made by them. They feel that at last she has to do only chullha and chowky. • Poverty: Male member choose to give education to sons rather than daughter due to poverty. • Hurdle to get married: Most of the male feel that if their daughter will get highly educated then it will be difficult to find match for her as male ego doesn’t permit to marry women who have higher education and pay packages. • Custom: Most of the girls get married in early ages as and when they attain age of 18 years which comes in the way of higher education. • Agriculture and House Chores: Girls are more used in agriculture and house chores in the rural India. • Lack of facility: Most of India’s population resides at rural regions. The guardians are not interested in sending their girl child to school because of shortage of basic installations such as non availability of hygienic water, no arrangement for separate sanitary facility in schools. • Far from house: Normally in rural India schools are far away from houses, parents become hesitant to send girl child for higher education. • Problem of co-education: Most parents in rural India do not like co-education system and they find it difficult their girls sitting with boys in same classes due to backward mindset. • Lack of lady teachers: Lady Teachers are hesitant to go and work in rural schools due which the no of lady teachers are less than required which also reduces interest of parents to send their girl child to schools. • Higher cost of higher education: Even in urban India families cannot afford the cost of higher education which is rising after every year. 342 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey Suggestions for Promoting Women Participation in Higher Education • Women centric syllabus. • Scholarship to girl students to motivate to go for higher education. • Improvement in transport facility. • Increase the no of female education institutions especially in rural India. • Increase in the number of women teacher in schools in backward and tribal area. • Mass movement to be started to counsel parent to motivate them to enroll girl child for higher education. • Increase in the women participation for framing policies about women education in India. • Check sexual harassment within and outside education institutions. • Bank loan facility at very low interest and mortgage free for higher education of women. • Improving the participation of women in local body, State assembly and Parliament to consider their opinion and make them part of decision process.

Conclusion As per a study formulated by a six member team of Tata Institute of Social Science (TISS), in rural areas, out of 100 girls who enroll in class 1, only one reaches class 12 and in Urban areas out of 1000 girls only 14 reach class 12. But everything is not gloom and doom. We have seen that mentality of males is changing and they have started accepting importance of education in the life of women. The awakening among Indian women has been really considerable during recent years. We are witnessing that women is coming out and fighting for her rights. She is taking stand on various issues concerning her. Shanishingnapur temple opened door for women due to judgment of High court and isolated fight of women. But there are number of difficulties for advancing towards higher education. The education of women is important for improving her status in society as well as for national development. She is our mother who builds family and therefore nation. Therefore program for girls and women should be vigorously executed and reviewed by government. Our girls are talented. We have to nourish and cherish their talent by giving full-hearted support towards her over all development.

References Census of India, Office of the Registrar General, India. Elementary Education in India 2013-14, Ministry of Human Resource Development. Source : Educational statistics at a glance: Table 20,GOI,MHRD,2014 All India Survey on Higher Education 2014-15 (provisional report) Deswall Anita and SahaniMadhu ,2015,Women Education in India: A overview published in University News-A weekly Journal of Higher Education, Association of Indian UniversitiesVol.53 No. 13March 30- April 05, 2015 www.aishe.gov.in www.swamivivekanandaquotes.org/2013/04/swami-vivekananda-quotes-on-HYPERLINK “http:// www.swamivivekanandaquotes.org/2013/04/swami-vivekananda-quotes-on-women.html”women.html Educational Revolution among Indian Women – Post Independence Era 343 www.womenempowermentinindia.com/position-of-women-in-india/ www.mid-day.com/articles/over-70-pc-of-girls-across-india-drop-out-before-class- 10-reveals-survey/15840183#sthash.vYtK6XmB.dpuf www.firstpost.com/india/shani-shingnapur-temple-victory-it-still-took-men-to-barge-in-and-clear-the-way-for-women- 2722382.html 43

tu tkx:drk gsrq lapkj ds ekè;e dk ;ksxnku

jpuk ikaMs*

la{ksi

yksdlaidZ dk vFkZ cM+k gh foLr`r o çHkkodkjh gSA yksdra=k ds vkèkkj ij LFkkfir yksdlÙkk ds ifjpkyu ds fy, gh ugha cfYd jktra=k dks liQy o lqpk: :i ls pykus gsrq tulaidZ dks vko';d ekuk tkrk gSA Ñf"k] m|ksx] O;kikj] tulsok vkSj yksd#fp ds foLrkj rFkk ifj"dkj ds fy, Hkh yksdlaidZ dh vko';drk gSA yksdlaidZ dk 'kkfCnd vFkZ gS ^tulèkkj.k ls vfèkdkfèkd fudV lacaèk*A çkphu dky esa yksder dks tkuus vFkok yksd#fp dks l¡okjus ds fy, ftu lkèkuksa dk ç;ksx fd;k tkrk Fkk os vkt ds oSKkfud ;qx esa vfèkd mi;ksxh ugha jg x, gSaA ,d ;qx Fkk tc jktk yksxks dh :fp dks tkuus ds fy, xqIrpj O;oLFkk ij iw.kZ :i ls vkfJr jgrk Fkk rFkk vius funsZ'kksa earO;ksa vkSj fopkjksa dks og f'kyk[kaMksa] çLrjewÑr;ksa] rkezi=kksa vkfn ij vafdr djkdj çlkfjr fd;k djrk FkkA Hkksti=ksa ij vafdr vkns'k tulkèkkj.k ds eè; çlkfjr djk, tkrs FksA jkT;kns'kksa dh equknh djkbZ tkrh FkhA èkeZxzaFkksa vkSj mins'kksa ds }kjk tu#fp dk ifj"dkj fd;k tkrk FkkA vkt Hkh foØekfnR;] v'kksd] g"kZoèkZu vkfn jktkvksa ds le; ds tks f'kykys[k feyrs gSa muls irk pyrk gS fd çkphu dky esa tulaidZ dk ekxZ fdruk tfVy vkSj nqxZe FkkA èkhjs èkhjs vkèkqfud foKku esa fodkl gksus ls lkèkuksa dk Hkh fodkl gksrk x;k vkSj vc ,slk le; vk x;k gS tc yksdlaidZ ds fy, lekpkji=k] eqfær xzaFk] y?kq iqLrd&iqfLrdk,¡] çlkj.k ;a=k (jsfM;ks] Vsyhfotu)] pyfp=k] èofufoLrkjd ;a=k vkfn vusd lkèku miyCèk gSaA bu lkèkuksa dk O;kid mi;ksx jkT;lÙkk] vkS|ksfxd vkSj O;kikfjd çfr"Bku ds }kjk gksrk gSA

Hkwfedk tulaidZ ;k tulapkj dk vk'k; mu lHkh lkèkuksa ds vè;;u ,oa fo'ys"k.k ls gS tks ,d lkFk cgqr cM+h tula[;k esa lapkj :ih lEcUèk LFkkfir djus esa dkiQh ennxkj lkfcr gksrs gSA çk;% bldk rkRi;Z lfEefyr :i ls lekpkj&i=k] jsfM;ks] nwjn'kZu] flusek ls fy;k tkrk gSA lapkj 'kCn bldh mRifÙk laLÑr ds ^pj* èkkrq ls gqvk gSμftldk vFkZ gS pyukA

* mi f'k{kd] fganh foHkkx] ds-,y- lkslkbVh lkbal ,aM dkWelZ dkWyst] dyacksyh tu tkx:drk gsrq lapkj ds ekè;e dk ;ksxnku 345 tulaidZ dk vFkZ cgqr gh foLr`r o çHkkodkjh gSA jktra=k dks liQy o lqpk: :i ls pyus gsrq tu laidZ dks vfr vko';d ekuk x;k gSA yksdlaidZ dk egRo orZeku ;qx esa yksdlaidZ ds loksZÙke ekè;e dk dk;Z lekpkji= djrs gSaA blds ckn jsfM;ks] Vsyhfotu] pyfp=kksa vkSj baVjusV vkfn dk LFkku gSA ukV~;] laxhr] Hktu] dhrZu] èkeksZins'k vkfn ds }kjk Hkh tulaidZ dk dk;Z gksrk gSA yksdrkaf=kd O;oLFkk ds varxZr tqywl] lHkk] laxBu] çn'kZu vkfn dh tks lqfoèkk,¡ gSa mudk mi;ksx Hkh jktuhfrd nyksa dh vksj ls tu laidZ ds fy, fd;k tkrk gSA Mkd] rkj] VsyhiQksu] jsy] ok;q;ku] eksVjdkj] tyiksr vkSj ;krk;kr rFkk ifjogu ds vU;kU; lkèku Hkh jk"Vªh; vkSj varjjk"Vªh; laidZ ds fy, O;oâr fd, tkrs gSaA yksdlaidZ dh egÙkk crkrs gq, lu~ 1787 bZloh esa vejhdk ds jk"Vªifr Vkel tsiQlZu us fy[kk Fkk & gekjh lÙkkvksa dk vkèkkj yksder gSA vr% gekjk çFke mís'; gksuk pkfg, yksder dks Bhd j[kukA vxj eq>ls iwNk tk, fd eSa lekpkji=kksa ls foghu ljdkj pkgrk gw¡ vFkok ljdkj ls jfgr lekpkji=kksa dks i<+uk pkgrk gw¡ rks eSa fu%ladksp mÙkj nw¡xk fd 'kklulÙkk ls jfgr lekpkji=kksa dk çdk'ku gh eq>s Lohdkj gSA ij eSa pkgw¡xk fd ;s lekpkji=k gj O;fDr rd igq¡psa vkSj os mUgsa i<+us esa l{ke gksaA tgk¡ lekpkji=k Lora=k gSa vkSj gj O;fDr i<+us dks ;ksX;rk j[krk gS ogk¡ lc dqN lqjf{kr gSA eSdkys us lu~ 1828 esa fy[kk &laln~ dh ftl nh?kk± esa lekpkji=kksa ds çfrfufèk cSBrs gSa ogh lÙkk dk prqFkZ oxZ gSA ,MeaM cdZ }kjkμlaln~ esa lÙkk ds rhu oxZ gSa fdarq i=kçfrfufèk;ksa dk d{k prqFkZ oxZ gS tks lcls vfèkd egRoiw.kZ gSA blh çdkj lu~ 1840 esa dkykZby us ;ksX; laikndksa dh ifjHkk"kk crkrs gq, fy[kkμeqæ.k dk dk;Z vfuok;Zr% ys[ku ds ckn gksrk gSA vr% eSa dgrk gw¡ fd ys[ku vkSj eqæ.k yksdra=k ds LraHk gSaA vc ;g Li"V gS fd tu laidZ dh n`f"V ls orZeku ;qx esa lekpkji=kksa] jsfM;ks] Vsyhfotu] fiQYe rFkk blh çdkj ls vU; lkèkuksa dk vR;ar egRoiw.kZ LFkku gSA ;g fLFkfr dsoy Hkkjr esa gh ugha gS cfYd] fons'kksa us Hkh vius fopkjks dks yksxks rd igqpkus ds fy, bu lkèkuksa dk Hkjiwj ç;ksx fd;k gSA baxySaM] vejhdk] Ýkal] lksfo;r :l] tkiku] teZuh rFkk vU; dÃ ns'kksa esa tulkèkkj.k rd igqapus ds fy, loksZÙke ekè;e dk dk;Z lekpkji=k djrs gSaA bu ns'kksa esa lekpkji=kksa dh fcØhla[;k yk[kksa esa gSA lekpkj i=k Hkkjro"kZ esa tulaidZ dh n`f"V ls lekpkji=kksa dk çFke çdk'ku lu~ 1780 ls vkjaHk gqvkA dgk tkrk gS] 29 tuojh 1785 dks Hkkjr dk igyk i=k caxky xtV çdkf'kr gqvk FkkA blds ckn lu~ 1784 esa dydÙkk xtV dk çdk'ku gqvkA lu~ 1785 esa eækl ls dwfj;j fudyk] fiQj cacbZ gsjYM] cacbZ dwfj;j vkSj cacbZ xtV tSls i=kksa dk vaxzsth esa çdk'ku gqvkA blls cgqr igys baXySaM] teZuh] bVyh vkSj izQkal ls lekpkji=k çdkf'kr gks jgs FksA baXySaM dk çFke i=k vkDliQksMZ xtV lu~ 1665 esa çdkf'kr gqvk FkkA yaMu dk VkbEl uked i=k lu~ 1788 esa fudyk FkkA eqæ.k ;a=k ds vkfo"dkj ls igys phu ls fdax;kM vkSj fd;y ^rFkk jkse ls* ^jkseu ,DVk Mk;juk* uked i=k fudys FksA Hkkjr esa i=kksa ds çdk'ku dk Øe lu~ 1816 esa çkjaHk gqvkA ^caxky xtV* ds ckn ^tku cqybu*] rFkk fn bZLV dk çdk'ku gqvkA baxfy'keSu 1836 esa çdkf'kr gqvkA 1838 esa cacbZ ls ^cacbZ VkbEl* vkSj ckn esa *VkbEl vkQ bafM;k* dk çdk'ku gqvkA 1835 ls 1857 ds eè; fnYyh] vkxjk] esjB] Xokfy;j vkSj ykgkSj ls dbZ i=k çdkf'kr gq, bl 346 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey le; rd 19 ,saXyks bafM;u vkSj 25 Hkkjrh; i=k çdkf'kr gksus yxs Fks fdarq turk ds eè; mudk çpkj cgqr gh de FkkA lu~ 1857 ds foæksg ds ckn ^VkbEl vkWiQ bafM;k*] îk;ksfu;j*] êækl esy*] ^ve`rcktkj if=kdk*] ^LVsV~leSu*] ^flfoy ,saM fefyVjh xtV* vkSj ^fganw* tSls çHkko'kkyh lekpkji=kksa dk çdk'ku çkjaHk gqvkA fcgkj ls fcgkj gsjYM] fcgkj VkbEl vkSj fcgkj ,Dlçsl uked i=k çdkf'kr gq,A Hkkjrh; Hkk"kkvksa esa çdkf'kr gksusokyk çFke i=k lekpkjniZ.k lu~ 1818 esa Jhjkeiqj ls caxyk esa çdkf'kr gqvkA lu~ 1822 esa cacbZ lekpkj] xqtjkrh Hkk"kk esa çdkf'kr gqvkA mnwZ esa ^dksgsuwj*] ^voèk v[kckj* vkSj ^v[kckjs vke* uked dbZ i=k fudysA fganh dk çFke lekpkji=k ^mnar ekr±M* Fkk] ftlds laiknd Jh ;qxyfd'kksj 'kqDy FksA nwljk i=k *cukjl v[kckj* jktk f'koçlkn flrkjsÇgn us lu~ 1845 esa çdkf'kr djk;k FkkA blds laiknd ,d ejkBh lTtu Jh xksfoan j?kqukFk HkÙks FksA lu~ 1868 esa Hkkjrsanq gfj'paæ us ^dfo opu lqèkk* uked ekfld if=kdk fudkyhA ihNs bls ikf{kd vkSj lkIrkfgd laLdj.k Hkh fudysA 1871 esa ^vYeksM+k lekpkj* uked lkIrkfgd çdkf'kr gqvkA lu~ 1872 esa iVuk ls ^fcgkj caèkq* uked lkIrkfgd i=k çdkf'kr gqvkA blds çdk'u esa iafMr ds'kksjke HkV~V dk çeq[k gkFk FkkA lu~ 1874 esa fnYyh ls lnkn'kZ vkSj lu~ 1879 esa vyhx<+ ls ^Hkkjr caèkq* uked i=k fudysA T;ksa T;ksa lekpkji=kksa dh la[;k c<+rh xbZ R;ksa&R;ksa muds fu;a=k.k vkSj fu;eu ds fy, dkuwu Hkh cukrs x,A jk"Vªh; tkxj.k ds iQyLo:i ns'k esa nSfud] lkIrkfgd] ekfld] =kSekfld vkfn i=kksa dk çdk'ku vfèkd gksus yxkA lekpkji=kksa ds iBuikBu ds çfr turk esa vfèkd vfHk#fp tkxzr gqbZA vxLr 1947 dk tc ns'k Lora=k gqvk rks çk;% lHkh cM+s uxjksa ls lekpkji=kksa dk çdk'ku gksrk FkkA Lora=k Hkkjr ds fy, tc lafoèkku cuk rks igyh ckj Hkk"k.k vkSj vfHkO;fDr dh Lora=rk ds fl¼kar dks ekU;rk nh xbZA lekpkji=kksa dk Lrj crk gSA pkgs lekpkj gks ;k euksjatu] fdlh Hkh {ks=k dh tkudkjh ysuh gks rks euq"; ehfM;k ij fuHkZj gks x;k gSA lHkh txg bldk cksyckyk gS] ehfM;k dk lekt ij ldkjkRed o udkjkRed nksuksa rjg dk çHkko iM+k gS% lqpuk ds ekè;eksa esa cnyko&vkt daI;wVj o bUVjusV ds }kjk lwpukvks ds vknku&çnku esa rst+h vkbZ gSA vkt iksLV vkWfiQl dh txg bUgksaus ys yh gSa] Mkd Hkstus dh ctk; gj dksbZ bZ&esy ;k ,l ,e ,l Hkstuk T;knk ilan djsxk vFkkZr dksbZ Hkh tkudkjh gks euq"; mls tqVkus gsrq blh dk lgkjk ysxkA blus lekt dks iw.kZ :i ls cny Mkyk] rHkh rks uxkMks o k djus esa leFkZ cuk;s ;k lks'ky usVofdax esa fgLlk ysus esa leFkZ djs mls lks'ky ehfM;k dgk tkrk tu tkx:drk gsrq lapkj ds ekè;e dk ;ksxnku 349 gSA ohfdihfM;k ds eqrkfcd] lks'ky ehfM;k yksxksa ds chp lkekftd foe'kZ gS ftlds rgr os ijks{k leqnk; o usVodZ ij lwpuk rS;kj djrs gSa] mUgsa 'ks;j (lk>k) djrs gSa ;k vknku&çnku djrs gSaA dqy feykdj lks'ky ehfM;k ;k lks'ky usVoÉdx lkbV~l ,slk bysDVªkfud ekè;e gS ftlds tfj;s yksx mDr ekè;e esa 'kkfey lnL;ksa ds lkFk fopkjksa (blesa rLohjsa vkSj ohfM;ks Hkh 'kkfey gS) dk vknku&çnku dj ldrs gSaA fo'oHkj esa yxHkx 200 lks'ky usVofdax lkbV~l gSa ftuesa iQslcqd] V~ohVj] vkdqZV] ekbZ Lisl] fyaDMbu] fÝydj] baLVkxzke (iQksVks] ohfM;ks 'ks;fjax lkbV~l) lcls vfèkd yksdfç; gSaA ,d losZ ds eqrkfcd fo'oHkj esa laçfr 1 vjc 28 djksM+ iQslcqd ;wtlZ (iQslcqd bLrseky djus okys) gSaA ogha] fo'oHkj esa baLVkxzke ;wtjksa dh la[;k 15 djksM+] fyaDMbu ;wtjksa dh la[;k 20 djksM+] ekbZ Lisl ;wtjksa dh la[;k 3 djksM+ vkSj V~ohVj ;wtjksa dh la[;k 9 djksM+ gSA lks'ky ehfM;k dk tUe 1995 esa ekuk tkrk gSA ml oDr DyklesV~l MkWV dkWe ls ,d lkbV 'kq: dh x;h Fkh ftlds tfj;s Ldwyksa] dkWystksa] dk;Z{ks=kksa vkSj feyhVjh ds yksx ,d nwljs ls tqM+ ldrs FksA ;g lkbV vc Hkh lfØ; gSA blds ckn o"kZ 1996 esa cksYV MkWV dkWe uke dh lks'ky lkbV cuk;h x;hA o"kZ 1997 esa ,f'k;u ,osU;w uke dh ,d lkbV 'kq: dh x;h Fkh ,f'k;kbZ&vejhdh dE;wfuVh ds fy,A lks'ky ehfM;k ds {ks=kk esa lcls cM+k cnyko vk;k iQslcqd vkSj V~ohVj ds vkus ls iQslcqd dk tUe 4 iQjojh 2004 esa gqvkA ekdZ tdjcxZ us gkoZMZ fo'ofo|ky; ds Nk=kksa ds fy, iQslcqd dks Msoyi fd;k FkkA èkhjs&èkhjs bldk foLrkj nwljs dkWystksa vkSj fo'ofo|ky;ksa rd gqvk vkSj o"kZ 2005 esa vejhdk dh ljgn yk¡?k dj ;g fo'o ds nwljs ns'kksa esa igq¡p x;kA ,slh gh dgkfu;k¡ nwljs lks'ky usVofdax lkbV~l dh Hkh gSaA 'kq: esa ;s lkbV~l eè;oxZ dh igq¡p ls nwj Fks ysfdu eksckby iQksu ij tc ;s lsok,¡ feyuh 'kq: gqb± rks bl oxZ us bls vius lhus ls yxk fy;kA fiNys o"kZ vçSy esa tkjh vkadM+ksa ds eqrkfcd] Hkkjr esa yxHkx 1 djksM+ ,fDVo iQslcqd ;wtlZ gSa vkSj vkus okys le; esa budh la[;k 10 djksM+ rd igq¡pkus dk y{; j[kk x;k gSA lks'ky ehfM;k bu fnuksa yksdfç;rk ds lksiku p<+ jgh gS&Hkkjr esa vkSj Hkkjr ds ckgj HkhA fo'ks"kK ekurs gSa fd lks'ky ehfM;k vke turk ds fy, ,slk ekè;e gS ftlds tfj;s os vius fopkj T;knk l'kDr rjhds ls j[k ldrs gSaA usrkth lqHkk"kpaæ dh xqe'kqnxh ij nh chxsLV dojvi uke dh iqLrd fy[kus okys ys[kd vkSj tuZfyLV vuqt èkj dgrs gSa] fiNys ,d n'kd esa dbZ cM+h [kcjsa lks'ky ehfM;k ds tfj;s gh ykbeykbV esa vk;haA vke vkneh dks lks'ky ehfM;k ds :i esa ,slk Vwy fey x;k gS ftlds tfj;s os viuh ckr ,d cM+h vkcknh rd igq¡pk ldrs gSaA vuqt èkj dh ckr lp Hkh gS] rHkh rks vke vkneh ds lkFk jktusrk Hkh iQslcqd] V~ohVj ij vk x;s gSaA çèkkuea=kh ujsaæ eksnh] vke vkneh ikVhZ ds eqf[k;k vkSj fnYyh ds iwoZ eq[;ea=kh vjfoan dstjhoky] foÙkea=kh v#.k tsVyh] fcgkj ds iwoZ eq[;ea=kh uhrh'k dqekj] if'pe caxky dh eq[;ea=kh eerk cuthZ] mÙkj çns'k ds eq[;ea=kh vf[kys'k ;kno] jktukFk flag lesr reke usrkvksa us iQslcqd vkSj V~ohVj ij vius vdkmaV~l cuk fy;s rkfd os lhèks vke yksxksa ds lkFk laidZ lkèk ldsaA yksdlHkk pquko ls igys jktn lqçheks vkSj fcgkj ds iwoZ eq[;ea=kh ykyw çlkn ;kno us Hkh V~ohVj ij vkus dh ?kks"k.kk dh FkhA lks'ky lkbV~l dh yksdfç;rk gh gS fd dHkh dEI;wVj dk Hkkjh fojksèk djus okys okeiaFkh usrkvksa dks Hkh yksdlHkk pquko ds nkSjku iQslcqd ij vkuk iM+kA ekdik usrk vkSj lkaln eks- lyhe ekurs gSa fd yksxksa ds laokn djus ds fy, lks'ky ehfM;k ,d egRoiw.kZ ekè;e gSA mudk dguk gS] lks'ky ehfM;k vkt cgqr gh t:jh ekè;e gks x;k gSA bl ekè;e ds tfj;s ,d cM+h vkcknh ls vius fopkj lk>k fd;s tk ldrs gSaA fiNys ,d n'kd esa bl ekè;e dk dkiQh foLrkj gqvk gSA gkykafd os ekurs gSa fd jktuhfr vkSj lkekftd dk;ZdrkZvksa dks turk ls lhèks laidZ lkèkuk pkfg, 350 Magna Carta : A 800 Years Journey u fd ijks{k ekè;e ds tfj;sA mUgksaus dgk] lks'ky ehfM;k ds tfj;s yksxksa ls laidZ rks gks ldrk gS ysfdu mudh leL;kvksa ds ckjs esa irk ugha py ldrk gS [kkldj xzkeh.k Hkkjr esa D;k py jgk gS] ;g rks muds ikl tkdj gh tkuk tk ldrk gSA gky ds o"kks± esa dbZ cM+s vkUnksyu lks'ky ehfM;k }kjk gh 'kq: fd;s x;sA o"kZ 2011 ds tuojh eghus esa iQslcqd ds }kjk gh feL=k esa tcjnLr vkUnksyu fd;k x;kA Vîwfuf'k;k esa Hkh iQslcqd ds tfj;s gh ogk¡ dh ljdkj ds f[kykiQ vke turk ykecan gksus yxhA gkykr ,sls gks x;s fd ljdkj dks iQslcqd vkSj V~ohVj vdkmaV~l ij çfrcaèk yxkuk iM+k ysfdu vkUnksyu ugha #dk vkSj ogk¡ ds çsflMsaV eqckjd dks etcwj gksdj bLrhiQk ns nsuk iM+kA lkekftd dk;ZdrkZ ls jktusrk cus vjfoan dstjhoky dks fnYyh ds pquko esa Hkkjh liQyrk feyh rks bldk Js; iQslcqd dks Hkh tkrk gSA vius ns'k esa yksdlHkk pquko dks ysdj iQslcqd ds tfj;s Hkh [kwc çpkj gqvkA çèkkuea=kh ujsaæ eksnh us dqN ekg igys lHkh ea=ky;ksa vkSj eaf=k;ksa dks lks'ky ehfM;k ij vkus dks dgk rkfd ea=ky; ds dkedkt ds ckjs esa yksx tku ldsa vkSj dke esa Hkh ikjnf'kZrk cuh jgsA iQslcqd us yacs vjls ls fcNM+s firk&csVh] HkkbZ&cgu vkSj nksLrksa dks feyokus dk Hkh dke fd;kA dgrs gSa fd gj pht ds nks igyw gksrs gSa&vPNk vkSj cqjkA dbZ rjg dh [kwfc;ksa ds fy, çfl¼h ikus okyh lks'ky ehfM;k viokn ugha gSA lks'ky ehfM;k ds tfj;s vkijkfèkd xfrfofèk;ksa dks dks Hkh vatke fn;s tkus yxk gSA o"kZ 2013 esa ns'kHkj esa bukiQkWesZ'ku VsDuksykWth ,DV vkSj bafM;u iSuy dksM dh èkkjkvksa ds rgr 5212 ekeys ntZ fd;s x;s FksA buesa ls 1203 ekeys lks'ky lkbV~l ij vkifÙktud lkefxz;k¡ Mkyus ls lacafèkr gSaA vkijkfèkd ço`fÙk ds yksx ;su&dsu&çdkjs.k nwljksa ds vdkmaV~l dks gSd dj vkifÙktud rLohjsa vkSj vU; lkefxz;k¡ Mkydj nq'euh fudky jgs gSaA bèkj] de mez ds cPpksa us Hkh iQslcqd dk bLrseky djuk 'kq: dj fn;k gS ftldk mu ij udkjkRed vlj iM+ jgk gSA fiNys fnuksa ,slkspSe dh vksj ls fd;s x;s ,d losZ{k.k ds eqrkfcd] ftrus cPps iQslcqd dk bLrseky dj jgs gSa muesa ls 73 çfr'kr cPpksa dh mez 8 ls 13 lky (13 lky ls de mez ds cPpksa ij iQslcqd vdkmaV [kksyus ij çfrcaèk gS) ds chp gSA losZ esa dgk x;k gS fd vfèkdka'k cPpksa ds ifjtu ukSdjhis'kk gSa vkSj os vius cPpksa dks le; ugha ns ikrs gSa fygktk ;s cPps iQslcqd vkSj vU; lks'ky lkbV~l ij e'kxwy jgus yxs gSa D;ksafd lks'ky ehfM;k mUgsa ,d ,slk lekt nsrk gS ftlls os viuh ckrsa 'ks;j dj ldrs gSaA lks'ky lkbV~l ds bLrseky ds euksoSKkfud çHkko Hkh [krjukd gSaA euksjksx fpfdRldksa dk dguk gS fd lks'ky usVofdax lkbV~l ds T;knk bLrseky djus ls yksx dks bldk u'kk yx tkrk gS vkSj os vius ifjokj ds çfr çfrc¼rk NksM+dj ?kaVksa dEI;wVj ;k eksckby iQksu ls fpids jgrs gSaA ,l,lds,e vLirky ds euksjksx fpfdRld lqthr lkj[ksy us dgk] lks'ky ehfM;k ,d ijks{k ekè;e gSA blds bLrseky ls yksx ijks{k :i ls rks yksxksa ls tqM+s jgrs gSa ysfdu oks tks vly lekt gS mlls os vyx&Fkyx iM+ tkrs gSaA bldk vlj ;g gksrk gS fd muesa lkekftd xq.kksa dk fodkl ugha gks ikrk gSA nwljh rjiQ lks'ky ehfM;k esa yksx vfèkd O;Lr jgrs gSa ftlls os vkmVMksj ,fDVfoVh ugha dj ikrs gSaA blds vykok vfèkd nsj rd cSBs jgus ds dkj.k dbZ rjg dh 'kkjhfjd chekfj;k¡ Hkh gks tk;k djrh gSaA lkj[ksy us dgk] gky gh esa esjs ikl 3&4 ekeys vk;s gSa tks lks'ky ehfM;k ds ,fMD'ku ls tqM+s gSaA ejhtksa dk dguk gS fd os 10 ls 12 ?kaVs baVjusV djrs gq, fcrkrs gSaA ;g u'kk bruk flj p<+dj cksyrk gS fd os vius ifjokj dks le; ugha ns ik jgs gSaA muds ifjokj okys tc bldk fojksèk djrs gSa rks os vkØked gks tkrs gSa vkSj rks vkSj vxj baVjusV Bhd ls dke ugha djrk gS rks os xqLls esa vkdj ?kj ds lkeku Hkh rksM+us yxrs gSaA tu tkx:drk gsrq lapkj ds ekè;e dk ;ksxnku 351 irk pyk gS fd egkuxj esa nks&,d tYn gh lks'ky ehfM;k ,fMDV ds bykt ds fy, Mh&,fMD'ku lsaVj [kqyus tk jgk gSA blls lkiQ gS fd lks'ky ehfM;k dk bLrseky vc chekjh dk :i ys jgk gSA cgjgky] blesa dksbZ nks jk; ugha gS fd lks'ky ehfM;k vkt yksxksa ds fy, cgqr gh vko';d gks x;k gS ysfdu bldk tks nwljk igyw gS mlls cpus dh t:jr gS D;ksafd tc fdlh Hkh pht dk nq#i;ksx gksus yxrk gS rks oks ojnku ugha vfHk'kki cu tkrk gSA tSls iwQy ds lkFk dkaVs gksrs gS] mlh çdkj ehfM;k Hkh ojnku gh ugha vfHk'kki Hkh gSA milagkj ehfM;k ;k çsl dks dks Lora=krk feyuh pkfg, vkSj feyrh Hkh gS ysfdu Loa=krk vxj viuh lhek yk¡?k tk, rks og mPNà[kyrkcu tkrh gSA luluh iQ+Sykus ds fy, ;g ns'k dh lqj{kk dks Hkh nkao ij yxk nsrs gSA vPNs dkeks dks mtkxj djus dh ctk; ;g lekt dks dsoy vijkèk ;k ghjks&ghjksbuksa ds LdSaMYl dks fn[kkrs gSA ehfM;k ;fn vius fufgr LokFkksZ dks Hkwydj viuh ftEesnkjh fuHkk, rks lekt dks ,d fn'kk çnku dj ldrk gSA var esa ehfM;k ds çfr ;gh dgrs gq, viuh ckr lekIr djuk pkgwaxh dh] 'kfDr dk rw lzksr gS] ok.kh esa rsjs tks'k çtk ds bl ra=k dk rw gS] vkèkkj LrEHk fn'kk viuh er Hkwy] ns'k dk fuekZ.k dj tu&tu ds thou esa] u;h LiwQfrZ uo çk.k HkjA mYys[k tSu-uhμlks'ky ehfM;kμuhjk tSu leh{kd] 24 tqykbZ] 2015] (,pVhVhih (@@leh{kd- dkWe @841) uoHkkjr VkbElμeksnh vljnkj bUVjusV LVkj] 18 ekpZ] 2016] (iath;u Øekad ,e,llh@061@2015&17] vkj- ,u- vkbZ- iath;u uacj 1613@57 jk;- m-dq-μlks'ky ehfM;k dk c<+rk nk;jk ojnku Hkh vfHk'kki Hkh] 16 vçSy] 2015] (okWY;we&1 b'k;w&3)